Home

RIFLE MARKSMANSHIP M16-/M4-SERIES WEAPONS

1. 8 4 Figure 8 3 Borelight in the HALF TURN position 8 4 Figure 8 4 Example of a start point half turn and reference 8 5 Figure 8 5 Close combat optic 25 meter Zeroing 8 15 Figure 8 6 Width of horizontal hash 8 18 Figure 8 7 Advanced combat optical gunsight reticle point of aim at 100 meters 8 18 Figure 8 8 Advanced combat optical gunsight reticle point of aim at 25 meters 8 19 Figure 8 9 Example of thermal weapon sight zeroing adjustments 8 22 Figure 8 10 Example of shot group adjustment with strike zone 8 26 Figure 1 Engagement skills trainer five lane configuration A 1 Foure A ZA EXECS e isis a ance IEEE A 8 FIGUIC ice 2 Ruan ane ase A 10 PIGUIC MS roii o ODE A 11 FOUC AO EXO lt C 12 Foure tT 15 Figure 7 Riddle sighting A 16 Figure 8 M16 sighting
2. 4 22 Breath control for engaging short exposure targets 4 22 Individual foxhole supported firing position 4 25 Basic prone unsupported firing 4 26 Alternate prone unsupported firing position 4 26 Basic prone supported firing 4 27 Alternate prone supported firing position 4 27 Kneeling unsupported firing 4 28 Zo Imeter Nas a E een iUm n dia n aas 5 2 SNOOP MarK T M 5 4 Central point of odd shaped group 5 4 25 meter match grade performance 5 5 Shot groups with no firer erfor tens 5 5 Shot groups with minor shooting error nne 5 6 Shot groups with considerable shooting error 5 6 Shot groups with major shooting 5 7 Central point of three shot 5 enne 5 8 Acceptable shot grouping performance 5 8 Shot groups with inconsi
3. 0 usAID SI ay peyioddnsupy z z spuooss OZ Spied 002 3jyenou is 3 punoJ Q o usA ID ay uonisog Bunig payoddns 1 peuinbaeu s sajd d y S Juo Jouwe 103de248 ul Bue eyenouls ped awos seuono Jo ulus pue Ag 387 eWay Joy woun eu y 5 Jeu 9 09 Jaling Aue JO peJoos s JI v 2198 yore eye pepi oud sjnsaeJ ay yya syd eu Ul pejonpuoo si Bulicas 34l3 LONGNOD a qe eAe jou si 5 aly pioa PJEPUR S ay A UO pesn si esJnoo siu pasn si auel eouejsip UAOUY eu ueuA uoneouienb eJ poaa esJnoo e2ugjsip UAOU 21028 0 pesn 5 pJe223105s 5141 00 L Jd Z 10 abeg 31510890 SI 9002 Inf 4 0645 WHOS va 8002 485 4 0625 WHOS YA S IvI LINI 5 939 0840 QGIWWAAAA GATVILINI 3 Lv S IvLLINI S H34HO2S QGWINAAAA Q31vlLINI 319 So vINS 318v 1 3NIZVOVIA CGNNOY OL Z 318v L daidrTvnoNn M0139 ANY ZZ BE 3NIZVOVIA 0 INO JNIZVOVIA NI TIM SGNNOY JHL L1393vL Yad IYON ON S1393VL NVINS aa VIA Ge ee OL ISYONI OL SGNNOY OF Q3nssi 48414 544 IH 318v euo 224
4. 2 10 Adapter Ecrit a aa 2 11 M5 rail covers heat shields 2 11 Address markings the adapter rail 2 12 as 2 13 2 14 Insight rail grabber MILES training extender 2 15 Picatinny rail grabber 2 15 8 em 2 17 Mounting the M68 on M16AA rifle or M4 series Carbine 2 17 Mounting the M68 an M16A1 A2 AG3 rifle 2 18 Mounting the M68 AN PVS 14 combination on an MWS 2 19 AN PAQ 4B C infrared aiming 2 19 Mounting the AN PAQ 4B C on the 4 MWS top or left 2 20 Mounting the AN PAQ 4B C on the M16A1 A2 A3 rifle and M4 carbine 2 21 FM 3 22 9 Contents vi Figure 2 29 AN PEQ 2A B target pointer illuminator aiming light 2 22 Figure 2 30 Mounting the AN PEQ 2A B on the M1644 rifle and 4 MWS 2 22 Figure 2 31 Mounting the AN PEQ 2A B on M16A1 A2 A3 rifles and M4 ca
5. 5 25 Known Distance Record Fire Range 5 27 Modified Field Fire Range em dx pit Ret 5 27 PerfonTiaiGe dust ead 5 27 25 Meter Zero Standard oet a i ee tease 5 27 Section IV Effects of Wind and Gravity 5 28 EHOCIS OL 1 2 117 5 5 28 gt cT 5 29 Section V a etn 5 34 internal BalllSiG S 2th coe ptc ast dv bu 5 34 ELS AS MS OS sedri 5 39 Terminal E AIST CS 5 41 Bullet Dispersion at 5 41 FIELD FIRE 6 1 Section Target Detecti M iiic a a a aa ai 6 1 Locating conie a aes 6 1 6 fil ge de o tee teen E E A MUN A EU 6 4 Range aran a aati 6 5 Section Il Field Fire Training nnmnnn 6 6 Conduct of a Field Fire Range eese nennen 6 7 Field Fire Single Timed 6 8 Field Fire I Multiple or Single Timed 6 9 Section Ill Record Qualification 6 10 Practice Re
6. LMTS Remediation On site LMTS is used as remedial trainer for Soldiers who fail to meet standards on any table of fire LMTS EST 2000 Live Fire EST 2000 with STRAC Live Fire Requirement Figure 1 3 Active Army home station marksmanship training strategy NG Armory NG Armory NG Armory L LMTS T LMTS EST 2000 PMI SBPT PMI SBPT PMI SBPT 5 EST 2000 within 55 miles of Armory EST 2000 BRM ARM Fire LMTS NBC Night Training P Remediation Collective Qualification ARM Located Sites Training Weapons Qualification Quarterly PMI Annually Semi annual Simulator Based Performance Test SBPT NG units integrate TADSS into marksmanship training as they become available LMTS 27 EST 2000 tive Fire Figure 1 4 National Guard home station marksmanship training strategy FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Marksmanship Training AR Training Site AR Training Site Centrally Located pees LMTS CLUB unus 85 of Pretest 15 of Basic amp Adv PMI Pretest structure Basic amp Adv structure Marksmanship Basic amp Adv Marksmanship Collective Marksmanship EST 2000 Basic amp Adv Marksmanship Collective LMTS Remediation Advanced Mrks Located Sites Training Qualification Quarterly PMI Pretest Basis Adv Mrks Crew served MTOE Semi annual Semi ann
7. po ts pe oo 10 0 BENE UU 100 Lo _ or s o ws 0 ws oe r Lo y e Lo et ti om e 2 s oc 2 lt LL ro Ju e oo Je Jl or e ves oss s oss m 55 PF JAIL SONVY o SSI JAIL SONVY SS JAIL Si NOILISOd GaLYOddNSNN ANOUd NOILISOd 9SNI4I3 daldoddf s AIOHXOS L3 18v A009 adi SOL VvfrTvgA3 GGWWAAAA 31vd LINN 5003 s jusuodoud 2 6 ZZ J 225 uiuo Siu Jo asn 104 quvodsdoos LHOIN asdo23 00 L 3d 8002 495 4 6792 Va S IvILINI 5 98 01930 GGWIAAAAA SIVILINI S H3HOOS QGGWWAAAA Q31VlLINI 31v pue eL 174 peyuoddns peyuoddns peyuoddns woor peyuoddnsun peyoddnsun woos LIT LI peyioddnsun woos peuoddns woos peyoddns pauioddns uoc peyuoddnsun wigaz 002 peyuoddns uipoz peyuoddns 002 peyoddnsun w00 peyuoddns wgqoz peyioddns
8. 5 30 Determine wind speed using the pointing 5 31 Calculate the adjusted point of aim based on wind speed 5 32 FM 3 22 9 vii Contents viii Figure 5 30 M16 M4 series weapons adjusted point of aim based on wind speed 5 33 Figure 5 31 Projectile differences 5 34 Figure 5 32 Ammunition impact comparison 5 35 Figure 5 33 M855 zeroed at 300 meters M193 re zeroed at 300 5 5 36 Figure 5 34 M855 zeroed at 25 meters M193 re zeroed at 25 5 5 37 Figure 5 35 M855 zeroed at 25 meters M193 fired using M855 5 38 Figure 5 36 Minute of angle 5 41 Figure 5 37 Increase in shot group size as range 5 5 5 42 Figure 7 1 Kneeling supported firing position 7 2 Figure 7 2 Standing unsupported firing position 7 3 Figure 7 3 Standing supported firing position around obstacles 7 4 Figure 7 4 Modified supported prone firing position
9. 5 38 Table 6 1 Field Fire and Il training 6 1 Table 6 2 Number of rounds that must be fired from each position during Field Fire l 6 8 Table 6 3 Field Fire firing tables cccccccssscccceeseeeceeeseecceeeeceeseecseaeeeessageeessegseessaneeenes 6 9 Table 6 4 Number of rounds that must be fired from each position during Field Fire T Ir P TT C TR 6 10 Fable 6 5 Field firing tables uote ope eto dorus deoa aa te eo ames 6 10 Table 6 6 Practice Record Fire and II training program 6 11 Table 6 7 Number of rounds that must be fired from each position during Practice FRO CONG Fre Tapa 6 11 Table 6 8 Qualification ratings for Practice Record Fire and ll 6 12 Table 6 9 Record Fire training program a E A a 6 13 Table 6 10 Probability of hits o e ore tt toe ee ea qued ee 6 14 Table 6 11 Results from an adequate unit training 6 14 Table 6 12 Number of rounds that must be fired from each position during Record qtu 6 14 Table 6 13 Qualification ratings for Record 6 16 Table 6 14 Known distance rec
10. 5 1 CONCE eters ETE 5 2 Organization of a 25 Meter Grouping 5 2 Conduct of a 25 Meter Grouping Firing 5 2 SOL 5 3 Single Shot Group Analysis nennen nnns 5 4 Multiple Shot Group 5 7 Troubleshooting the 5 5 14 Section Il Zeroing Procedures 5 14 FUN DOS mee t M 0 15 SIGH WANA GC e E 5 15 Organization of a 25 Meter Zero Range 0 15 Conduct of a 25 Meter Zero Firing sees 5 15 Section Ill Known Distance 5 19 6 REM Kr 5 20 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 12 August 2008 Contents Known Distance Target Description 5 20 Marking Known Distance Range 5 21 Known Distance Shot Grouping 5 5 22 Known DISTANCE ZeFoll lg aeuo bu bees td Sw sore edades 5 23 Conduct of a Standard Known Distance
11. TD ORE 3 2 Destr cton Proce dE S iere essa tenes tol mede 3 7 PRELIMINARY MARKSMANSHIP 4 1 Section I Introduction to Basic Rifle Marksmanship and Mechanical IR Ihrem 4 1 Se u 4 2 Cycles or IPUNCUONING tu usua cree 4 4 Et 4 11 FESI 9 910 ee a teen qni 4 12 Section Marksmanship Fundamentals l 4 14 Interceptor Body 4 15 FOUL Endamenlal eu oneness 4 16 Dominant Eye Trail vau kane Ad iod us RE 4 24 BASIC FIRING Ir OSINOMS wad ED itas sm dva vena tens td Ran sto ade ioe 4 24 Training Devices and 4 28 Section Ill Marksmanship Fundamentals ll 4 29 Engagement Skills Trainer 2000 teda tef a 4 29 Laser Marksmanship Training 4 30 DOWNRANGE FEEDBACK 5 1 Section Grouping
12. 29 NW Bul ageneus 2 agel Jays uo seganorujs 01 aBebua o aurzeber punod pz auo ua lB 8 Jay au uoniso d papoddns uaraslasip s Tapueurumma 10 5 p 192 p 1 W 007 a ge uoneayi nb all pJo2aJ au Jo aug 5453111264 o1 suagisad ui Shue YS uaa si ubnous JEU seinsua 55 abus au age Bul 1xau aug peojaJ pue suagisad Bun sbusua Ap12inb uodea siy J632 01 SU 01 aq poys W OSE 2 JOU si 509 Bury usaAgag 243 ubnau unge pue unsez DER SES GW YEW wos er Gu woo Hauaa WOOL WOOL Hapo sig pinoys 3 1581115 zsanoo D JSSJBSU pue quB WOW 5 aug Uo 5 sHdldW sc Buimo D au 01 5 sia Tequinu paquasaid Pe1025 aues ay uo ajenos quaes spy aui UBL enu jo0us pue saug saie 2104 JO Lu Lux eLu v ayana eu jo ed awos 10 dau 18510 JOU op JEL sJnsus o seurgebeu punod oA pus saw jeu
13. 1 5 Section Unit Marksmanship Training Program 1 8 Mis ion Essential TASKS wishin cxieusyahsnddvatyo nadia napa peer betae t 1 9 ASS 1 acies aes ellas 1 9 ESTIS esos orae uem RE tS MM T MM D DM CRM 1 11 Trainer Certification Program nennen 1 13 Gualificadon 1 15 UnICLIVe FIre adware 1 17 Chapter 2 WEAPON CHARACTERISTICS ACCESSORIES AND AMMUNITION 2 1 Section I Rifles and 2 1 Characteristics of M16 MA Series 2 1 M4 Senies eo ine i a p cud 2 2 MISAZA dcm 2 5 gie X M M H A 2 DATO AT TRING NT 2 9 Section Il Accessory Mounting 2 10 M4 M5 Adapter Rail vances Arai puts Maddie tae 2 10 5 T M 2 13 oection Ill Accessories Dru aia 2 16 M68 Close Combat 4 oae e tete o i eo ed en el 2 17 AN PAQ 4B C Infrared Aiming Light cccccccc
14. si yy auc sajejdruoa jad jeu euizebeulpunal pz euo SAL IA 5 24081 aqe uaneai enb pasen si pasys pase sues ayy ONIHO2S Jdl4 40 LONGNOD asinoa nmongaupenb ayy 0 1019 UOMEWIIUOD 2 13jaul Gz 104 pali 29 ns BUE J xis poaa Jo ay uo pawopad jou ase sasaxa J 31 ON sabuei a3uejsip UMOUN pue pJoa2al piepuejs uam pasn sr asnos pasn si 66EL 791 LOFO 69 NSN paj eas 13jaur Gg uaum asino3 ajeulaj e 31025 pasn si pJea3ajo25 5 00 L 3d ady 911310590 SI 2002 AON H 68 Z WHOS 8002 d3S 4 68t WHOS S IvILINI S 4321443O QGMWINAAAA C3 TvLLINI S IvILINI 5 494095 QGWINAAAA O3 TvLLINI 31 SW YAH 3JHO02S NOILVOIAITVnO 5 438 913 P SAd NY M0139 91 g Vc OSd NV 2 2 euo 12242 GASN 3ol 3d 9SNIIAIY euo 12242 SSNILV MH 34025 NOILVOIJITYnO 34035 Lo y oz J z oz o pe fo o a Pape Po v ea Ti tT ti 6 EIT 0 10 0 0 xs e se jo Gd
15. 1 4 National Guard home station marksmanship training strategy 1 4 Army Reserve home station marksmanship training strategy 1 5 Deployed unit marksmanship training 1 5 M4 M4A1 carbine with accessories 2 2 4 MWS with accessories ccccccceccecseececee cece eeecee cesses eesseeeesseeeeseeesseeeeseeeeeas 2 3 M4 M4A1 and M4 M4A1 MWS 2 3 M4 M4A1 4 MWS mechanical zero 2 4 M4 M4A1 or 4 MWS battlesight zero 2 4 M16A2 A3 rifle with accessories 2 5 16 2 mechanical zero cccccccccceececeeseeceeeeececeeseeessaeeeseeeesseeessaeeesegeeses 2 6 MIGAZIAS DattleSiQNt ZEN Dess seis cde Su ebd 2 6 M16AA rifle with accessories 2 MECHANICA ZE O accede 2 8 AMA GA4 2 8 etm ote een c EE c dh 2 9 JMTOAT1 mechanical Zero taa tee lar ad 2 9 M16A1 battlesight zero
16. A 8 Table A 3 Action conditions and standards for an interactive dry fire exercise A 9 Table A 4 Action conditions and standards for a grouping and zeroing exercise A 10 Table A 5 Action conditions and standards for a laser marksmanship training strategy prequalification exercise A 11 Table 6 Training aids and 5 nnne A 13 Table A 7 Largetordering 14 Table 0 1 Five levels of probability ccccccscsccccseseeeceeeseecceseeeceaeeeesegseeseuseeesseseeeseageees D 4 Table D 2 Four levels of severity esses nnnm nnns D 5 Table 0 3 Risk assessment matrix D 5 Table D 4 Four D 6 Table D 5 Worksheet instructions zug dax IUe ata tor Sadan CC da n e oett o emerit veio i D 10 Table E 1 Primary alternate range selection E 10 able Ofsetbtrio Ur docs Deo oia cob dede umet a eon F 6 Table F 1 Offset mounting continued eese F 7 Table F 1 Offset mounting continued F 8 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Preface Preface This manual provides guidance for planning and executing training on the 5 56 millimeter M16 series rifle M16A1 A2 A3 A4 and M4 carbine It is a guide for commanders leaders and instructors to devel
17. 4 2 21 2 21 illus light thermal weapon sight see also light weapon thermal sight AN PAS 13B V1 2 27 2 27 illus AN PAS 13C V1 2 27 2 27 illus AN PAS 13D V1 2 27 2 27 illus M68 close combat optic see also M68 close combat optic 2 18 2 18 illus Index 8 target pointer illuminator aiming light see also target pointer illuminator aiming light AN PEQ 2A 2 23 2 23 illus AN PEQ 2B 2 23 2 23 illus M16A4 rifle see also M16 series rifle 2 7 illus battlesight zeroing 2 8 to 2 9 2 8 illus point of impact 2 9 table characteristics 2 1 2 1 table mechanically zeroing 2 8 2 8 illus mounting accessories see also accessories advanced combat optical gunsight see also advanced combat optical gunsight 2 31 to 2 32 2 31 illus AN PEQ 15 advanced target pointer illuminator aiming light see also AN PEQ 15 advanced target pointer illuminator aiming light 2 25 2 25 illus AN PVS night vision sight see also AN PVS 4 night vision sight 2 28 to 2 29 2 28 illus compatibility and mounting 2 16 table heavy thermal weapon sight see also heavy weapon thermal sight AN PAS 13B V3 2 26 to 2 27 2 26 illus AN PAS 13C V3 2 26 to 2 27 2 26 illus AN PAS 13D V3 2 26 to 2 27 2 26 illus infrared aiming light see also infrared aiming light 2 20 2 20 illus AN PAQAC 2 20 2 20 illus light thermal weapon si
18. JWL SONY SSIIA LIH LIH SSIIN LIH SSIA LIH JONVYH J9ONVYtH NOILISOd O9NFT33NM NOLLISOd NOLLISOd GaldOddNs 37871 NOLLISOd 5 c 31871 37871 37871 4009 TVA GGNNAAAA HINN 8003 s AaueBe juguodaid aun is ze 2 W4 99s uuo 51 Jo esn 104 qaevoddoos auld 91313 l39 8Vl J19NIS 00 1 Qdv 21310890 SI 686 4 6225 WHOS V 8002 d3S 4 6229 WHOS vg S IVILINI 5 494095 GGWWAIA AAA Q31VILINI 31 VO So 319 moue NOILOGSIC GNIAA NOILISOd 9NIMIJ QqalHoddnsNn JNO d 3385 ANIA OOE INOOL Jli8vL NOILISOd 9NIal4 qaLsodadrs SNOILYVOO 1 LOHS SNOILYOO 1 10 5 0832 NOILISOd S3LLS3OOH TIS ADNVYYNMOG NOILISOd GALYOddNS S31L300HTIS 39NYHNMOG c J HV dl8vi NOILY HIHJHNOO 0832 4009 dl SHOLYN TWAS GGHWAAAA ILYA NOGVHL SI jueuodoud E 22 2 N4 895 uuoj siu Jo asn 104 QuvoaHoos MoOvaaaad 39NVHNMOG YALAW 00F ANY 00Z 00L 00 L 91370590 SI 6861 H LrzS WHOS Ya 8002 435 Y brzs WHOS va S IvILLINI 5 494095 GOWIAAAAA 3 LYO So vA GL EN CL LL LL L cl LL L e GLL Iu m r oE Gi 9 9 NEM EN poe jz _ 9 ET p u __5 2 SZ m 295 JIL J NYH NOILISOd
19. rn T M KS i PEN T Ag ei eh SUAM nl s rr Ax y i mato dO eS ek RET UAR De nM S NUS NEN 5 Figure 4 25 Kneeling unsupported firing position TRAINING DEVICES AND EXERCISES 4 72 When used alone or in combinations with the appropriate training strategies training devices and aids can be used to help individuals or squads sustain or practice basic marksmanship skills They are beneficial when ammunition is limited for training or practice exercises Some training devices are complex costly and in limited supply while others are relatively simple cheap and in large supply MISALI AIMING CARD 4 73 This exercise measures the firer s ability to acquire the same sight picture each time he places his iron sights on a target NOTE Refer to Appendix A for a detailed explanation of training aids and devices 4 28 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Preliminary Marksmanship Instruction TARGET BOX AND PADDLE EXERCISE 4 74 This exercise checks the consistency of aiming and placement of three round shot groups in a dry fire environment It incorporates the Soldier s position breathing and sight picture to simulate a live fire 25 meter engagement Further it reinforces the basic fundamentals while refining the Soldier s muscle memory during the integrated act of dry firing NOTE Refer to Appendix A for a detailed explanation of the target box and paddle exercise and training standa
20. Figure 4 5 Firing 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 4 7 Chapter 4 UNLOCKING 4 8 During unlocking the following actions occur This process is shown in Figure 4 6 1 As the bolt carrier moves to the rear the bolt cam pin follows the path of the cam track located in the bolt carrier 2 The cam pin and bolt assembly rotate simultaneously until the locking lugs of the bolt are no longer in line behind the locking lugs of the barrel extension Figure 4 6 Unlocking EXTRACTING 4 9 During extracting the following actions occur This process is shown in Figure 4 7 1 The bolt carrier group continues to move to the rear 2 The extractor which is attached to the bolt grips the rim of the cartridge case holds it firmly against the face of the bolt and withdraws the cartridge case from the chamber Figure 4 7 Extracting 4 8 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Preliminary Marksmanship Instruction EJECTING 4 10 During ejecting the following actions occur This process is shown in Figure 4 8 1 With the base of a cartridge case firmly against the face of the bolt the ejector and ejector spring are compressed into the bolt body 2 As the rearward movement of the bolt carrier group allows the nose of the cartridge case to clear the front of the ejection port the cartridge 1s pushed out by the action of the ejector and ejector spring Figure 4 8 Ejecting 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 4 9 Chapter 4 COCKI
21. 3 The trainer evaluates this position by comparing his notes from the original supported position The Soldier should maintain the same characteristics in the second evaluation as he did in the first 4 Once the trainer is satisfied that the Soldier has demonstrated the proper position and is able to show it in two consecutive attempts the Soldier moves to the unsupported prone position Eye Relief 7 236 To evaluate the Soldier s eye relief ensure that the Soldier e Demonstrates a consistent eye relief by checking the placement of the Soldier s cheek on the weapon s buttstock e Places his eye is the same distance from the rear sight each time he is evaluated 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 7 59 Chapter 7 Trigger Finger 7 237 To evaluate the placement of the Soldier s trigger finger ensure that the Soldier e Uses his own style not all Soldiers place their finger on the trigger in the same place e Places his finger on the trigger the same way each time he 15 evaluated Elbows 7 238 To evaluate the placement of the Soldier s elbows ensure that the Soldier e Places his elbows firmly a comfortable distance apart on the outside edge of the foxhole e Uses a sandbag and not his arms to support the weapon s weight e Assumes a stable position each time he is evaluated by slightly nudging him Nonfiring Hand 7 239 To evaluate the placement of the Soldier s nonfiring hand ensure that the Soldier e Places th
22. A 17 Figure A 9 Blank firing attachment A 18 Figure A 10 Weaponeer set up in the standing supported position A 21 Figure A 11 Replay of SNOR eat oe HM ed tabiti tesis C iav A 22 Figure A 12 Weaponeer printouts A 23 Figure A 13 Target box exercise sen ria dose ange eaa de pit Coa ga A 24 Figure A 14 Rifle holding device 12 A 25 Figure A 15 Staked rifle holding DOX aaa A 25 Figure A 16 Paper being placed on a stationary object A 26 Figure A 17 Target box paddle 0 7 86 27 Figure B 1 Example of completed DA Form 5239 R 100 200 and 300 Meter Downrange Feedback Scorecard B 2 Figure B 2 Example of completed DA Form 3601 R Single Target Field Fire CONG GANG m DE B 2 Figure B 3 Example of completed DA Form 5241 R Single and Multiple Targets Field Fire a i aa cerei ot umi B 3 Figure B 4 Example of completed DA Form 3595 R Record Fire Scorecard B 3 Figure B 5 Example of DA Form 5789 R Record Fire Scorecard Known Distance
23. 1 751 2 150 2 01 0 90 NOTE Target offsets not yet developed are indicated by TBD to be developed M16A4 MWS M16A4 MWS BD BD BD M16A4 IA 8 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Glossary SECTION 1 ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS AAR ACH ACOG AFF AMU AP AR ARF ARM ARS ATC ATPIAL BDC BFA BOLC BRM BUIS CBRN CCO COA cm CRM DA Pam EST FM FOV fps ft HWTS 12 IBA IET in IR KD Ib LBE LFX LMTS LOGCAP LOMAH 12 August 2008 after action review Army combat helmet advanced combat optical gunsight automated field fire Army Marksmanship Unit armor piercing Army regulation automated record fire advanced rifle marksmanship adapter rail system Army training center advanced target pointer illuminator aiming light bullet drop compensated blank firing attachment Basic Officer Leaders Course basic rifle marksmanship backup iron sight chemical biological radiological and nuclear close combat optic course of action centimeter or centimeters composite risk management Department of the Army pamphlet Engagement Skills Trainer field manual field of view feet per second foot or feet heavy weapon thermal sight image intensifier interceptor body armor initial entry training inch or inches infrared known distance pound or pounds load bearing equipment live fire exercise Laser Marksmanship Training System Logistics Civil
24. 25 Controlled pair _ 3secfromcommand UP laterally right 2 7 Controlled pair _ 3 sec from command UP Waklatralyleft 2 Controlled pair 3secfromcommand UP 2 NIN 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 7 55 Chapter 7 Evaluation NOTE For scoring purposes a hit is a round that impacts within the lethal zone 7 223 Each Soldier scores 16 hits day and night The standard when wearing a protective mask 1s 14 day and 12 night In addition to achieving a qualifying score all 20 rounds must hit the E type silhouette in order to qualify BARRICADE TRANSITION QUALIFICATION FIRING Range Setup 7 224 The range must be at least 50 meters in length with tall barricades at the 35 and 50 meter distances and short barricades at the 25 and 40 meter distances Each lane should be marked in a way that prevents crossfiring between lanes A lane safety coach is assigned to each lane to observe and evaluate the Soldier s performance as well as ensure that firing is conducted safely The tower or line safety gives all firing cues Conduct NOTE Soldiers must complete a dry fire and a blank fire iteration of the qualification tables before conducting live fire qualification The dry fire and blank fire exercises gives the Soldier the repetition needed to successfully engage targets quickly and accurately 7 225 The exercise proceeds as follows 1 The Soldier receives one 28 round and three 4 round magaz
25. NOTES 1 The 22 caliber round approximates the 5 56 millimeter trajectory out to 25 meters 2 The correct zeroing target or appropriate scaled silhouette targets can be used for practice firing exercises at 15 meters 50 feet or 25 meters Advantages and Disadvantages A 62 If the RFA is used as a training aid the advantages and disadvantages must be considered during training 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 A 19 Appendix A Advantages A 63 The 22 caliber ammunition is cheaper and may be available in larger quantities than 5 56 millimeter ammunition It can be fired on all approved indoor ranges and in other close in ranges where 5 56 millimeter ammunition is prohibited RFA training can be used to sustain marksmanship skills during periods when full caliber 5 56 millimeter ammunition training cannot be conducted Disadvantages A 64 Some negative training aspects exist because of differences in the weapon s functioning when using the RFA These differences include e The forward assist does not work The bolt does not lock to the rear after the last round 1s fired More malfunctions can occur with the RFA than with 5 56 millimeter ammunition Immediate action procedures are different SHORT RANGE TRAINING AMMUNITION A 65 SRTA 1s a plastic practice cartridge M862 that enables a unit to conduct realistic firing training at shorter distances with reduced danger areas The M862 has a maximum range of 250 meters The blue
26. CLICK TO THE HX METER SETTIHG THE INTER RIFLE OW TWO TO THE 300 METER FOR THE RIFLE THE WEAPON WILL ZEROED FOR 200 METERS Figure F 6 M16A4 MWS 10 meter boresighting target 25 meter zeroing target offsets 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 F 5 Appendix F Table F 1 Offset mounting RAIL MOUNT LOCATION RANGE ZERO BORESIGHT GRABBER TO OFFSET TARGET ZERO N A 300m 0000 0 04 2U 2 0L 0 9U 0 0 1 4 300 m cm DN 0 0 5 2U 2 0L 2 4U 0 0 13 4U 2 0L 2 4U 0 0 8 1D 0 0 11 5U 2 0L 2 4U 300 m WEAPON ACCESSORY MILES OFFSET M16A2 Iron sight N A M68 gooseneck bracket Carrying M16A2 M68 N A handle TWS Carrying 0 0 10D M16A2 LTWS TWS bracket handle 300 m assembly TWS Carrying M16A2 TWS N A bracket handle assembly AN PVS 4 Carrying AN PVS 4 N A mounting handle knob M16A2 0 0 7 0D 0 0 9 4U 2 0L 0 9U 300 m M4 M16 Hand 1 5R 1 85L 2 54U 2 0L 0 9U AN PEQ 2A B N A M4 M16 Hand 300 m 1 5L 0 5U 1 8R 2 40 2 0L 0 9U bracket guards Spacer and 300 m 1 85L 8 6U 2 0L 3 9U 300 m a TBD 2 0L 0 9U bracket handle 9 8D assembly AN PVS 4 receiver M4 M16 Hand 1 5R 1 85L 2 54U 2 0L 0 9U receiver TWS Upper 0 05 7D 0 09 4U 2 0L 2 4U M4 M4A1 TWS Picatinny om 300 m grabber M4 M4A1 AN PEQ 2A B N A M4 M16 Hand 300 m 1 0L 0 3U 1 8R 2 40 2 0L 0 9U bracket guards Spacer Upper 0 0 3 4D 0 0 7 6U 2 0L 0 9U M4 M4A1 AN PVS 4 Picatinny and rail receiver 30
27. Chapter 7 Live Fire Exercises 7 28 There are two types of LFXs e Individual e Collective Individual 7 29 To conduct an individual LFX e Ensure that the emphasis is on each Soldier maintaining a heavy volume of accurate fire e Keep weapon downtime during immediate action and rapid magazine changes to a minimum e Begin by firing at shorter ranges progressing to longer ranges as Soldiers display increased proficiency e Shorten exposure or engagement times and increase the number of rounds to simulate the need for a heavy volume of fire e Provide downrange feedback to determine the accuracy of fire Collective 7 30 Rapid semiautomatic fire should be the primary means of delivering fire during a collective LFX To conduct a collective LFX ensure that the emphasis is on performing staggered rapid magazine changes maintaining a continuous volume of fire and conserving ammunition AUTOMATIC OR BURST FIRE NOTE Automatic or burst fire should be trained only after the Soldier has demonstrated expertise during slow and rapid semiautomatic fire 7 3 When applying automatic or burst fire Soldiers deliver the maximum number of rounds one to three rounds per second into a designated target area while rapidly applying the four fundamentals This specialized technique of delivering suppressive fire may not apply to most combat engagements NOTE The M16A1 A3 rifle and M4A1 carbine have fully automatic settings The
28. NOTE The rifle 1s ready to fire Figure 4 4 Locking 4 6 FM 3 22 9 Co lS Fe We 12 August 2008 Preliminary Marksmanship Instruction FIRING 4 7 During firing the following actions occur This process is shown in Figure 4 5 1 With a round in the chamber the hammer cocked and the selector on SEMI the firer squeezes the trigger 2 The trigger rotates on the trigger pin depressing the nose of the trigger and disengaging the notch on the bottom of the hammer 3 The hammer spring drives the hammer forward 4 The hammer strikes the head of the firing pin driving the firing pin through the bolt and into the primer of the round 5 The primer ignites causing the powder in the cartridge to ignite 6 The gas generated by the rapid burning of the powder forces the projectile from the cartridge and propels it through the barrel 7 After the projectile has passed the gas port located on the upper surface of the barrel under the front sight as shown in Figure 4 5 and before it leaves the barrel gas enters the gas port and moves into the gas tube 8 The gas tube directs the gas into the bolt carrier It passes down through the key and into a space between the rear of the carrier s bolt cavity and the rear of the bolt itself 9 Then the gas expands 10 The bolt is locked into the barrel extension unable to move forward the carrier 1s forced to the rear by the expanding gas
29. NOTES 1 Each Soldier ensures that his sights are set for 25 meter zeroing 2 Soldiers fire each shot from a supported firing position using the same point of aim target s center of mass 3 Ensure that the correct 25 meter zero target is being used For 15 use NSN 6920 01 167 1392 Figure 5 18 for M16A2s M16A3s M16A4s M4s and MAAs use NSN 6920 01 395 2949 Figure 5 19 M16A2 A3 is printed on one side and M16A4 MA MAA is printed on the other 1 The Soldier fires a three round shot group at the 25 meter zeroing target 2 The firing line is cleared and he moves downrange to examine the shot group for fundamental errors triangulates the shot group and puts the number 1 in the center of the shot group NSN 6920 01 167 1392 ex LL LL LETT Front S Cee Eee Sight iin 14 14 121110 9 867 06 5 4 32 1 OT 234 n 989 9 1011 144 49 1 Aimattarget center Adjust sights to move shot group center as close as possible to white dot At completion of zero rotate rear sight to unmarked aperture and weapon will be battlesight zero for 250 meters Figure 5 18 M16A1 25 meter zero target 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 5 17 Chapter 5 25 METER ZEROING TARGET 25 METER ZEROING TARGET Mi6A2 M4 CARBINE NSN B920 01 395 2949 NSN 6820 01 385 2949 8 o3 6 s d 1 D a m a A HB O uu o4 A o amp BH d d ou i n mM ZERO TARGET D
30. Weapon malfunction drills Ensure that Soldiers instinctively drop to the kneeling firing position clear a malfunction using SPORTS and continue to engage targets This drill can be performed by issuing each Soldier a magazine loaded with six to eight rounds of blank ammunition with one expended blank round Target engagement drills Teach Soldiers to move from the weapon ready position to the firing stance emphasizing speed and precision Soldiers must be observed to ensure that the finger is outside of the trigger well and that the selector switch remains on SAFE until the weapon is raised to the firing position NOTE This is a force protection issue and must be drilled until all Soldiers can perform to standard MAGAZINE CHANGING DRILLS NOTE Before performing magazine changing drills have Soldiers configure their LBE or magazine racks to allow for the easiest access for the magazine change The time limit to perform any of the magazine changing drills is 8 seconds 7 196 There are two methods of changing the magazine e Parallel method e L shaped method Parallel Method 7 197 When shooting from the right side perform the right side parallel magazine changing method Figure 7 26 1 Engage the target until the magazine is empty 2 Take a knee 3 Place the weapon at a 45 degree angle with the magazine well facing in the muzzle pointed in a safe direction and the buttstock in the crease of the right elbow 4
31. 2 28 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Weapon Characteristics Accessories and Ammunition 1 Align the Picatinny rail grabber with a mounting adapter 1 on the bottom of the AN PVS 4 with a notch on the integrated rail 2 of an M16A4 rifle M4 carbine or M4 MWS ensuring that the AN PVS 4 is positioned to accommodate an effective firing position once the eyecup 1s depressed NOTE The AN PVS 4 will not retain zero if the rail grabber extends beyond the end of the integrated rail when mounted 2 Tighten the torque limiting knob clockwise until it clicks twice NOTE Retighten the rail grabber after firing a few rounds to ensure that the sight is fully seated 2 63 The mounting procedures are identical for the M4 carbine and M4 MWS MOUNTING ON THE M16A1 A2 A3 RIFLE 2 64 The AN PVS 4 is mounted on the carrying handle of the M16A1 A2 A3 rifle Figure 2 40 To mount the AN PVS 4 night vision sight on an M16A1 A2 A3 rifle Figure 2 40 Mounting the AN PVS 4 on an M16A1 A2 A3 rifle 1 Position the sight in the groove on the top of the carrying handle 2 Align the threaded hole in the base of the sight mounting adapter over the hole in the handle 3 Insert the mounting knob assembly through the hole in the carrying handle and screw it firmly clockwise into the sight mounting adapter 2 65 If difficulty is encountered 1 Turn the sight and the rifle upside down 2 Place the rifle handle onto the sight mounting adapter
32. 2 32 Figure 2 16 AGO0 IOCKING SCI OW uda iex bt c ERR iia lites Duane s aU dan em de 2 33 Figure 2 47 Borelight with a 5 56 millimeter mandrel 2 33 Figure 2 48 10 meter boresighting target and 25 meter zero offset 2 34 Figure 2 49 M855 drop during 25 meter zeroing M16A2 at 8 3 1 M4 at 6 3 2 37 Figure 2 50 Bullet drop of M855 ammunition with M16A2 8 3 2 37 Figure 2 51 Bullet drop of M855 ammunition with 4 6 3 2 38 Figure 2 52 4 carbine and M16A2 rifle bullet trajectory comparison 2 38 Figure 2 53 Bullet drop of M4 M855 during 25 meter Zeroing on 6 3 2 39 Figure 3 1 Failure to feed chamber OF lOCK eb torta ite Vae aeu os oS Loue n 3 2 Figure 2 2 T alltit eO E uet amiet ecc c panna CLE M C DPI quee 3 4 Figure 3 3 Other possible malfunctions 3 7 mie Clearing TIT 4 3 mile luz LUAM pec 4 4 Figure m RT 4 5 PIQUE oo mer dns N 4 6 IQ UG he OF IDIBO 4 7 Figure 4 6 UnlOCKIFlg astuce bo vta det todas Oca fu Lada cad
33. 2 33 illus AN PVS night vision sight see also AN PVS 4 night vision sight 2 29 2 29 illus compatibility and mounting 2 16 table heavy thermal weapon sight see also heavy weapon thermal sight AN PAS 13B V3 2 27 2 27 illus AN PAS 13C V3 2 27 2 27 illus AN PAS 13D V3 2 27 2 27 illus infrared aiming light see also infrared aiming light 2 21 2 21 illus AN PAQAC 2 21 2 21 illus light thermal weapon sight see also light weapon thermal sight AN PAS 13B V1 2 27 2 27 illus AN PAS 13C V1 2 27 2 27 illus AN PAS 13D V1 2 27 2 27 illus M68 close combat optic see also M68 close combat optic 2 18 2 18 illus target pointer illuminator aiming light see also target pointer illuminator aiming light AN PEQ 2A 2 23 2 23 illus FM 3 22 9 Index AN PEQ 2B 2 23 2 23 illus M16A2 rifle see also M16 series rifle 2 5 to 2 33 2 5 illus battlesight zeroing 2 6 to 2 7 2 6 illus point of impact 2 7 table characteristics 2 1 2 1 table mechanically zeroing 2 6 2 6 illus mounting accessories see also accessories advanced combat optical gunsight see also advanced combat optical gunsight 2 32 to 2 33 2 32 illus 2 33 illus AN PVS night vision sight see also AN PVS 4 night vision sight 2 29 2 29 illus compatibility and mounting 2 16 table heavy thermal weapon sight see also heavy weapon thermal sigh
34. 3NO3d SSII LIH SSIIN w NOILISOd SNI4I3 GaldOddNs NOILISOd SNI4I3 aa3ldoddfis 38038 c 371991 L3 dvi A000 di Ss YOLVATWAS GGIWINAAAA ALWO LINA 8903 5 jueuodoud eu 6 22 2 JA 885 uuo siu Jo asn Joy qs voasoos Il 91313 Sld394Vvla3 ldlLini ANY 3 119NIS DO L 3d Ody 8002 d3S 4 6849 WHO va abeg 919710890 51 686 Mn 68 5 lI HO vd STYLIN 5 59 21940 3 S TYIN 5 598 025 GONNA AAA 1871 ANIMI H3 v3 INO 8789 1 dod OMAL SWIN sno 07888 Sg TIAA SONMOd SHL SONO OF dassi 48 TIAS asa 8 OAlsITYNONN AKO TSS ONY Sc zeaz SQINO23S Ozi INIL NOIUSOd SNIMIJ Odds 310HXOJ HO Q3 5 3NO3d a18v 1 SQNO23S 09 3lNIL SQNO2D3S 09 IWI NOIUSOd 9NII3J SNIT33NM NOIUSOd S9NIMIJ INOHd JI8V L c 31871 ms 4009 sl 291 A zc e jJ aas Wool 5191 0 asn 04 35 5 03 ADNYLSIO qe voasoos dqaeooas 00 L Qv c Jo abed 800 d3S d 68 5 NMOS VG spuoo2es 09 spJe 001 ayjenoujis 4 ue suizebew punoJ p SI 99 150 payioddnsup aiqel 2 spuoo2ses 09 UIUJAA spje 002 ayenouls y ue
35. Chapter 1 Phase IV Advanced Rifle Marksmanship Phase V Advanced Optics Lasers and Iron Sights 1 14 When Soldiers are trained in all phases of rifle marksmanship a solid sustainment program is key to mission readiness PHASE I BASIC RIFLE MARKSMANSHIP PRELIMINARY MARKSMANSHIP INSTRUCTION 1 15 Understanding the operation and functions of any machine is vital to becoming an expert with that machine The same theory applies to rifle marksmanship Soldiers must master weapon maintenance function checks and firing fundamentals before progressing to advanced skills and firing exercises under tactical conditions Armed with this knowledge a Soldier is able to assess and correct any malfunction to keep the weapon operating properly Introduction to Basic Rifle Marksmanship and Mechanical Training 1 16 During this period of instruction Soldiers are trained to understand the operation and functions of the weapon This period of instruction includes the following topics General safety rules and weapon clearing procedures Characteristics components accessories and ammunition Disassembly Inspection Lubrication Assembly Function check Loading unloading the magazine Loading unloading the weapon Immediate and remedial action Adjusting the front and rear sights Peer coaching Eight cycles of function Troubleshooting NOTE The IET program of instruction POI allots four hours for this phase of traini
36. Fire 6 1 to 6 6 locating targets 6 1 to 6 4 marking targets see also marking targets 64 to 6 5 range determination see also range determination 6 5 to 6 6 scanning see also scanning for targets 6 2 to 6 3 selection of a position 6 2 target indicators see also target indicators 6 3 to 64 12 August 2008 target discrimination training see also short range marksmanship training 7 53 to 7 55 conduct 7 54 evaluation 7 55 range setup 7 54 target discrimination targets 7 53 to 7 54 target indicators see also field fire and target detection 6 3 to 6 4 improper camouflage 6 3 to 6 4 movement 6 3 sound 6 3 target pointer illuminator aiming light see also accessories 4 carbine M16 series rifle and advanced optics lasers and iron sights AN PEQ 2A 2 2 to 2 24 2 22 illus boresighting 8 9 to 8 10 characteristics 2 16 table compatibility and mounting 2 16 table mounting on 2 23 2 23 illus M16A2 2 23 2 23 illus M16A3 2 23 2 23 illus M16AA 2 22 to 2 23 2 22 illus carbine 2 23 2 23 illus M4 MWS 2 22 to 2 23 2 22 illus training strategies and qualification standards 8 23 to 8 28 8 24 table 25 meter zeroing procedures 8 25 to 8 27 8 26 illus concept 8 24 conduct of training 8 24 field fire 8 27 modified fundamentals 8 24 to 8 25 practice qualification 8 28 record qualification 8 28 target detection 8 2
37. MECHANICALLY ZEROING THE M4 M4A1 CARBINE OR MWS NOTE Mechanically zeroing the weapon is only necessary when the weapon zero is questionable the weapon is newly assigned to the unit or the weapon sights have been serviced 2 3 To mechanically zero an M4 M4A1 or MWS NOTE Reference the weapon components using the numbers listed in Figure 2 4 Figure 2 4 M4 M4A1 or M4 MWS mechanical zero 1 Adjust the front sightpost 1 until the base of the front sightpost is flush with the front sightpost housing 2 2 Turn the elevation knob 3 shown as viewed from above counterclockwise until the rear sight assembly 4 rests flush with the detachable carrying handle and the 6 3 marking 15 aligned with the index line 5 on the left side of the carrying handle 3 Position the apertures 6 so the unmarked aperture is up and the 0 200 meter aperture 1s down 4 Turn the windage knob 7 to align the index mark 8 on the 0 200 meter aperture with the long center index line on the rear sight assembly BATTLESIGHT ZEROING THE M MAAI CARBINE OR MWS 2 4 To battlesight zero an M4 M4A1 MWS Figure 2 5 NOTE Reference the weapon components using the numbers listed in Figure 2 5 Figure 2 5 M4 M4A1 or M4 MWS battlesight zero 1 Turn the elevation knob 1 shown as viewed from above counterclockwise until the rear sight assembly 2 rests flush with the detachable carrying handle and the 6 3 marki
38. PEER TUE LAE OF COMBAT PSTL QUALFICATICN C DURSE Er FOC 17822 LATOUE FORMATION Figure E 5 Qualification training range 17809 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 E 15 This page intentionally left blank Appendix F 10 Meter Target Offsets and 25 Meter Zero Offsets This section provides the 10 meter target offsets and the 25 meter zero offsets for M16 and M4 series weapons mounted with iron sights optics MILES or aiming lasers A blank reproducible 10 meter target offset Figure F 2 and an example of each weapon configuration Figures F 3 through F 6 are provided The M16A2 300 meter zeroing target is used for 25 meter zeroing with all weapon configurations MARKING 10 METER TARGET OFFSETS 1 To mark the proper 10 meter target offsets 1 Find the correct template for the weapon configuration 2 Starting from the center of the borelight circle on the offset count the number of squares to the desired point of aim EXAMPLE L2 0 U2 4 Starting from the center of the borelight circle 0 0 0 0 move left 2 squares and up 2 4 squares NOTE Each template also provides a number formula for the proper offset 3 Place the appropriate symbol or mark Figure F 1 Laser Optic Desired Point of Impact MILES Laser AN PEQ 2A Illuminator AN PAS 13 TWS Figure F 1 10 meter target offset symbols 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 F 1 Appendix F MARKING 25 METER ZERO OFFSETS F 2 To mark the
39. TM 9 6920 746 12 amp P Operator s and Organizational Maintenance Manual Including Repair Parts and Special Tools List M2 Practice Bolt Plastic Ammunition for Rifle 5 56mm M16 Series NSN 1005 01 184 4041 09 September 1986 TM 11 5855 213 10 Operator s Manual for Night Vision Sight Individual Served Weapon AN PVS 4 NSN 5855 00 629 5334 EIC IPJ 01 February 1993 TM 11 5855 261 10 Operator s Manual for Infrared Aiming Light AN PAQ 4 NSN 5855 01 107 5925 28 May 1981 TM 11 5855 301 12 amp P Operator s and Unit Maintenance Manual Including Repair Parts and Special Tools List Light Aiming Infrared AN PAQ 4B NSN 5855 01 361 1362 AN PAQ 4C 5855 01 398 4315 15 May 2000 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 References 1 References TM 11 5855 306 10 Operator s Manual for Monocular Night Vision Device AN PVS 14 NSN 5855 01 432 0524 EIC IPX 15 May 2007 TM 11 5855 308 12 amp P Operator s and Unit Maintenance Manual Including Repair Parts and Special Tools List Target Pointer Illuminator Aiming Light AN PEQ 2A NSN 5855 01 447 8992 15 May 2000 TM 11 5855 312 10 Operator s Manual Sight Thermal AN PAS 13B V 2 NSN 5855 01 464 3152 AN PAS 13B V 3 5855 01 464 3151 15 February 2005 TM 11 5855 316 10 Operator s Manual AN PAS 13C V 1 Sight Thermal NSN 5855 01 523 7707 AN PAS 13C V 2 Sight Thermal NSN 5855 01 523 7713 MWTS AN PAS 13C V 3 Sight Thermal NSN 5855 01 523 7715 15 June 2006 TM 11 585
40. e Do not change sighting and stock weld during rapid semiautomatic fire Keep the cheek on the stock for every shot align the firing eye with the rear aperture and focus on the front sightpost When using slow semiautomatic fire seek a stable sight picture In the fast moving situations that require rapid semiautomatic fire accept target movement and unsteady sight picture and keep firing into the target area until the target is down or there is no chance of a hit e Aimevery shot Breath Control 7 20 Breath control must be modified because the Soldier does not have time to take a complete breath between shots Consider the following modifications to achieve proper breath control e Hold your breath at some point in the firing process e Take shallow breaths between shots 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 7 9 Chapter 7 Trigger Squeeze 7 2 To maintain the desired rate of fire the Soldier has a brief period of time to squeeze the trigger The firer must cause the weapon to fire in about half of a second or less and still not anticipate the precise moment of firing Consider the following modifications to achieve proper trigger squeeze e Apply initial trigger pressure as soon as a target is identified and while the front sightpost is being brought to the desired point of aim e When the front sightpost reaches the point of aim apply final pressure to cause the weapon to fire almost at once Apply this additional pressure also kn
41. efr cc B 4 Figure B 6 Example of completed DA Form 5790 R Record Fire Scorecard Scaled Target Alternate Course B 4 Figure B 7 Example of completed DA Form 7489 R Record Night Fire Scorecard B 5 Figure B 8 Example of completed DA Form 7649 R Squad Designated Marksman Recorra Fire land MR t LC 5 Figure D 1a Sample DA Form 7566 Composite Risk Management Worksheet D 8 Figure D 1b Sample DA Form 7566 Composite Risk Management Worksheet Page 2 m M D 9 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 Ix Contents Figure E 1 Figure E 2 Figure E 3 Figure E 4 Figure E 5 Figure F 1 Figure F 2 Figure F 3 Figure F 4 Figure F 5 Figure F 6 Table 1 1 Table 2 1 Table 2 2 Table 2 3 Table 2 4 Table 2 5 Table 2 6 Table 2 7 Table 2 8 Table 2 8 Table 3 1 Table 3 2 Table 4 1 Table 4 2 Table 4 3 Table 5 1 Table 5 2 Table 5 3 Table 5 4 Table 5 5 Table 5 6 Table 5 7 Table 5 8 Table 5 9 Rifle machine gun zero range 17801 E 11 Automated field fire range 17803 E 12 Automated record fire range 17805 eese E 13 Modified record fire range 17806 E 14 Qualification training range 17809 E
42. o3 amp un SUI bam pede een D py wee o pinac nzaunsussib Su weg ung ee cide og dee 4 ee oy Pe eee wa a ee ee pe weg che eg pue dU Kpog pue Ago Uy 9 ej OU i unmgunauaue jn hupen wenn Buuy sau Le B uu Bugasuy sin ung she 5 pae ungez Buuy paypaddreun sun sii ung vsum uanmod Buaj pj done sip ung eelue adam n oz mikDus pS EO XR pue eee nina fir mii Hg SRLS menle JONY H 3H 08 938 VY 30 Loe 00 L Jd OdV 31310 80 SI 686 NAF L09 WHOS 8002 435 4 L09 WHOS va S IVILINI S d3dHOOoSs GGWAAAAA Q3 1VILINI SALVO Jed ON SSIIN LIH 84035 WLOL WLOL WLOL 00 GL 0 GL SLL 0 SZl EN 89 su _ 5 SZ 002 SZ Sil gogg SZ 521 005 Sil Sil ele SL Sl al elu mic Gl el y OL OL SZV SZV SZV P elele dd 0052 gogg 90 9905 SZV SAL 00 SAL SAL e Ww uw Mm Oo y SAL S m T 295
43. 5 27 FM 3 22 9 L Laser Marksmanship Training System see also preliminary marksmanship instruction and training aids devices and exercises 4 30 A 5 to A 12 equipment A 5 A 5 table A 6 table exercises A 8 to A 12 grouping and zeroing exercise A 10 to A 11 A 10 table A 11 illus interactive dry fire exercise A 9 to A 10 A 9 table A 10 illus laser marksmanship training strategy prequalification exercise A 11 to A 12 A 11 table A 12 illus reflective target exercise A 8 to A 9 A 8 table A 8 illus marksmanship training A 6 to A 7 remedial traming A 7 sustainment training A 7 sound and recoil replicator A 12 light thermal weapon sight see also accessories M4 series carbine 16 rifle and advanced optics lasers and iron sights AN PAS 13B V1 2 26 to 2 27 2 26 illus boresighting 8 8 compatibility and mounting 2 16 table mounting on 2 27 2 27 illus 2 2 27 2 27 illus M16A3 2 27 2 27 illus M16A4 2 26 to 2 27 2 26 illus carbine 2 26 to 2 27 2 26 illus training strategies and qualification standards 8 20 to 8 23 8 20 table 25 meter zeroing procedures 8 21 to 8 22 8 22 illus concept 8 20 conduct of traming 8 20 modified fundamentals 8 21 12 August 2008 practice qualification 8 23 record qualification 8 23 target detection 8 22 to 8 23 AN PAS 13C V1 2 26 to 2 27 2 26 illus boresighti
44. Firing events will serve to both reinforce and assess these areas CONDUCT 7 231 While conducting the skills progression program instructors trainers will adhere to the following guidelines e The skills progression program for the SDM 15 based on the M16 M4 series weapon system and a 98 rounds per man ammunition requirement Soldiers will use their assigned weapon during the training The firing events will be conducted with the iron sights or BUISs only The firing events will be conducted on a KD range that enables firing out to 600 meters at a minimum QUALIFICATION 7 232 SDM qualification requires the completion of five phases 1 Position evaluation 2 Dry fire training 3 Range estimation and sight manipulation 4 Hold off 5 Field fire 7 58 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Advanced Rifle Marksmanship 7 233 Each phase stresses marksmanship fundamentals and specific skill areas required to perform as an SDM To continue training Soldiers must receive a GO in each phase Soldiers who fail in any area should be removed from training NOTE If an optic is issued for use the phases dealing with hold off and field record fire will be removed and relevant optics training and testing will be substituted PHASE I POSITION EVALUATION 7 234 Phase I of the training consists of demonstrating the ability to consistently assume proper firing positions The foxhole supported and prone unsupported firing positions will
45. Press the magazine release catch with the trigger finger Secure a full magazine with two fingers and the thumb of the nonfiring hand Bring the full magazine top of the magazine facing to the rear next to and perpendicular to the empty magazine forming an L shape Slide the empty magazine out with the nonfiring hand rotate the full magazine so the top of the magazine faces the magazine well and insert the full magazine Hit the bolt release Stow the empty magazine in the ammunition pouch FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Advanced Rifle Marksmanship Figure 7 29 Left side L shaped magazine changing method PHASE I REFLEXIVE FIRE TRAINING 7 201 Reflexive fire training involves the practical application of all four of the fundamentals of SRM All Soldiers must receive a GO on the task Conduct Reflexive Firing before proceeding with training This is a perishable skill that must be constantly reinforced and reflexive fire training should be conducted frequently as refresher training to ensure that the Soldiers skills are always at the highest level possible REFLEXIVE FIRING TARGETS 7 202 Targets can be purchased locally FBI style or manufactured by the unit bowling pin targets E type silhouettes may be painted as shown in Figure 7 30 E TYPE SILHOUETTE BOWLING PIN TARGET TORSO LETHAL NECK HEAD LETHAL ZONE IS 18 X 8 ZONE IS 4 X8 Figure 7 30 Dimensions and placement of bowling pin targets 12 Augus
46. Single and Multiple Targets Field Fire II Scorecard DA Form 5789 R Record Fire Scorecard Known Distance Course DA Form 5790 R Record Fire Scorecard Scaled Target Alternate Course DA Form 7489 R Record Night Fire Scorecard DA Form 7649 R Squad Designated Marksman Record Fire I and II DA Form 7650 R Squad Designated Marksman Position Evaluation NOTE These forms scorecards and position evaluation sheets are not available through the normal supply channels You may reproduce them locally on 8 1 2 x 11 inch paper or download them from the Army Publishing Directorate at http www apd army mil 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 B 1 Appendix B B 2 100 200 AND 300 METER DOWNRANGE FEEDBACK SCORECARD For use of thes form see FM 3 22 9 the proponent agency ia TRADOC DA FORM 5239 R SEP 2008 DA FORM 5238 R JUN 1989 15 Figure B 1 Example of completed DA Form 5239 R 100 200 and 300 Meter Downrange Feedback Scorecard SINGLE TARGET FIELD FIRE SCORECARD For usa of this dorm sag 3 22 Gc the proponent agency i TRADOC Joos x n 012980 TABLE 2 PRON id dll gl s 10 5 0 hi a a P 3 Ev DA FORM 3601 R SEP z008 DA FORM 3801 R JUN 1089 15 OBSOLETE Figure B 2 Example of completed DA Form 3601 R Single Target Field Fire Scorecard FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 SINGLE AND M
47. Slide the nonfiring hand down the handguard to the receiver and press the magazine release catch 5 Secure a full magazine with two fingers and the thumb of the nonfiring hand 6 Bring the full magazine top of the magazine toward the magazine well next to and parallel with the empty magazine 7 Slide the empty magazine out with the nonfiring hand and insert the full magazine 8 Hit the bolt release 9 Stow the empty magazine in the ammunition pouch 7 48 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Advanced Rifle Marksmanship Figure 7 26 Right side parallel magazine changing method 7 198 When shooting from the left side perform the left side parallel magazine changing method Figure 7 27 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Engage the target until the magazine is empty Take a knee Place the weapon at a 45 degree angle with the magazine well facing in the muzzle pointed in a safe direction and the buttstock 1n the crease of the left elbow Secure a full magazine with two fingers and the thumb of the nonfiring hand Bring the full magazine top of the magazine toward the magazine well next to and parallel with the empty magazine Press the magazine release catch with the trigger finger Slide the empty magazine out with the nonfiring hand and insert the full magazine Hit the bolt release Stow the empty magazine in the ammunition pouch Figure 7 27 Left side parallel magazine changing method 1
48. The Soldier should maintain the same characteristics in the second evaluation as he did in the first evaluation 4 The trainer lets the Soldier hold this firing position for approximately 15 seconds to check for shaking If the Soldier starts to shake have him relax and reposition himself 5 Once the trainer 1s satisfied that the Soldier has demonstrated the proper position and is able to accomplish it in two consecutive attempts the Soldier moves on to the next phase of training 7 60 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Advanced Rifle Marksmanship Elbows 7 242 To evaluate the placement of the Soldier s elbows ensure that the Soldier e Places the elbows a comfortable distance apart on the ground Uses the bone not the muscles to support the weapon s weight This will prevent any unnecessary muscle fatigue and will allow for a steadier firing position e Assumes a stable position Slightly nudge the Soldier to ensure that his position 15 stable Nonfiring Hand 7 243 To evaluate the placement of the Soldier s nonfiring hand ensure that the Soldier e Places his nonfiring hand in a comfortable position on the handguards e Does not support his nonfiring hand on the ground sandbag or anything that would create a supported position Legs 7 244 To evaluate the placement of the Soldier s legs ensure that the Soldier e Positions his legs in such a way that he has a stable position not all Soldiers position their legs the
49. crouch or squat during dry and live fire to reduce bodily contact with contaminated ground or foliage e Understand that a consistent spot or stock weld is difficult to maintain due to the shape of the protective mask This requires the firer to hold his head in an awkward position to place the eye behind the sight Aiming 7 102 Wearing a protective mask may force firers to rotate cant the weapon to see through the rear aperture This ideal aiming procedure Figure 7 11 should be the initial procedure taught and practiced If this cannot be achieved a canted sight picture may be practiced 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 7 25 Chapter 7 Ideal Aiming Procedure 7 103 To perform the ideal aiming procedure 1 Rotate the weapon as little possible to see through and line up the sights 2 Place the center tip of the front sightpost on the ideal point of aim 1 Ideal sight picture 2 Initial sight picture for 3 Initial sight picture for right handed firers wearing left handed firers wearing protective mask protective mask Figure 7 11 Sight picture when canting the rifle while wearing a protective mask 75 meter target Canted Sight Picture 7 104 Due to a shift in bullet strike and the many individual differences in sight alignment when wearing a protective mask it is important to conduct downrange feedback training at ranges beyond 75 meters on KD ranges This allows Soldiers to determine the aiming adjustments needed
50. events are identified Marksmanship programs must be continuous and to sustain an effective marksmanship program resources are required While the unit may only qualify its Soldiers annually or semiannually test results show that sustainment training is required at least quarterly to maintain marksmanship skills DIRECT OBSERVATION OF TRAINING 1 30 Observing and accurately recording performance reveals the status of weapon maintenance Soldier zero and qualification results and each Soldier s ability to hit targets This also allows the commander to identify Soldiers who need special assistance to reach required standards and those who exceed these standards SPOT CHECKS 1 31 Spot checks of individual marksmanship performance such as interviews and evaluations of Soldiers provide commanders with valuable information about Soldier proficiency and knowledge of the marksmanship tasks REVIEW OF PAST TRAINING 1 32 Commanders review past training to gain valuable information for developing a training plan The assessment should include e The frequency and results of training e The basic and advanced record fire results e The frequency of unit conducted collective CBRN or night fire training COMMANDER S EVALUATION GUIDE 1 33 The commander s evaluation guide contains three sections e Commander s priorities and intent e Soldier assessment e Trainer assessment 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 1 9 Chapter 1 1 34 The fol
51. lining up the hole in the carrying handle with the hole in the sight mounting adapter 3 Place the mounting knob assembly through the hole in the carrying handle and screw it clockwise 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 2 29 Chapter 2 BACKUP IRON SIGHT 2 66 The BUIS Figure 2 41 is a semi permanent flip up iron sight equipped with a rail grabbing base It is intended to remain on the M4 MWS while the M68 CCO is used as the primary means of day fire control If the M68 fails the prezeroed BUIS can be flipped up and used to continue the mission The BUIS provides a backup capability effective when firing 600 meters away and farther and can be installed on the M16A4 rifle and M4 carbine It provides a sighting capability when all other accessories have been removed and it can be used to establish approximate zeros for other sighting components without requiring live fire Zeros established using this method are only effective to approximately 20 meters and should be refined by a live fire zero 2 67 The armorer installs the BUIS on the first notch of the integrated rail nearest to the charging handle Before the armorer installs the BUIS he removes all rail covers heat shields from the top except one 4 5 or 6 rib shield The remaining rail cover heat shield can be positioned to accommodate accessories and protect the nonfiring hand when the barrel 1s hot Once installed and zeroed the BUIS should be left in the stowed position collapsing
52. payienbun aly uenexienb eue LL ed pie Cee Lec b x px puc uio E eA POLL sk jO si esu ed siu apgegpas mie unnaunjjmu LA pains puse parus mj sspe e ME dein See usi ET JB Dot y 59 jaluem zz P us peugkenburn RS JHEDpeRE UBL E LE BUJLEM MA Be ee ce umb mj un oq ej mug cei fD age xm min c smurehmus o ge sun M parmin Ji pu gi Wo estie Dua impe sup ual uil ain ju unm RULE nM RR jme Le Lg FRR mj ee gjan ee mi eye Coe ie EDUC HUY BRIT vU puru Bi ure ebur murs Au eu PEH yay ei eii OW du PS ei qpesodxe eje ennop seg eb euo eig 16 WES x eu ye pu veh mEPAUD En es ae 3 n URP pes Bue SDL usw 84 li x xg 0 21 2 cona mang Poe tl OGUN sno p sme
53. plastic projectile reduces the risk of overpenetration and ricochet which makes it ideal for UO training A 66 To fire the M862 SRTA from an M16 M4 series weapon the standard bolt and bolt carrier must be replaced by the M2 practice bolt The M2 practice bolt consists of a bolt carrier which is a fixed bolt The practice bolt changes the weapon from a gas operated action to a blow back action that permits cyclic fire with the lower powered M862 NOTES 1 Because of the design of the M2 practice bolt standard 5 56 millimeter rounds cannot be fired from the weapon while it 1s installed 2 See TM 9 6920 746 12 amp P for more information on the M862 SRTA and the M2 practice bolt WEAPONEER A 67 The Weaponeer is an effective rifle marksmanship training device that simulates the live firing of the M16 series rifle The system can be used for developing and sustaining marksmanship skills diagnosing and correcting problems and assessing basic skills NOTE The EST 2000 has replaced the Weaponeer but some units still use the Weaponeer Operation A 68 Figure A 10 shows the Weaponeer in the standing supported firing position With the exception of smoke and cartridge ejection the rifle operates normally and has the same weight and balance as the standard weapon An IR aiming sensor simulates round trajectory and hit point to an accuracy of better than one MOA The recoil rod that attaches at the rifle s muzzle end simulates recoil NO
54. range Figure E 5 is used to train and test Soldiers on the skills necessary to detect identify engage and defeat stationary and moving Infantry targets in a tactical array with their prescribed weapons This range combines the capabilities of the MRF range 17806 automated sniper field fire range 17812 combat pistol military police firearms qualification course 17822 and multipurpose machine gun range 17833 to centralize training and reduce land maintenance and unit overhead requirements Its primary features include 429 stationary Infantry targets 20 stationary armor targets 20 moving Infantry targets 10 stationary Infantry emplacements 32 lanes rifle machine gun zero 15 lanes combat pistol qualification 10 lanes sniper field fire 16 lanes modified record fire 10 lanes multipurpose machine gun 2 target mechanisms each 400 meter and 700 meter E 57 All targets are fully automated and the event specific target scenario is computer driven and scored from the range operations center The range operating system is fully capable of providing immediate performance feedback to the participants NOTE This range enhances throughput capability for units with multiple weapon densities by consolidating unit efforts to operate one training facility LEGENU cyTATMOMARY TARGETS MANDET TaHCETI E FOR TARGETS SEE FOC 17833 DETAR S tGTATIGNARY AME TARET
55. short range The rear sight aperture is set on 300 not 800 The small aperture is being used The range consists of targets at 75 175 and 300 meters Coaches are used to analyze the firer s adherence to the fundamentals not as scorers Soldiers detect and achieve 22 target hits out of 36 timed target exposures Field Fire Soldiers detect and achieve 27 target hits out of 44 timed target exposures Field Fire Il Soldiers that don t achieve the standard receive remedial training prior to refiring SECTION I TARGET DETECTION For most Soldiers finding the target is a greater problem than hitting it Target detection is the process of locating marking prioritizing and determining the range to combat targets Target detection must be conducted as part of individual training and tactical exercises and must be integrated into day and night LF Xs NOTE Refer to TC 25 8 for construction of a target detection range LOCATING TARGETS 6 1 The ability to locate a combat target depends on the observer s e Position e Skill in scanning e Ability to observe the area and recognize the type of indicators made by the target 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 6 1 Chapter 6 SELECTION OF A POSITION 6 2 A good position is one that offers maximum visibility of the area while affording cover and concealment In this case the word position refers to both the observer s location on the ground and the position of his body at that
56. single type of personal camouflage blends in with all areas a moving Soldier must be continually aware of the surrounding terrain and vegetation MARKING TARGETS 6 16 A Soldier observes two enemy riflemen moving into completely concealed positions one behind a bush and the other into a depression e By selecting a point of aim on the bush the Soldier should hit the enemy rifleman even though he can t see him If the target cannot be engaged the point of aim also allows for quick and accurate engagement once the target 1s re exposed e The enemy rifleman who moved into the depression provides no distinguishable point of aim so the Soldier must select a nearby feature as a reference point and determine its distance and general direction from the depression A reference point provides a general point of aim on a concealed target 6 17 Of the two a point of aim is usually the more effective means of delivering accurate fire The difficulty in using reference points to mark targets moving from one location to another depends on the following factors e Number of targets e Exposure time to target e Spacing of targets e Good and poor points of aim NUMBER OF TARGETS 6 18 If several targets appear and disappear at approximately the same time it is very difficult to note each target s point of disappearance EXPOSURE TIME OF TARGET 6 19 Usually moving targets are exposed for only a short period of time so the observer must
57. small arms crew served shoulder launched munitions gunnery simulator with superior accuracy and state of the art graphics 4 77 The EST 2000 is used to provide small arms weapon training on e Marksmanship e Squad tactical procedures e Close range shoot don t shoot techniques and skills 4 78 Commanders should review DA Pam 350 38 for live fire events that can be executed using the EST 2000 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 4 29 Chapter 4 NOTE Refer to Appendix A for a detailed explanation of the EST 2000 training simulator LASER MARKSMANSHIP TRAINING SYSTEM 4 30 4 79 The LMTS helps bridge the existing gap in individual marksmanship training by providing a more widely available flexible transportable and lightweight means of maintaining marksmanship skills The LMTS large company suite with the warrior kit is a home station or deployed multipurpose modular scaleable individual and unit small arms marksmanship sustainment simulator that accommodates the M16 series rifle and M4 carbine 4 80 The LMTS supports both IET and unit sustainment training for static mounted and dismounted small units When incorporated into BRM and Marksmanship Fundamentals I and II it greatly improves Soldier feedback NOTES 1 The LMTS is not intended to replace live firing qualification the EST 2000 2 Referto Appendix A for a detailed explanation of the LMTS 3 Soldiers failing to maintain a three centimeter shot group on the
58. 12 Moving target engagement training program 7 36 Table 7 13 Modifications for a steady position when firing at moving 7 37 Table 7 14 Angle of target movement sees nennen 7 39 Table 7 15 Target angle when dead center hits occur using the single lead rule 7 40 Table 7 16 Short range marksmanship training program 7 42 Table 7 17 Preliminary SRM tasks and explanation 7 48 Table 7 18 Familiarization stationary 7 52 Table 7 19 FamiliariZation moving cccccccseeeceeceeeeeecaeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeesseneeesseeeeeeaeeeeeeas 7 53 Table 7 20 Record arid practice oen bett o cute uium 7 55 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 xi Contents xii Table 7 21 Barricade transition fire 7 57 Table 7 22 Zero zero confirmation firing event 7 61 Table 7 23 Elevation knob M16A2 3 and front sightpost M16A4 7 66 Table 7 24 Elevation knob M4 M4A1 and windage 6 7 66 Table 7 25 Known distance mech adj firing 7 66 Table 7 26 Calculated adjusted point of aim
59. 15 10 meter target offset F 1 Blank 10 meter target offset ccccccccssseeccesseeeceeseeeceeeeecseueessegeeessageeesseaes F 3 M16A2 10 meter boresighting target 25 meter zeroing target offsets F 4 4 MWS 10 meter boresighting target 25 meter zeroing target offsets F 4 M4 M4A1 10 meter boresighting target 25 meter zeroing target offsets F 5 M16A4 MWS 10 meter boresighting target 25 meter zeroing target elici M F 5 Tables Training simulators devices and 1565 1 17 Characteristics of M16 M4 series weapons 2 1 Point of impact for the M4 M4A1 and M4 MWS 2 5 Point of impact for the M16A2 A3 2 7 Point of impact for the M16A4 rifle 2 9 Point or impact for the MTOA T Milles ite 2 10 Accessory compatibility and mounting 2 16 Characteristics of various accessories 2 16 Autnorzed armmublttlQE satu ch es pasce sabe op E E E AME 2 35 Authorized ammunition continued ceeccceeeeeeeecseeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeueeeeeeaeeeeeesaaes 2 36 Other Mmanunc Uns neei 3 6 Methods of destruction and the
60. 2 26 to 2 27 2 26 illus carbine 2 26 to 2 27 2 26 illus training strategies and qualification standards 8 20 to 8 23 8 20 table 25 meter zeroing procedures 8 21 to 8 22 8 22 illus concept 8 20 conduct of training 8 20 modified fundamentals 8 21 practice qualification 8 23 record qualification 8 23 target detection 8 22 to 8 23 hold off 100 to 500 meters see also squad designated marksman training 7 66 to 7 69 elevation 7 67 7 67 illus Index 5 Index windage 7 68 to 7 69 7 68 illus 7 68 table 7 69 table I infrared aiming light see also accessories M4 series carbine M16 series rifle and advanced optics lasers and iron sights 2 19 to 2 21 2 19 illus boresighting 8 8 to 8 9 compatibility and mounting 2 16 table mounting on 2 21 2 21 illus 2 2 21 2 21 illus M16A3 2 21 2 21 illus M16A4 2 20 2 20 illus carbine 2 21 2 21 illus M4 MWS 2 20 2 20 illus training strategies and qualification standards 8 23 to 8 28 8 24 table 25 meter zeroing procedures 8 25 to 8 27 8 26 illus concept 8 24 conduct of training 8 24 field fire 8 27 modified fundamentals 8 24 to 8 25 practice qualification 8 28 record qualification 8 28 target detection 8 27 AN PAQAC 2 19 to 2 21 2 19 illus boresighting 8 8 to 8 9 compatibility and mounting 2 16 table mounting on 2 2
61. 3 2 Align the locking bar 4 under the M68 with the notch in the rail ensuring that the rotary switch 5 1s facing the firer 3 Tighten the torque limiting knob not shown here until it clicks twice MOUNTING ON THE M16A4 RIFLE OR M4 MWS 2 35 This combination Figure 2 25 is an effective means of engaging targets during hours of limited visibility The brightness knob on the M68 should be on the lowest setting 2 or 3 that presents the red dot clearly when viewed through the AN PVS 14 When employing the AN PVS 14 Soldiers must consider the following factors 2 18 The AN PVS 14 should be mounted where the firer can acquire a good sight picture while performing the integrated act of shooting The M68 can be mounted and zeroed on any slot forward of the AN PVS 14 as long as the rail grabber fully rests on the ARS and the M68 lens does not rest on the front sightpost The closer the AN PVS 14 is mounted to the M68 the larger the field of view will be In order to get a clear sight picture with this configuration fine adjustments must be made to the AN PVS 14 s range focus gain control and diopter The eyecup should be exchanged with the eye guard that is shipped with the AN PVS 14 to reduce the light signature from the display when not viewing The red dots on settings 2 and 3 project a negligible light signature at night which can only be seen through an NVD Settings 4 through 10 project a noticeable signature detectable
62. 3 On cue the Soldier assumes the proper firing position and stance places the selector lever on SEMI uses the correct aiming technique for the target s distance and engages the target 4 After engaging the target the Soldier continues to cover the target to reinforce firing until the threat 1s eliminated NOTE If Soldiers will be engaging targets using lasers optics or the protective mask they should complete all steps using the same equipment Do not have Soldiers familiarize with iron sights and then fire the LFX with optics Evaluation 7 206 Soldiers are evaluated on a GO NO GO basis based on the standards in the training and evaluation outline T amp EO and scoring table Soldiers must score a GO on the familiarization firing tables Table 7 18 and Table 7 19 before attempting to qualify The standard for protective mask firing is 60 percent day and 50 percent night 7 207 Use the following guidelines for scoring Rounds fired after the time standard will be scored as a miss The number of rounds fired after the time standard will be subtracted from the total number of hits the Soldier has scored e All rounds must impact on the E type silhouette Hits are defined as being in the lethal zone bowling pin Table 7 18 Familiarization stationary POSITION ROUNDS DISTANCE METHOD TIME LETHAL ZONE FIRED m STANDARD HIT STANDARD Straight ahead __4 10 Single shot Straight ahead 4 25 Controlled pair Straight
63. 300 0 04 350 2 568 0 00235575 0 00235575 6 11 375 2 568 0 00235575 0 00235575 40 13 10 09 400 2 568 0 00235575 0 00235575 46 78 12 25 14 77 SRR 125 150 175 200 225 250 275 300 325 350 375 400 325 2 568 0 00235575 0 00235575 2 83 di Bullet Location M855 Bullet Location M193 Figure 5 35 M855 zeroed at 25 meters M193 fired using M855 zero 5 98 A simple rule of thumb that will preclude any problem is to use only the ammunition specifically designed for each weapon M193 ball ammunition for MI6AI rifles M855 ball ammunition for M16A2 3 4 rifles and M4 carbines 5 38 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Downrange Feedback EXTERNAL BALLISTICS 5 99 External ballistics deals with factors affecting the flight path of the bullet between the weapon s muzzle and the target 5 100 Soldiers must understand the basics of external ballistics so they can make necessary scope adjustments or hold compensations to allow them to hit the target The external ballistic factors that affect bullet trajectory are e Gravity Muzzle velocity Air resistance drag Altitude or air density Temperature Trajectory Wind Angles GRAVITY 5 101 The force of gravity on a bullet is constant regardless of its weight shape or velocity The longer a bullet is in the air or the greater its angle from the vertical the more effect gravity will have on its
64. 3028 26 24 222018 16141210 8 6 4 2 LE J INCHES Blowing from 3 o clock on an M193 bullet Figure 7 32 Windage effects of a 10 mph crosswind Table 7 26 Calculated adjusted point of aim based on wind speed full value RANGE m SER Io po o ow om 1 5 in 10 5 in 22 5 in 7 68 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Advanced Rifle Marksmanship Table 7 27 Drift for 10 mph wind using M855 ammunition when fired from M16A2 rifle with 300 meter battlesight zero EMEN 3 100 25 po o 215 5 860 7 1339 gt 113 95 7 283 Firers use the M15 sighting device to demonstrate that they understand holding off To do so the firer aligns the sights on the silhouette on the proper adjusted point of aim NOTE See Appendix A for information about the M15 sighting device 7 284 Once the firer has an understanding of elevation and windage hold off he can begin the live fire training exercise Table 7 28 The firer will be given 20 rounds in which to engage 20 targets at ranges from 100 to 500 meters using elevation and windage hold off Table 7 28 Firing event known distance hold off FIRING EVENT ROUNDS _____ TARGET RANGE m Known Distance Hold Off 100 to 500 PHASE V FIELD FIRE 100 TO 500 METERS 7 285 The field fire events Table 7 29 will test the individual s marksmanship range estimation and target detection skills Field fire will consist of both a Rec
65. 430L425D 2 0L 0 9U M4 MWS 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 01U Sound M4 MWS Bracket 4 9R 6 1U 6 0L 4 0D OL 3 90 203 AN PAQ 4B C Picatinny adapter Left 300 m Spacer M4 MWS AN PVS 4 Picatinny Spacer Upper 300 m 0 0 3 4D 0 0 9 6U 2 0L 3 9U M203 receiver M16A4 Upper 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 010 2 0L 0 9U AN PAQ M16A4 ied MWS 4 Picatinny bracket Left 300 m 6 5R 8 1U 6 03L 4 25D 2 0L 0 9U adapter spacer M16A4 S Upper ao 0 09 40 2 0L 2 40 MWS dio receiver M16A4 M68 M68 N A Upper 300 m inal 0 0 0 0 5 63U 2 0L 2 4U MWS receiver AN PVS 4 Picatinny Spacer UPPer 300 m MI Se MWS receiver NOTE Target offsets not yet developed are indicated by TBD to be developed 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 F 7 Appendix F Table F 1 Offset mounting continued ACCESSORY RAIL MOUNT LOCATION RANGE ZERO BORESIGHT MILES GRABBER TO OFFSET TARGET OFFSET ZERO Upper 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 01U 2 0L 0 9U N A N A receiver 300 m AN PAQ 300 m 6 5R 8 1U 6 0L 4 0D 2 0L 3 9U 4B C AN PAQ 4B C Picatinny bracket Upper 0 0 4 6D 0 0 9 6U 2 0L 3 9U AN PVS 4 Picatinny Spacer receiver 300 m WEAPON adapter Spacer ANIPEQ 2A B Insight Top 15L0 5D 208230 2010 90 AN PEQ 2A B Insight anng 300 2 0L 1 50 2 01 0 90 adapter AN PAQ 4 9R 6 1U 1 75L 3 9U 2 0L 0 9U adapter AN PAC 6 0R 0 9D 2 0L 0 9U AN PAQ 4B C Picatinny ce Right udi adapter 4 Insight
66. 7 It takes about 30 to 45 minutes to fully dark adapt when going from a brightly lighted area into the dark However people dark adapt at varying rates People who are older people who smoke or people who are not in great physical shape will take longer to dark adapt C 8 There are three stages of dark adaptation e Daylight vision e Twilight vision e Night vision DAYLIGHT VISION C 9 Daylight vision occurs under maximum lighting conditions such as when the sun is shining or in a well lit room Under these conditions Soldiers have e Optimal visual acuity In daylight conditions Soldiers use both their central and peripheral vision which provides optimal visual acuity 20 10 20 15 and 20 20 vision e Optimal color vision Colors look most vivid under daylight conditions e Quickest reaction time TWILIGHT VISION C 10 Twilight vision occurs during many military night operations and when driving around in a car at night It occurs at dawn and dusk down to full moonlight when there is artificial illumination and when snow 15 on the ground at night It can occur in the daytime with several layers of jungle canopy Under these conditions Soldiers have Poorer visual acuity Visual acuity can be as poor as 20 100 Under twilight conditions optimal visual acuity is between 20 50 and 20 100 e Poorer color vision Colors will not be as vivid e Slower reaction times C 2 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Night Fighti
67. 8 M16A2 A3 battlesight zero Turn the elevation knob 1 shown as viewed from above counterclockwise until the rear sight assembly 2 rests flush with the carrying handle and the 8 3 marking is aligned with the index line 3 on the left side of the carrying handle Turn the elevation knob one more click clockwise Position the apertures 4 so the unmarked aperture is up and the 0 200 meter aperture 1s down Turn the windage knob 5 to align the index mark on the 0 200 meter aperture with the long center index line on the rear sight assembly 2 9 Table 2 3 shows how much one click of elevation or windage will move the strike of the round at ranges from 25 to 600 meters FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Weapon Characteristics Accessories and Ammunition Table 2 3 Point of impact for the M16A2 A3 rifle RANGE m 25 100 200 300 400 500 600 Elevation 3 A in 1 3 8 in 2 3 4 in 4 1 8 in 5 1 2 in 6 7 8 in 8 1 4 in 0 9 cm 3 5 cm 7 cm 10 5 cm 14 cm 17 5 cm 20 9 cm Windage 1 8 in 1 2 in 1 in 1 1 2 in 2in 2 1 2 in 3 in 0 3 cm 1 25 cm 2 5 cm 3 8 cm 5 6 3 7 6 M16A4 RIFLE 2 10 The M16A4 rifle Figure 2 9 is the same as the M16A2 rifle with the addition of a flat top upper receiver with an integral rail and detachable carrying handle and the M5 ARS AN PAS 13 V 1 LWTS Shown also ANIPVS 4 AN PAQ 4B C ANIPAS RIE V 2 mwrs Upper Receiver Rail Hand Guard Rail 2 Slot L26 M4 L35 MIGA
68. A maximum of four hits for each silhouette on the same target sheet are scored The same target sheet is used for every 40 round qualification table that a firer completes 6 92 DA Form 5790 R Record Fire Scorecard Scaled Target Alternate Course is used to score alternate course record fire qualifications NOTE See Appendix B for a sample completed form and the end of this publication for a blank reproducible copy 6 93 The NSNs for scaled silhouette targets are e 25 meter NSN 6920 01 1671398 e 15 meter NSN 6920 01 1396 RATINGS 6 94 Qualification ratings for the 25 meter scaled target alternate course are shown in Table 6 17 Table 6 17 Qualification ratings for the 25 meter scaled target alternate course QUALIFICATION NUMBER OF RATINGS TARGETS HIT 38 to 40 Sharpshooter 33 to 37 26 to 32 Unqualified 25 and below 15 METER SCALED TARGET ALTERNATE COURSE NOTE Units are permitted to use the 15 meter scaled alternate course only when standard record fire and KD ranges and 25 meter scaled target alternate courses are unavailable 6 95 The 15 meter scaled target alternate course is conducted on a 50 foot indoor range using a 22 caliber rimfire adapter RFA Qualification 1s conducted using the 15 meter alternate course C target NSN 6920 01 167 1396 NOTES 1 See Appendix A for more information about the RFA 2 Prior to qualification all Soldiers battlesight zero their weapons using the 15 meter
69. Blankets 6920 01 516 9912 _ TRAINING DEVICES A 43 Several marksmanship training devices are available to aid in PMI and sustainment training They are beneficial when ammunition is limited for training or during practice exercises such as field firing on the EST 2000 or zeroing and qualifying with short range training ammunition SRTA Some training devices are complex costly and in limited supply while others are relatively simple cheap and in large supply Individuals or squads can sustain and practice basic marksmanship skills and fundamentals using devices and aids alone or in combinations A 14 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Training Aids Devices and Exercises AIMING CARD A 44 The MI5A1 aiming card Figure 6 determines if the Soldier understands how to aim at a target s center of mass how to adjust the point of aim how to allow for gravity and how to engage a moving target M15A1 AIMING CARD THIS CARD SHOWS THE FRONTSIGHT POST PROPERLY CENTERED IN THE REAR SIGHT APERTURE HOLE MOVE THE TARGET TO CORRECTLY PLACE THE AIMING POINT AT CENTER OF VISIBLE MASS TARGET AT 250 METERS Figure A 6 M15A1 aiming card A 45 To use the aiming card 1 The card is misaligned the Soldier is instructed to establish the correct point of aim and a trainer checks it Each Soldier demonstrates six out of six of the points of aim NOTE The sight target relationship on the card is the same visual perception that
70. CHE CLICK TO THE QOO METER doc mE DONN Te CLIC Ix Grids are 1cm wide by 1em high Units must locally manufacture SETTING FOR THE RIFLE THE WEAPON YA OR 00 METERS dm cp QA de PB ca cs amp c GO cm za E BIS nS EEE E En E E iim m Figure F 4 M4 MWS 10 meter boresighting target 25 meter zeroing target offsets F 4 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 10 Meter Target Offsets and 25 Meter Zero Offsets 10 Meter Boresight Tgt AN PAO 4B C Mtd on MWS Using MAMAAT with ANIPAQ ABIC Mounted on Hand 4B C Spacer and Picatinny Rail Grabber on Left Side Rail Guards using the M4 M16 Mounting Rail Pe ELI 7S MET Ee EE 25 91 39 90129 83 832 A Timing Laser H EEEEFEEHESEEELE LEE LIA PEE ER oq ESTE JI Lap eps ru a wi se LL 10 Meter Bore Sight Tanget Tor 30am Zaro 27 24 21 18 15 12 0 8 3 O 3 8 12 15 18 21 24 27 13 90 ZERO TARGET DATA FOR MIERT WPERA RIFLE 7 FO RIEBONODAT25 METER ROTATE and THE REAR IGHT par US Army ARDEC METER sms FO m iw ene OR PEAS RIFLE GEER TUM TWO CUICH AlMSTA AR CCL A AI TARGET T HGHTS MOVE GROUP CENTER 5 CLOSE 5 POSSIBLE THE AMSTA AR FSF R WHITE DOT iN THE CENTER OF oF TARGET Arsenal 07806 1 ARTEA COMPLETION THE 25 TEGO ROTATE THE REAR SIG
71. DA Form 5239 R 100 200 and 300 Meter Downrange Feedback Scorecard DA Form 5241 R Single and Multiple Targets Field Fire II Scorecard DA Form 5789 R Record Fire Scorecard Known Distance Course DA Form 5790 R Record Fire Scorecard Scaled Target Alternate Course DA Form 7489 R Record Night Fire Scorecard DA Form 7649 R Squad Designated Marksman Record Fire I and ID and DA Form 7650 R Squad Designated Marksman Position Evaluation This publication applies to the Active Army the Army National Guard ARNG National Guard of the United States ARNGUS and the US Army Reserve USAR Terms that have joint or Army definitions are identified in both the glossary and the text Terms for which FM 3 22 9 is the proponent FM are indicated with an asterisk in the glossary Uniforms depicted in this manual were drawn without camouflage for clarity of the illustration Unless this publication states otherwise masculine nouns and pronouns refer to both men and women The proponent for this publication is the US Army Training and Doctrine Command The preparing agency is the United States Army Infantry School USAIS You may send comments and recommendations by any means US mail e mail fax or telephone as long as you use DA Form 2028 Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms or follow its format Point of contact information 15 as follows E mail benn 29IN 229 S3 DOC LIT conus army mil Phone Commercial 706 5
72. ENGAGE 10 TARGETS MORE THAN 4 ROUNDS PER WILL DATE INITIALEL VY Y YMMDDI 260 0220 Jorr DA FORM 5790 R SEP 2008 DA FORM 5790 R JUL 2006 5 OBSOLETE Figure B 6 Example of completed DA Form 5790 R Record Fire Scorecard Scaled Target Alternate Course B 4 FM 3 22 9 Page 1212 APO PE vi 00 12 August 2008 RECORD NIGHT FIRE SCORECARD use of this form see FM 2 22 8 The proponen agency is TRADOC TABLE 1 FOXHOLE SUPPORTED FIRING POSITION DA FORM 7488 SEP 2008 DA FORM 7489 9 NOW 2002 15 OBSOLETE APD PE wt 00 Figure B 7 Example of completed DA Form 7489 R Record Night Fire Scorecard SQUAD DESIGNATED MARKSMAN RECORD FIRE I AND FM 1 22 8 andesite at RECORD FIRE MECHANICAL SIGHT ADJUSTMENT TARGET RANGE POSITION nee FAIL 13 and below 5 DA FORM 7649 SEP 2006 Figure B 8 Example of completed DA Form 7649 R Squad Designated Marksman Record Fire and Il 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 Scorecards This page intentionally left blank Appendix C Night Fighting With the Army s emphasis on night operations commanders must be sure that riflemen are lethal at night as well as during the day That lethality depends largely on whether riflemen can fire effectively with today s technology NVGs aiming lights and TWSs This appendix provides a better understanding of how eyes adapt to the night as
73. Hold the weapon with the buttstock firmly against the shoulder e Hold the firing side elbow close against the body 7 166 Although short range engagements generally take place from the standing position a Soldier may be required to engage targets from the kneeling position The kneeling position is generally used when correcting a weapon malfunction Weapon Ready Positions 7 167 There are two weapon ready positions high ready and low ready High Ready Position 7 168 The high ready position Figure 7 22 is best suited for the lineup outside of a building room or bunker entrance 7 169 To hold the weapon in the high ready position 1 Hold the weapon s buttstock under the armpit with the barrel pointed slightly up so that the top of the front sightpost is just below the line of sight but still within peripheral vision 2 Grasp the handguards toward the front sling swivel with the nonfiring hand Keep the trigger finger outside of the trigger well and the thumb of the firing hand on the selector lever 7 170 To engage a target from the high ready position 1 Push the weapon forward as if to bayonet the target 2 Bring the buttstock firmly against the shoulder as it slides up the body Figure 7 22 High ready position 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 7 43 Chapter 7 Low Ready Position 7 171 The low ready position Figure 7 23 15 best suited for movement inside of buildings 7 172 To hold the weapon in the
74. JOYCE E MORROW Administrative Assistant to the Secretary of the Army 0820409 DISTRIBUTION Active Army Army National Guard and U S Army Reserve To be distributed in accordance with the initial distribution number IDN 110187 requirements for FM 3 22 9 This page intentionally left blank This page intentionally left blank This page intentionally left blank PIN 080759 000
75. LMTS 25 meter target should receive remedial feedback FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Chapter 5 Downrange Feedback Downrange feedback provides precise knowledge of what happens to bullets at range It provides for an effective transition between 25 meter firing and firing on the field fire range Knowing precisely where all bullets are hitting or missing the target a poor firer with instructor trainer assistance can improve his performance and a good firer can bring his shots to the target s center This chapter contains guidelines for the instructor trainer to conduct training on ranges that provide detailed feedback from the targets downrange This chapter contains grouping and zeroing procedures and procedures for conducting the three types of KD ranges SECTION I GROUPING PROCEDURES This section provides guidelines for conducting a grouping range Table 5 1 It includes concept organization shot group marking shot group analysis multiple shot group analysis and troubleshooting of the fundamentals Table 5 1 Grouping procedures GROUPING PROCEDURES Instructional Intent Reinforce PMI by performing the integrated act of shooting Shoot two consecutive 3 round shot groups within a 4 centimeter circle at 25 meters Special Instructions Ensure that The rear sight is on the proper setting zero M16A2 3 8 3 1 M16A4 6 3 2 M4 6 3 The rear sight aperture 15 set on 300 1 not 800 7 1 The M16A1 s rear sight is set on t
76. RIFLES AND CARBINES All M16 M4 series weapons are magazine fed gas operated air cooled shoulder fired 5 56 millimeter weapons This section describes the general characteristics and components of M16 M4 series weapons CHARACTERISTICS OF M16 MA SERIES WEAPONS 2 1 Table 2 1 describes the general characteristics of M16 M4 series weapons Table 2 1 Characteristics of M16 MA series weapons CHARACTERISTICS M4 SERIES M16A2 A3 M16A4 M16A1 WEIGHT Ib Without magazine and sling 649 778 908 635 With sling and loaded 20 round magazine 7 19 8 48 9 78 6 75 30 round magazine 7 50 8 79 10 09 8 06 LENGTH in OPERATIONAL CHARACTERISTICS MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RATE OF FIRE rounds per min round burst 90 90 2 90 NA RANGE m 3 600 3 600 3 600 2 653 Maximum effective range Point target 500 550 550 460 Area target 600 800 600 N A 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 2 1 Chapter 2 NOTE For further technical information refer to TM 9 1005 319 10 and TM 9 1005 249 10 M4 SERIES CARBINE 2 2 The M4 series carbine consists of the M4 the M4A1 and the modular weapon system MWS Figures 2 1 and 2 2 and features several modifications to equip it for close combat operations e The M4 series carbine buttstock has four positions m Closed m open m 3 4 open Fully open e The M4 carbine becomes the M4 MWS when the M4 adapter rail system ARS is installed Figure 2 3 e Whe
77. Soldier assessment 1 10 to 1 11 trainer assessment 1 12 direct observation of training 1 9 review of past training 1 10 spot checks 1 9 training devices see also training aids devices and exercises A 14 to A 24 aiming card A 15 A 15 illus location of miss and hit system A 18 to A 19 15 1 aiming card 4 28 M15A2 M23 blank firing attachment A 18 A 18 illus M16 sighting device A 17 A 17 illus M261 22 caliber rimfire adapter A 19 to A 20 riddle sighting device A 16 A 16 illus short range traming ammunition A 20 weaponeer A 20 to A 24 A 21 illus A 22 illus A 23 illus training exercises see also training aids devices and exercises A 24 to A 28 ball and dummy exercise A 27 dime washer exercise A 27 to A 28 4 29 target box exercise A 24 to A 27 A 24 illus A 25 illus A 26 illus A 27 illus 4 29 training phases see also training 1 6 to 1 8 Phase I Basic Rifle Marksmanship Preliminary Index 14 Marksmanship Instruction 1 6to 1 7 Phase II Basic Rifle Marksmanship Downrange Feedback Range Firing 1 7 Phase III Basic Rifle Marksmanship Field Firing 1 8 Phase IV Advanced Rifle Marksmanship 1 8 Phase V Advanced Optics Lasers and Iron Sights 1 8 troubleshooting and destruction 3 1 to 3 8 destruction procedures see also destruction procedures 3 7 to 3 8 malfunctions see also malfunctions 3 2 to 3 7 stoppages s
78. When firing record fire each Soldier must wear the proper uniform the helmet LBE and IBA with all SAPI plates if available No other armor is required 6 51 Every firer receives 54 rounds of 5 56 millimeter ball ammunition with 10 rounds loaded into one magazine for Firing Table 1 and 44 rounds loaded into two separate magazines with 22 rounds each for Firing Tables 2 and 3 Table 6 4 depicts the number of rounds that must be fired from each position Each Soldier must achieve 27 hits out of the 44 timed target exposures in Firing Tables 2 and 3 Table 6 5 shows the number of target exposures target distance and exposure times for each firing table 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 6 9 Chapter 6 Table 6 4 Number of rounds that must be fired from each position during Field Fire Il POSITION NUMBER OF ROUNDS FIRED Supported firing position Supported firing position Unsupported firing position Table 6 5 Field Fire Il firing tables FIRING TABLE 1 FIRING TABLE 2 FIRING TABLE 3 RANGE TIME RANGE TIME RANGE TIME m sec m sec m sec L d gt ee o 1 1 175 __2 15 8 75 300 300 SECTION Ill RECORD QUALIFICATION The objective of record fire is to access and confirm the individual proficiency of firers and the effectiveness of the training program Important statistical data such as qualification ratings and first time GO rates are obtained from record fire These data provide goals for the
79. after the first three rounds are fired NOTE When cutting the 3x3 centimeter square out of the target some of the strike zone may be cut out Take care when annotating the impact of the rounds When the weapon is close to being zeroed some of the shots may be lost through the hole in the target 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 8 25 Chapter 8 NUES e 18 19 E 5 SEE B T HHHH SON DESIGNATED STRIKE POINT nd orga See ON NNNM 300 METERS 1 01 1 1 1 1 1 88 LI d 11114 11441 ot it amp LLILLLLILIA 21 26 2 18 3d9 9 Figure 8 10 Example of shot group adjustment with strike zone AN PEQ 2A B Infrared Aiming Laser 8 86 The 25 meter zeroing procedures for the AN PEQ 2A B IR aiming laser are as follows NOTE The zero standards are the same as with iron sights 1 Set the adjusters to their zero preset position NOTE See TM 11 5855 308 12 amp P for more information about setting the adjusters to their zero preset position 2 Prepare the 25 meter zeroing target by cutting out a 3x3 centimeter square in the center of the target and E type silhouette 3 Turn the aiming beam on in the low power setting AIM LO 4 Install the aim point filter to eliminate excessive blooming 5 Adjust the AN PEQ 2A B top mounted aiming point as follows For windage and elevation one click equals 1 centimeter or one square at 25 meters For
80. ahead 4 10 Controlled pair 7 52 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Advanced Rifle Marksmanship Table 7 19 Familiarization moving POSITION ROUNDS DISTANCE METHOD TIME LETHAL ZONE FIRED m STANDARD HIT STANDARD Facing right turning left Controlled pair Straight ahead walking 10 start at 15 Controlled pair Straight ahead Controlled pair PHASE II TARGET DISCRIMINATION TRAINING 7 208 During SRC there 1s little or no margin for error Too slow a shot at the enemy too fast a shot at a noncombatant or friendly Soldier or inaccurate shots can all be disastrous for the Soldier Target discrimination is the act of distinguishing between threat and nonthreat targets during SRC Target discrimination is an inescapable responsibility and must be stressed in all situations regardless of mission NOTE It is essential that target discrimination training be aimed at instilling fire control and discipline in Soldiers The first priority 1s always the safety of a Soldier TARGET DISCRIMINATION TARGETS 7 209 Targets used to conduct target discrimination training include 1 Two or more E type silhouettes with bowling pins painted on each side of the silhouette for example brown side and green side 2 Multiple E type silhouettes with different painted shapes for example squares triangles and circles 3 A series of 3 inch circles on E type silhouettes 4 Pop up targets for example electrical or pull targets 5
81. aid in PMI and sustainment training They are beneficial when ammunition is limited for training Training exercises can be used alone or in combinations TARGET BOX EXERCISE A 86 The target box exercise checks the consistency of aiming and placement of three round shot groups in a dry fire environment A 87 To conduct the exercise Figure A 13 1 The target man places the silhouette anywhere on the plain sheet of paper and moves the silhouette target as directed by the firer NOTE The two positions separated by 15 yards or 25 meters must have already been established so the rifle is pointed at some place on the paper 2 When the firer establishes proper aiming he signals the target man to Mark NOTE Only hand signals are used since voice commands would be impractical when training several pairs of Soldiers at one time A 24 Figure A 13 Target box exercise FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Training Aids Devices and Exercises 3 The target man places the pencil through the hole in the silhouette target and makes a dot on the paper Then he moves the silhouette to another spot on the paper and indicates to the firer that he is ready for another shot 4 When the three shots are completed the target man triangulates the three shots and labels it Shot Group 1 The firer and instructor view the shot group 5 The Soldier fires several shot groups After two or three shot groups are completed in one lo
82. aids and devices can be selected from the TSC Table A 6 lists many of those aids and devices available and their identification numbers Table A 6 Training aids and devices TYPE NOMENCLATURE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Also available in videotape 2E 010 071 1271 8 26 010 071 0444 8 2E 010 071 0086 B 2E 010 071 0725 8 TVT 7 1 Teaching Rifle Marksmanship Part TVT 7 2 Teaching Rifle Marksmanship Part 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 A 13 Appendix A TARGET ORDERING NUMBERS A 42 Table A 7 lists the description and NSN to use when ordering marksmanship targets Table A 7 Target ordering numbers DESIGNATION DESCRIPTION O D Prone Full length face with V through two 6920 00 922 7450 scoring areas Repair center with V through two scoring 6920 00 922 7451 areas 6920 01 167 1392 _ 15 Meter Battlesight Zeroing Target 22 Caliber RFA 250 meter scaled silhouette target 50 6920 01 167 1393 foot indoor range 15 Meter Alternate Course C 22 Caliber RFA 50 to 300 meter scaled silhouette target 6920 01 167 1396 50 foot indoor range 6920 01 167 1392 Pasem Black ___ _______________ 6920 00 165 6354 _ Pase Buff ___ 6920 00 172 3572 Landscape target __ _______________ 6920 00 713 8253 Spindle Target Spotter Wood 6920 00 713 8257 Spoters 1 1 2 inches in diameter 6920 00 789 0869 _ Spoters 3 inches in diameter 6920 00 713 8255 Spoters 5 inches in diameter ___ 6920007138254_ Thermal
83. ammunition e Collects expended ammunition casings and other residue UNIT ARMORER D 7 The unit armorer e Repairs rifles e Replaces parts ASSISTANT INSTRUCTOR D 8 One assistant instructor is assigned for each one to ten firing points Each assistant instructor e Ensures that all firers observe safety regulations and procedures e Assists firers having problems MEDICAL PERSONNEL D 9 Medical personnel provide medical support as required by regulations governing LFXs CONTROL TOWER OPERATORS D 10 Control tower operators e Raise and lower the targets e Time the exposures e Sound the audible signal e Give the fire commands NOTE If possible two men should be chosen to perform these functions MAINTENANCE DETAIL D 11 This detail should be composed of two segments one to conduct small arms repair and one to perform minor maintenance on the target holding mechanisms FIRING ORDER LINEUP E 12 After the range cadre have given the safety and range briefings they assemble the Soldiers in firing orders in correlation with the number of firing points on that range After the firing order has been determined firers have their weapons rodded move to the firing line and proceed to their assigned firing points keeping their weapons pointed up and downrange at all times TOWER COMMANDS E 13 Simple standard fire commands are needed to avoid confusion and misunderstanding during LFXs E 2 FM 3 22 9 12 Augu
84. battlesight zeroing target NSN 6920 01 167 1393 3 The conduct of fire scoring scorecard and qualification ratings are the same as those used for the 25 meter scaled target alternate course 6 20 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Chapter 7 Advanced Rifle Marksmanship The procedures and techniques for implementing the ARM training program are based on all Soldiers understanding common firing principles being proficient marksmen and being confident in applying their firing skills in combat This chapter concentrates on the advanced techniques and procedures that Soldiers need to participate in collective training during unit live fire training exercises This chapter describes advanced firing positions combat firing techniques CBRN firing unassisted night fire moving target engagements SRM training and SDM training NOTE Unit METL and STRAC allocation determine which ARM tasks will be trained SECTION I ADVANCED FIRING POSITIONS After mastering the four marksmanship fundamentals in the basic firing positions Soldiers master the four fundamentals while firing from a variety of advanced firing positions The firer s position may change but the three remaining fundamentals never change Ultimately any firing position that aids the firer in applying the fundamentals is acceptable as long as the firer applies it consistently to avoid changing his sight picture With minor modifications the dry fire exercises taught during PMI can
85. be proficient in applying these fundamentals know the importance of marksmanship training and have a competent and professional attitude The commander must ensure that selected instructors trainers can effectively train other Soldiers Local instructor trainer training courses and marksmanship certification programs must be established to ensure that instructor trainer skills are developed 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 1 11 Chapter 1 CADRE TRAINER 1 40 Cadre trainer refers to a marksmanship instructor trainer that has more experience and expertise than the firer does He trains Soldiers in the effective use of the rifle by maintaining strict discipline on the firing line insisting on compliance with range procedures and program objectives and enforcing safety regulations A good cadre trainer must understand the training phases and techniques for developing marksmanship skills Each cadre trainer must have the following attributes e Knowledge e Patience e Understanding e Consideration e Respect e Encouragement Knowledge 1 41 Effective cadre trainers must possess a thorough knowledge of the rifle proficiency in firing and a complete understanding of this manual and supporting manuals Patience 1 42 Effective cadre trainers relate to the Soldier calmly persistently and patiently Understanding 1 43 Cadre trainers enhance success and understanding by emphasizing close observance of rules and instructions Con
86. blowing the farther the wind will push the bullet WIND DIRECTION 5 75 The effects of wind vary depending on changes in wind speed and direction Wind is classified by the direction it 1s blowing in relationship to the firer target line The clock system is used to indicate wind direction and value Figure 5 26 This system works as follows e Winds that blow from the left 9 o clock or right 3 o clock are called full value winds because they have the most effect on the bullet e Winds that blow at an angle from the front or rear are called half value winds because they have about half the effect on the bullet as full value winds e Winds that blow straight into the firer s face or winds that blow straight into the target are termed no value winds because they have minimal effect on the bullet WINDS FROM LEFT BLOW THE BULLET TO THE RIGHT WINDS FROM RIGHT BLOW THE BULLET TO THE LEFT aan t NO 1 HALF VALUE VALUE HALF VALUE WIIND WIND FULL VALUE FULL VALUE WIND WIND HALF VALUE NO V HALF VALUE WIND VALUE WIND 7 5 Figure 5 26 Determine wind value using the clock method WIND SPEED 5 76 Wind is variable and sometimes quite different at the firing position than at the target s position Consider the following e When wind is blowing hard at the firing line trees brush or terrain could protect the bullet s path e Wind can vary by several miles per hour between the time a measurement is taken and when t
87. by opposing forces using NVDs The brighter the dot the larger the blooming effect becomes in the AN PVS 14 The blooming effect reduces the Soldier s field of view and prevents him from seeing targets behind the blooming 2 36 To mount the M68 and AN PVS 14 on an M16A4 rifle or M4 MWS NOTE Reference the weapon components using the numbers listed in Figure 2 25 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Weapon Characteristics Accessories and Ammunition Figure 2 25 Mounting the M68 AN PVS 14 combination on an M4 MWS 1 Remove the carrying handle 2 Mount the M68 1 by tightening the torque limiting knob 3 Mount the AN PVS 14 2 where the best field of view 1s achieved 4 Once the preferred location for the M68 is located zero the M68 to that notch if different from the notch the M68 was previously zeroed on NOTE For more information about the M68 refer to TM 9 1240 413 13 amp P For more information about the AN PVS 14 refer to TM 11 5855 306 10 AN PAQ 4B C INFRARED AIMING LIGHT 2 37 The AN PAQ 4B C IR aiming light Figure 2 26 projects an IR laser beam that is invisible to the naked eye but can be seen with NVDs This aiming light works with the AN PVS 7 series goggles and the AN PVS 14 The AN PAQ 4B C mounts on various M16 M4 series weapons with mounting brackets or rail grabbers Figure 2 26 AN PAQ 4B C infrared aiming light 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 2 19 Chapter 2 MOUNTING ON THE M16A4 RIFLE OR M
88. circle the firer determines the sight adjustments he needs to make identifies the horizontal and vertical lines closest to the X and reads the 25 meter zeroing target to determine the proper sight adjustments If the two shot groups do not fall within a 4 centimeter circle the Soldier continues grouping NOTE The majority of the round must be inside of the circle to be counted 7 The Soldier annotates any sight adjustments that need to be made to the weapon on the 25 meter zeroing target and ensures that his name is on the target 8 If five out of six rounds fell within the 4 centimeter circle the Soldier is zeroed and can be removed from the firing line If not the Soldier returns to the firing line and makes sight adjustments 5 46 Steps 1 through 8 are repeated until the Soldier places five out of six consecutive rounds inside the 4 centimeter circle If the Soldier is not zeroed in 18 rounds he should be removed from the firing line and given remedial training before attempting to zero again 5 18 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Downrange Feedback 5 47 Once firing proficiency has been demonstrated from the supported firing position zeroing exercises can be conducted from the unsupported firing position For example 18 rounds are allocated for the zeroing exercise If the Soldier zeroes in 9 rounds the Soldier can fire the remaining 9 rounds from the unsupported firing position CONDUCT OF A 25 METER ZERO FIRING USING THE LOCAT
89. comparisons should be made continually between the range as determined by the Soldier and the actual range as determined by pacing or other more accurate means of measurement 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 6 5 Chapter 6 NOTE The best training technique is to require the Soldier to pace the range after he has visually determined it In this way he discovers the actual range for himself which makes a much greater impression than if he is simply told the correct range 6 30 The greatest limitation of the 100 meter unit of measure method is that its accuracy is directly related to the amount of terrain visible to the observer This is particularly true at longer ranges If a target appears at a range of 500 meters or more and the observer can see only a portion of the ground between himself and the target it becomes very difficult to use the 100 meter unit of measure method with any degree of accuracy APPEARANCE OF OBJECTS METHOD 6 31 The appearance of objects method is a means of determining range by the size and other details of the object observed This is a common method of determining distances and is used by most people in their everyday living For example a motorist attempting to pass another car must judge the distance of oncoming vehicles based on his knowledge of how vehicles appear at various distances Suppose the motorist knows that at a distance of one mile an oncoming vehicle appears to be 1 inch wide and 2 inches high Then an
90. destroy an enemy threat NOTE Detailed instructions on how to create and modify scenarios can be found in the EST 2000 training support package 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 A 3 Appendix A WEAPON SAFETY A 14 The following general safety precautions should be adhered to e Fire simulated weapons only if they are pointed downrange e Post warning signs at all entry doors e Do not allow personnel to stand downrange from the firing line WARNING No one should be allowed beyond the firing line Instruct weapon handlers never to look directly into a barrel e Take the weapon off line for testing and service at the first indication of malfunction and refer to the troubleshooting procedures DANGER Each simulated weapon has the same appearance as a fully functioning weapon with the exception of the umbilical cable Under certain circumstances especially in the subdued light of a training room it is possible to mistake a live firearm for a simulated weapon This creates the potential for personal injury or damage to property To avoid confusion no live or blank ammunition and no live weapons should be allowed in the training room Simulated weapons will not accept live or blank ammunition Any attempt to chamber a live or blank round may damage the simulated weapon and create an unsafe situation LASER SAFETY A 15 The lasers used in the simulated weapons meet ANSI Standard Z136 1 1993 Class
91. each time the range increases a shot group can be expected to do the same If there are 2 54 centimeters between bullets on a 25 meter target there will be an additional 2 54 centimeters of dispersion for each additional 25 meters of range A 2 54 centimeter shot group at 25 meters about 3 5 MOA is equal to a 25 4 centimeter shot group at 250 meters Figure 5 37 10 INCH SHOT GROUP 1 INCH HR SHOT GROUP 6 75M 100M 125M 150M 175M 200M 225M 250M Figure 5 37 Increase in shot group size as range increases 5 42 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Chapter 6 Field Fire Field firing is part of the continued progression in the development of combat shooting skills This begins the Soldier s critical transition from unstressed firing at single known distance targets to targets at various ranges for short exposures It also requires the Soldier to practice and refine previously taught skills This chapter introduces the techniques for scanning the range for targets estimating range and firing quickly and accurately NOTE See Table 6 1 for the current training program Table 6 1 Field Fire and II training program FIELD FIRE AND Il Instructional Intent Reinforce PMI and downrange feedback by detecting and engaging single and multiple timed targets with the M16 M4 series weapon Special Instructions Ensure that The rear sight is on the proper setting M16A2 3 8 3 M16A4 and M4 6 3 flush M16A1 the unmarked aperture
92. expected to perform tasks efficiently Immediate Action 7 98 Consider the following modifications e Under normal conditions a Soldier should be able to clear a stoppage in 3 to 5 seconds Under increased MOPP levels however this may take as long as 10 seconds to successfully complete e Mask with or without hood and gloves must be worn Care must be taken not to snag or damage the gloves or dislodge the hood or mask during movements e Vision is limited to what can be seen through the mask lenses or faceplate Peripheral vision is severely restricted The lenses or faceplate may be scratched or partly fogged further restricting vision NOTE Soldiers requiring corrective lenses must be issued insert lenses before training e Scanning movements may be restricted by the hood or mask 7 99 These factors could adversely affect the Soldier s ability to quickly and accurately detect targets Dry fire practice under these conditions is necessary to reduce time and streamline actions Until Soldiers can instinctively apply immediate action to stoppages they should practice using dummy or blank ammunition Marksmanship Fundamentals 7 100 Although the four marksmanship fundamentals remain valid during MOPP firing some modifications may be needed to accommodate the equipment Steady Position 7 101 Consider these modifications e Due to the added bulk of the overgarment adjust firing positions for stability and comfort e Stand
93. fall off A 95 Several repetitions of this exercise must be conducted to determine if the Soldier has problems with trigger squeeze The Soldier is a GO if he can dry fire six of six consecutive shots without causing the dime or washer to fall NOTES 1 Ifthe dime or washer is allowed to touch the sight assembly or flash suppressor it may fall off due to the jolt of the hammer The strength of the hammer spring on some rifles can make this a difficult exercise to perform 2 When using the M16A2 rifle the dime washer exercise is conducted the same except that a locally fabricated device must be attached to the weapon A piece of 3 4 inch bonding material 1s folded into a clothespin shape and inserted in the weapon s flash suppressor and the dime or washer 15 placed on top of it A 28 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Appendix B Scorecards During live fire events a Soldier s hit and miss performance is recorded to facilitate the instructor trainer s critiques or to indicate where more training is needed The following are examples of completed scorecards EXAMPLES OF COMPLETED SCORECARDS B 1 Figures B 1 through B 8 show examples of completed scorecards REPRODUCIBLE FORMS B 2 Blank copies of the following can be found at the end of this publication DA Form 3595 R Record Fire Scorecard DA Form 3601 R Single Target Field Fire I Scorecard DA Form 5239 R 100 200 and 300 Meter Downrange Feedback Scorecard DA Form 5241 R
94. firing position The Soldier engages the 300 meter target with the remaining two 5 round magazine from the foxhole standing or kneeling supported firing position In order to receive a GO the Soldier must obtain a minimum of 8 hits out of 10 shots on the 75 meter target m 14 hits out of 20 shots on the 175 meter target m 5 hits out of 10 shots on the 300 meter target NOTES 1 DA Form 5789 R is used to record the firer s results 2 Soldiers can use ammunition allocated by DA PAM 350 38 for advanced skill training for the CBRN downrange feedback scenario 50 Meter Live Fire Exercise 7 113 The basic CBRN LFX allows all Soldiers to gain confidence in their CBRN firing abilities Practice and proficiency firing can be conducted on any range however when a Remote Electronic Target System RETS range is used for this exercise the two 50 meter mechanisms are used For CBRN LFXs Soldiers perform the following scenario Each Soldier is issued 20 rounds of ammunition to be loaded in two 10 round magazines On the command GAS GAS GAS each Soldier engages twenty 50 meter targets Target exposures consist of 10 from the right and 10 from the left from the foxhole supported or the kneeling firing position Each Soldier must achieve 11 hits out of 20 target exposures This is a GO NO GO exercise Alternate Fire Exercise 7 114 The CBRN alternate fire course uses the 25 meter scaled silhouette timed fire target This sil
95. fundamentals can be taught anywhere and Soldiers must learn them before participating in an LFX The dry fire exercises used during CBRN training are the same as those used during initial rifle marksmanship dime washer exercise target box SPORTS EST 2000 and LMTS Soldiers can also practice by using MILES equipment during force on force training NOTE Soldiers should wear MOPP Level 4 when participating in dry fire exercises training at the highest degraded level allows Soldiers to adjust their shooting technique to increase their marksmanship ability in a CBRN environment Downrange Feedback 7 112 CBRN downrange feedback gives Soldiers the confidence knowledge and skills required to consistently deliver accurate well aimed fire against combat targets as far away as 300 meters On a KD range the Soldier will perform the following scenario e The Soldier will be issued six magazines m first and second magazine will have 5 rounds each a The third and fourth magazine will have 10 rounds each The fifth and sixth magazine will have 5 rounds each 7 28 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Advanced Rifle Marksmanship The Soldier engages the appropriate targets The Soldier engages the 75 meter target with the first and second 5 round magazine from the foxhole standing or kneeling supported position m The Soldier engages the 175 meter target with both 10 round magazines from the foxhole standing or kneeling supported
96. groups in Figure 5 10 represent acceptable shot groups 4 centimeters or less in the same location The Soldier firing this shot grouping should make a sight change of left 10 and down 4 Any change should be clearly marked on the target and saved for reference The Soldier 15 then ready to zero his weapon 27 24 21 18 15 12 9 _ Pew ttt ttt 54 Figure 5 10 Acceptable shot grouping performance 5 8 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Downrange Feedback NOTES 1 Location of the shot group on the 25 meter target is not important when conducting a grouping exercise The size and dispersion of the shot groups are the main focus of this exercise 2 Before the Soldier should be allowed to make any adjustments or start zeroing procedures two consecutive shot groups must fall within a 4 centimeter circle when fired at 25 meters SHOT GROUPS WITH INCONSISTENT AIMING 5 28 The groups in Figure 5 11 indicate that the Soldier firing the shot groups is applying proper firing fundamentals but is using a different point of aim each time a shot group is fired 5 29 The instructor trainer should question the Soldier s understanding of the aiming process and check his position for consistency The instructor trainer cannot determine which shot group best represents the firer s zero LE ICI mm ai am EIC on Figure 5 11 Shot groups with inconsistent aiming 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 5 9
97. in Exercise 4 NOTE Whenever this exercise is conducted prior to an LFX calibrated lasers should be used to support prezeroing Adjustments to the rear sight of an M16A2 A3 A4 or M4 series weapon associated optics and the front sight of an M16A1 must be made when training at 10 meters or 15 meters to compensate for parallax error See the LMTS operator s manual for a detailed description of these adjustments Exercise Performance A 34 To perform Exercise 3 use the following procedures 1 From the supported firing position Figure A 4 the Soldier fires three round shot groups at the target overlay s center of mass continuing until two consecutive groups fall within a 4 centimeter circle anywhere on the target maximum 27 shots Trainers should provide feedback to the Soldier between each shot group If the Soldier is unable to achieve the standard within 27 shots the trainer attempts remedial actions or sends the Soldier to the remedial training station 10M 15M or 25M Figure A 4 Exercise 3 2 When the grouping standard is met the Soldier makes appropriate sight changes as instructed by the trainer who begins a new session for the zeroing process The Soldier continues to fire three round shot groups adjusting the sights as instructed by the trainer to bring the shot groups maximum 18 shots within the zeroing circle on the target silhouette When a shot group falls within the zeroing circle the Soldier fires an add
98. in weapon target alignment NOTE The necessary changes are significant and must be thoroughly taught and practiced before performing LF Xs RAPID SEMIAUTOMATIC FIRE 7 12 The most important firing technique during fast moving modern combat is rapid semiautomatic fire It is the most accurate technique of placing a large volume of fire on poorly defined targets or target areas such as short exposure multiple or moving targets To apply rapid semiautomatic fire the Soldier intentionally fires a quick series of shots into the target area to ensure a high probability of a hit NOTE Increased speed and volume should be sought only after the Soldier has demonstrated expertise and accuracy during slow semiautomatic fire 7 8 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Advanced Rifle Marksmanship EFFECTIVENESS AND CONTROL OF RAPID SEMIAUTOMATIC FIRE 7 13 With proper training Soldiers can select the appropriate mode of fire semiautomatic fire rapid semiautomatic fire or automatic burst fire NOTE Leaders must ensure that Soldiers apply proper fire discipline at all times Even in training unaimed fire must never be tolerated especially unaimed automatic fire 7 14 While Soldiers sacrifice some degree of accuracy to deliver a greater volume of fire it is surprising how devastatingly accurate rapid semiautomatic fire can be At ranges beyond 25 meters rapid semiautomatic fire is superior to automatic fire in all measures shots per target trigger
99. is necessary it must be raised on dunnage at least 6 inches from the ground and protected with a cover leaving enough space for air circulation Since moisture and high temperatures adversely affect ammunition and explosives take the following precautions Do not open ammunition boxes until you are ready to use them Protect ammunition from high temperatures and the direct rays of the sun Do not attempt to disassemble ammunition or any of its components Never use lubricants or grease on ammunition 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 2 39 This page intentionally left blank Chapter 3 Troubleshooting and Destruction Commanders and unit armorers are responsible for the field level maintenance of weapons and for the destruction of weapons when necessary Soldiers are responsible for keeping their weapons clean and operational at all times in training and in combat therefore they should be issued an operator s TM and cleaning equipment for their assigned weapons STOPPAGES 3 A stoppage is a failure of an automatic or semiautomatic firearm to complete the cycle of operation The firer can apply immediate or remedial action to clear the stoppage Some stoppages cannot be cleared by immediate or remedial action and may require weapon repair to correct the problem A complete understanding of how the weapon functions is an integral part of applying immediate action procedures IMMEDIATE ACTION 3 2 Immediate action involves quickly applyi
100. location NOTE Instructors must continuously refer to and emphasize the importance of the observer s position when conducting practical exercises 6 3 Depending on the situation the individual Soldier may or may not select his own position e In most defensive situations the Soldier is told where to prepare his position e Some situations for example the attack and reorganization on the objective require the Soldier to select his own position SCANNING 6 4 scan the area Soldiers use three methods of search e Self preservation method e 50 meter overlapping strip method e Maintaining observation of the area Self Preservation Method of Search 6 5 When moving into a new area Soldiers use the self preservation method of search To perform this method use the following techniques 1 For approximately 30 seconds quickly scan the area for enemy activity that may be of immediate danger 2 Make quick glances at specific points throughout the area rather than just sweeping the eyes across the terrain in one continuous panoramic view NOTE The eyes are sensitive to slight movements that occur within the area the eyes are focused on panoramic views do not allow the eyes to detect the slight movements of a concealed target 50 Meter Overlapping Strip Method of Search 6 6 If the Soldier fails to locate the enemy during the initial search he must begin a systematic examination known as the 50 meter overlapping s
101. material sandbags or berm to the front of the position 7 Place the weapon s buttstock into the pocket of the firing shoulder 8 Rest the firing elbow on the ground outside of the position NOTES 1 When prepared positions are not available the prone supported position can be substituted 2 The objective is to establish a steady position under various conditions The ultimate performance of this task is combat Although the firer must be positioned high enough to observe all targets he must remain as low as possible to provide added protection from enemy fire x d vilem rct EE ee T tot TES d L ES i F ASA ine HEEL a 4 t Be Je VES ar vu ra mma s aoa VM V Lip Bee ur PA Uic ram poi de dux o J v EE re Mir tee E ee le h dd i a Vk Wo m Wii de r c A rst n ae dcr 7 Figure 4 20 Individual foxhole supported firing position PRONE UNSUPPORTED FIRING POSITION 4 69 This firing position offers another stable firing platform for engaging targets To assume the prone unsupported firing position 1 Face the target 2 Spread the feet a comfortable distance apart 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 4 25 Chapter 4 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Drop to the knees breaking the fall with the weapon s buttstock Using the rifle s buttstock as a pivot roll onto the nonfiring si
102. modified fundamentals 8 19 operation 8 17 to 8 18 8 18 illus practice qualification 8 19 record qualification 8 20 target detection 8 19 zeroing the advanced combat optical gunsight 8 18 to 8 19 8 18 illus 8 19 illus advanced optics lasers and tron sights see also accessories 8 1 to 8 30 borelight see also borelight 8 1 to 8 11 training strategies and qualification standards 8 11 to 8 28 advanced rifle marksmanship 7 1 to 7 70 advanced firing positions see also firing positions 7 1 to 7 8 Index 1 Index chemical biological radiological and nuclear firing see also chemical biological radiological and nuclear firing 7 24 to 7 29 combat fire techniques see also combat fire techniques 7 8 to 7 24 moving target engagements see also moving target engagements 7 36 to 7 41 7 36 table night fire training see also night fire training 7 30 to 7 35 short range marksmanship training see also short range marksmanship training 7 41 to 7 57 squad designated marksman training see also squad designated marksman training 7 57 to 7 70 aided night vision see also aided night vision C 4 to C 9 aiming lasers see also aiming lasers C 6 electromagnetic light spectrum C 4 image intensification devices C4 thermal weapon sight C 4 image intensification devices C4 to C 5 adjustments C 4 to C 5 thermal weapon sight see also thermal weapon sight C 6 to C 9
103. of NVDs The course of fire for the TWS is the same scenario as the day qualification tables with the same standards of fire as for current day standards Qualification standards are the same for day and night CONDUCT OF TRAINING 8 57 AN PAS 13B C D equipment training should familiarize the Soldier with the proper operation and characteristics of the TWS IAW the TM 8 20 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Advanced Optics Lasers and Iron Sights MODIFIED FUNDAMENTALS 8 58 AN PAS 13B C D TWS operation requires modifications to the fundamentals of marksmanship e Steady position e Aiming e Breath control e Trigger squeeze Steady Position 8 59 This fundamental slightly changes due to the height of the sight Consider the following modifications e Soldiers must adjust their position so they can properly look through the sight e In most cases the cheek to stock weld no longer exists Aiming 8 60 To properly aim with the TWS Soldiers must ensure that the correct reticle is selected in the sight NOTE Refer to TM 11 5855 312 10 for reticle selection and point of aim for use with the TWS Breath Control 8 61 This fundamental is not affected by night firing conditions when using the TWS Trigger Squeeze 8 62 This fundamental of marksmanship does not change during night firing 25 METER ZEROING PROCEDURES NOTE Refer to TM 11 5855 312 10 for target preparation 8 63 To zero the AN PAS 13B C D TWS at 100 meters use
104. of marksmanship Each Soldier knows how to adjust for wind and gravity Each Soldier manipulates the rear sight for different ranges NOTE See Appendix B for a sample completed form and the end of this publication for a blank reproducible copy CERTIFICATION 7 289 Once the firer has successfully completed the SDM program he is designated as an SDM and will be able to perform all duties and responsibilities set forth by these guidelines NOTE SDM skills are highly perishable and sustainment training should be conducted to ensure retention of the skills At a minimum sustainment training should be conducted semiannually 7 70 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Chapter 8 Advanced Optics Lasers and Iron Sights BRM teaches Soldiers how to effectively engage targets with their weapons using the iron sights ARM adds other marksmanship situations that a combat Soldier may encounter This chapter discusses how to enhance marksmanship skills through proper training using the Army s newest optics and lasers to ensure that Soldiers can fight as well at night as they can during the day This chapter implements new night qualification standards to complement current Army training strategies SECTION I BORELIGHT The borelight is an accurate means of zeroing weapons and most aided vision equipment without the use of ammunition The time and effort required to ensure a precise boresight will in turn save time and ammunition Table 8 1 outlin
105. on accessory mounting locations ER QJ Co Figure 2 17 Address markings on the adapter rail system NOTE Within the notches each ARS also contains holes that are threaded 4 inch deep with 20 threads per inch Figure 2 17 This is the standard thread size for a camera tripod adapter which is used to attach standard camera or video accessories For example an Md MWS with an NVD mounted may be attached to a standard camera tripod for hands free support during long periods of surveillance 2 12 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Weapon Characteristics Accessories and Ammunition VERTICAL PISTOL GRIP 2 22 Each ARS comes with a vertical pistol grip To install the pistol grip NOTE Reference the weapon components using the numbers listed in Figure 2 18 Figure 2 18 Vertical pistol grip 1 Remove the rail cover 2 Unscrew the pistol grip lock 1 until the tip 2 is no longer visible through the hole in the pistol grip 3 Slide the pistol grip 3 onto the ARS NOTE The pistol grip will cover five notches on the ARS 4 Align the tip on the top of the pistol grip lock 1 with a notch 5 Hand tighten NOTE For further information about these accessories refer to TM 9 1005 319 10 RAIL GRABBERS 2 23 The Insight Figure 2 19 and Picatinny Figure 2 21 rail grabbers are designed to mount accessories onto the M16A4 and M4 series weapons These rail grabbers enable the us
106. once time and a range 1s available Figure 8 8 Use tip of 300m post for POA POI zeroing at 25 meters Figure 8 8 Advanced combat optical gunsight reticle point of aim at 25 meters MODIFIED FUNDAMENTALS 8 47 ACOG operation requires modifications to the following fundamentals of marksmanship e Steady position e Aiming e Breath control e Trigger squeeze Steady Position 8 48 This fundamental does not change Aiming 8 49 When the TAIIF 15 attached to the carrying handle of an M16A1 A2 A3 rifle the BDC reticle will be off slightly at extended distances Beginning at 400 meters the BDC reticle will be approximately one MOA off to the extent of the BDC reticle once properly zeroed Example At 500 meters the impact will be 5 inches high at 600 meters the impact will be 6 inches high Once the target 1s ranged beyond 400 meters hold slightly low Breath Control 8 50 This fundamental does not change Trigger Squeeze 8 51 This fundamental does not change TARGET DETECTION 8 52 Target detection procedures for the ACOG are the same as with standard iron sights PRACTICE QUALIFICATION 8 53 The procedures are the same as standard iron sight procedures 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 8 19 Chapter 8 RECORD QUALIFICATION 8 54 The procedures are the same as standard iron sight procedures AN PAS 13B C D V1 LIGHT WEAPON THERMAL SIGHT AND AN PAS 13B C D V3 HEAVY WEAPON THERMAL SIGHT 8 55 Th
107. one clockwise click moves the bullet strike down e For windage one clockwise click moves the bullet strike left NOTES 1 At ranges of 50 meters and beyond the effects of parallax are minimal However at ranges of 50 meters and closer parallax exists and the firer must ensure that the red dot is centered while zeroing 2 The aiming method two eyes open or one eye open used to zero must be used to engage targets 25 METER ZEROING TARGET 87 B4 21 18 15 d 8 B EN SELL i o SHO Sr 17984 3 0 8 6 E 15 BA 10 8 a 7 B 5 4 a 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 B 7 8 8 10 18 ZERO TARGET DATA 1 ROTATE REAR SIGHT ELEVATION KNOB TO THE 8 3 SETTING THEN UP RIGHT ONE CLICK PAST THE 300 MARK FOR ZEROING AT 25 METERS 2 AIM AT TARGET CENTER ADJUST SIGHTS TO MOVE SHOT GROUP CENTER AS CLOSE AS POSSIBLE TO THE WHITE DOT IN THE CENTER OF THE TARGET 3 AFTER COMPLETION OF THE 25 METER ZERO ROTATE THE REAR SIGHT ELEVATION KNOB BACK ONE CLICK TO THE 300 800 METER MARK THE WEAPON WILL BE ZEROED FOR 300 METERS 4 1 4 CENTIMETERS OR 1 5 SQUARES STARTING FROM CENTER MASS OF THE 300 METER SILHOUETTE ON THE 25 METER ZERO TARGET WILL BE THE POINT OF IMPACT FOR THE M68 CCO Figure 8 5 Close combat optic 25 meter zeroing target 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 8 15 Chapter 8 TARGET DETECTION 8 32 Target detection procedures for the M68 are the same as with standard iron
108. only to gain initial fire superiority Depending on the tactical situation the rate of fire should be adjusted so that a minimum number of rounds are expended Accurate fire conserves ammunition while preventing the enemy from placing effective fire on friendly positions SUPPRESSIVE FIRE TRAINING NOTE See Table 7 5 for the current training program 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 7 17 Chapter 7 Table 7 5 Suppressive fire training program SUPPRESSIVE FIRE TRAINING PROGRAM Instructional Intent Soldier learns to suppress targets using suppressive fire Special Instructions Ensure that The M16A2 A3 AA rifle s or carbine s rear sight is set on the 0 2 aperture The M16A1 s rear sight is set on the unmarked aperture Soldiers use a 25 meter scaled landscape target Each Soldier is given two 9 round magazines and one 12 round magazine of 5 56 millimeter ball ammunition Each Soldier is in a proper supported firing position Each Soldier fires 9 rounds at the open window area of the target using rapid semiautomatic fire with the first 9 round magazine Each Soldier fires 12 rounds at the fence or hedgerow area of the target using rapid semiautomatic fire with the 12 round magazine Each Soldier fires three 3 round bursts at the tank turret area of the target using the automatic burst fire mode with the second 9 round magazine Each Soldier achieves 5 hits inside the open window area within 18 seconds Each Soldier
109. or after it crosses the line of sight If the firer wants his rounds to impact the center of mass he must adjust his point of aim up or down to account for gravity ADJUSTED POINT OF AIM BASED ON GRAVITY 5 73 An adjusted point of aim Figure 5 25 is intended to increase hit probability when properly presented However Soldiers can become confused which could result in degraded performance All Soldiers should be taught to aim at the target s center of mass unless they are confident that they know the range to the target If adjusting the point of aim confuses the Soldier he should aim at the target s center of mass These points of aim place the center of each shot group in the target s center of mass assuming a perfect zero and no firer error NOTES 1 These adjustments are small and should only be applied by competent firers who wish to improve their firing performance 2 Because the difference between M16 and M4 series weapons is so small and to avoid confusion the same adjusted points of aim should be used regardless of the weapon being fired 200 METERS 250 METERS 300 METERS 50 METERS 100 METERS 150 METERS Figure 5 25 M16 M4 series weapon aiming points 5 28 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Downrange Feedback EFFECTS OF WIND 5 74 Wind affects the bullet similar to the way gravity does the farther the round travels the farther the wind will push the round in the direction the wind is blowing The faster the wind is
110. performance results when the trigger 1s squeezed continuously and the rifle is fired without disturbing its lay DOMINANT EYE TRAINING 4 65 This exercise assists the coach and the firer in determining which eye the firer should use when engaging targets The firer s dominant eye should be identified early in the training process to prevent unnecessary problems such as a blurred sight picture or the inability to acquire a tight shot group during the grouping exercise To perform dominant eye training 1 The trainer cuts a 1 inch circular hole in the center of an 8 by 10 inch piece of material can be anything from paper to plywood 2 The trainer positions himself approximately 5 feet in front of the Soldier The trainer closes his nondominant eye and holds his finger in front of and just below his dominant eye to provide the Soldier with a point of aim 3 The Soldier holds the training aid with both hands at waist level and looks with both eyes open at the trainer s open eye With both eyes focused on the trainer s open eye and arms fully extended the Soldier raises the training aid between himself and the trainer while continuing to look at the trainer s eye through the hole in the training aid The Soldier s eye that the trainer sees through the hole in the training aid 1s the Soldier s dominant eye BASIC FIRING POSITIONS 4 24 4 66 Basic firing positions are taught during PMI Other advanced firing positions are added later i
111. practice predetermined fire A technique of aligning the rifle during good visibility so the rifle can be aligned and fired on designated areas when they cannot be seen due to darkness smoke or fog preparatory marksmanship training All marksmanship training that takes place before live fire primer A small explosive device in the center base of the cartridge case that 1s struck by the firing pin to fire the round probability of hit Ranging from 0 to 1 0 it refers to the odds of a given round hitting the target at a given range qualification firing Firing on any authorized course that results in meeting qualification requirements may also be called record fire See record fire quick fire A technique of fire used to engage surprise targets at close range range card Small chart on which ranges and directions to various targets and other important points in the area under fire are recorded rapid semiautomatic fire A firing procedure that results in an accurate shot being fired every one or two seconds receiver That portion of a firearm that holds the barrel and houses the bolt and firing mechanism recoil The rearward motion or kick of a gun upon firing Glossary 8 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Glossary record fire Any course of fire used to determine if qualification standards are met The standard record fire course consists of 40 target exposures at ranges between 50 and 300 meters The standard course requires
112. reflect most of the thermal energy from the sun so it is difficult to acquire a good thermal image on objects that are close to the ground DIURNAL CYCLE C 34 There are two times during the day when motionless objects that do not generate their own thermal energy such as trees rocks and man made objects become the same temperature as the surrounding air once in the morning and once in the evening This is known as the diurnal cycle The specific times that this cycle will take effect are based on the time of year but it usually occurs shortly after sunrise and shortly after sunset C 35 The diurnal cycle contains crossover points During the day a motionless object will absorb thermal energy from the sun the crossover point is the time when that object stops absorbing thermal energy day and starts radiating thermal energy night As the night goes on that same object will come to a point where it stops radiating thermal energy and will once again start absorbing thermal energy day ADJUSTMENTS C 36 Rain snow fog smoke and the diurnal cycle are just a few environmental or combat situations that may affect your thermal image These conditions may cause objects to be difficult to see so adjustments must be made to TWS in order to refine the thermal image C 37 To allow Soldiers to maximize the capability of the sight the TWS 15 equipped with e A diopter focus ring Two FOVs An objective focus ring A brightnes
113. ring will lock the FOV ring to the point that the FOV cannot be changed 2 Make adjustments to the objective focus ring only after focusing the diopter focus ring Brightness Knob C 44 The dual function brightness knob is used to turn on the TWS adjust the brightness of the raster and refine the thermal image Used in conjunction with the contrast knob it helps to combat the effects of the diurnal cycle and other conditions that might require fine tuned adjustment to the thermal image Contrast Switch C 45 The dual function contrast switch has automatic and manual contrast modes Used in conjunction with the brightness knob the contrast switch allows Soldiers to obtain the best possible thermal image Automatic Contrast Mode C 46 The automatic contrast mode is used under normal operating conditions C 8 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Night Fighting Manual Contrast Mode C 47 The manual contrast is used under conditions other than normal for example during 10 meter boresighting or 25 meter zeroing during rain fog smoke or snow during the diurnal cycle or when trying to obtain as much detail of a target as possible Polarity Switch C 48 The polarity switch has two modes white hot or black hot Use of the polarity switch is a user s preference Through continued use Soldiers decide which polarity setting works best under different combat or environmental conditions White Hot Mode C 49 When in the white hot mo
114. same way while shooting from the prone position e Spreads his legs a comfortable distance apart with the heels on the ground or as close as possible without causing strain Zero Confirmation 7 245 After completing Phases I and II the Soldier conducts a firing event Table 7 22 to zero or confirm the zero on his weapon and reinforce the fundamentals of marksmanship This firing event will be conducted on a 25 meter range If the Soldier cannot zero within 18 rounds the trainer recommends re training retesting or possible removal from the course After the weapon is zeroed any additional rounds will be fired and the coach will observe the Soldier for deficiencies in his marksmanship fundamentals Table 7 22 Zero zero confirmation firing event FIRING EVENT RONDS _____ TARGET RANGE m Zero Zero Confirmation PHASE II DRY FIRE TRAINING 7 246 SDMs must have a solid grasp on the fundamentals to successfully engage targets at longer ranges During this phase of training the Soldier must demonstrate that he can apply the fundamentals of marksmanship correctly If the Soldier does not receive a GO in this phase of training he will be dropped from the course The components of this phase of training are e Follow through Borelight exercise Target box exercise Dime washer drill Zero confirmation 7 247 Prior to this phase of training trainers ensure that the e Weapon is cleared and no ammunition is loaded prior t
115. scan the designated area Lack of ability to detect targets Lack of ability to shift from one target to another Failure to manage ammunition m A stoppage 6 75 Training can then focus on combat tasks skills or other factors that address these weaknesses Refire 6 76 Qualified weapons personnel or the NCOIC must verify weapon malfunctions before the Soldier can refire the course Soldiers who erroneously claim a malfunction on the firing line are considered unqualified and refire as a second time firer Soldiers who fail to qualify on the first attempt should be given appropriate remedial training and allowed to refire in a few days When a Soldier refires the course e Heremains unqualified if he hits 22 targets or less e A rating of marksman is awarded for a score of 23 to 40 target hits e If automated scoring procedures if available allow the Soldier s performance to be stored and retrieved before a weapon malfunction his performance 15 added to the score of his first attempt after weapon repair and refire e Ifa Soldier s weapon becomes inoperable and his performance before a malfunction precludes qualification he is considered unqualified and must refire QUALIFICATION RATINGS 6 77 One point is awarded for each round within or touching some part of the silhouette facing Qualification ratings are shown in Table 6 13 Table 6 13 Qualification ratings for Record Fire QUALIFICATION NUMBER OF RATINGS TA
116. scheduled to complete the training 4 Have conflicts that surfaced been resolved BECOME AN EXPERT 1 Review TMs and FMs on the weapons to be fired 2 Talk with the armorer and other personnel experienced with the weapons to be fired 3 Review AR 385 63 4 Visit range control and read the installation s range instructions 5 Reconnoiter the range preferably while it is in use 6 Check ARTEPs to see if training tasks can be integrated into the range training plan DETERMINE REQUIREMENTS E 33 Determining the requirements involves identifying the equipment and personnel necessary to conduct the training Personnel E 34 The following personnel are required for range operations e OIC e Safety officer e Assistant safety officer e NCOIC e Ammunition NCO E 6 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Range Procedures and Range Operations Checklist Ammunition personnel determined by type of range Target detail and target operators Tower operator Concurrent training instructors Assistant instructors Radio telephone operators Guards range requirements Medic s Air guard Armorer Truck driver range personnel and equipment Mechanic for vehicles E 35 Further the following must be checked Equipment Have you overstaffed your range E 36 The following equipment is required for range operations Range packet and clearance form Safety fan and diagram if applicable Oth
117. seconds After dark this task usually takes longer Identifying the cause of the stoppage may be difficult and frustrating for the Soldier A dry fire practice applying SPORTS under these conditions using dummy or blank rounds is necessary to reduce time and build confidence Once the Soldier is confident in applying immediate action in darkness he can perform such actions rapidly during actual firing NOTES 1 Training should be practiced first during daylight for better control and error correction by the trainer 2 To learn the hands only technique of identifying a stoppage the firer must practice applying immediate action with his eyes closed This is a technique that Soldiers should be able to master with practice Firing Positions 7 119 The firing position recommended for use during limited visibility 1s the supported firing position NOTE This unassisted night fire supported position differs slightly from the supported position taught in earlier periods of instruction because the firer cannot use his sights during limited visibility 7 120 To effectively engage targets during limited visibility 1 Assume a supported firing position 2 Establish a raised stock weld look 2 to 3 inches above the sights level with the barrel 3 Point the weapon at the target 4 Fire in the semiautomatic fire mode NOTE To obtain optimum results keep the eyes open and move the head arms and weapon as one unit Marksmanship F
118. sights lubricates the weapon and checks for defects that might cause malfunctions Retired Area 6 60 The retired area is about 100 meters behind the ready area Soldiers completing practice record fire move to the retired area to clean their weapons and be critiqued on their firing performance PRACTICE RECORD FIRE STANDARDS 6 61 A firer who fails to qualify on his first try should refire the practice record fire range after his problem has been diagnosed and remedial training has been provided Practice qualification ratings are shown in Table 6 8 Table 6 8 Qualification ratings for Practice Record Fire and Il QUALIFICATION NUMBER OF RATINGS TARGETS HIT 36 to 40 Sharpshooter 30 to 35 23 to 29 6 12 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Field Fire RECORD OF PERFORMANCE 6 62 Accurate performance data are critical The firer s score is manually recorded using DA Form 3595 R Record Fire Scorecard or automatically documented using a computer printout provided on the automated range Based on the data recorded an AAR can be performed by range and firing position to discuss firing performance NOTE See Appendix B for a sample of a completed DA Form 3595 R and the end of this publication for a blank reproducible copy RECORD FIRE 6 63 The intent of record fire is to facilitate the commander s evaluation of several individual tasks and integrated marksmanship skill performances and to provide unit readiness indicators The q
119. specialists for example TOW and Dragon gunners These devices were bulky heavy and impractical for the dismounted Soldier Now the Army has a thermal device that can be mounted on a dismounted Soldier s weapon or handheld The TWS operates within the middle far IR range It can detect IR light emitted from friction combustion or objects radiating natural thermal energy Since the TWS and other thermal devices operate within the middle far IR range they cannot be used in conjunction with image intensifiers or other image intensification devices IMAGE INTENSIFICATION DEVICES C 19 As the name implies image intensification devices are designed to amplify light To be effective some degree of light must be available When light enters the image intensification tube the light releases electrons which the tube accelerates until the light is much brighter Under optimal conditions second generation devices such as the PVS 5 series intensify ambient light up to about 1 500 times Third generation devices such as the PVS 7 14 series NODs double that level of intensification ADJUSTMENTS C 20 To acquire and engage a target at night image intensification devices must be adjusted properly C 4 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Night Fighting NOTE Soldiers will not be able to obtain the acuity level that they have during the day Under optimal night conditions a Soldier with 20 20 daytime vision can expect no better than 20 50 vision with
120. tT S sa PIS T ex o FLIP LIT Ly ____ s ec s ELI PT LI TL ex ae 2 __ fos om px amp Pty s TT 5 ce 8 ox em ou fT ee LIP oe ac zc zc PTT fos P om s o i a BT ui IH a i JHH T bui hari irm Ga GES Dieses Pl VSP hi Ci ra Des Det ot CER eee Fn aba Cete hi rij reet M Le ete ne STI e D d et DES e Cete sil Coles E SCEL ST 1 g mi 5 A Oe sug gi pe 104 Gal TIO SS xui duco Qr Ba Di LG Lx Un B UBUA TD BEG UAR LG ede Buun piu Jj EEUNA AREA PP PES ing DU Bau SPU ELO qiu ur Ejrempepunzu kil ppm Fee n Qi i qe 5j panimi eji elu E summe DEJAN DIE ng pedem Bola Bin mud
121. targets Coaches analyze the firer s application of the fundamentals The majority of the round must be inside of the circle to be counted Two consecutive 3 round shot groups are shot with 5 of 6 rounds in the 4 centimeter circle 5 14 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Downrange Feedback PURPOSE 5 39 The purpose of battlesight zeroing is to align the sights with the weapon s barrel given standard issue ammunition When this is accomplished correctly the point of aim and point of impact are the same at a given range 250 meters for the M16A1 300 meters for the M16A2 A3 A4 and M4 series weapons This sight setting provides the highest hit probability for most combat targets with minimum adjustment to the point of aim 5 40 When standard zeroing procedures are followed a properly zeroed weapon for one Soldier is close to the zero for another Soldier When a straight line is drawn from the target s center to the tip of the front sightpost and through the center of the rear aperture it makes little difference whose eye 1s looking along this line There are many subtle factors that result in differences among individual zeros Instructors trainers should emphasize the similarity of individual zeros instead of the differences 5 41 Most firers can fire with the same zeroed weapon if they properly apply marksmanship fundamentals This information can be useful in three ways 1 If a Soldier has difficulty zeroing and the problem cannot be di
122. techniques against stationary targets The range is designed for conducting shot grouping and zeroing exercises with the M16 and M4 series weapons as well as crew served machine guns Its primary features include e 32 target frames at 25 meters e target frames at 10 meters e 32 foxholes E 49 This range requires no automation All targets are fixed at 25 meters from the firing line for M16 and M4 series weapons and 10 meters for machine gun N a pun gt 10 METERS NOTES ARNG POINT 10 LANES SHOWN OF 32 LANE RANGE V HOTCH RIFLE RESTING PEG FIRING PONT TARGET ARE QN A FLAT PLANE T SANDBAGS TARGET BOOT Figure E 1 Rifle machine gun zero range 17801 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 E 11 Appendix E Automated Field Fire Range 17803 E 50 The AFF range Figure E 2 is used to train and familiarize Soldiers on the skills necessary to identify engage and hit stationary Infantry targets with M16 and M4 series weapons Its primary features include e 96 stationary Infantry targets e 32 foxhole positions E 51 All targets are fully automated and the event specific target scenario is computer driven and scored from the range operations center The range operating system is fully capable of providing immediate performance feedback to the participants NOTE This range can be used for automatic rifle practice LEGEND c5 STATIONARY INFANTRY TARGET EMPLACEM
123. tests the trainer During this phase the trainer sets up a range and conducts training for at least one person If ammunition 15 available the trainer conducts a firing exercise If ammunition is not available the evaluation is based on the quality of training given QUALIFICATION TRAINING 1 63 Although marksmanship is a continuous training requirement units normally conduct a refresher program before qualification Soldiers must be well versed in marksmanship fundamentals and have preparatory marksmanship training before qualification This applies to qualification for the entire unit or for newly assigned personnel Trainers must understand that unit rifle marksmanship is not a series of exercises to be trained in a planned sequence as 1s done during IET but trainers can use the exercises and POI events covered during IET to identify events that the unit can use for a sustainable and effective unit marksmanship program The unit must prepare for training by e Issuing Soldiers a serviceable weapon e Maintaining and replacing bad magazines e Issuing and assigning each Soldier his own rifle Only he will zero and fire the weapon assigned to him e Considering available or required resources targets ranges ammunition training aids devices and publications early in the process 1 64 Before the Soldier can fire he must know how to adjust the rifle s sights and should understand ballistics for example the effects of wind and g
124. the ACOG Special Instructions Ensure that Soldiers Are proficient with the ACOG Use the proper offset during boresighting procedures Confirm the 10 meter boresight with 100 meter zero or 25 meter zero if the 100 meter range is not available Retighten the rail grabber after the initial 3 rounds are fired Apply the marksmanship fundamentals Zero and qualify with the same sight picture Ensure that The point of aim and point of impact are the same at 100 meters The designated impact zone is 1 centimeter down from the center of mass of the 300 meter silhouette on the 25 meter zeroing target Observables e Soldiers zero the ACOG to the same standards as with iron sights e Soldiers achieve the same practice qualification and qualification standards as with day record fire CONCEPT 8 36 Soldiers must qualify on their assigned weapons during the day as outlined in this manual The integrated act of firing with the ACOG 1s identical to the iron sights except for the change in sight picture CONDUCT OF TRAINING NOTES 1 The ACOG training strategy is the same as the iron sight training strategy 2 All procedures for the ACOG are the same as with standard iron sights 8 37 ACOG equipment training should familiarize the Soldier with its proper operation and characteristics OPERATION 8 38 The ACOG scope is internally adjustable Adjustment is made using the adjuster mechanisms located inside the adjust
125. the automatic fire mode Steady Position 7 40 Consider the following modifications to achieve a steady position e Make sure that the weapon is well supported e Grip the weapon a little more firmly and pull it into the shoulder a little tighter than when in the semiautomatic fire mode NOTE This support and increased grip help offset the progressive displacement of weapon target alignment caused by recoil e To provide maximum stability assume the modified supported prone firing position Figure 7 4 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 7 13 Chapter 7 NOTE If the weapon is equipped with the ARS use the vertical pistol grip to further increase control of the weapon Aiming 7 41 Consider the following recommendations to properly aim the weapon e Do not change sighting and stock weld during automatic or burst fire Keep the cheek on the stock for every shot align the firing eye with the rear aperture and focus on the front sightpost e Although recoil may disrupt this process try to apply the aiming techniques throughout recoil Breath Control 7 42 Breath control must be modified because the Soldier does not have time to take a complete breath between shots Consider the following modifications to achieve proper breath control e Hold your breath at some point in the firing process e Take shallow breaths between shots Trigger Squeeze 7 43 Training and repeated dry fire practice aid the Soldier in applying proper trigg
126. the nearest target He is not allowed to fire all five remaining rounds at the two 250 meter target exposures On a computerized range the tower operator confirms that the target malfunctioned and indicates the number of malfunctions that occurred 6 72 Inoperable weapons are uncorrectable malfunctions such as the following A broken firing pin Jam caused by a double feed not by the Soldier Failure to extract due to a broken extractor Round in the bore 6 73 The Soldier must apply correct immediate action procedures to eliminate stoppages If a stoppage 15 determined to be correctable for example the Soldier did not apply correct immediate action procedures and as a result the Soldier did not engage the required number of targets the Soldier is at fault Troubleshooting Performance 6 74 Onsite observation detailed analysis and evaluation of individual results and unit performance identify weaknesses such as the following Unserviceable weapons could cause poor zeroes or failures to fire and therefore failures to qualify Some Soldiers may not qualify because of a lack of understanding of immediate action procedures or weapon and magazine maintenance procedures 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 6 15 Chapter 6 e Soldiers who miss targets are not applying the four fundamentals or are not accurately zeroing the weapon e Soldiers who do not fire at exposed targets during qualification might be experiencing Failure to
127. the personnel armor system for ground troops PASGT helmet over Soldiers eyes To minimize the PASGT helmet positioning problem make sure that the helmet is properly sized and fitted Female shooters with long hair will find that wearing their hair in a bun adds material between the IBA and helmet further forcing the helmet down over their eyes Encourage female Soldiers to wear a short chin length haircut or cornrow hairstyle If the female Soldier chooses not to wear short hair allow her to wear her hair down when firing Tightening the suspension harness and sweat band raising the helmet higher on the head can lessen interference with the IBA hair and helmet e The Army combat helmet ACH is lighter than the PASGT helmet has better weight distribution and contains less material that can impede a Soldier s firing vision when in the prone position The ACH does not interfere with the IBA or block a Soldier s vision while in the prone position ADJUSTMENTS TO FIRING POSITIONS 4 31 When using IBA adhere to the following guidelines e increase comfort and stability while wearing IBA in the prone position scoop sand or dirt underneath the chest while preparing to fire e To alleviate the pain and pressure on elbows and knees that the added weight of IBA causes use elbow and knee pads If used in the kneeling position do not rest the elbow pad on the knee pad hard plastic on hard plastic 1s not conducive to a steady position
128. the same procedures and standards as with iron sights along with the following e Atthe 25 meter range each incremental adjustment to the azimuth or elevation setting moves strike of the round as follows 1 2 centimeters for LWTS on WFOV 12 centimeter for LWTS on NFOV gt centimeter for HWTS on WFOV lcentimeter for HWTS on NFOV Retighten the rail grabber after firing the first three rounds Zero both FOVs Figure 8 9 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 8 21 Chapter 8 ZEROING TWS TO M16A1 USING M16A2 TARGET EL ADJUSTMENT CALCULATION 4 SQ D 1 25 3 2 gt 3 INCREMENTS D AZ ADJUSTMENT CALCULATION 6 SQ L 1 25 4 8 gt 5 INCREMENTSL CENTER OF SHOT GROUP r1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LLLI REELLE H 4 SQUARES FLTERNITITIEIITITIDI wel WA NS SN 4 owowouaumc SG TOTAL ADJUSTMENT 3D 5L 6 SQUARES Figure 8 9 Example of thermal weapon sight zeroing adjustments TARGET DETECTION 8 64 With NVDs the field of view is much smaller scanning becomes much more deliberate and with the TWS camouflage becomes less of a factor Even though NVDs greatly enhance the Soldier s ability to acquire a target at night increased awareness of target detection must be trained to allow the Soldier to recognize the visual cues of IR imagery Select Position 8 65 The TWS is a large device selecting a position that allows for good fields of view but do
129. the sights on this exercise he should be able to aim at the same point on the zero range or on targets at actual range BALL AND DUMMY EXERCISE A 91 This exercise is conducted on a live fire range and is used to detect 1f the firer is anticipating the shot or using improper trigger squeeze A 92 To perform this exercise 1 The coach or designated assistant inserts a dummy round into a magazine of live rounds The firer must not know when a dummy round is in the magazine 2 When the hammer falls on a dummy round which the firer thought was live the firer and his coach may see movement The firer anticipating the shot or using improper trigger squeeze causes this Proper trigger squeeze results in no movement when the hammer falls A 93 The Soldier demonstrates the ability to properly utilize the fundamentals of marksmanship six consecutive times DIME WASHER EXERCISE A 94 This dry fire technique is used to teach or evaluate the skill of trigger squeeze and is effective when conducted from an unsupported position To perform this exercise 1 The Soldier cocks the weapon 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 A 27 Appendix A 2 The Soldier assumes an unsupported prone firing position 3 The Soldier aims at the target An assistant places a dime or washer on the rifle s barrel between the flash suppressor and front sightpost assembly 4 The Soldier tries to squeeze the trigger naturally without causing the dime or washer to
130. the supported firing position and from the unsupported firing position Then the targets are marked and evaluated Feedback consists of a critique of performance adjustments to the point of aim effects of wind and gravity and shot placement Target spotters mark the bullet holes so hits can be viewed from the firing line NOTE IET Soldiers fire one five round shot group from the supported firing position and one five round shot group from the unsupported firing position They must hit 8 out of 10 targets 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 5 25 Chapter 5 175 METER TARGETS 5 65 Firers engage the 200 meter target using the same downrange procedures as when engaging the 100 meter target NOTE IET Soldiers fire 10 rounds from the supported firing position and 10 rounds from the unsupported firing position They must hit 14 out of 20 targets 300 METER TARGETS 5 66 Firers engage the 300 meter target using the same downrange procedures as when engaging the 100 meter target NOTE IET Soldiers fire one five round shot group from the supported firing position and one five round shot group from the unsupported firing position They must hit 5 out of 10 targets UTILITY BUILDING 1E es SS OS eee DETAIL OF TARGET 300 M LINE 400 M LINE 500 M LINE 600 M LINE 1 000 M FIRING LINE Figure 5 23 Known distance range 5 26 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Downrange Feedback K
131. the torque limiting knob 2 Figure 2 21 that tightens the rail grabber must be hand tightened until it clicks twice Figure 2 21 Picatinny rail grabber CAUTION Both of the holes located in the top of the rail grabber 1 Figure 2 21 can be used to mount accessories but the hole closest to the muzzle must be used for the Picatinny rail grabber This ensures that the majority of the rail grabber is supporting the accessory to prevent damage to the accessory It also allows the torque limiting knob to be mounted on either the left or right side when top mounted or top or bottom when side mounted so that it will not interfere with weapon operation 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 2 15 Chapter 2 2 29 Unless command directed all devices in a unit do not have to be mounted in the same location as long as individual users record or mark with paint markers or grease pencils the mounting location on their weapons to avoid unnecessary rezeroing NOTE Even if the rail grabber is resting entirely on the ARS accessories should not make contact with the front sight assembly or the collar of the barrel The vibrations that occur during firing will interfere with the rail grabber s and accessory s zero retention capabilities SECTION Ill ACCESSORIES Table 2 6 shows the weapons with which the various accessories are compatible along with the mounting device and TM number Table 2 7 shows select characteristics of the various accesso
132. to hit the center of the target 7 105 Figure 7 12 shows what might be expected for a right handed firer engaging a target at 175 meters with a certain amount of cant it depicts the adjustment in point of aim needed to move the bullet strike to the center of the target Figure 7 13 shows what might be expected for a right handed firer engaging a NOTE The normal amount of cant has a limited influence on rounds fired at ranges of 75 meters or less Rifle ballistics cause the strike of the bullet to impact low in the direction of the cant at longer ranges 300 meter target 7 26 NOTE The adjustments in point of aim for left handed firers are the opposite of those shown in Figures 7 12 and 7 13 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Advanced Rifle Marksmanship Aiming high and right to compensate for cant RIGHT HANDED RIGHT HANDED s FIRER S CANT FIRER S CANT 1 L Aiming center mass Figure 7 12 Engagement of 175 meter target CANT LEFT NORMAL AIMING Rotating around aiming point Aiming high and right a oe to compensate for cant Figure 7 13 Engagement of 300 meter target 7 106 Although bullet strike is displaced when using a cant individual differences vary center of mass aiming should be used until the individual knows what aiming adjustment 1s needed When distant targets are missed a right handed firer should usually adjust his point of aim to the right and high a left hande
133. to qualification commanders should conduct familiarization using the same qualification standards while altering the conditions Firing the qualification tables in protective masks and during periods of limited visibility should be included Soldiers should train as they fight with all assigned equipment NOTE Although the qualification is intended to be fired with open sights only iterations using laser aiming devices CCOs and NVDs are highly encouraged RECORD AND PRACTICE FIRE Conduct NOTES 1 Soldiers must complete a blank fire iteration of the qualification tables before conducting live fire qualification 2 Each Soldier will have a coach to ensure that he acquires the target keeps the weapon on SAFE until time to engage the target and is then places it back on SAFE and maintains muzzle awareness throughout the exercise 3 If Soldiers will be engaging targets with lasers optics or the protective mask they should complete all steps using the same equipment Do not have Soldiers familiarize with iron sights and fire the exercise while wearing the protective mask 7 222 Each Soldier engages the target IAW the firing table Table 7 20 Table 7 20 Record and practice fire POSITION ROUNDS DISTANCE METHOD TIME STANDARD FIRED m Lettum ZT Controlled pair 3 sec from command UP PRightturn 2 10 Controlled pair 3 sec from command UP NIN Run stop kneel and shoot _ 2 15
134. to the bullet when it comes in contact with the target tight shot group A shot group with all bullet holes close together tracer ammunition Ammunition with a substance at the rear of the bullet that ignites soon after firing It burns brightly so the trajectory of the bullet can be seen tracking Engaging moving targets where the lead is established and maintained moving with the target as the trigger is squeezed train the trainer Describes any training that is designed to train marksmanship instructors or coaches trainfire A marksmanship program using pop up targets in a realistic environment trajectory The flight path the bullet takes from the rifle to the target trapping A technique for engaging moving targets The aiming point is established forward of the target The rifle is held stationary and fired as the target approaches the aiming point Glossary 10 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Glossary trigger squeeze The fourth fundamental squeezing the trigger so that the movement of firing is a surprise the lay of the weapon is not disturbed and a large target hit can be expected unit marksmanship All marksmanship training that is conducted by units unlocking The step in the cycle of operation that refers to the clockwise rotation of the bolt after firing freeing the bolt from the barrel locking lugs unsupported position Any position that requires the firer to hold the weapon steady using only his body bone support
135. to train and test individual Soldiers on the skills necessary to identify engage and defeat stationary Infantry targets for day night qualification requirements with M16 and M4 series weapons This range combines the capabilities of the AFF 17803 ARF 17805 and automated night fire 17808 ranges to reduce land and maintenance requirements and increase efficiencies Its primary features include e 144 stationary Infantry targets e 16 foxholes E 55 All targets are fully automated and the event specific target scenario is computer driven and scored from the range operations center The range operating system is fully capable of providing immediate performance feedback to the participants NOTE 1 To perform night fire Soldiers fire at 50 meter targets from the night fire line and baseline 2 Range Set up Replace one of the 50m F type silhouettes with an E type silhouette Low light illumination capability is required in both of the 50 meter target emplacements Engage the F type from the 25 meter night firing line and the E type from the baseline Tm NA EY L1 NAT I NAT 7m Im fm MI EI MIS i 2 5m emn im Tt th km tmm PT Pp rim 1 Aem Figure E 4 Modified record fire range 17806 E 14 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Range Procedures and Range Operations Checklist Qualification Training Range 17809 E 56 The qualification training QTR
136. weapon thermal sight and AN PAS 13B C D V3 heavy weapon thermal sight MOUNTING THE TWS ON AN M16A4 RIFLE OR CARBINE 2 57 To mount the TWS on an M16A4 rifle or carbine NOTE Reference the weapon components using the numbers listed in Figure 2 36 Figure 2 36 Mounting the TWS on M16A4 rifle or M4 carbine 1 Align the Picatinny rail grabber with the spacer on the bottom of the TWS with a notch on the integrated rail of the M16A4 rifle or M4 carbine ensuring that the TWS is positioned to accommodate an effective firing position once the eyecup 15 depressed 2 26 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Weapon Characteristics Accessories and Ammunition NOTE The TWS will not retain zero if the rail grabber extends beyond the end of the integrated rail when mounted 2 Tighten the torque limiting knob clockwise until it clicks twice NOTE Retighten the rail grabber after firing a few rounds to ensure that the sight is fully seated 2 58 The mounting procedures are identical for the M16A4 rifle and M4 MWS MOUNTING THE TWS ON AN M16A1 A2 A3 RIFLE 2 59 To mount the TWS on an M16A1 A2 A3 rifle NOTE Reference the weapon components using the numbers listed in Figure 2 37 Figure 2 37 Mounting the TWS on an M16A1 A2 A3 rifle 1 Insert the weapon bracket s threaded rod 2 through the hole in the carrying handle of the M16A1 A2 A3 rifle and secure it with the thumb wheel 3 NOTE The M16A1 A2 A3 weapon bracke
137. well as information about night devices The information has been provided through continuous observation during operational testing the Army Research Institute and lessons learned by individual Soldiers across the Army Be it with the naked eye or with night devices Soldiers must learn to increase their ability not only to see better at night but their ability to own the night SECTION UNAIDED NIGHT VISION Although operating at night has definite advantages it is also difficult Eyes do not work as well as they do during the day yet they are crucial to effective performance 80 percent of sensory input comes through them Soldiers need to be aware of the constraints that their eyes place upon them at night These constraints include Reduced ability to see crisp and clear images visual acuity Inability to distinguish colors under certain conditions Reduced depth perception Difficulty in seeing objects at certain distances due to the night blind spot Lost dark adaptation due to exposure to light Confusion your eyes may seem to play tricks on you NORMAL BLIND SPOTS 1 The normal blind spot is always present day and night It is caused by the lack of light receptors where the optic nerve inserts into the back of the eye C 2 The normal blind spot occurs when you use just one eye When you close the other eye objects 12 to 15 degrees away from where you are looking will disappear When you uncover your e
138. wind effects takes practice especially at longer ranges where accuracy in correcting is more critical To shoot accurately in the wind a firer must know the wind velocity the wind direction and the value of deflection at the range at which he is shooting NOTE See paragraph 5 74 for more information on the effects of wind ANGLES 5 116 Firing uphill or downhill normally causes the bullet to hit high relative to a horizontal trajectory If the firer 1s firing on an angle up or down at a slanted range of 100 meters the point of impact will be higher than it would be for a level shot of 100 meters The height depends on the angle 5 117 Gravity acts on a bullet only during the horizontal component of its flight the distance from the firer to the target measured as 1f they were both at the same level Since the horizontal component will always be less than the slanted range gravity will not pull the bullet down as far as it would if the range were level 5 40 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Downrange Feedback 5 118 Firing uphill or downhill causes the wind to affect the shot over the entire slant range The firer should aim at the target as if 1t were 25 meters away and correct for wind as if it were 400 meters away The correct method for shooting uphill or downhill 1s to adjust elevation based on the horizontal range and correct for wind deflection based on the slanted range TERMINAL BALLISTICS 5 119 Terminal ballistics deals with
139. with the assistance of instructors trainers to improve their performance and good firers to bring their shots to the center of the target Firers develop the knowledge and skills required to perform with confidence on the field fire range where only hit or miss information is available Grouping Procedures 1 21 Grouping is a form of practice firing with two primary objectives firing tight shot groups and consistently placing those groups in the same location Frequent use of the EST 2000 or LMTS greatly reduces live fire grouping time Zeroing Procedures 1 22 Zeroing allows firers to use standard issue ammunition to align the sights with the weapon s barrel When this is accomplished correctly the aimpoint and the impact point are the same at a given range For most combat targets this sight setting provides the greatest probability of a hit with minimum adjustment to the aimpoint When followed a properly zeroed rifle for one Soldier is close to zero for another Soldier Downrange Feedback 1 23 On KD ranges Soldiers fire tight shot groups at a known distance and make sight adjustments at a given range while experiencing the effects of wind gravity and other environmental factors The advantage of a KD range 15 the ability to see precisely where each bullet hits KD firing is conducted with a single clearly visible target at a known distance and the Soldier can establish a position that provides a natural aimpoint on that single ta
140. 0 m grabber spacer receiver cm DN receiver Spacer Carrying 1 3R M4 M203 AN PAQ 4B C N A AN PVS 4 300 m 1 851 8 60 2 0L 0 9U handle 1 9D mounting knob Spacer Upper 0 0 3 4D 0 0 9 6U 2 0L 3 9U M4 M203 AN PVS 4 Picatinny and rail receiver 300 m grabber NOTE Target offsets not yet developed are indicated by TBD to be developed M16A2 M16A2 A Carrying M16 M203 handie AN PAQ 4B C N A N O mounting knob AN PVS 4 mounting Carrying M16 M203 AN PVS 4 N A M4 M4A1 F 6 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 10 Meter Target Offsets and 25 Meter Zero Offsets Table F 1 Offset mounting continued WEAPON ACCESSORY RAIL MOUNT LOCATION run ZERO BORESIGHT MILES GRABBER OFFSET TARGET OFFSET ERG receiver Spacer Upper 0 0 3 4D 0 0 7 6U 2 0L 0 9U M4 MWS AN PVS 4 Picatinny and rail receiver 300 m grabber M4 MWS Ban pper 9014 oos563u 20L24U grabber receiver cm DN receiver receiver ON 0D M im EE Spacer _ Training 2 0L 1 5D 2 e 0 9U AN PAQ 4 9R 6 1U 1 75L 3 9U ial OL 0 9U M4 MWS AN PAQ 4B C Picatinny ur 300 m adapter AN PAQ 4B C M4 MWS AN PAQ 4B C Picatinny bracket Right 300 m N A 6 9R 0 9D 2 0L 0 9U adapter Spacer MWS AN PAQ 4B C Insight 1 751 2 150 2 0L 0 9U M4MWS AN PAQ 4B C Insight Right A 4 35R 0 650 2 0L 0 9U M4MWS AN PAQ 4B C Insight Left 300m NA
141. 00 meter left 200 meter right 250 meter and 300 meter This ensures that firers do not forget which targets they engaged during qualification It also alleviates the possibility of shooting each target more than the prescribed number of times KNOWN DISTANCE RECORD FIRE RANGE NOTE The KD record fire range is used by all components of the U S Army U S Army Reserve and Army National Guard when a record fire range is not available 6 79 The KD record fire range allows Soldiers to engage targets at range while experiencing time constraints feedback and the effects of wind and gravity CONDUCT 6 80 To complete this course Soldiers fire three tables Table 6 14 depicts these three tables and provides related information such as time constraints number of rounds that must be fired type of target that must be used and the distance from the firer that the target must be placed NOTE Before firing the course all Soldiers confirm the zero of their assigned weapons by assuming the prone position and firing six rounds from the 300 meter line Zero rounds do not count for score Table 6 14 Known distance record fire range firing tables and related information TABLE POSITION TIME NUMBER TYPE OF TARGET DISTANCE CONSTRAINTS OF m ROUNDS Table 1 Prone supported firing position E type silhouette target 300 Table 2 Prone unsupported firing position E type silhouette target 200 Table 3 Prone unsupported firing position F type silhouet
142. 008 FM 3 22 9 4 21 Chapter 4 Breath Control for Engaging Single Targets 4 54 When zeroing or when time is available to fire a shot Soldiers fire when there is a natural respiratory pause when most of the air has been exhaled from the lungs and before inhaling Figure 4 18 The shot must be fired before the Soldier feels any discomfort IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN SQUEEZE TRIGGER k NATURAL HOLD SHOOT RESPIRATORY BREATH PAUSE Figure 4 18 Breath control for engaging single targets Breath Control for Engaging Short Exposure Targets 4 55 When employing rapid fire engaging short exposure targets Soldiers stop their breath when they are about to squeeze the trigger Figure 4 19 TRIGGER SQUEEZE TRIGGER f HOLD IN OUT IN mem TARGE T SHOOT Figure 4 19 Breath control for engaging short exposure targets TRIGGER SOUEEZE 4 56 A steady position reduces disturbance of the rifle during trigger squeeze If the trigger 1s not properly squeezed the rifle will be misaligned with the target at the moment of firing The elements of trigger squeeze training are as follows e Rifle movement Trigger finger Trigger squeeze time Coaching trigger squeeze Wobble area 4 22 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Preliminary Marksmanship Instruction Rifle Movement 4 57 Trigger squeeze is important for two reasons e Any sudden movement of the finger on the trigger can disturb the lay of the rifle and cause the
143. 1 2 21 illus 2 2 21 2 21 illus M16A3 2 21 2 21 illus M16A4 2 20 2 20 illus carbine 2 21 2 21 illus M4 MWS 2 20 2 20 illus training strategies and qualification standards Index 6 8 23 to 8 28 8 24 table 25 meter zeroing procedures 8 25 to 8 27 8 26 illus concept 8 24 conduct of training 8 24 field fire 8 27 modified fundamentals 8 24 to 8 25 practice qualification 8 28 record qualification 8 28 target detection 8 27 initial entry training see also marksmanship training strategy and training 1 2 1 2 illus interceptor body armor see also preliminary marksmanship instruction 4 15 to 4 16 4 15 illus adjustments to firing positions see also firing positions 4 16 proper wear and fit 4 15 wear of helmets with interceptor body armor 4 16 K known distance range see also downrange feedback 5 19 to 5 27 5 19 table 25 meter zero standard 5 27 5 27 illus concept 5 20 conduct of a standard known distance range 5 25 to 5 26 5 26 illus 75 meter targets 5 25 75 meter targets 5 26 300 meter targets 5 26 known distance record fire range 5 27 known distance shot grouping analysis 5 22 5 22 illus known distance target description 5 20 to 5 21 5 21 illus known distance zeroing 5 23 to 5 25 5 24 table 5 25 table marking known distance range targets 5 21 5 21 illus modified field fire range 5 27 record of performance
144. 10 and Figure 5 34 If firing M193 ammunition from an M16A2 A3 A4 rifle or an 4 carbine the weapon should be zeroed with M193 ammunition Table 5 10 M855 zeroed at 25 meters M193 re zeroed at 25 meters SIGHT 2 568 0 0023383 0 00235575 0 257 257 0 39 1 49 3 06 4 31 5 21 5 73 5 88 5 58 4 90 3 72 2 568 0 0023383 0 00235575 2 14 2 568 0 0023383 0 00235575 23 44 0 04 2 568 0 0023383 0 00235575 2 83 2 568 0 0023383 0 00235575 6 11 2 568 0 0023383 0 00235575 40 13 10 09 2 568 0 0023383 0 00235575 46 78 12 52 14 77 TTL hE LED FLLLI CLELELLELELELLETS 0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 275 300 325 350 375 400 Bullet Location M855 Bullet Location M193 Figure 5 34 M855 zeroed at 25 meters M193 re zeroed at 25 meters 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 5 37 Chapter 5 5 97 If an M16A2 A3 A4 rifle or an M4 M4A1 carbine has been zeroed at 25 meters using M855 ammunition and M193 ammunition 1s fired without re zeroing the difference in the impact of the rounds on the target varies between ammunition Table 5 11 and Figure 5 35 Table 5 11 M855 zeroed at 25 meters M193 fired using M855 zero wes FRONT mem BULLETLOGATION SIGHT Mom we we we wm wm _ 2 568 0 00235575 0 00235575 0 257 257 25 0 39 50 1 49 75 3 06 100 4 31 125 5 21 150 5 73 175 5 88 200 5 58 225 4 90 250 3 72 275 2 14
145. 2 SONILVH 34025 NOILVIISITYND 39035 SQNOO3S 09 3INIL SQNOD3S 09 3IAILL SQNOD3S 02 3INILL NOILISOd 9 SNITSSNY NOILISOd GALYOddNSNN 3NO3d NOILISOd GALYOddNS 310HXOJ YO GaLYOddNS S3NOUd 318v c 318Vv1 318vVL A000 dli SYOLYNTVAA QGWWAAAA ALVO LINA 4000 dl OQqwvs L s Aouabe jusuodojd eu ia ze e J 225 uuo siu jo esn 104 ASYNOD ALVYNYALIVY 1959 99 1 08 dHVOdHO2S 9ONI4I3 Dd 33 Ody Z 40 c ahed S002 935 04 0625 WHOA VG ALLANGHS JHL 36 ANY LIH Jl SLIH S 095095 37242 JHL LIH QINGHS SLATING LMlOd OMIA SEV 93435 JHL 19901 LOC 31IHAA JHL W 05 aganoujs yasa pajo2s aJe syy z uey spuogas 09 ui pejejduuoa2 ag 1snu Bur ABA 5 0 0S Bauaonsad u3ea 2 sapn 3ul Jaaus 120 64 auus s ua sagenaus eBebua au mpe auo si Jal au d Burn 2 Spanos Jn si yy ue aJou oy spuoaas 09 ui 02 ag yanu BUI agenous uasa 2 18aus 4 aug ua 01 sbBebua punad g auo uari 5 au uonisog Bully psyioddnsufj z 21992 7 Ww OOF apgenau is uaea 204 panas aJe syy F WEL amu op spuaaas ozi
146. 2 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 7 39 Chapter 7 Target Distance 7 149 The front sightpost covers only a small part of close in targets providing hits on close targets moving at any angle and any speed However if the lead rule is applied on more distant targets moving at a slight angle for example 5 degrees at 100 meters the bullet strikes about 4 inches forward of the target s center Soldiers must be taught to fire at targets as though they are stationary until lateral movement 15 observed 15 degrees 7 150 The rule provides for many speed angle combinations that place the bullet within 2 inches of the target s center Table 7 14 Since the Soldier is expected to fire a 12 inch group on moving targets at 100 meters the rule provides for hits on the majority of targets Even the worst case a 90 degree target moving at 8 miles per hour would result in the shot group s center being located 9 8 inches behind the target s center If bullets were evenly distributed in a 12 inch group this would result in hitting the target 40 percent of the time 7 151 Soldiers should be taught to increase their lead if they miss the target which increases their probability of hitting all targets For example if target exhibits much lateral movement and the Soldier feels that he has missed the target by applying the lead rule and firing fundamentals he should increase his lead 7 152 The training program must be simple and provide Soldiers with informatio
147. 2 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 7 49 Cha pter 7 L Shaped Method 7 50 7 199 When shooting from the right side perform the right side L shaped magazine changing method Figure 7 28 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Engage the target until the magazine 1s empty Take a knee Place the weapon at a 45 degree angle with the magazine well facing in the muzzle pointed in a safe direction and the buttstock in the crease of the right elbow Slide the nonfiring hand down the handguard to the receiver and press the magazine release catch Secure a full magazine with two fingers and the thumb of the nonfiring hand Bring the full magazine top of the magazine facing to the rear next to and perpendicular to the empty magazine forming an L shape Slide the empty magazine out with the nonfiring hand rotate the full magazine so the top of the magazine faces the magazine well and insert the full magazine Hit the bolt release Stow the empty magazine in the ammunition pouch Figure 7 28 Right side L shaped magazine changing method 7 200 When shooting from the left side perform the left side L shaped magazine changing method Figure 7 29 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Engage the target until the magazine is empty Take a knee Place the weapon at a 45 degree angle with the magazine well facing in the muzzle pointed in a safe direction and the buttstock in the crease of the left elbow
148. 23 hits to qualify as marksman 30 for sharpshooter and 36 for expert reduced range ammunition Ammunition that is designed to be a ballistic match with service ammunition to an appropriate range for training may be less than maximum effective range and a reduced maximum range regular rear sight The M16AI rifle rear sight that is zeroed for 250 meters the unmarked aperture on rifles with standard sights and the aperture marked L on rifles equipped with LLLSS reinforcement training Training conducted that 1s over and above scheduled training remedial action A procedure applied after immediate action has failed to correct a malfunction which determines the cause of the malfunction remedial training Additional training presented to soldiers who have demonstrated special shooting problems Remote Electronic Target System Range complexes Some ranges include moving targets Reserve Components Includes Army National Guard and Army Reserve forces ricochet fire Fire in which the projectile glances from a surface after impact Riddle sighting device A small magnetic device with a scaled target that attaches to the front sight assembly allowing the soldier to practice aiming rifle cant Any leaning of the rifle to the left or right from a vertical position during firing rim fire adapter The caliber 22 rim fire adapter M261 consists of a bolt and a magazine insert which allows standard 22 caliber ammunition to be fired in t
149. 25 meters equals a doublewide E silhouette target at 300 meters 3 The trainer inspects the target score for the number of hits If the number 15 less than eight the trainer should perform a visual laser sight alignment check If the laser sight alignment 1s correct the trainer reconfirms the Soldier s understanding of the four fundamentals of marksmanship and directs the Soldier to repeat Step 2 If the number of hits 15 less than eight after several tries the Soldier reports for remedial training If the number of hits is eight or more the Soldier repeats Step 2 to confirm and then proceeds to Step 4 4 After the Soldier completes Step 3 a 300 meter scaled E silhouette mask is installed over the face of a TR 700 target The Soldier repeats Step 2 from the supported position and repeats Step 4 to confirm 5 OPTIONAL As time allows the Soldier increases the number of shots to 20 and or installs smaller masks for an additional skill challenge Additional firing positions may also be reinforced if needed NOTES 1 Thelargest mask presents a 300 meter E target size scaled for 25 meters 2 The middle mask presents a 300 meter E target size scaled for 15 meters or a 450 meter E target size scaled for 25 meters 3 The smallest mask presents a 300 meter E target size scaled for 10 meters a 450 meter E target size scaled for 15 meters or a 600 meter E target size scaled for 25 meters EXERCISE 3 GROUPING AND ZEROING EXERCISE Tabl
150. 26 to 2 27 2 26 illus infrared aiming light see also infrared aiming light 2 21 2 21 illus AN PAQAC 2 21 2 21 illus light thermal weapon sight see also light weapon thermal sight AN PAS 13B V1 2 26 to 2 27 2 26 illus AN PAS 13C V1 2 26 to 2 27 2 26 illus AN PAS 13D V1 2 26 to 2 27 2 26 illus M68 close combat optic see also M68 close combat optic 2 17 2 17 illus target pointer illuminator aiming light see also target pointer illuminator aiming light AN PEQ 2A 2 23 2 23 illus AN PEQ 2B 2 23 2 23 illus carbine see also M4 series carbine 2 2 illus 2 3 illus battlesight zeroing 2 4 to 2 5 2 4 illus point of impact 2 5 table characteristics 2 1 2 1 table mechanically zeroing 2 4 2 4 illus mounting accessories see also accessories advanced combat optical gunsight see also advanced combat optical gunsight 2 31 to 2 32 2 31 illus AN PVS night vision sight see also AN PVS 4 night vision sight 2 28 to 2 29 2 28 illus compatibility and mounting 2 16 table heavy thermal weapon sight see also heavy weapon thermal sight 12 August 2008 AN PAS 13B V3 2 26 to 2 27 2 26 illus AN PAS 13C V3 2 26 to 2 27 2 26 illus AN PAS 13D V3 2 26 to 2 27 2 26 illus infrared aiming light see also infrared aiming light 2 21 2 21 illus AN PAQAC 2 21 2 21 illus light thermal
151. 3 A4 rifle and MA MAAT carbine fire both M193 and M855 ball ammunition with little difference in accuracy to a range of 500 meters The M16A2 A3 A4 and M4 M4A1 and their ammunition are more effective than the M16A1 at ranges out to and beyond 500 meters due to better stabilization of the round 5 93 The three 10 round shot groups in Figure 5 32 A were fired by a skilled marksman at a distance of 274 2 meters 300 yards and 91 4 meters 100 yards using the same M16A1 rifle e At 300 yards the 25 4 centimeter shot group shown on the left was fired and zeroed with M193 ammunition e The 6 foot shot group shown on the right was fired with M855 ammunition At 100 yards the 35 56 centimeter 14 inch shot group shown in the center was fired with M855 ammunition 5 94 Figure 5 32 B shows two 25 4 centimeter 12 inch shot groups fired by the same skilled marksman at a distance of 274 2 meters 300 yards using an M16A2 rifle e The shot group on the left was fired and zeroed with M855 ammunition e The shot group on the right was fired using M193 ammunition NOTE Both M193 and M855 ball ammunition can be used in training and accurately function in M16A2 3 4 rifles and 4 carbines Due to the different characteristics of each round zero with the type of ammunition used for training Do not switch between the types during firing Do not zero with one type and then fire the other for any type of training M1
152. 32 5 32 illus 5 32 table drift for a 10 mile per hour wind using 5 56 millimeter M855 ammunition 5 33 5 33 table wind direction 5 29 5 29 illus wind speed 5 29 to 5 31 flag method 5 30 5 30 illus observation method 5 31 pointing method 5 31 5 31 illus 7 zeroing procedures see also downrange feedback arid 25 meter zero offsets 5 14 to 5 19 5 14 table conduct of a 25 meter zero firing 5 15 to 5 19 5 16 illus 5 17 illus 5 18 illus 12 August 2008 Index conduct of a 25 meter zero organization of a 25 meter zero firing using the Location range 5 15 of Misses and Hits purpose 5 15 System 5 19 sight variance 5 15 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 Index 15 This page intentionally left blank 3iigesosiWOL AOS S007 dis West WO vd LLM 243 ao mre el DEDY DSR ON cz L LIRSKI Diwali NOIL danced LA WO E oom LEN Hec 6 YO LX OR 3 Cape yog SONIS Wu NIST TED ___ s ox o os Tye pu m tT Ss e ex FLIP LIT Ly m EL ow e ____ 2 pos e oc e s e 2 e Bee s ox P s ec Dos Ts
153. 4 AN PAS 13A B V 3 HWTS sm V oi CCO Le a 2 HANDLE A R Upper Receiver Rail _ MILES z i Re AT Front of Barrel mt 7 FLASHLIGHT MOUNT 07 VERTICAL Bottom Hand Guard Rail PISTOL GRIP AN PEQ 2A Bottom Rail Hand Guard CLOSE QUARTER m COMRAT SLRS IRON SIGHT BIS Upper Receiver Rail e ANIPVS 14 Upper Receiver Rail M203 LEAF SIGHT Top Hand Guard Rail m M203 QUAD SIGHT Bottom Hand Guard Rail Slot T24 M4 T38 M16A4 wiQuick Attach Bracket Upper Receiver Rail Figure 2 9 M16A4 rifle with accessories 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 2 7 Chapter 2 MECHANICALLY ZEROING THE M16A4 RIFLE NOTE Mechanically zeroing the weapon is only necessary when the weapon zero is questionable the weapon is newly assigned to the unit or the weapon sights have been serviced 2 11 To mechanically zero an M16A4 rifle NOTE Reference the weapon components using the numbers listed in Figure 2 10 Figure 2 10 M16A4 mechanical zero 1 Adjust the front sightpost 1 until the base of the front sightpost is flush with the front sightpost housing 2 2 Turn the elevation knob 3 shown as viewed from above counterclockwise until the rear sight assembly 4 rests flush with the carrying handle and the 6 3 marking 1s aligned with the index line 5 on the left side of the carrying handle 3 Position the apertures 6 so the unmarked apert
154. 4 effectiveness and control 7 19 to 7 21 aimed 7 20 7 20 illus pointed 7 21 7 21 illus factors for use 7 22 modifications 7 22 to 7 23 training 7 23 to 7 24 7 24 table R rail grabbers see also accessory mounting 2 13 to 2 16 Insight rail grabber 2 14 to 2 15 2 14 illus MILES training extender for the insight rail grabber 2 14 to 2 15 2 15 illus Picatinny rail grabber 2 15 to 2 16 2 15 illus range determination see also field fire target detection arid squad designated marksman training 6 5 to 6 6 7 63 to 7 66 100 meter unit of measure method 6 5 to 6 6 7 63 to 7 64 appearance of objects method 6 6 7 64 combination method 7 64 elevation knob training 7 65 to 7 66 conduct 7 66 7 66 table factors affecting range estimation 7 64 to 7 65 light conditions 7 65 nature of the target 7 65 nature of the terrain 7 65 front sightpost method 6 6 7 64 range card method 7 64 range operations checklist see also range procedures and computer controlled ranges E 5 to E 10 range procedures see also range operations checklist and computer controlled ranges 1 fring order lineup E 2 personnel and duties E 2 to E 3 FM 3 22 9 Index tower commands see also tower commands E 2 to E 5 range safety D 1 to D 3 ammunition positioning and issuance D 3 personnel and duties D 2 to D 3 recommended briefing D 1 rapid semiautomatic fire see also combat fire tech
155. 4 MWS 2 38 The Picatinny 1 Figure 2 27 or Insight 5 Figure 2 27 rail grabber is used to mount the AN PAQ 4B C on the ARS 2 39 To mount the AN PAQ 4B C on the ARS NOTE Reference the weapon components using the numbers listed in Figure 2 27 Figure 2 27 Mounting the AN PAQ 4B C on the M4 MWS top or left 1 Mount the rail grabber all the way forward on the top or either side of the ARS 2 ensuring that it does not extend beyond the end of the ARS NOTE The AN PAQ 4B C will not retain zero if the rail grabber extends beyond the end of the integrated rail when mounted 2 Tighten the torque limiting knob 3 until it clicks twice 3 Align the thumbscrew 4 on the AN PAQ 4B C with the thumbscrew hole in the rail grabber nearest the muzzle 2 40 The mounting procedures are identical for the M16A4 rifle and M4 MWS The remote switch should be attached to the weapon where it will not interfere with the functioning of the weapon or hinder the firer s ability to fire the weapon If the aiming light and rail grabber are removed as a whole unit and mounted onto the same rail the system will retain zero NOTE 1 If the rail grabber and AN PAQ 4B C are separated the AN PAQ 4B C must be rezeroed to the weapon 2 For further information refer to TM 11 5855 301 12 amp P 2 20 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Weapon Characteristics Accessories and Ammunition MOUNTING ON THE M16A1 A2 A3 RIFLE OR CARBINE 2 41 To m
156. 4 in 0 9 cm 3 5 cm 7 cm 10 5 cm 14 cm 17 5 cm 20 9 cm Windage 1 8 in 1 2 in 1in 1 1 2 in 2 in 2 1 2 in in 0 3 cm 1 25 cm 2 5 cm 3 8 cm 5 6 3 7 6 M16A1 RIFLE 2 14 When operating an M16A1 rifle Figure 2 12 the firer can move the selector lever SAFE SEMI and AUTO to fire in the semiautomatic or automatic mode Figure 2 12 M16A1 rifle MECHANICALLY ZEROING THE MI6A1 RIFLE NOTE Mechanically zeroing the weapon is only necessary when the weapon zero is questionable the weapon is newly assigned to the unit or the weapon sights have been serviced 2 15 To mechanically zero an M16A1 rifle NOTE Reference the weapon components using the numbers listed in Figure 2 13 Figure 2 13 M16A1 mechanical zero 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 2 9 Chapter 2 1 Adjust the front sightpost 1 until the base of the front sightpost is flush with the front sightpost housing 2 2 Adjust the front sightpost 11 clicks in the direction of UP 3 Turn the rear sight windage drum 3 left until it stops 4 Turn the windage drum right 17 clicks so the rear sight is approximately centered BATTLESIGHT ZEROING THE MI6A1 RIFLE 2 16 Soldiers should use the aperture marked L Figure 2 14 to battlesight zero their weapons Aperture Marked L Figure 2 14 M16A1 battlesight zero 2 17 Table 2 5 shows how much one click of elevation or windage will move the strike of the round at ranges of 25 to 500
157. 45 8623 DSN 835 8623 Fax Commercial 706 545 8600 DSN 835 8600 US Mail Commandant USAIS ATTN ATSH INB 6650 Wilkin Drive Bldg 74 Rm 102 Fort Benning GA 31905 5593 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 xiii This page intentionally left blank Chapter 1 Marksmanship Training An effective marksmanship program can be measured by the unit s ability to put effective fire on a target This chapter provides a proven strategy for establishing and conducting an effective rifle marksmanship training program The strategy begins with the progressive individual training periods taught during initial entry training IET and culminates with advanced rifle marksmanship ARM skills Refresher training is conducted only when necessary A Soldier s marksmanship proficiency depends on proper training and application of the basic marksmanship fundamentals During initial marksmanship training emphasis is placed on learning the firing fundamentals which are taught in four phases preliminary marksmanship instruction PMI downrange feedback field firing and advanced firing exercises This prepares Soldiers for advanced optic and laser training for combat type collective exercises and real world deployments SECTION TRAINING STRATEGY The total Army marksmanship training strategy is the overall concept for integrating resources into a program designed to train sustain and improve the individual and collective skills needed to achieve proficiency
158. 5 18 The instructor trainer should ensure that the Soldier is properly applying the four marksmanship fundamentals and explain that this shot group size is due to minor shooting error not weapon or ammunition performance Any of these shot groups could have resulted from a minor change in sight picture breathing trigger squeeze position or an erratic round Figure 5 6 Shot groups with minor shooting error OVER 4 TO 5 CENTIMETER SHOT GROUPS 5 6 5 19 The targets shown in Figure 5 7 represent unacceptable firing performance 5 20 The instructor trainer should ensure that the Soldier is properly applying the four marksmanship fundamentals and explain that this shot group size 1s due to considerable shooting error not weapon or ammunition performance Any of these shot groups could have resulted from a change in position sight picture breathing trigger squeeze position or an erratic round 5 21 Soldiers who fire these shot groups should receive dry fire training or remedial training on the EST 2000 or LMTS to help correct firing problems 300 METERS 300 METERS Figure 5 7 Shot groups with considerable shooting error FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Downrange Feedback SHOT GROUPS LARGER THAN 5 CENTIMETERS 5 22 The targets shown in Figure 5 8 represent unacceptable firing performance a better firing performance should be expected 5 23 The instructor trainer should ensure that the Soldier 1s properly applying the fou
159. 5 317 10 Operator s Manual For Sight Thermal AN PAS 13D V 2 NSN 5855 01 524 4313 AN PAS 13D V 3 NSN 5855 01 524 4314 HWTS 15 February 2007 ARMY FORMS DA Form 2028 Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms DA Form 3595 R Record Fire Scorecard DA Form 3601 R Single Target Field Fire I Scorecard DA Form 5239 R 100 200 and 300 Meter Downrange Feedback Scorecard DA Form 5241 R Single and Multiple Targets Field Fire II Scorecard DA Form 5789 R Record Fire Scorecard Known Distance Course LRA DA Form 5790 R Record Fire Scorecard Scaled Target Alternate Course DA Form 7489 R Record Night Fire Scorecard LRA DA Form 7566 Composite Risk Management Worksheet DA Form 7649 R Squad Designated Marksman Record Fire I and II DA Form 7650 R Squad Designated Marksman Position Evaluation READINGS RECOMMENDED These sources contain relevant supplementary information AR 190 11 Physical Security of Arms Ammunition and Explosives 15 November 2006 AR 350 38 Training Device Polices and Management 15 October 1993 DA Pam 350 9 Index and Description of Army Training Devices 03 September 2002 DA Pam 385 64 Ammunition and Explosive Safety Standards 15 December 1999 FM 1 02 Operational Terms and Graphics 21 September 2004 FM 3 06 Urban Operations 26 October 2006 FM 3 06 11 Combined Arms Operations in Urban Terrain 28 February 2002 FM 3 11 4 Multiservice Tactics Techniques and Procedures
160. 7 use in conjunction with MILES 2 24 2 24 illus AN PEQ 2B 2 21 to 2 24 2 22 illus boresighting 8 9 to 8 10 characteristics 2 16 table 12 August 2008 compatibility and mounting 2 16 table mounting on MI6A1 2 23 2 23 illus 1642 2 23 2 23 illus M16A3 2 23 2 23 illus M16AA 2 22 to 2 23 2 22 illus carbine 2 23 2 23 illus M4 MWS 2 22 to 2 23 2 22 illus training strategies and qualification standards 8 23 to 8 28 8 24 table 25 meter zeroing procedures 8 25 to 8 27 8 26 illus concept 8 24 conduct of training 8 24 field fire 8 27 modified fundamentals 8 24 to 8 25 practice qualification 8 28 record qualification 8 28 target detection 8 27 use in conjunction with MILES 2 24 2 24 illus thermal weapon sight see also night fighting arid aided night vision C 6 to C 9 absorption C 7 adjustments C 7 to C 9 brightness knob C 8 contrast switch C 8 to C 9 diopter focus ring C 8 fields of view C 8 objective focus ring C 8 polarity switch C 9 diurnal cycle C 7 emissivity C 7 exposure C 7 reflection C 7 tower commands see also range procedures E 2 to E 5 field firing exercises E 3 to E4 general commands E 3 grouping commands E 3 practice record fire E 4 rapid fire exercises 4 to E 5 record fire E 4 zero commands E 3 to E 4 FM 3 22 9 Index trainers see also unit marksmanship training program and training 1 12 to 1 14 c
161. 7 5 Figure 7 5 Firing over a rooftop cccccseeeecceeseeeceesscecceueeeceaeecsaseeeseaeeeessegeeessageeesseaeeenas 1 6 Figure 7 6 Firing around an obstacle 7 7 Figure 7 7 Firipng rom a WIFIOOW 7 8 Figure 7 0 Landscape targets erso ge cort dec d du sea itt Siecle ce ou il 7 18 Figure 7 9 Almed quick TINY a 7 20 Figure 7 10 Pointed QUICK fC uius aiu doe a ete Data dao a uae etd tee 7 21 Figure 7 11 Sight picture when canting the rifle while wearing a protective mask 75 meter 7 26 Figure 7 12 Engagement of 175 meter target 7 27 Figure 7 13 Engagement of 300 meter target 7 27 Figure 7 14 Lower weapon target 1 32 Figure 7 15 Daytime field of view USING pinpoint 7 33 Figure 7 16 Nighttime field of view using off center vision 1 33 Figure 7917 Night nie sooo o ies aetema het 7 34 Figure 7 18 Lead requirement based on distance and approach angle 1 37 Figure 7 19 Sight target relationship for the single lead 7 38 Figure 7 20 Lead
162. 8 The firing elbow is important in providing balance Its exact location depends on the firing or fighting position used Placement of the firing elbow should allow the firer s shoulders to remain level Nonfiring Side Elbow Placement 4 39 The nonfiring side elbow is positioned firmly under the weapon to allow a comfortable and stable position When the Soldier engages a wide sector of fire moving targets and targets at various elevations his nonfiring side elbow should remain free from support Cheek to Stock Weld 4 40 The cheek to stock weld should provide a natural line of sight through the center of the rear sight aperture to the front sightpost and onto the target The firer s neck should be relaxed allowing his cheek to fall naturally onto the stock NOTE Proper eye relief is obtained when a Soldier establishes a good cheek to stock weld A small change in eye relief normally occurs each time that the firer assumes a different firing position 4 A Through dry fire training the Soldier practices this position until he assumes the same cheek to stock weld each time he assumes a given position which provides consistency in aiming To learn to maintain the same cheek to stock weld each time the weapon is aimed the Soldier should begin by trying to touch the charging handle with his nose when assuming a firing position The Soldier should be mindful of how the nose touches the charging handle and should be consistent when doing so
163. 93 BALL 300 Yards M855 100 Yards M855 300 Yards B M16A2 AS3 A4 and M4 M4A1 M855 BALL 300 Yards M193 BALL 300 Yards Figure 5 32 Ammunition impact comparison 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 5 35 Chapter 5 5 95 Table 5 9 and Figure 5 33 show the difference between a M16A2 A3 A4 and a M4 M4A1 weapon zeroed with M855 ammunition and then re zeroed with M193 ammunition at 300 meters There is practically no difference between the trajectory of the rounds and the impact of the rounds on the target Table 5 9 M855 zeroed at 300 meters M193 re zeroed at 300 meters using an M16A2 A3 A4 rifle and an M4 carbine RANGE m FRONT THETA BULLET DROP BULLET LOCATION SIGHT mios wes wes 0 0021987 ___ 0 00235575 _ 257 2 568 2 57 0 0021987 0 00235575 0 0 2 57 2 568 0 39 2 568 1 49 2 568 3 06 2 568 4 31 2 568 5 21 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 275 2 568 5 73 2 568 5 88 2 568 5 58 2 568 4 90 2 568 3 72 2 568 2 14 300 2 568 0 04 325 2 568 2 83 NO Jojo See PL 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 275 300 325 350 375 400 Bullet Location M855 3 Bullet Location M193 Figure 5 33 M855 zeroed at 300 meters M193 re zeroed at 300 meters 5 36 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Downrange Feedback 5 96 When zeroing using M855 and M193 ammunition at 25 meters the differences in the ammunition becomes apparent Table 5
164. A1 rifles only Soldiers should use the unmarked aperture short range for refining zero at 300 meters For target engagements beyond the 300 meter line Soldiers should use the long range aperture L ELEVATION AND WINDAGE ADJUSTMENTS AT A DISTANCE 5 57 The elevation and windage rule states that one click of elevation or windage moves the strike of the bullet a specific distance at a specific range At a range of 25 meters one click of windage moves the strike of the bullet 33 centimeters and one click of elevation on the front sight moves the strike of the bullet 83 centimeters To compute the distance D one click of elevation front sight or windage moves the strike of a bullet at a given range R 1 Divide the range expressed in meters by 25 2 Multiply by either 33 centimeters for windage or 83 centimeters for elevation Windage D 25 33 D distance in cm Elevation D R 25 m x 83 R distance in cm Windage 5 58 To compute the distance one click of windage moves the strike of the bullet at a range of 300 meters 1 Divide 300 meters by 25 meters 2 Multiply by 33 centimeters D 300 m 25 12 12 x 33 3 96 cm Round 3 96 cm up to 4 0 cm 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 5 23 Chapter 5 5 59 One click of windage moves the strike of the bullet 4 centimeters at 300 meters NOTE Tables 5 5 and 5 6 show the amount of change in windage of the strike of the bullet at var
165. AINING A 19 Failure to achieve the standards set forth in this manual identifies the Soldier as a candidate for remedial training Using the LMTS technology trainers can quickly identify and correct problems significantly raising qualification rates after subsequent attempts at qualification After remedial training the Soldier moves to the LMTS alternate course C target where the course of fire replicates that of the live fire course except that the ammunition is a laser beam SUSTAINMENT TRAINING A 20 The training model in the exercises provides commanders and unit trainers with a sustainment training system that can be employed year round ideally as integrated concurrent training to cause the least disruption to other planned training 21 Soldiers are administered a skill test at a regular frequency current training guidance recommends quarterly The results of this test allow commanders to focus training efforts on those Soldiers least able to demonstrate the minimum skills required A 22 For quarterly sustainment training Soldiers should be pretested to determine the extent of training required The pretest should begin with the grouping exercise from Exercise 3 followed by the electronic alternate course C or mini RETS Exercise 4 Soldiers unable to meet pretest standards are given refresher training in the four fundamentals of rifle marksmanship followed by completion of Exercises 1 through 4 EXERCISES A 23 LMTS exe
166. ATA FOR M18A2 ie 1 FOR ZEROING AT 25 METERS ROTATE THE REAR SIGHT ELEVATION KNOB TO THE 300 METER SETTING THEN CLOCKWISE UP ONE CLICK iia NS ME PAST THE 300 METER SETTING 1 FOR ZEROING AT 25 METERS ROTATE THE REAR SIGHT ELEVATION KNOB 2 AIM AT TARGET CENTER ADJUST SIGHTS TO MOVE SHOT GROUP TO THE 300 METER 6 3 SETTING DO NOT USE THE Z MARK ON THE CENTER AS CLOSE A5 POSSIBLE TO THE WHITE DOT IN THE CENTER ELEVATION KNOB T TARGET 2 AIM AT TARGET CENTER ADJUST SIGHTS TO MOVE SHOT GROUP CENTER 3 COMPLETING THE 25 METER ZERO ROTATE THE REAR SIGHT AS CLOSE AS POSSIBLE TO THE WHITE DOT IN THE CENTER OF THE TARGET ELEVATION KNC ne PARE pam Bd ZEROED FOR 302 METERS CLICK TO 3 AFTER COMPLETNG THE 25 METER ZERO THE WEAPON WILL BE ZEROED Figure 5 19 M16A2 and M4 25 meter zero target NOTES 1 The Soldier fires two individual shot groups before a sight change 15 considered 2 If the initial shot group is not on the target paper the weapon should be mechanically zeroed before the Soldier fires this weapon again 3 The Soldier returns to the firing line and fires a second three round shot group 4 The firing line is cleared and the Soldier moves downrange to examine the second shot group triangulate and mark the center of the shot group with the number 2 5 The Soldier groups the two shot groups and marks the center of the two shot groups with an X 6 If the two shot groups fall within a 4 centimeter
167. Augmentation Program location of misses and hits FM 3 22 9 Glossary 1 Glossary LWTS m MDMP METL METT TC min MOA MOPP mph MRF MWS NCOES NCOIC NFOV NGO NOD NSN NVD OIC OSUT OTV PASGT PH PMCS PMI POI QTR RETS RFA RSO RTO SAPI SAW SDM SDZ sec SRC SRM SRT SRTA SIRAC SIX TADSS TC TSC TM Glossary 2 light weapon thermal sight meter or meters military decision making process mission essential task list mission enemy terrain and weather troops and support available time available civil considerations minute or minutes millimeter or millimeters minute of angle mission oriented protective posture miles per hour modified record fire modular weapon system Noncommissioned Officers Education System noncommissioned officer in charge narrow field of view nongovernmental organizations night observation devices national stock number night vision device officer in charge one station unit training outer tactical vest personnel armor system for ground troops probability of hit preventive maintenance checks and services preliminary marksmanship instruction program of instruction qualification training Remote Electronic Target System rimfire adapter range safety officer radio telephone operator small arms protective insert squad automatic weapon squad designated marksman surface danger zone second or seconds short range combat short range m
168. August 2008 Marksmanship Training e Can Soldiers scan a designated area or sector of fire and detect all targets out to 300 meters If not why e Can Soldiers quickly engage timed single and multiple targets from both supported and unsupported firing positions out to 300 meters If not which targets were not engaged Which were missed Why e During individual and collective training do Soldiers demonstrate their ability to manage allocated ammunition and to engage all targets Do they fire several rounds at one target Which targets Why e Basedon an analysis of individual qualification scores what is the distribution w Are most Soldiers just meeting the minimum acceptable performance marksman most Soldiers distributed in the upper half of the performance spectrum sharpshooter expert What 1s the hit distribution during collective LFXs Do Soldiers demonstrate proficiency during night fire target detection and acquisition and night fire engagement techniques When using night vision devices NVDs e Do Soldiers demonstrate individual marksmanship proficiency during MOPP firing conditions During collective exercises e Do Soldiers demonstrate proficiency during moving target engagements Do they demonstrate proficiency collectively by hitting moving targets at the multipurpose range complex If not is moving target training conducted e Are marksmanship skills integrated into tactical exercises and unit LE Xs
169. B 2 illus reproducible form B 1 5239 100 200 and 300 Meter Downrange Feedback Scorecard example of completed form B 2 illus reproducible form B 1 5241 R Single and Multiple Targets Field Fire II Scorecard example of completed form B 3 illus reproducible form B 1 5789 R Record Fire Scorecard Known Distance Course example of completed form B illus reproducible form B 1 5790 R Record Fire Scorecard Scaled Target Alternate Course example of completed form BA illus reproducible form B 1 7489 R Record Night Fire Scorecard example of completed form 5 illus reproducible form B 1 Index 3 Index 7566 Composite Risk Management Worksheet see also composite risk management D 7 to D 9 D 8 illus D 9 table 7649 R Squad Designated Marksman Record Fire I and IT example of completed form B 5 illus reproducible form B 1 7650 R Squad Designated Marksman Position Evaluation reproducible form B 1 destruction procedures see also troubleshooting and destruction 3 7 to 3 8 degree of damage 3 8 methods of destruction 3 8 3 8 table priorities of destruction 3 8 dominant eye training see also Preliminary Marksmanship Instruction 4 24 downrange feedback 5 1 to 5 42 ballistics see also ballistics 5 34 to 5 42 effects of wind and gravity see also effects of wind and gravity 5 28 to 5 33 grouping procedures see also grouping proced
170. Chapter 5 SHOT GROUPS WITH CONSISTENT AIMING AND MAJOR SHOOTING ERROR 5 30 The groups in Figure 5 12 indicate consistent aiming but the Soldier is not applying the four fundamentals properly while firing each shot group 5 3 The firer should be assigned a coach to troubleshoot his application of the four fundamentals in an attempt to 1solate his firing errors Figure 5 12 Shot groups with consistent aiming and major shooting error 5 10 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Downrange Feedback SHOT GROUPS WITH INCONSISTENT AIMING AND MAJOR SHOOTING ERROR 5 32 The groups shown in Figure 5 13 indicate inconsistent aiming and major shooting error 5 33 The firer should be assigned a coach to troubleshoot his application of the four fundamentals in an attempt to 1solate his firing errors THERE AA Le Figure 5 13 Shot groups with inconsistent aiming and major shooting error 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 5 11 Chapter 5 SHOT GROUPS WITH IMPROPER VERTICAL PLACEMENT 5 34 When viewed as nine shots the shot groups shown in Figure 5 14 reflect proper horizontal placement of shots but unsatisfactory vertical dispersion This indicates a failure to vertically aim at the target s center of mass for each shot 5 35 The instructor trainer should check the Soldier s aiming procedure and adherence to marksmanship fundamentals LII a EL aa a2 mw ae aa LT m m Fi
171. ENT FOXHOLE NOTE 16 LANES OF A 32 LANE RANGE SHOWN Figure E 2 Automated field fire range 17803 E 12 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Range Procedures and Range Operations Checklist Automated Record Fire Range 17805 E 52 The ARF range Figure E 3 15 used to train and test individual Soldiers on the skills necessary to identify engage and defeat stationary Infantry targets for day night qualification requirements with M16 and M4 series weapons Its primary features include e 112 stationary Infantry targets e 16 foxholes E 53 All targets are fully automated and the event specific target scenario is computer driven and scored from the range operations center The range operating system 1s fully capable of providing immediate performance feedback to the participants NOTE 1 To perform night fire Soldiers fire at 50 meter targets from the night fire line and baseline 2 Range Set up Replace one of the 50m F type silhouettes with an E type silhouette Low light illumination capability is required in both of the 50 meter target emplacements Engage the F type from the 25 meter night firing line and the E type from the baseline STATKHUUEY IMFANTEY UO TARG T EMPLACEMENT i roce Figure E 3 Automated record fire range 17805 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 E 13 Appendix E Modified Record Fire Range 17806 E 54 The modified record fire MRF range Figure E 4 is used
172. FM 3 22 9 RIFLE MARKSMANSHIP M16 M4 SERIES WEAPONS 25 METER ZEROING TARGET M4 CARBINE aod M 18 15 12 12 18 18 HOHHH O OH TT T HH Ht mie C F eee um n ON TT Oy A HT PHS jaan fd 5 d Rin OEE __ 5 ee e 12 18 18 s i ad CM ORTA po 1 FOR ZEROING AT 25 METER Siete ELEVATION KNOB THE 8 3 SETTING DO NOT USE THE 2 MARK ON THE 1 ar TARGET CENTER ADJUST SIGHTS TO MOVE HUE D MEL UNE POSSIBLE TO THE WHITE DOT IN THE CENTER OF THE TARGET A COMPLETNG THE 25 METER ZERO THE WEAPON WILL BE ZEROED August 2008 DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION Approved for public release distribution is unlimited HEADQUARTERS DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY This publication is available at Army Knowledge Online www us army mil and General Dennis J Reimer Training and Doctrine Digital Library at www train army mil Field Manual Headquarters No 3 22 9 Department of the Army Washington DC 12 August 2008 Rifle Marksmanship M16 M4 Series Weapons Contents Page PREFACE o xiii Chapter 1 MARKSMANSHIP TRAINING nennen nennen nnn nnn 1 1 Section Training oie pee e corta de uasa see acai senate 1 1 Slot TEE 1 1 Marksmanship Training Strategy sees 1 1 Traning
173. HT ELEVATION HNDE GOUNTER CL OG HW SE Deam ONE CLICK TO THE 3200 METER SETTING FOR THE Agi RIFLE DOWN TWO CLICES TO THE METER Grids are 1cm wide by 1em high Units must locally manufacture SETTING F R THE WIGS RIFLE THE WEAPON MLL BE ZEROED FOR PH METERS Figure F 5 M4 MAA1 10 meter boresighting target 25 meter zeroing target offsets 10 METER BORESIGHT OFFSET TARGET with Bracket Assembly 25 METER ZEROING TARGET 41 11111 27 24 21 18 15 12 9 493 4 9 12 15 T PET 27 mammam BEB DESIGNATED 877 LEE T sum e Ux HAHH ELE T LIE d sli T ECHELLE hes D D e w W a B o amp Ch _ ZEROED FOR HAL SADE 4 O 27 24 21 18 15 12 9 6 3 0 3 9 12 15 18 21 24 TARGET DATA FOR MIRAE Ad RIFLE i FOR ZERDINDAT Z3 METERS F OTATE THE MEAR SHEHT ELEVATION e inno THEM HM ONE CLICK FAST THE 300 METER SETTING FOR Hitit AILE LICKS SETTING FOR THE M16A4 RIFLE i AM T CENTER ADJUST SIGHTS TO MOVE SHOT GROUP CENTER AS CLOSE amp 5 POSSIBLE TO THE WHITE iN THE CENTER OF TARGET fF LM b u KW EP st NW ke FT E 1 TP THE CORE T POR WEAPON LCCATIDE eee T TEE Gat Laren te E AFTER coer ares THE 23 METER ROTATE THE FEAR ELEVATION KNOB COUNTER LOC HW TE ALLE CL TITE RD EAT
174. I Standards for single laser pulse power This classification is commonly referred to by the industry rating of eye safe However even eye safe lasers may be dangerous under extraordinary circumstances To ensure personnel safety weapon handlers should not stare directly down a simulated weapon s barrel Serious eye injury could result if a laser malfunctioned while a user was staring into the weapon s muzzle WARNING Laser light is used in the operation of this equipment Injury may result if personnel fail to observe safety precautions Never stare into the laser beam look down the barrel of the simulated weapon or directly view the laser beam with optical instruments Avoid direct eye exposure The instructor should ensure that all persons entering the training room are aware that laser radiation is present FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Training Aids Devices and Exercises SECTION LASER MARKSMANSHIP TRAINING SYSTEM The LMTS supports training with a Soldier s own weapon without the use of live ammunition It is not designed to replace live fire training or to eliminate the need for knowledgeable instructors Major components include a battery powered laser transmitter mounted to a mandrel inserted in the rifle barrel or affixed to the front sight with a mounting bracket and a variety of laser sensitive targets The exercise is performed in the same manner as an LFX except that the ammunition is a laser beam T
175. IC OR BURST FIRING FAMILIARIZATION 7 227 Shotgun and automatic or burst firing familiarization is no different for SRM than for BRM Controlled pair Controlled pair Controlled pair Tall 50 m Controlled pair Controlled pair Controlled pair Controlled pair Controlled pair Tall 35 m Controlled pair Controlled pair Controlled pair Controlled pair Controlled pair Tall 35 m Controlled pair Controlled pair Short 45 m Controlled pair Controlled pair Controlled pair NOTE Publications for shotgun firing familiarization are currently being developed SECTION VII SQUAD DESIGNATED MARKSMAN TRAINING Advances in technology have led to the development of weapon systems that are increasingly more accurate and able to engage targets at much longer ranges Conversely today s rifleman 15 trained to engage targets only out to 300 meters This 300 meter limit is well short of the weapon ammunition combination s capability Snipers engage targets at 600 meters and beyond The SDM engages targets with direct small arms fire in the gap between the engagement range of the average combat Soldier and the sniper Possessing the ability to estimate range detect targets and place effective well aimed fire on intermediate range targets the SDM plays a vital role on the modern battlefield 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 7 57 Chapter 7 MISSION OF THE SQUAD DESIGNATED MARKSMAN 7 228 The SDM program provides the squad with a d
176. INING STRATEGY 1 3 The following marksmanship training strategy guide contains the tasks that are currently trained in basic rifle marksmanship BRM programs during basic combat training at Army training centers ATCs and during infantry one station unit training OSUT It also provides a basis for structuring unit sustainment programs for active Army Army National Guard and United States Army Reserve units Units 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 1 1 Chapter 1 normally perform diagnostic tests of the tasks and only conduct training on specific periods for Soldiers who must improve their basic firing skills Unit training is usually conducted in less time than at IET 1 4 There are two primary components of a marksmanship training strategy initial training and sustainment training Both may include individual and collective tasks and skills Initial training must be taught correctly the first time A task taught correctly and learned well is retained longer and skills can be more easily sustained However an individual or unit eventually loses skill proficiency if the training is not reinforced This learning decay depends on many factors such as the difficulty and complexity of the task Personnel turnover is a main factor in the decay of collective skills since the loss of critical team members requires retraining to regain proficiency If a long period elapses between initial and sustainment sessions or training doctrine is altered retrainin
177. ION OF MISSES AND HITS SYSTEM 5 48 When using the LOMAH system on a KD range zero confirmation is part of the program and will be shot as the first scenario To conduct a 25 meter zero range using the LOMAH system the Soldier shoots six rounds at the 175 meter 200 yard target while aiming at the target s center of mass The outcome is evaluated using the following guidelines e Ifthe shot group falls within the 11 inch circle on the LOMAH monitor the Soldier continues the programmed scenario which is identical to the downrange feedback scenario without LOMAH e If the Soldier shoots a shot group that is 11 inches or smaller but is clearly not zeroed the instructor trainer assists the Soldier in making sight adjustments based upon the data provided on the LOMAH monitor e Ifthe shot group is not tight greater than 11 inches the Soldier should be removed from the firing line and given remedial training on the four fundamentals of marksmanship SECTION Ill KNOWN DISTANCE RANGE This section provides guidelines for the instructor trainer to conduct a KD range and apply the effects of wind and gravity This section also addresses three types of KD ranges the standard KD range the KD record fire range and the modified field fire range NOTE See Table 5 4 for the current training program Table 5 4 Downrange feedback DOWNRANGE FEEDBACK Instructional Intent e Reinforce PMI while shooting from the prone supported and unsupported fi
178. If so is suppressive fire rapid semiautomatic fire and automatic or burst fire conducted What tasks in the mission training plan are evaluated e Basedononsite observations and analysis of training and firing performance what skills or tasks show a readiness deficiency a What skills need training emphasis Individual emphasis Leader emphasis What are the performance goals Trainer Assessment 1 37 During trainer assessment commanders answer the following questions e Who has trained or will train the trainers a What is the subject matter expertise of the cadre w Are they actually training the critical skills Have they addressed the nonfiring skills first a What aids and devices are being used Are EST 2000 and LMTS being properly used e What administrative constraints or training distracters can you overcome for the junior officer and NCO At what level are the resources necessary to train marksmanship controlled time training aids weapons ammunition ranges Do the sergeants do the job they are charged with TRAINERS 1 38 Knowledgeable instructors or cadre are the key to marksmanship performance All commanders must be aware of maintaining expertise in marksmanship instruction training INSTRUCTOR TRAINER SELECTION 1 39 Institutional and unit instructors trainers are selected and assigned from the most highly qualified Soldiers These Soldiers must demonstrate proficiency in all aspects of rifle marksmanship
179. L GOALS READINESS LEVELS TURNOVERS MISSION OBSERVANCE OF DEFICIENCIES ASSESS OVERALL UNIT PROFICIENCY AND READINESS CONDUCT UNIT EVALUATIONS TRAIN REVIEW ARTEP MTP BATTLE DRILLS MILES LIVE LTA VARIED MISSIONS amp CONDITIONS INTEGRATED INDIVIDUAL amp COLLECTIVE SKILLS EVALUATION CONDUCT OF AAR TRAIN THE TRAINER STAFF amp UNIT LEADERS INTENT amp PRIORITY PUBLICATIONS REVIEW IDENTIFICATION OF TASKS PREPARATION amp REHEARSAL BASIC METL YEAR ROUND TRAINING PROGRAM PERIODIC INTEGRATED TRAINING TO MAINTAIN BAND OF EXCELLENCE AND UNIT READINESS CONDUCT ADDITIONAL SKILLS PREPARATION NIGHT FIRE SKILLS MOPP SKILLS amp POSITIONS CAMOUFLAGE COVER CONCEALMENT MODIFIED TACTICAL POSITIONS ASSAULT SUPPRESSIVE FIRES MOVING TARGETS FIRE amp MOVEMENT CONDUCT LIVE FIRE ASSESSMENT OF INDIVIDUAL NBC amp LIVE FIRE CONDUCT FTX STX amp LFX ASSESSMENT OF DRILLS CONDUCT PMI IDENTIFY TASKS TRAIN REVIEW NONFIRING MAINTENANCE amp SERVICEABILTY IMMEDIATE ACTION DRILLS INTEGRATED FUND OTHER SM SKILLS EVALUATION REMEDIATION TRAIN CONDUCT INITIAL 25 METERS LIVE FIRE PRACTICE LIVE FIRE INTEGRATION GROUP ZERO SETTING EVALUATION REMEDIATION TARGET DETECTION amp ESTIMATION WIND GRAVITY amp ADJUSTED AIM PRECISE APPLICATION OF BASICS LIVE FIRE PRACTICE AT KD RANGE WITH FEEDBACK TRAIN FIRE ON NETS RA
180. M M16A4 1005 01 383 2872 EIC 4F9 Carbine 5 56 MM M4 W E 1005 01 231 0973 EIC Carbine 5 56 MM 1005 01 382 0953 EIC 4GC 1 October 1998 01 October 1998 DOCUMENTS NEEDED These documents must be available to the intended users of this publication ARMY PUBLICATIONS AR 350 1 Army Training and Leader Development 03 August 2007 FM 7 0 Training the Force 22 October 2002 FM 7 1 Battle Focused Training 15 September 2003 TC 7 9 Infantry Live Fire Training 30 September 1993 TC 25 1 Training Land 15 March 2004 TC 25 8 Training Ranges 5 April 2004 TM 9 1005 319 23 amp P Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual Including Repair Parts and Special Tools List FOR RIFLE 5 56MM M16A2 W E NSN 1005 01 128 9936 EIC 4GM Rifle 5 56MM M16A3 1005 01 357 5112 Rifle 5 56MM M16A4 W E 1005 01 383 2872 EIC 4F9 Carbine 5 56MM M4 1005 01 231 0973 EIC 4FJ and Carbine 5 56MM M4A1 1005 01 382 0953 EIC 4GC 1 May 1991 TM 9 1240 413 13 amp P Operator and Field Maintenance Manual Including Repair Parts and Special Tools List for M68 Sight Reflex w Quick Release and Sight Mount COMP M2 NSN 1240 01 411 1265 COMP M4 NSN 1240 01 540 3690 19 March 2008 TM 9 5855 1914 13 amp P Operator and Field Maintenance Manual Including Repair Parts and Special Tools List for the Advanced Target Pointer Illuminator Aiming Light ATPIAL AN PEQ 15 NSN 5855 01 534 5931 16 February 2007
181. M OFFSET AMSTA AR FSF R 8 RECONFIRM ALL DEVICES ARE STILL ALIGNED TO THEIR AIMING MARK Picatinny Arsenal NJ 07089 Figure F 2 Blank 10 meter target offset 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 F 3 Appendix F 10 Meter Boresight Tgt AN PAQ 4B C Mtd on M16A2 with AN PAQ 4B C Mounted on Top of Hand M4 M4A1 Using the M4 M16 Mounting Rail Guards Using the M4 M16A2 Bracket prH H H P OMEGA TETE PH E 21 18 15 177 9 6 3 0 3 8 12 15 18 2M 24 20 EEE AQ 4B C Aiming Laser HE 9 EI T DESIGNATED e STRIKE POINT I DEEIGHRETED ZONE 8 7 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 n a E E a 1 27 24 21 18 15 32 9 6 3 0 3 8 8 12 15 18 21 24 27 10 Meter Bore Sight Target for 300m Zero TERO TAROET DATA POR RIFLE 13 Dec i FOR IIROMGAT 23 METERS m TATE na wine FIGHT ELEVATION KHOR TO TH 30 METER THEN E FAST THE PETTING FOR MIGA RIFLE CLOCHAISE UF y TWO CLICHE AR SETTING FOR THE t eA AMPLE 2 KT TARGET CENTER ADJUST SIGHTS TO MOVE SHOT GROUF CENTER CLOSE P SSIBLE THE US ARDEC WHITE DOT lH THE CENTER OF TAR ET AMSTA AR CCL A b AFTER COMPLETING THE 25 METER ZERO ROTATE THE REA ELEVATION ROE C OUNTER CLOCHMTEE AMSTA AR FSE R DDR ONE CLICK TO THE BETER SETTING FOR THE BEA RIFLE DOAN TWO CLICKS TO THE 200 METER Picatinny Arsenal 07806 SETTING F
182. M16A2 A4 rifle and M4 carbine use a three round burst capability EFFECTIVENESS AND CONTROL OF AUTOMATIC OR BURST FIRE 7 32 Automatic or burst fire is inherently less accurate than semiautomatic fire The first fully automatic shot fired may be on target but recoil and a high cyclic rate of fire often combine to place subsequent rounds far from the desired point of impact Even controlled three round burst automatic or burst fire may place only one round on the target Because of these inaccuracies it is difficult to evaluate the effectiveness of automatic or burst fire and even more difficult to establish absolute guidelines for its use FACTORS FOR USE OF SEMIAUTOMATIC VERSUS AUTOMATIC OR BURST FIRE 7 33 Trainers must ensure that Soldiers understand the capabilities and limitations of automatic or burst fire They must know when it should and should not be used 7 12 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Advanced Rifle Marksmanship Semiautomatic Fire 7 34 M16 rifles and M4 carbines should normally be employed in the semiautomatic fire mode 7 35 Depending on the tactical situation Soldiers should employ the semiautomatic fire mode in the following conditions e Ammunition is in short supply or resupply may be difficult Single targets are being engaged Widely spaced multiple targets are being engaged The target is located more than 50 meters away The effect of bullets on the target cannot be observed Artificial support is not ava
183. N PAQ 4B C AN PEQ 2A AN PAS 13 V 1 LWTS M68 CCO also eith AN PAS 13A B V 2 MWTS or AN PAS 13A B V 3 HWTS M16A1 TM 9 1005 249 10 M16A2 TM 9 1005 319 10 Figure 2 6 M16A2 A3 rifle with accessories 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 2 5 Chapter 2 MECHANICALLY ZEROING THE M16A2 A3 RIFLE NOTE Mechanically zeroing the weapon is only necessary when the weapon zero is questionable the weapon is newly assigned to the unit or the weapon sights have been serviced 2 7 mechanically zero an M16A2 A3 rifle NOTE Reference the weapon components using the numbers listed in Figure 2 7 Figure 2 7 M16A2 A3 mechanical zero 1 Adjust the front sightpost 1 until the base of the front sightpost is flush with the front sightpost housing 2 2 Turn the elevation knob 3 shown as viewed from above counterclockwise until the rear sight assembly 4 rests flush with the carrying handle and the 8 3 marking 1s aligned with the index line on the left side of the carrying handle 3 Position the apertures 5 so the unmarked aperture is up and the 0 200 meter aperture 1s down 4 Turn the windage knob 6 to align the index mark on the 0 200 meter aperture with the long center index line on the rear sight assembly BATTLESIGHT ZEROING THE M16A2 A3 RIFLE 2 8 To battlesight zero an M16A2 A3 rifle NOTE Reference the weapon components using the numbers listed in Figure 2 8 1 2 3 4 Figure 2
184. NG 4 11 During cocking the following actions occur This process is shown in Figure 4 9 1 The rearward movement of the bolt carrier overrides the hammer 2 The hammer is forced down into the receiver and the hammer spring is compressed NOTE This action cocks the hammer in the firing position COCKING WHEN TRIGGER IS HELD BACK DURING SEMIAUTOMATIC FIRING E DISCONNECTOR SS Figure 4 9 Cocking 4 10 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Preliminary Marksmanship Instruction MODES OF FIRE 4 12 Weapons may fire using the three modes of fire e Semiautomatic Figure 4 10 e Automatic Figure 4 10 e Burst Figure 4 11 Figure 4 11 Burst fire mode selector position SEMIAUTOMATIC MODE OF FIRE 4 13 Weapons that function in the semiautomatic mode of fire are e M16A1 A2 A3 A4 rifles e M4 M4A Icarbines 4 14 Before a Soldier fires a weapon using the semiautomatic mode of fire a disconnector mechanism installed so the firer can fire single rounds 1s attached to the trigger and rotated forward by the action of the disconnector spring When the recoil of the bolt carrier cocks the hammer 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 Chapter 4 1 The disconnector engages the lower hook of the hammer and holds it until the trigger is released 2 The disconnector rotates to the rear and down disengaging the hammer and allowing it to rotate forward until caught by the nose of the trigger this prevents the hammer from foll
185. NGE TIMED EXPOSURE PRACTICE QUALIFICATION COURSE EVALUATION CONDUCT BASIC RECORD FIRE COMMANDER S EVALUATION STANDARD OR ALTERNATE COURSE ASSESSMENT OF BASIC PROFICIENCY READINESS Figure 1 2 Unit marksmanship sustainment strategy 1 12 General marksmanship knowledge and weapon proficiency are perishable skills Most units have a readiness requirement that all Soldiers must zero their rifles within a certain time after unit assignment 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 Chapter 1 Soldiers must confirm the battlesight zeros of their assigned rifles before qualifying Units should conduct PMI and practice firing throughout the year due to personnel turnover A year round marksmanship sustainment program is needed for the unit to maintain the individual and collective firing proficiency requirements to accomplish its mission The following figures depict marksmanship training programs for active Army home station units Figure 1 3 National Guard home station units Figure 1 4 Army Reserve home station units Figure 1 5 and deployed units Figure 1 6 NOTE While the training strategy depicted in Figures 1 3 through 1 6 is not compulsory it is strongly recommended for Army wide application The strategy has proven success during IET producing more proficient Soldiers while using less ammunition Commanders are urged to follow this strategy closely UNIT PMI LIVE FIRE EST 2000 Gr nd L Collective EST 2000 c
186. NITION Weapon Characteristics Accessories and Ammunition This section provides information about different types of standard military ammunition used in M16 and MA series weapons AUTHORIZED AMMUNITION 2 79 Use only authorized ammunition manufactured to U S and NATO specifications Table 2 8 M193 cartridge 5 56 mm ball M196 cartridge 5 56 mm tracer M199 cartridge 5 56 mm dummy M200 cartridge 5 56 mm blank no projectile M855 cartridge 5 56 mm ball 12 August 2008 Table 2 8 Authorized ammunition CARTRIDGE ROUND IDENTIFICATION USE ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Plain tip Red or orange tip Six grooves along the sides of the case beginning about 1 2 inch from its tip Case mouth is closed with a seven petal rosette crimp violet tip Green tip The M193 is the standard cartridge for field use with the M16A1 rifle The M196 cartridge is used only in the M16A1 rifle Its main uses are for Observation of fire incendiary effect and signaling The M199 dummy cartridge is used in all M16 M4 series weapons during dry firing and other training The M200 blank cartridge is used in all M16 M4 series weapons The M855 cartridge is used in the M16A2 3 4 and in M4 series weapons FM 3 22 9 The M193 cartridge is a center fire cartridge with a 55 grain gilded metal jacketed lead alloy core bullet Soldiers should avoi
187. NOTE The weapon does not have to be perfectly level with the ground when boresighting 2 Align the visible laser with the weapon s barrel CAUTION Do not over adjust the laser Do not point the laser at Soldiers or reflective material 3 Attach the 5 56 millimeter mandrel to the borelight 4 Insert the mandrel into the weapon s muzzle NOTE The borelight is seated properly when the mandrel cannot be moved any further into the muzzle and the mandrel spins freely 5 Measure 10 meters with the 10 meter cord that comes with the borelight or pace off eleven paces 6 Draw a zeroing mark small dot on a piece of paper or tree bark or use the borelight reference point on the 10 meter boresighting target Figure 8 1 CCO RED DOT Figure 8 1 Example of a zeroing mark 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 8 3 Chapter 8 7 Rotate the borelight until the battery compartment is facing upward and the adjusters are on the bottom Figure 8 2 NOTE Once the Soldier performs step 7 the borelight s position and the place where the visible laser is pointing are identified as the start point The command START POINT is given to ensure clear communication between the Soldier at the weapon and the Soldier at the boresighting target Figure 8 2 Borelight in the START POINT position 8 Rotate the borelight until the battery compartment is facing downward and the adjusters on top to allow for easy access to the adju
188. NOTES 1 Soldiers should successfully group prior to zeroing 2 If the Soldier is proficient at grouping two shot groups should be fired to confirm proficiency prior to making any sight adjustments during zeroing procedures 5 43 To properly conduct a 25 meter zero range perform the following actions e Divide the unit into firing orders The first order fires while the second order coaches e Reserve firing points to conduct corrective instruction e Provide sandbags at each firing point to accommodate supported firing positions CONDUCT OF A 25 METER ZERO FIRING 5 44 On the 25 meter zero range the Soldier applies the fundamentals while consistently aiming at the target s center of mass A Figure 5 16 The Soldier fires two separate three round shot groups B Figure 5 16 and groups them Based on the location of these groups the Soldier makes the appropriate sight adjustments Then 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 5 15 Chapter 5 the Soldier fires two additional three round shot groups to confirm that the adjustments have aligned the sights with the center of the target and that the bullets are in the 4 centimeter circle Figure 5 17 REAR SIGHT F T T 4 4 BERE nimm m LJ UJ II 94 mw om Figure 5 17 Final shot group results 5 16 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Downrange Feedback 5 45 To conduct a 25 meter zero range
189. NOWN DISTANCE RECORD FIRE RANGE NOTE See paragraphs 6 79 through 6 82 of Chapter 6 for information about the alternate course KD record fire range MODIFIED FIELD FIRE RANGE 5 67 A modified field fire range can be used for downrange feedback To conduct downrange feedback minor changes must be made to a standard field fire range Target frames like those used on the 25 meter range are placed on a standard qualification range at 100 200 and 300 meters The standard KD range or the KD record fire range can be conducted on the modified field fire range NOTE The firing line must be cleared moved to the targets for marking and returned each time a firing order fires RECORD OF PERFORMANCE 5 68 During the conduct of downrange feedback a record of performance should be kept on DA Form 5239 R 100 200 and 300 Meter Downrange Feedback Scorecard for the AAR NOTE See Appendix B for a sample completed form and the end of this publication for a blank reproducible copy 5 69 As Soldiers complete each phase and achieve the performance standard for that range they should receive a critique Instructors trainers must ensure that Soldiers do not progress to a greater range until they become proficient at closer ranges 25 METER ZERO STANDARD 5 70 A standard E type silhouette is 48 26 centimeters wide a circle angle that is 48 26 centimeters at 300 meters is 4 centimeters at 25 meters A Soldier who can fire all bullets in a 4 c
190. OR THE OH WLL BE ZEROUD FOR Grids are 1cm wide by 1em high Units must locally manufacture Figure F 3 M16A2 10 meter boresighting target 25 meter zeroing target offsets M4 MWS with AN PAQ 4 mounted on left side rail 10 Meter Boresight Tgt AN PAO 4B C Mtd on M16 MWS Using AN PAO 4B C Spacer and Picatinny Rail Grabber on Left Side Rail with Bracket Assembly 0 bp SEE saat ARDET w 24 21 18 15 12 3 0D 3 SL MUERE TIIILLIITLELIT Jeux Powr 5 ee ae THER E ER n TELE sos oas HH LET LLL LLpemeemw oe eee SE BL ee UR BN OR ee Et PEE LLLI P LZ a 17 a e DESIGNATED STRIKE ZONE 2 JE _ aes RIGHT D E ARMING POINT CIE LITLELTTIJIJ JANI ZEROED FOR 10 Meter Hore Sight Target for 300m Zero 27 24 21 1H 15 12 D 6 3 D 3 8 12 15 1H 21 24 27 13 Dec 88 ZERO TARGET DATA FOR rigen ae i FOR TERING 25 METERE T ALE Heg THEN RAE CLICK PAST THE 200 METER SETT FOR meg RIFLE qur ARDEC METER FOR THE migati BIFLE 2 AT TARGET CENTER ADJUST LIGHTS TO SHOT GROUP CENTER AS CLOSE KS POSSIBLE THE WHITE IN THE CENTER OF TARGET ALTER COMPLETING THE 25 METER ZERO H TATE THE BEAR SIGHT ELEVATION ee AMI BE th el og Dowel
191. QUIPMENT TRAINING 7 110 Repeated dry fire training and LFXs are the most efficient means to prepare a Soldier wearing MOPP Level 4 equipment for successful target engagements at any range The Soldier must follow these procedures and applications to be combat effective in a CBRN environment Conduct NOTE See Table 7 9 for the current training program Table 7 9 Chemical Biological Radiological and Nuclear fire training program CBRN FIRE TRAINING PROGRAM Instructional Intent Develop the Soldier s confidence and ability to engage targets while wearing any level of MOPP equipment Special Instructions Ensure that The M16A2 A3 A4 rifle s or M4 carbine s rear sight is set on the 0 2 aperture The M16A1 s rear sight is set on the unmarked aperture Soldiers have inserted lenses before firing if required Soldiers have a proper seal on the mask to prevent fogging and loss of visibility Each Soldier is issued 20 rounds of ammunition to be loaded in two magazines 10 10 Each Soldier engages 20 targets at 50 meters Target exposures consist of 10 from the right and 10 from the left from the foxhole supported firing position using Table 1 of the Record Fire Qualification firing table DA Form 3595 R Observables Each Soldier obtains 11 hits out of 20 target exposures Dry Fire Exercises 7 111 As with all marksmanship training Soldiers must start at the basics in order to become proficient at CBRN fire Modified
192. RGETS HIT 36 to 40 Sharpshooter 30 to 35 23 to 29 RECORD OF PERFORMANCE 6 78 The record fire range is fired and recorded IAW DA Form 3595 R NOTE See Appendix B for a sample completed scorecard and the end of this publication for a blank reproducible copy SECTION IV ALTERNATE QUALIFICATION COURSES Units should conduct weapon qualification on a standard record fire range Convenience and comfort should not be the prime consideration when choosing a range Authorized alternate record fire courses are e KD record fire range e 25 meter scaled target alternate course e 15 meter scaled target alternate course 6 16 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Field Fire NOTES 1 The official records of personnel who use an alternate qualification course are noted to distinguish alternate qualification ratings from standard record fire course ratings For example official personnel records are annotated as follows JONES John Q 000 00 0000 Expert 36 record fire RF JONES John Q 000 00 0000 Expert 38 known distance alternate course KDAC JONES John Q 000 00 0000 Expert 38 alternate course AC 2 The uniform for all alternate qualification courses is a helmet LBE and IBA with all SAPI plates if available No other armor is required 3 Firers should engage targets from left to right from nearest to the farthest 50 meter 100 meter left 100 meter center 100 meter right 150 meter left 150 meter right 2
193. RTIFICIAL ILLUMINATION TRAINING PROGRAM Instructional Intent Develop the Soldiers confidence in his ability to locate mark prioritize and engage targets at night using artificial illumination Special Instructions Ensure that M16A2 A3 A4 or M4 series 5 rear sight is set on the 0 2 aperture M16A1 rear sight is set on the unmarked aperture Each Soldier is given two 15 round magazines with 10 rounds of ball and 5 rounds of tracer ammunition Each Soldier engages 15 target exposures from the foxhole supported fighting position with the first 15 round magazine Each Soldier engages 15 target exposures from the prone unsupported fighting position with the second 15 round magazine Observables Each Soldier achieves 15 hits out of 30 target exposures EFFECTIVENESS AND CONTROL OF ARTIFICIAL ILLUMINATION 7 136 When artificial illumination is used the eyes lose most of their night adaptation and off center vision is no longer useful Artificial illumination allows the firer to use the iron sights with the 0 2 rear sight aperture as he does during the day 7 137 To preserve night vision while artificial illumination 1s being used the Soldier closes his firing eye and scans his sector for enemy targets with his nonfiring eye This allows the Soldier to have night vision in at least one eye to keep scanning his sector for enemy targets after the artificial illumination has burned out However keeping one eye c
194. S EYE SAFE DISTANCE IS BEYOND 25 METERS IN DUAL LO MODE IN TRAINING MODE AND BEYOND 220 METERS IN TACTICAL MODE 3x EXTENDERS MAGNIFY THE LASER AIMING LIGHT WHEN USING THE 3x EXTENDERS THE AN PEQ 2A B IS NOT CONSIDERED EYE SAFE AT ANY DISTANCE DO NOT STORE THE AN PEQ 2A B WITH THE BATTERIES INSTALLED 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 8 9 Chapter 8 8 9 To boresight the AN PEQ 2A B 1 Select the proper 10 meter boresighting target for the weapon AN PEQ 2A B configuration 2 With the help of an assistant place the boresighting target 10 meters in front of the weapon 3 Install the filter on the aiming laser and turn the AN PEQ 2A B on 4 Align the 10 meter boresighting target with the visible laser of the borelight 5 Adjust the adjusters on the AN PEQ 2A B until the IR laser is centered on the crosshair located on the 10 meter boresighting target NOTE For windage and elevation one click equals 1 centimeter at 25 meters A click 1s defined as the sound or feel of the positive detent movement CAUTION Do not turn the adjustment screws too much Over turning the adjustment screws will cause them to break NOTES 1 Each click of elevation and windage is 1 centimeter and each square of the 25 meter zeroing target is 9 centimeter For ease of use round up to one square per click of elevation This will have a negligible effect on the zero unless a large adjustment is needed 2 Regardless of the mounting locatio
195. Soldier and aid the commander in identifying the quality of his training PRACTICE RECORD FIRE I AND II 6 52 Although the Soldier receives a practice rating based on the number of target hits practice record fire should also be considered a valuable training exercise When practice record fire is correctly conducted all Soldiers gain valuable experience and become more confident in engaging combat targets NOTE See Table 6 6 for the current training program 6 10 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Field Fire Table 6 6 Practice Record Fire and Il training program PRACTICE RECORD FIRE I AND II Instructional Intent Reinforce PMI and KD firing and apply the techniques of target detection by engaging a more difficult course of fire with single and multiple pop up targets and increased time constraints Special Instructions Ensure that The rear sight is on the proper setting M16A2 3 8 3 M16A4 and M4 6 3 flush M16A1 the unmarked aperture short range The rear sight aperture is set on 300 not 800 The small aperture is being used Peer coaching is stressed Practice Record Fire only Soldiers apply all aspects of BRM Soldiers hit 23 out of 40 target exposures Soldiers that do not meet the standard receive remedial training before refiring Practice record fire should be conducted on a different range than record fire CONCEPT 6 53 Practice Record Fire I and II should closely resemble all aspects of actual quali
196. T 8 75 Two training strategies have been devised to adequately train Soldiers in the use of AN PAQ AB C and AN PEQ 2A B IR aiming lasers the night initial training strategy and the night sustainment training strategy Units should always review the night initial training strategy prior to the night sustainment training strategy Night Initial Training Strategy 8 76 The night initial training strategy is used for Soldiers who have little or no previous experience with night vision goggles or for units beginning a night training program Night Sustainment Training Strategy 8 77 The night sustainment training strategy is for Soldiers who are familiar with night vision goggles and for units that have already implemented a night training program CONDUCT OF TRAINING 8 78 AN PAQ 4B C and AN PEQ 2A B IR aiming laser equipment training should familiarize Soldiers with the proper operation and characteristics of AN PAQ 4B C and AN PEQ 2A B IR aiming lasers IAW the TM MODIFIED FUNDAMENTALS 8 79 NVD operation requires modifications to the fundamentals of marksmanship Steady position Aiming Breath control Trigger squeeze 8 24 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Advanced Optics Lasers and Iron Sights Steady Position 8 80 Consider the following modifications e Realize that a good cheek to stock weld is not possible with NVGs mounted on the head e Ensure that the weapon s buttstock is firmly pulled into the pocket of the should
197. TE Recoil is provided in both semiautomatic and automatic modes of fire and is adjustable from no net force to 30 percent more than that of a live M16 A 69 Sound is provided through headphones and is adjustable from 115 to 135 decibels Special magazines are used One magazine simulates a continuous load the other is used to train rapid magazine change and can be loaded with 1 to 30 simulated rounds Selectable misfire can be used to detect gun shyness and drill immediate action The front and rear sights are zeroed the same as standard rifles A 20 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Training Aids Devices and Exercises Figure A 10 Weaponeer set up in the standing supported position A 70 The Weaponeer range can be raised or lowered to accommodate all firing positions The target assembly contains four targets a scaled 25 meter zeroing target and three pop up targets E type and F type silhouettes at ranges from 75 meters can be used on the Weaponeer Known distance and various other types of targets displayed in fixed or random sequences can be used Target exposure times may be set to unlimited or from 1 to 30 seconds The fall when hit mode can be selected with the KILL button A 71 The operator s console contains the system control buttons graphics printer and video feedback monitor The back of the console has counters that total rounds and hours and a storage bin for storing magazines printer paper and ribbon headphones two wrenche
198. TER ZERO OFFSET 2 78 The M16A2 25 meter zeroing target is used when live firing all optics and IR aiming lights at 25 meters with the appropriate strike zone marked on the target Figure 2 48B The M4 zeroing target 1s only used when zeroing the iron sights on the M4 The M4 25 meter zeroing target will not allow the placement of the correct offset due to the size of the squares which are 13 millimeters high and wide The point of aim is always the 300 meter scaled silhouette s center of mass The designated strike zone is a 4x4 square designating where the rounds should impact when the firer aims at the center of mass 2 34 NOTE Refer to Chapter 8 for a detailed explanation of the 25 meter offset zeroing procedures 25 METER ZEROING TARGET 1 2 10 Maher Baresight Tat ANIPEC ZA Mid on 1 Hand Guards Lining MAIM MEA AN Garret Clamp a CEFE Es m Q METERS LLLELTTLLELLLLLI PLE MITTIT mL ee E Jo Lares LATI a 4 EER Lie dd vus iun aa Mm amp am DTE Grid are tom wide iy Tom hgh Unit Bieten _ 1 E a 1 Wo 2118 1 i22 9 6 3 0 3 MF A 10 meter boresight offset B 25 meter zero offset Figure 2 48 10 meter boresighting target and 25 meter zero offset FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 SECTION V AMMU
199. Target s hands and center of the uniform Two or More E Type Silhouettes with Bowling Pins Painted on Each Side 7 210 Target discrimination is best taught using two or more E type silhouettes with bowling pins painted on each side of the silhouette To conduct training using this type of target 1 The instructor calls out a color for the firer to identify 2 On the command READY UP or at the whistle blast the firer quickly scans all targets for the color and engages the correct target using a controlled pair 7 211 This exercise trains Soldiers to accomplish missions under the expected ROE During force on force training the OPFOR wears distinctive uniforms this exercise prepares Soldiers to eliminate threats based on enemy uniforms and reduces the chances of a Soldier hesitating and becoming a casualty Using realistic targets displaying threat and nonthreat personnel is another variation Multiple E Type Silhouettes with Different Painted Shapes 7 212 To conduct training using this type of target 1 The instructor calls out a shape for the firers to identify 2 On the command READY UP or at a whistle blast the firers quickly scan all targets searching for the shape and engage the correct target using the controlled pair technique 7 213 This is repeated until one shape is mastered Subsequently a sequence of shapes 15 announced and the firers engage accordingly 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 7 53 Chapt
200. This position should be critiqued and reinforced during dry fire training Support and Muscle Relaxation 4 42 When artificial support for example sandbags logs or stumps is available it should be used to steady the position and support the weapon If support is used properly the Soldier should be able to relax most of his muscles If artificial support is not available the bones not the muscles in the firer s upper body must support the weapon Using muscles to support the rifle can cause muscle fatigue which in turn causes the weapon to move 4 18 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Preliminary Marksmanship Instruction Natural Point of Aim 4 43 When the Soldier first assumes his firing position he orients his weapon in the general direction of his target Then he adjusts his body to align the weapon and sights with the desired point of aim When using proper support and consistent cheek to stock weld the Soldier should have his weapon and sights naturally aligned on the target 4 44 If correct body rifle target alignment cannot be achieved the front sightpost must be held on the target using muscular support and effort As the weapon fires muscles tend to relax causing the front sight to move away from the target toward the natural point of aim Adjusting this natural point of aim to the target eliminates this movement When multiple target exposures are expected or a sector of fire must be covered the Soldier adjusts his natura
201. To help with stability while firing in the kneeling position squeeze the rifle buttstock between the SAPI plate and bicep Loosen the firing side straps and tighten the nonfiring side straps to shift the SAPI plate away from the firing side e Instead of using load bearing equipment LBE attach canteens ammunition pouches or first aid pouches directly to the IBA to minimize interference with LBE shoulder straps IBA and helmet Reserve IBA firing with throat collar or groin protectors for ARM To position themselves more comfortably and be able to reach the handguards Soldiers of shorter stature may have to increase their body line to rifle axis angle to more of an L shape e Soldiers should be in a comfortable firing position to leverage the natural point of aim The more the target and rifle are naturally in line as when in a relaxed position the less movement 15 needed to acquire a proper sight picture FOUR FNDAMENTALS 4 32 Before the Soldier approaches the firing line he must understand and apply the four fundamentals e Steady position e Aiming e Breath control e Trigger squeeze 4 33 Soldiers apply these four fundamentals rapidly and consistently to perform the integrated act of firing These fundamentals should be practiced while the Soldier is wearing all of his equipment including his helmet and IBA if available STEADY POSITION 4 34 When the Soldier approaches the firing line he assumes a comforta
202. Training 1 50 Assistance and expertise from outside the unit may also be available such as the Army Marksmanship Unit AMU at Fort Benning Georgia A suggested train the trainer program is outlined below Conduct marksmanship diagnostic test Review operation and function of the rifle and ammunition immediate action and safety Conduct PMI review the four fundamentals Review coaching techniques and device usage Establish grouping and zeroing procedures Review effects of wind and gravity when firing as far away as 300 meters 600 meters for ARM Conduct range operations Conduct qualification record firing Diagnose firing problems DUTIES OF THE INSTRUCTOR TRAINER 1 51 The instructor trainer helps the firer master the fundamentals of rifle marksmanship He ensures that the firer consistently applies what he has learned When training the beginner the instructor trainer could confront problems such as fear nervousness forgetfulness failure to understand and a lack of coordination or determination which may be compounded by arrogance or carelessness With all types of firers the instructor trainer must ensure that firers are aware of their firing errors understand the causes and apply remedies To perform these duties he e Observes the firer e Questions the firer e Analyzes the shot group Observing the Firer 1 52 To pinpoint errors the instructor trainer observes the firer during drills and when fir
203. ULTIPLE TARGETS FIELD FIRE SCORECARD For upe of ihis onm ses FM 2 22 9 ihe proponent agency TRADOC AUT Luth is e SCORERS INITIALS UPS OBSOLETE ARD Pi 00 DA FORM 5241 R SEP 2008 DA FORM 5241 R JUN 1569 15 Figure B 3 Example of completed DA Form 5241 R Single and Multiple Targets Field Fire Il Scorecard RECORD FIRE SCORECARD For use of thet form see FM 3 22 5 the proponent agency TRADE Voor z APD PE st Oo Figure B 4 Example of completed DA Form 3595 R Record Fire Scorecard 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 DA FORM 3585 R SEP 2008 DA FORM 3585 R JUL 2006 IS OBSOLETE Page 1 T Scorecards Appendix B RECORD FIRING SCORECARD KNOWN DISTANCE COURSE _ For use of this fonm see FM 3 22 95 the proposent agency i TRADOC TABLE 1 PRONE SUPPORTED OR FOXHOLE SUPPORTED FIRING POSITION TH FIRER WILL BE ISSUED 40 ROUNDS THE ROUNDS VALL PRELOADED IN FOUR 10 ROUND MAGAZINES TWD FOR TABLE 1 ONE FOR EACH REMAINING TABLE DA FORM 5789 R SEP 2008 DA FORM 57898 JUN 1559 16 OBSOLETE Figure B 5 Example of DA Form 5789 R Record Fire Scorecard Known Distance Course RECORD FIRING SCORECARD SCALED TARGET ALTERNATE COURSE For ute of thes form see 3 22 3 rhe proponent agency i TRADOC as sue 200022 DASH Ceo 2 54T ryE Qooroage UNSUPPORTED FIRING 888 FIRER ISSUED 40 ROUNDS TO
204. VE ACTION The bolt fails to lock in the rearward position after the last Check for a bad magazine or short recoil round in the magazine is fired The bolt fails to lock in the rearward position when the bolt Check the bolt catch turn in the weapon to the unit catch has been engaged armorer The weapon fires two or more rounds when the trigger is This indicates a worn sear cam or disconnector Turn in pulled and the selection lever is in the SEMI position the weapon to the unit armorer so that he can repair and replace the trigger group parts The trigger fails to pull or return after release with the This indicates that the trigger pin has backed out of the selector set in a firing position receiver or the hammer spring is broken A Figure 3 3 Turn in the weapon to the unit armorer so that he can repair and replace it The magazine fails to lock into the magazine well Check the magazine and magazine catch for damage B Figure 3 3 Turn in to the unit armorer to adjust or replace the catch Any part of the bolt carrier group fails to function Check for incorrect assembly of components C Figure 3 3 Correctly clean and assemble the bolt carrier group or replace damaged parts The ammunition fails to feed from the magazine Check for a damaged magazine D Figure 3 3 A damaged magazine could cause repeated feeding failures and should be turned in to the unit armorer or exchanged NOTE For more information about troub
205. _ emn _ 39 Te ig 39 8 gt o 7 40 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Advanced Rifle Marksmanship Tracking 7 155 Tracking is a more accurate technique of engaging targets used by experienced firers It involves establishing and maintaining a point of aim in relationship to the target and moving with the target to maintain that sight picture while squeezing the trigger As the target moves this technique puts the firer in position for a second shot if the first one misses Trapping 7 156 Trapping involves setting up a point of aim forward of the target and along the target path The trigger is squeezed as the target comes into the sights This technique works on targets with slow lateral movement It does not require tracking skills but the firer must know precisely when the weapon is going to fire NOTE Soldiers who can squeeze the trigger without reacting to the weapon firing may fire better using this technique BREATH CONTROL 7 157 This fundamental is unchanged TRIGGER SOUEEZE 7 158 To use proper trigger squeeze e Apply rearward pressure on the handguard and pistol grip to hold the weapon steady while applying pressure to the trigger Squeeze the trigger quickly almost a controlled jerk Apply heavy pressure on the trigger at least half of the pressure it takes to make the weapon fire before squeezing MOVING TARGET LIVE FIRE EXERCISE 7 159 Soldiers
206. a 4 8 FIgUre 4f gt 4 ta ate vata Ga tee 4 8 PONSA 4 9 Figure A 9 COCKING 4 10 Figure 4 10 Semiautomatic and automatic fire mode selector positions 4 11 Figure 4 11 Burst fire mode selector position 4 11 Figure 4 12 Prone position of coach right handed 4 14 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Figure 4 13 Figure 4 14 Figure 4 15 Figure 4 16 Figure 4 17 Figure 4 18 Figure 4 19 Figure 4 20 Figure 4 21 Figure 4 22 Figure 4 23 Figure 4 24 Figure 4 25 Figure 5 1 Figure 5 2 Figure 5 3 Figure 5 4 Figure 5 5 Figure 5 6 Figure 5 7 Figure 5 8 Figure 5 9 Figure 5 10 Figure 5 11 Figure 5 12 Figure 5 13 Figure 5 14 Figure 5 15 Figure 5 16 Figure 5 17 Figure 5 18 Figure 5 19 Figure 5 20 Figure 5 21 Figure 5 22 Figure 5 23 Figure 5 24 Figure 5 25 Figure 5 26 Figure 5 27 Figure 5 28 Figure 5 29 12 August 2008 Contents Interceptor DOGWARIMOL 4 15 so GAA POSION T cT PP 4 17 GORECE SIGME 4 00 54 TIT EE 4 19 Focus of the eye and correct sight picture 4 20 Side aiming technique 2 Ear Dsum OmU eas Ree 4 21 Breath control for engaging single targets
207. a column Based on a one round allocation for each target exposure data should be collected on hits misses no fires and repeated shots to assist the instructor trainer in assessing firing proficiency FIELD FIRE I SINGLE TIMED TARGET 6 44 Field Fire I is broken down into four firing tables Table 6 3 CONCEPT 6 45 Firing Table 1 helps the firer practice shooting skills and develop the sense of timing and rhythm required to make the transition from KD to field fire This builds confidence prior to firing the exercises in Firing Tables 2 3 and 4 and identifies Soldiers who are having difficulty and need reinforcement 6 46 When firing the exercises in Firing Tables 2 3 and 4 each Soldier demonstrates his ability to apply the fundamentals of marksmanship during the integrated act of firing by successfully detecting and engaging single timed targets CONDUCT 6 8 NOTE When firing record fire each Soldier must wear the proper uniform the helmet LBE and IBA with all SAPI plates if available No other armor is required 6 47 Each firer receives 54 rounds of 5 56 millimeter ball ammunition with two 18 round magazines one magazine each for Firing Tables 1 and 2 and two 9 round magazines one magazine each for Firing Tables 3 and 4 Table 6 2 depicts the number of rounds that must be fired from each position Each Soldier must achieve 22 hits out of 36 timed target exposures in Firing Tables 2 3 and 4 Table 6 3 shows th
208. a small metal clip that slips over the front sight assembly to allow a smooth surface for attachment of the magnet The device may also be used without the metal clip TA AY Dom AN SE vez f 14 v A A a IP av 2 A 2 af y a bl METAL SLIDE This device is provided with a small metal clip that slips over the front sight assembly It all a smoother surface for attachment of the magnet however the device can be used without the metal clip Figure A 7 Riddle sighting device A 16 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Training Aids Devices and Exercises M16 SIGHTING DEVICE A 49 The M16 sighting device Figure A 8 is made of metal with a tinted square of glass placed at an angle When the device is attached to the rear of the MI6A1 carrying handle an observer can look through the sight to see what the firer sees NOTE The M16 sighting device can be mounted on the M16A2 rifle but the charging handle must be pulled to the rear first Then the M16 sighting device is mounted on the rear of the carrying handle and the charging handle is returned forward A 50 When using the M16 sighting device observe the following recommendations e The M16 sighting device can be used in a dry fire or live fire environment but a brass cartridge deflector must be used during live fire e The observer must practice with the sight to be effective For example if the observer looks at a reflecte
209. able Cause 3 16 Short recoil cycles and fouled or corroded rifle chambers are the most common causes of failures to extract A damaged extractor or a weak or broken extractor spring can also cause this malfunction Corrective Action 3 17 This malfunction is one of the hardest to clear the severity of the failure determines the corrective action procedures NOTE If the bolt has moved rearward far enough to strip a live round from the magazine in its forward motion the bolt and bolt carrier must be locked to the rear 3 18 With the bolt locked to the rear and the weapon on SAFE perform the following actions 1 Remove the magazine and all loose rounds 2 Tap the weapon s buttstock on a hard surface to cause the cartridge to fall out of the chamber 3 19 However if the cartridge case is ruptured it can be seized When this occurs perform the following actions 1 Insert a cleaning rod into the bore from the muzzle end 2 Force the cartridge case from the chamber by tapping the cleaning rod against the inside base of the fired cartridge 3 20 If cleaning and inspecting the mechanism and chamber reveals no defects but failures to extract persist the extractor and extractor spring should be replaced If the chamber surface is damaged the entire barrel must be replaced 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 3 5 Chapter 3 FAILURE TO EJECT 3 21 Ejection of a cartridge is an element in the rifle s cycle of functioning regardless o
210. about this method of range determination Combination Method 7 265 In a combat environment perfect conditions rarely exist Therefore only one method of range estimation may not be enough for the SDM s specific mission By using a combination of two or more methods to determine an unknown range an experienced SDM should arrive at an estimated range close to the true range Factors Affecting Range Estimation 7 266 Three factors affect range estimation e Nature of the target e Nature of the terrain e Light conditions 7 64 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Advanced Rifle Marksmanship Nature of the Target 7 267 The nature of the target affects its perceived range e An object with a regular outline such as a house appears closer than one with an irregular outline such as a clump of trees e A target that contrasts with its background appears to be closer than it actually 1s e A partly exposed target appears more distant than it actually is Nature of the Terrain 7 268 The contour of the terrain affects the observer s ability to estimate range As the observer s eye follows the contour of the terrain he tends to overestimate distant targets Observing over smooth terrain such as sand water or snow causes the observer to underestimate distant targets Looking downhill the target appears farther away Looking uphill the target appears closer Light Conditions 7 269 Light conditions affect range estimation The mo
211. ach exercise positions rotate until all orders have fired Standard field fire scenarios have been developed to provide several target exposures Although they are recommended for IET local commanders can develop any variety of more challenging target sequences Ammunition 15 allocated based on one round for each target RECORDING 6 41 During live fire the Soldier s hit and miss performance is recorded to facilitate the instructor trainer s critiques or to indicate where more training closer supervision or remedial training 1s needed Two methods are used to record firing performance Manually marked scorecards e Automated computer printouts Manual Recording 6 42 When manual recording is used the unit provides Soldiers for recording information on either DA Form 3601 R Single Target Field Fire I Scorecard or DA Form 5241 R Single and Multiple Targets Field Fire II Scorecard NOTE See the end of this publication for blank reproducible copies of these forms 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 6 7 Chapter 6 Automated Recording 6 43 When firing exercises are conducted using automated field fire AFF ranges a computer printout is provided for each firing order At the conclusion of each firing order the range noncommissioned officer in charge NCOIC completes the printout and ensures that the Soldier identification is matched with each firing point He adds the Soldier s numbered code to the top of each lane firing point dat
212. achieves 10 hits inside the dotted lines surrounding the fence or hedgerow area within 24 seconds Each Soldier achieves 3 hits inside the tank turret area within 24 seconds 7 65 Figure 7 8 shows a landscape target suitable for suppressive fire training When this type of target 1s used trainers must develop a firing program to include areas of engagement and designated target areas At 25 meters this target provides the firer with an area to suppress without definite targets to engage Figure 7 8 Landscape target 7 18 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Advanced Rifle Marksmanship Conduct 7 66 Each Soldier receives two 9 round magazines and one 12 round magazine of 5 56 millimeter ball ammunition The Soldier engages three areas of a 25 meter scaled landscaped target the open window area the fence or hedgerow area and the tank turret area Each Soldier achieves 5 hits inside of the open window area 10 hits inside of the dotted lines surrounding the fence or hedgerow area and 3 hits inside of the tank turret area 7 67 Table 7 6 depicts suppressive fire training and provides related information such as number of rounds that must be fired type of target that must be used and the distance away from the firer that the target must be placed Table 7 6 Suppressive fire training and related information FIRING TYPE OF AREA OF TARGET NUMBER OF TYPE OF FIRE TIME POSITION TARGET d mE cu Supported 25 m scaled Openwindow win
213. adre trainer 1 12 to 1 13 duties of the instructor tramer 1 13 to 1 14 instructor trainer selection 1 12 trainer certification program 1 14 to 1 15 certification program outline 1 14 to 1 15 training base 1 15 training the trainer 1 13 training 1 1 to 1 18 training strategy 1 1 to 1 8 marksmanship training strategy see also marksmanship training strategy 1 1 to 1 5 objectives 1 1 training phases see also traming phases 1 6 to 1 8 unit marksmanship training program see also unit marksmanship program 1 9 to 1 18 training aids devices and exercises see also preliminary marksmanship instruction 1 to A 28 4 28 to 4 29 Engagement Skills Trainer 2000 see also preliminary marksmanship instruction and Engagement Skills Trainer 2000 A 1 to 4 1 illus Laser Marksmanship Training System see also preliminary marksmanship instruction and Laser Marksmanship Training System A 5 to A 12 other training devices and exercises A 12 to A 28 selection of training aids and devices A 13 A 13 illus target ordering numbers A 14 A 14 table training devices see also training devices A 14 to A 24 Index 13 Index training exercises see also training exercises A 24 to A 28 training support centers A 13 training assessment see also unit marksmanship training program and training 1 9 to 1 12 commander s evaluation guide 1 10to 1 12 commander s priorities and intent 1 10
214. advantages of automatic or burst fire Special Instructions Ensure that The M16A2 A3 A4 rifle s or M4 carbine s rear sight is set on the 0 2 aperture The M16A1 s rear sight is set on the unmarked aperture Soldiers use a 25 meter alternate course C qualification target Each Soldier is in a proper modified automatic burst firing position Each Soldier is given two 15 round magazines of 5 56 millimeter ball ammunition Each Soldier fires one 3 round burst at each of the 10 silhouettes on the alternate course C qualification target Each Soldier does a rapid magazine change after each magazine is emptied Each Soldier obtains five target hits Soldiers demonstrate control of the weapon in the automatic burst fire mode Conduct 7 50 Each Soldier receives two 15 round magazines of 5 56 millimeter ball ammunition Each Soldier fires one 3 round burst at each of the 10 silhouettes on the alternate course C qualification target performing a rapid magazine change after each magazine is emptied Each Soldier must obtain five target hits 7 51 Table 7 4 depicts automatic or burst fire training and provides related information such as number of rounds that must be fired type of target that must be used and the distance away from the firer that the target must be placed Table 7 4 Automatic or burst fire training and related information FIRING POSITION NUMBER OF ROUNDS TYPE OF TARGET DISTANCE m Modified automatic burst f
215. agazine down Lock the bolt open To perform this procedure m Pull the charging handle rearward m Pressthe bottom of the bolt catch Allow the bolt to move forward until it engages the bolt catch Return the charging handle to the full forward position Ifyou have not done so already place the selector lever on SAFE Visually inspect the receiver and chamber to ensure that these areas contain no ammunition Allow the bolt to move forward by pressing the upper portion of the bolt catch Place the selector lever on SEMI Squeeze the trigger Pull the charging handle fully rearward and release it allowing the bolt to return to the full forward position 10 Place the selector lever on SAFE NOTE The weapon is now clear 11 Close the ejection port cover FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 1 Point the muzzle in a designated safe direction or in a clearing barrel 3 Remove the magazine To perform this procedure a Depress the magazine catch button b Pull the magazine down ON PRESS CATCH BUTTON KO LA li 1 pl de 4 4 A PULL MAGAZINE DOWN 7 1 t 5 Visually inspect the receiver and chamber to ensure that these areas contain no ammo 7 Place the selector lever on SEMI Squeeze the trigger 9 Place the selector lever on SAFE The weapon is now clear Preliminary Marksmanship Instruction 2 Attempt to place the selector lever
216. agnosed a good firer could zero the weapon to find the problem and eliminate the weapon as part of the problem 2 When a Soldier must fire another Soldier s weapon without opportunity to verify the zero by firing for example picking up another man s weapon on the battlefield the weapon will be closer to actual zero if the sights are left unchanged This information is useful in deciding initial sight settings and recording zeros 3 All weapons in the arms room even those not assigned should have been previously zeroed by the last Soldier they were assigned to Zeroing this newly assigned weapon should start with the sights left where they are SIGHT VARIANCE 5 42 There is no relationship between the specific sight settings a Soldier uses on his weapon to the sight settings he would use to zero another weapon which makes it essential that each Soldier zeros the weapon that he 1s assigned For example a Soldier could zero his assigned weapon 10 clicks left of center when zeroing another weapon his adjustments could be 10 clicks right of center This is due to the manufacturing difference between the weapons Therefore all newly assigned personnel should be required to zero their weapon as soon as possible after assignment to the unit The same rule applies anytime a Soldier is assigned a weapon that is returned from field level or sustainment level maintenance or when the zero is in question ORGANIZATION OF A 25 METER ZERO RANGE
217. aimed fire of weapons at night It amplifies reflected light such as moonlight starlight and sky glow so that the viewed scene becomes clearly visible to the operator It can be mounted on the M16A2 A3 A4 rifle and M4 M4 MWS Mounting brackets are provided for each type of weapon NOTE See Table 8 8 for the current training program Table 8 8 AN PVS 4 night vision device training program AN PVS 4 NIGHT VISION DEVICE Instructional Intent e Soldiers qualify with the AN PVS 4 NVD Special Instructions Ensure that Soldiers 8 28 Are proficient with the AN PVS 4 NVD Install the spacer and Picatinny rail grabber when mounting on the MWS Use the proper 10 meter boresighting target during boresighting procedures Use the proper reticle Confirm 10 meter boresight with a 25 meter zero Soldiers zero the AN PVS 4 to the same standard as with the iron sight Soldiers achieve the same practice and qualification standards as with day record fire FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Advanced Optics Lasers and Iron Sights CONCEPT 8 96 Training strategy for the AN PVS 4 is much the same as that for aiming lights and the course of fire and qualifications standards are the same as those for aiming lasers CONDUCT OF TRAINING 8 07 This training should familiarize the Soldier with the proper operation and characteristics of the AN PVS 4 IAW the TM MODIFIED FUNDAMENTALS 8 08 NVD operation requires modifications to the fundament
218. aiming lasers see also night fighting and aided night vision C 6 infrared discipline C 6 scanning C 6 walking C 6 alternate qualification courses see also field fire and record qualification 6 17 to 6 21 15 meter scaled target alternate course 6 21 25 meter scaled target alternate course 6 18 to 6 20 Index 2 conduct 6 19 6 19 table time between firing positions 6 19 duties of range personnel 6 19 to 6 20 ratings 6 20 6 20 table scoring 6 20 known distance record fire range 6 17 to 6 18 conduct 6 18 6 18 table qualification ratings 6 18 6 18 table record of performance 6 18 ammunition see also weapon characteristics accessories and ammunition 2 35 to 2 39 authorized ammunition 2 35 to 2 36 2 35 table 2 36 table storage 2 39 trajectory 2 37 to 2 39 2 37 illus 2 38 illus 2 39 illus AN PEQ 15 advanced target pointer illuminator aiming light see also accessories 4 carbine and M16 series rifle 2 24 to 2 25 2 25 illus mounting on M16AA 2 25 2 25 illus M4 MWS 2 25 2 25 illus AN PVS night vision sight see also accessories M4 series carbine M16 series rifle and Advanced Optics Lasers and Iron Sights 2 28 to 2 29 2 28 illus mounting on M1644 2 28 to 2 29 2 28 illus carbine 2 28 to 2 29 2 28 illus 2 29 2 29 illus M16AQ2 2 29 2 29 illus M16A3 2 29 2 29 illus boresighti
219. air the weapon system 15 boresighted 10 Turn the laser off and carefully remove the borelight and the mandrel from the weapon so that the borelight device is not damaged 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 8 7 Chapter 8 BORESIGHTING THE THERMAL WEAPON SIGHT NOTES 1 Before boresighting the TWS ensure that the borelight has been zeroed to the weapon The more accurate the boresight of the TWS to the assigned weapon the closer to a battlesight zero the weapon will be 2 25 meter zeroing must be conducted to ensure that the TWS 15 properly zeroed 3 Both the narrow field of view NFOV and wide field of view WFOV must be boresighted and zeroed 8 7 To boresight the TWS 1 Select the proper 10 meter boresighting target for the weapon TWS configuration 2 With the help of an assistant place the boresighting target 10 meters in front of the weapon 3 Ensure that the weapon s reticle is displayed 4 Get behind the weapon in a stable supported firing position and look through the TWS 5 Place a finger on each oval on the 10 meter boresighting target 6 Aim between the fingers with the 300 meter point of aim 7 Make adjustments to the TWS until the visible laser of the borelight is centered on the borelight circle on the 10 meter boresighting target 8 Move off of the aiming block realign the TWS to the center of the heated block and then turn the borelight back on 9 If the boresight is properly aligned the
220. als of marksmanship e Steady position e Aiming e Breath control e Trigger squeeze Steady Position 8 99 This fundamental slightly changes due to the height of the sight Consider the following modifications e Adjust your position so you can properly look through the sight e Recognize that in most cases the cheek to stock weld no longer exists Aiming 8 100 Consider the following modifications e To properly aim the AN PVS 4 ensure that the proper reticle is inserted in the sight e Place the aiming point on the target s center of mass NOTE Refer to TM 11 5855 213 10 for more information about inserting the proper reticle Breath Control 8 101 This fundamental of marksmanship does not change during night firing Trigger Squeeze 8 102 This fundamental of marksmanship does not change during night firing 25 METER ZEROING PROCEDURES 8 103 To zero the AN PVS 4 at 25 meters use the same procedures and standards as with the iron sights along with the following At 25 meter range each increment of azimuth or elevation setting moves the strike of the round 63 centimeters or 1 4 mil e Two clicks of the windage or elevation will move the strike of the round approximately one square on the M16A2 zeroing target e Retighten the thumbscrew on the rail grabber after firing the initial three rounds NOTE If there is not enough ambient light to see the boresight mark at ten meters or the silhouette on t
221. always precede an actual qualification Practice qualification allows the Soldier to practice and refine the skills needed to succeed during qualification Practice qualification standards for the BUIS are the same as with standard iron sights If the Soldier qualifies during the practice qualification it may be counted as the record qualification Record Qualification 8 17 Qualification with the BUIS is conducted on a standard record fire range and the standards for qualification are the same as the record fire day standards M68 CLOSE COMBAT OPTIC 8 18 The M68 CCO is a reflex nontelescopic sight It uses a red aiming reference collimated dot and is designed for the two eyes open method of sighting The dot follows the horizontal and vertical movement of the firer s eye while remaining fixed on the target No centering or focusing is required NOTE See Table 8 4 for the current training program 8 12 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Advanced Optics Lasers and Iron Sights Table 8 4 M68 close combat optic training program M68 CLOSE COMBAT OPTIC Instructional Intent e Soldiers qualify with the M68 CCO Special Instructions Ensure that Soldiers Are proficient with the M68 CCO Install the half moon spacer when using the M68 CCO with the M4 M16A4 and MWS Do not install the half moon spacer when using the M68 CCO with the M16A1 A2 Use the proper offset during boresighting procedures Confirm 10 meter boresight with a 25 met
222. an sharpshooter and expert and at what target ranges REMEDIAL TRAINING 1 70 For firers who need additional training to meet the requirements remedial training is conducted using the EST 2000 or LMTS Soldiers proficient in marksmanship skills can assist in the remedial training effort NOTE Table 1 1 shows the training devices that a commander may use to assist in remedial training and sustain weapon proficiency See Appendix A for more information about these training devices The devices replicate but are not intended to replace LFXs or qualifications Active and reserve component units should consult DA Pam 350 38 for regulatory guidance on mandatory live fire training and qualification events 1 16 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Marksmanship Training Table 1 1 Training simulators devices and exercises Engagement Laser Location of Short Range TRAINING Skills Trainer Marksmanship Misses and Hits Training DEVICE EST 2000 Training System LOMAH Ammunition LMTS SRTA and M2 Bolt Zero Practice Fire Simulated Record Fire CBRN Practice Simulated CBRN Record Unassisted Night Practice Unassisted Simulated Night Record NVD Zero NVD Practice NVD Simulated Record Advanced Skills UNIT LIVE FIRE EXERCISES 1 71 Unit LFXs are planned prepared and performed as outlined in the mission training plan for the infantry platoon and squad Within the framework of these exercises Soldiers perform marksman
223. ance of the target 2 A safety block is provided for training purposes to limit the operator from selecting high power modes of operation 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 2 21 Chapter 2 2 A4 The aiming lights are used with NVDs and can be used as handheld illuminators pointers or mounted on the weapon with the included brackets and accessory mounts In the weapon mounted mode the aiming lights can be used to direct fire and to illuminate and designate targets Figure 2 29 AN PEQ 2A B target pointer illuminator aiming light MOUNTING ON THE M16A4 RIFLE OR M4 MWS 2 45 The Picatinny 1 Figure 2 30 or Insight 2 Figure 2 30 rail grabber may be used to mount the AN PEQ 2A B on the ARS 2 46 To mount the AN PEQ 2A B on the ARS NOTE Reference the weapon components using the numbers listed in Figure 2 30 Figure 2 30 Mounting the AN PEQ 2A B on the M16A4 rifle and M4 MWS 1 Mount the rail grabber all the way forward on the top or either side of the ARS ensuring that it does not extend beyond the end of the ARS 2 22 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Weapon Characteristics Accessories and Ammunition NOTE The AN PEQ 2A B will not retain zero if the rail grabber extends beyond the end of the integrated rail when mounted 2 Tighten the torque limiting knob 4 until it clicks twice 3 If installing the AN PEQ 2A B with the Insight rail grabber tool tighten the AN PEQ 2A B and rail grabber so that it will not come loo
224. and gravity e Soldier can manipulate the rear sight for different ranges 7 258 The trainer sets up a range estimation course using E type silhouettes at ranges from 100 meters to 700 meters Soldiers practice on this course until they find the method that works best for them 7 259 Once the Soldiers have had time to practice trainers test their ability to estimate range The Soldier is given six targets He must estimate the range within 50 meters of the actual range to receive a GO The Soldier must estimate range correctly six out of six targets to move on to the next portion of this phase Methods of Range Determination 7 260 SDMs can use five different methods of range determination 100 meter unit of measure method Range card method Front sightpost method Appearance of objects method Combination method 100 Meter Unit of Measure Method 7 261 To use this method the SDM must be able to visualize a distance of 100 meters on the ground e Forranges up to 500 meters the SDM determines the number of 100 meter increments between the two objects he wishes to measure e Beyond 500 meters he must select a point halfway to the object determine the number of 100 meter increments to the halfway point and then double the number 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 7 63 Chapter 7 NOTES 1 See Chapter 6 for more information about this method of range determination 2 For example terrain with much dead space limits the accuracy
225. and lock them prior to firing Install the plastic insert in the BUIS during boresighting and zeroing Observables ooldiers attain the same day standards for zeroing and qualification as with the standard iron sights See Chapter 5 CONCEPT 8 11 The BUIS is adjusted for a 300 meter battlefield zero to provide backup in the event an optic or laser device fails to function The BUIS is zeroed the 4 target on the backside of M16A2 zeroing target NSN 6920 01 395 2949 NOTE The 25 meter zeroing procedures are the same as for conventional rear sight assembly on M16 rifles and M4 carbines 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 8 11 Chapter 8 CONDUCT OF TRAINING NOTES 1 The BUIS training strategy is the same as the iron sight training strategy 2 All procedures for the BUIS are the same as with standard iron sights 8 12 BUIS equipment training should familiarize the Soldier with the proper operation and characteristics of the BUIS Boresight the Backup Iron Sights 8 13 Optional Zero 8 14 The zeroing standards for the BUIS are the same as with iron sights e To zero the BUIS for M4 carbines set the range selector to 300 meters e To zero the BUIS to an M16A4 place the range selector on the white line below the 300 meter mark Target Detection 8 15 Target detection procedures for the BUIS are the same as with standard iron sights Practice Qualification 8 16 A practice qualification must
226. anship Instruction 4 49 The side aiming technique can be used to obtain a correct sight picture Figure 4 17 It involves positioning the front sightpost to the side of the target in line with the vertical center of mass keeping the sights aligned The front sightpost is moved horizontally until the target 15 directly centered on the front sightpost Figure 4 17 Side aiming technique Front Sightpost 4 50 The front sightpost 15 vital to proper firing and should be replaced when damaged The post should be blackened when it 15 shiny the firer cannot focus precisely on the tip of the front sightpost Aiming Practice 4 51 Aiming practice is conducted before firing live rounds During dry firing the Soldier should practice sight alignment and placement of the point of aim Training aids such as the MI5A1 aiming card can be used to do this BREATH CONTROL 4 52 While sighted on a target the firer must be aware of the rifle s movement as a result of breathing Two breath control techniques are practiced during dry fire e Breath control for engaging single targets e Breath control for engaging short exposure targets 4 53 As the firer s skills improve and as timed or multiple targets are presented he must learn to control his breath at any part of the breathing cycle The coach trainer ensures that the firer uses both breathing techniques and understands them by instructing him to exaggerate his breathing 12 August 2
227. apon when required This section provides guidance on training Soldiers to be effective in total darkness without using iron sights and in limited visibility when using iron sights NOTE See Appendix C for more detailed information about night fighting UNASSISTED NIGHT FIRE TRAINING 7 115 All Soldiers must be able to effectively employ their weapons during limited visibility Soldiers must experience the various conditions of night combat from total darkness to the many types of artificial illumination NOTE See Table 7 10 for the current training program Table 7 10 Unassisted night fire training program UNASSISTED NIGHT FIRE TRAINING PROGRAM Instructional Intent e Develop the Soldiers confidence in his ability to hit targets when he cannot see through his weapon sights and does not have night vision capability Special Instructions Ensure that The M16A2 A3 A4 rifle s or M4 carbine s rear sight is set on the 0 2 aperture The M16A1 s rear sight is set on the unmarked aperture Each Soldier is given two 15 round magazines with 10 rounds of ball ammunition and 5 rounds of tracer ammunition in each magazine Each Soldier engages the 50 meter F type silhouette target from the prone supported or foxhole supported fighting position with one magazine Each Soldier engages the 50 meter F type silhouette target from the prone unsupported fighting position or kneeling position with the second magazine Observables Eac
228. arallel method 7 48 to 7 49 7 49 illus malfunctions see also troubleshooting and destruction 3 2 to 3 7 failure to eject 3 6 failure to extract 3 5 failure to feed chamber or lock 3 2 to 3 3 3 2 illus failure to fire cartridge 3 3 to 3 4 3 4 illus other malfunctions 3 6 to 3 7 3 6 table 3 7 illus marking targets see also field fire and target detection 6 4 to 6 5 exposure time of target 6 4 good and poor points of aim 6 5 number of targets 6 4 spacing of targets 6 5 marksmanship training strategy see also training 1 1 to 1 5 initial entry training see also initial entry traming 1 2 1 2 illus Index 10 sustainment training see also sustainment training 1 2 to 1 5 1 3 illus modes of fire see also Preliminary Marksmanship Instruction 4 11 to 4 12 4 11 illus automatic mode of fire 4 12 4 11 illus burst mode of fire 4 12 4 11 illus semiautomatic mode of fire 4 11 to 4 12 4 11 illus moving target engagements see also Advanced Rifle Marksmanship 7 36 to 7 41 7 36 table modifications 7 36 to 7 41 marksmanship fundamentals 7 36 to 7 41 7 37 table 7 37 illus 7 38 illus 7 39 illus 7 39 table 7 40 table moving target live fire exercise 7 41 multiple shot group analysis see also grouping procedures 5 7 to 5 13 5 8 illus acceptable shot grouping performance 5 8 to 5 9 5 8 illus improper shot groups on the
229. arksmanship special reaction team short range training ammunition Standards in Training Commission DA Pam 350 38 situation training exercise training aids devices simulators and simulations training circular training support centers technical manual FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Glossary TPIAL target pointer illuminator aiming light TWS thermal weapon sight UO urban operations USACRC United States Army Combat Readiness Center WFF warfighting functions WFOV wide field of view SECTION TERMS Active Army All Regular Army RA forces in the Active Army adjusted aiming point An aiming point that allows for gravity wind target movement zero changes and MOPP firing advanced marksmanship Normally refers to marksmanship skills taught during ARM advanced rifle marksmanship Normally refers to the formal marksmanship instruction received by infantrymen upon completion of BRM during OSUT aiming A marksmanship fundamental refers to the precise alignment of the rifle sights with the target aiming card The M15A1 aiming card is a cardboard sleeve with a moveable insert The rear sight aperture front sight post and target are pictured This training device is used in conjunction with aiming instructions aiming point A place on a target in which the rifle sights are aligned normally the target center of mass alibi target A target or additional target a soldier is allowed to engage during qualification firing
230. at fire techniques see also advanced rifle marksmanship 7 8 to 7 24 automatic or burst fire see also automatic or burst fire 7 12 to 7 16 quick fire see also quick fire 7 19 to 7 24 rapid semiautomatic fire see also rapid semiautomatic fire 7 8 to 7 12 suppressive fire see also suppressive fire 7 16 to 7 19 composite risk management D 3 to D 9 D 4 table D 5 table D 6 table DA Form 7566 Composite Risk Management Worksheet see also DA Form D 7 to D 9 D 8 illus D 9 table responsibilities D 6 to D 7 computer controlled ranges see also range procedures and range operations checklist E 10 to E 15 range selection E 10 to E 15 E 10 table automated field fire range E 12 E 12 illus automated record fire range E 13 E 13 illus modified record fire range E 14 E 14 illus qualification training range E 15 E 15 illus rifle machine gun zero range FM 3 22 9 Index E 11 E 11 illus cycles of functioning see also Preliminary Marksmanship Instruction 4 4 to 4 10 chambering 4 5 4 5 illus cocking 4 10 4 10 illus ejecting 4 9 4 9 illus extracting 4 8 4 8 illus feeding 4 4 4 4 illus firing 4 7 4 7 illus locking 4 6 4 6 illus unlocking 4 8 4 8 illus D DA Form 3595 R Record Fire Scorecard example of completed form B 3 illus reproducible form B 1 3601 R Single Target Field Fire I Scorecard example of completed form
231. ate action quickly Repeated dry fire practice using blanks or dummy rounds followed by live fire training and evaluation ensures that Soldiers can rapidly apply immediate action procedures Rapid Magazine Changes 7 47 Rapid magazine changes are vital in maintaining automatic or burst fire Rapid magazine changes must be correctly taught and practiced during dry fire and live fire exercises until the Soldier becomes proficient 7 14 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Advanced Rifle Marksmanship AUTOMATIC OR BURST FIRE TRAINING NOTE Soldiers should be well trained in all aspects of slow semiautomatic firing before attempting any automatic training Those who display a lack of knowledge of fundamental skills should not advance to automatic or burst fire training until these skills are learned 7 48 Initial training should focus on the modifications to the fundamentals and other basic combat skills necessary during automatic firing 7 49 Unit training is vital to properly applying this technique Soldiers must be taught the advantages and disadvantages of automatic and burst firing so they know when it should be used Without this knowledge Soldiers tend to switch to the automatic or burst fire mode in life threatening situations NOTE See Table 7 3 for the current training program Table 7 3 Automatic or burst fire training program AUTOMATIC OR BURST FIRE TRAINING PROGRAM Instructional Intent Soldiers learn the advantages and dis
232. barrel locking lugs long range sight The aperture marked L on the M16A1 rifle equipped with standard sights provides for a zero at 375 meters The M16A1 rifle equipped with LLLSS has an aperture marked L but it is a regular sight Low Light Level Sight System LLLSS A sighting system for low visibility firing that replaces the standard front and rear sights on the M16A1 rifle marksman The designation given to the lowest qualification rating maximum effective range The greatest distance at which a soldier may be expected to deliver a target hit maximum effective rate of fire The highest rates of fire that can be maintained and still achieve target hits maximum range The longest distance a projectile will travel when fired from a weapon held at the optimum angle minute of angle A angle that would cover 1 inch at a distance of 100 yards 2 inches at 200 yards and so on Each click of sight adjustment on the M16A1 rifle with standard sights is equal to one minute of angle Multiple Integrated Laser Engagement System MILES A tactile shooting device that uses a low powered laser to activate detectors placed on people and vehicles muzzle velocity The speed of a projectile as it leaves the muzzle of the weapon natural point of aim The direction of the body rifle combination 1s oriented while in a stable relaxed firing position natural respiratory pause The temporary cessation of breathing between an exhale and inhale nig
233. based on wind speed full value 7 68 Table 7 27 Drift for 10 mph wind using M855 ammunition when fired from M16A2 rifle with 300 meter battlesight zero 7 69 Table 7 28 Firing event known distance hold 7 69 Table 7 29 Firing event Record Fire and 7 69 Table 8 1 Weapon aided vision device combinations 8 1 Table 8 2 Borelight training program 8 2 Table 8 3 Backup iron sights training program 8 11 Table 8 4 M68 close combat optic training 8 13 Table 8 5 Advanced combat optical gunsight training program 8 17 Table 8 6 AN PAS 13B C D thermal weapon sight training program 8 20 Table 8 7 AN PAQ 4B C or AN PEQ 2A B infrared aiming laser training program 8 24 Table 8 8 AN PVS 4 night vision device training 8 28 Table A 1 Laser marksmanship training strategy parts 151 A 5 Table 1 Laser marksmanship training strategy parts list continued A 6 Table A 2 Action conditions and standards for a reflective target exercise
234. be alert to note the point of disappearance for all of the targets In such situations the Soldier should mark the location of as many targets as possible before engaging any of them By doing so he will know the location of several targets and can engage each of them in rapid succession FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Field Fire SPACING OF TARGETS 6 20 The greater the interval between targets the more difficult it is to note each target s movements When there is considerable distance between targets the observer should accurately locate and mark the one nearest to his position and note the general area of the others GOOD AND POOR POINTS OF AIM 6 21 Good points of aim are easily distinguishable in the surrounding terrain Targets disappearing behind good points of aim such as manmade objects and large terrain features can be easily marked for future reference 6 22 Poor points of aim are not easily distinguishable within the surrounding terrain Targets disappearing behind poor points of aim are difficult to mark accurately and are easily lost 6 23 If two targets offer the same degree of danger to the Soldier but one disappears behind a good point of aim and the other behind a poor point of aim the Soldier should mark the location of the target behind the good point of aim and engage the other target first RANGE DETERMINATION 6 24 Range determination 15 the process of finding the distance between two points In most situation
235. ble steady firing position Figure 4 14 The firer is the best judge of the quality of his position If he can hold the front sightpost steady 4 16 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Preliminary Marksmanship Instruction through the fall of the hammer he has a good position Steady position incorporates the following elements e Nonfiring hand grip Rifle s buttstock position Firing hand grip Firing elbow placement Nonfiring side elbow placement Cheek to stock weld Support and muscle relaxation Natural point of aim NONFIRING HAND GRIP GRIP IS LIGHT NONFIRING ELBOW Figure 4 14 Steady position 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 4 17 Chapter 4 Nonfiring Hand Grip 4 35 The weapon s handguard rests lightly on the heel of the nonfiring hand in the V formed by the thumb and fingers Rifle s Buttstock Position 4 36 Place the weapon s buttstock into the pocket of the firing shoulder When wearing IBA place the weapon s buttstock where the pocket should be this reduces the effect of recoil and ensures a steady position Firing Hand Grip 4 37 The firing hand grasps the pistol grip so that it fits in the V formed by the thumb and forefinger The forefinger is placed on the trigger so that the lay of the weapon is not disturbed when the trigger is squeezed The remaining three fingers exert a slight rearward pressure to ensure that the buttstock remains in the pocket of the shoulder Firing Elbow Placement 4 3
236. bout 10 meter offsets for each weapon combination BORELIGHT 2 71 The borelight Figure 2 47 15 an eye safe laser that is used to zero aiming lasers such as the AN PAQ 4 or AN PEQ 2 without a 25 meter confirmation The borelight will also boresight optics and iron sights to ensure that the first shot group hits the 25 meter zeroing target when zeroing the weapon The borelight comes with a 5 56 millimeter 7 62 millimeter and 50 caliber mandrel M203 and MK19 mandrels can be purchased separately PULSE LOW GOGGLE OFF Figure 2 47 Borelight with a 5 56 millimeter mandrel 2 72 The borelight has four settings e OFF e GOGGLE e LOW e PULSE 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 2 33 Chapter 2 OFF SETTING 2 73 This setting is used when the borelight is not in use GOGGLE SETTING 2 74 This setting is used when the boresight is being used with NVGs in a tactical environment LOW SETTING 2 75 This setting is used during normal operations PULSE SETTING 2 76 This setting is used during dry fire training 10 METER BORESIGHT 2 77 The 10 meter boresighting target is used in conjunction with the borelight The 10 meter boresighting target is a 1 centimeter grid system with a crosshair and a circle Figure 2 48A The crosshair is the point of aim for the aiming device and the circle is the point of impact for the borelight NOTE Refer to Chapter 8 for a detailed explanation of boresighting procedures 25 ME
237. cation the rifle paper holder or paper is moved so shots fall on a clean section of the paper NOTE Any movement of the rifle or paper between the first and third shots of a group voids the exercise Two devices are available to hold the rifle Rifle holding devices Figures A 14 and A 15 are positioned on level ground or are secured by sandbags or stakes to ensure the rifle does not move during the firing of the three shots Movement of the paper is eased by using a solid backing Figure A 16 Any movement of either 1s reflected in the size of the shot group Several varieties of wooden target boxes have been locally fabricated Figure A 15 Staked rifle holding box 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 A 25 Appendix A Figure A 16 Paper being placed on a stationary object A 88 Each Soldier dry fires the exercise until he has demonstrated six out of six of the points of aim within the plastic target box paddle s 4 centimeter template The exercise should be repeated as many times as necessary to achieve two consecutive shot groups that will fit into the same 2 centimeter circle A 89 A simulated shot group covered with a 1 centimeter diameter circle indicates consistent aiming Since no rifle or ammunition variability is involved and since there is no requirement to place the shot group in a certain location 1 centimeter standard may be compared to obtaining a 4 centimeter shot group on the 25 meter live fire zero range NOTE The
238. cceeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeessaeeeeeeaees 2 19 AN PEQ 2A B Target Pointer Illuminator Aiming Light 2 21 AN PEQ 15 Advanced Target Pointer Illuminator Aiming Light 2 24 AN PAS 13B C D V1 Light Weapon Thermal Sight and AN PAS 13B C D Heavy Weapon Thermal 2 26 AN PVS 4 Night Vision Sight iiie Led et aa a e ear Cose 2 28 DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION Approved for public release distribution is unlimited This publication supersedes FM 3 22 9 24 April 2003 i Contents Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 ON SONE coetu tesis ated dos 2 30 Advanced Combat Optical 2 31 Section IV 10 Meter Boresight and 25 Meter Zero Offset 2 33 met 2 33 TOsMeter BOLeSIOD castas asia de coer med v rae d dara gt oa sn te d 2 34 Zb Meter Zero rates rot ut etta E 2 34 Section V AmmuhnltlOli z occ reise eua cepa uu e aa ecd S OPES ES 2 35 AUTMOFIZSG AMMUNION ete ET 2 35 A 2 37 2 6 m e 2 39 TROUBLESHOOTING AND DESTRUCTION 3 1 DIOD PAGES orlik oaia 3 1
239. ce and focus their attention on the Soldiers having the greatest problems e Soldiers are motivated to fire better since their peers can observe their performance 5 53 On the second and subsequent shot groups the target spotters markers should be moved and placed in the holes of the new shot group The old holes must be pasted using black pastors on black and white pastors on white Failure to paste all bullet holes makes it difficult to determine one shot group from another Figure 5 21 Target marking with spotters markers 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 5 21 Chapter 5 KNOWN DISTANCE SHOT GROUPING ANALYSIS 5 54 Figure 5 22 shows two targets that were both shot with three individual rounds A On a pop up target these two firing performances would provide the same information to the firing line each target was hit once and missed twice Once the targets are properly marked with spotters it becomes clear why only one round hit either target The firer on the left is failing to properly apply the four fundamentals the firer on the right needs to make an adjustment to his iron sights assuming that wind was not a factor triangulate the shot group and read the appropriate adjustments from the target 5 55 Figure 5 22 shows another two targets that were both shot with three individual rounds B On a pop up target these two firing performances would appear to be the same Once properly marked with spotters it is obvious that the fire
240. cessories mounted on the rail will lose their zero To prevent the screw from vibrating loose during firing apply locking compound to the original screw or use a new screw when reinstalling the ARS For optics and lasers to retain zero the ARS must be properly installed Mounted accessories will not retain zero unless proper procedures are followed as outlined in TM 9 1005 319 23 amp P Accessories may be mounted on the right side of the ARS but are not currently supported with zeroing procedures Further the bottom rail of the ARS will not retain zero Only accessories that do not require zero retention such as a flashlight or vertical pistol grip can be mounted on the bottom rail RAIL COVERS Figure 2 15 Adapter rail system 2 19 Rail covers protect the firer s hands from direct contact with the metal parts of the ARS and protect the ARS surfaces from excess wear and damage The rail covers are available in 11 9 6 5 and 4 rib sections For ease of reference the shorter lengths can be referred to by the number of ribs along their outer surfaces 11 9 and 5 rib sections are shown in Figure 2 16 12 August 2008 Full Length 11 rib Figure 2 16 M5 rail covers heat shields FM 3 22 9 Chapter 2 2 20 ARS rail covers can be quickly attached and detached from the ARS A spring latch at one end of each rail cover automatically engages cutouts at the end of each rail To slide the rail cover beyond a cutout o
241. clears the top of the magazine the expansion of the magazine spring forces the follower and a new round into the path of the forward movement of the bolt The expansion of the action spring sends the buffer assembly and bolt carrier group forward with enough force to strip a new round from the magazine Figure 4 2 Feeding FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Preliminary Marksmanship Instruction CHAMBERING 4 5 During chambering the following actions occur This process 1s shown in Figure 4 3 1 As the bolt carrier group continues to move forward the face of the bolt thrusts the new round into the chamber 2 At the same time the extractor claw grips the rim of the cartridge and the ejector is compressed Figure 4 3 Chambering 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 4 5 Chapter 4 LOCKING 4 6 During locking the following actions occur This process 15 shown in Figure 4 4 1 As the bolt carrier group moves forward the bolt cam pin riding in the guide channel in the upper receiver keeps the bolt in its most forward position 2 Just before the bolt locking lugs make contact with the barrel extension the bolt cam pin emerges from the guide channel 3 The pressure exerted by the contact of the bolt locking lugs and barrel extension causes the bolt cam pin to move along the cam track located in the bolt carrier in a counterclockwise direction rotating the bolt locking lugs in line behind the barrel extension locking lugs
242. clude the following e Firers assume a good supported prone unsupported position Scorers point out the limits of your lane Firers lock your first magazine Load Scan your sector Cease fire Lock and clear all weapons Record Fire E 22 Record fire commands include the following e Firers assume a good supported prone unsupported position Scorers point out the limits of your sector Firers lock your first 20 round magazine Load your sector Cease fire Lock and clear all weapons Rapid Fire Exercises E 23 The following commands are used for rapid fire exercises e Lock and clear all weapons Clear on the right Clear on the left The firing line is clear Firers assume the position Assistants secure two magazines of five rounds each Issue the firer one magazine of five rounds Lock one magazine Load Ready on the right Ready on the left Ready on the firing line Watch your targets Firers assume the appropriate firing position and commence firing when the targets are presented E 4 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Range Procedures and Range Operations Checklist E 24 When all of the targets are withdrawn the range officer checks for slow firers or malfunctions and then allows them to fire E 25 The pit NCOIC organizes orients and provides safety for the pit detail E 26 The success of KD firing depends on eff
243. cord Fire Land eire eet oue iurare dad e za svo rud 6 10 T 6 13 Section IV Alternate Qualification Courses 6 16 Known Distance Record Fire Range 6 17 25 Meter Scaled Target Alternate 6 18 15 Meter Scaled Target Alternate 6 20 ADVANCED RIFLE MARKSMANSHIP nnn 7 1 Section Advanced Firing Positions 7 1 Kneeling Supported Firing Position 7 2 Standing Unsupported Firing 7 3 Standing Supported Firing Position Around Obstacles 7 4 Modified Firing Positions uen e ieee Aenea 7 5 Urban Operations Firing Positions 1 6 Section Combat Fire Techniques 7 8 Rapid Semiautomatic 7 8 AULOMalIC Or Buts EIL od teca aia we tops eiu iue re 7 12 SUD DiC SIV Gil Ilis ucc castus eect ans eed 7 16 ad
244. cord fire range Soldiers fire at 100 200 and 300 meter targets with time constraints On the modified field fire range Soldiers fire at 100 200 and 300 meter targets on a standard 50 to 300 meter field fire qualification range NOTES 1 Ifa qualification range is not available this exercise may be shot on a standard 75 to 300 meter field fire range Targets and target frames must be set up to accommodate this training 2 On ranges that are built in yards instead of meters the same KD targets will be used The difference is so small that it does not need to be considered The KD range does not require Soldiers to detect targets estimate ranges to targets scan sectors of fire respond to surprise targets respond to short exposure targets or engage multiple targets An advantage of a KD range is the ability to see precisely where each bullet hits To benefit from this training Soldiers must clearly see the results of each firing whether a group single shot or 10 round exercise KNOWN DISTANCE TARGET DESCRIPTION 5 51 Downrange feedback training should include detailed explanations of the targets Consider the 5 20 following KD targets are large enough to capture all bullets fired Standard E type and F type silhouettes can be used if standard KD targets are not available The 16 centimeter circle on 100 meter targets the 32 centimeter circle on 200 meter targets and the 48 centimeter circle on 300 meter target
245. ctice The instructor trainer must understand how to analyze shot groups correctly 5 9 properly mark the shot groups Figure 5 2 1 Connect the three bullet holes on the target with a straight line 2 Place a number inside of the shot group NOTES 1 The number represents the center of the three shots 2 When two shots are near one end of the group and the third shot is toward the other end the number is placed closer to the two near shots Figure 5 3 3 This is not a precise marking that requires a measurement but a procedure to help with shot group analysis 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 5 3 Chapter 5 5 10 The three round shot group allows the firer s performance to be evaluated Figure 5 2 Shot group marking 1 Figure 5 3 Central point of an odd shaped group SINGLE SHOT GROUP ANALYSIS 5 11 The purpose of single shot group analysis is to identify firer errors on the single shots of a shot group so the Soldier can correct these errors while firing the next shot group 5 12 Shot group analysis begins with the instructor trainer observing the Soldier while he fires looking for proper position aim trigger squeeze and breathing Then the instructor trainer analyzes the shot group to confirm problem areas NOTE Coaches should not use shot group analysis without observing the firer 5 13 The ideal shot group will have all three rounds within a 2 centimeter circle Three rounds within a 4 ce
246. d firer should adjust to the left and high Actual displacement of the point of aim must be determined by using downrange feedback targets positioned more than 75 meters from the firer Breath Control 7 107 Moving when encumbered by MOPP equipment requires more physical effort and breathing 15 restricted while wearing the protective mask Physical exertion can produce labored breathing and make settling into a normal breathing rhythm much more difficult which in turn can increase the breath rate All of these factors make holding and controlling the breath to produce a well aimed shot more energy and time consuming Emphasis must be placed on rapid target engagement during the limited amount of time a firer can control his breath Trigger Squeeze 7 108 Consider the following modifications e MOPP gloves complicate the act of grasping the pistol grip and squeezing the trigger with the index finger The action of the trigger finger is restricted and the fit of the glove may require the release of the swing down trigger guard e Because the trigger feels different control differs from that used in barehanded firing This difference cannot be accurately predicted 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 7 27 Chapter 7 7 109 Dry fire training using dime washer exercises or simulators such as the EST 2000 or LMTS may be necessary to ensure that the firer knows the changes he will encounter during live fire MISSION ORIENTED PROTECTIVE POSTURE E
247. d image and the Soldier is aiming to the right it appears left to the observer The device must be precisely positioned on the rifle it may need to be bent to stay on The observer s position must remain constant The observer must talk with the firer to ensure a correct analysis of the aiming procedures A 51 The Soldier must achieve six out of six proper sight alignment drills NOTE The M16 sighting device 1s made for left and right handed firers MIRROR SURFACE GUNNER S VIEW OBSERVER S VIEW The M16 sighting device is made for left and right handed firers and is available for the M16A2 Figure A 8 M16 sighting device 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 A 17 Appendix A MISA2 M23 BLANK FIRING ATTACHMENT A 52 The M15A2 M23 BFA Figure A 9 attaches to the muzzle of M16 M4 series weapons It 15 designed to keep sufficient gas in the weapon s barrel to allow for semiautomatic automatic or burst firing with blank ammunition M200 only A 53 When using the M15A2 M23 BFA observe the following recommendations e After firing 50 rounds check the attachment for a tight fit e Continuous blank firing results in a carbon buildup in the bore gas tube and carrier key If this occurs follow the cleaning procedures outlined in TM 9 1005 249 10 NOTE The M15A2 is painted red and is used on the M16 series weapons The M23 is painted yellow and is used on the M4 series weapons For identification the M23 is stamp
248. d long term use of 100 percent tracer rounds which could cause deposits of incendiary material or chemical compounds that could damage the barrel When tracer rounds are fired they are mixed with ball ammunition in a ratio of no greater than one to one with a preferred ratio of three or four ball rounds to one tracer round This cartridge contains no propellant or primer The primer well is open to prevent damage to the firing pin The M855 cartridge has a 62 grain gilded metal jacketed lead alloy core bullet with a steel penetrator The primer and case are waterproof This round is also linked and used in the M249 NOTE This ammunition should not be used in the M16A1 except under emergency conditions and only at targets less than 90 meters away The twist of the M16A1 rifling is not sufficient to stabilize the length of the round s projectile 2 35 Chapter 2 M856 cartridge 5 56 mm tracer M862 cartridge 5 56 mm short range training ammunition SRTA M995 cartridge 5 56 mm armor piercing AP _ 2 36 Table 2 8 Authorized ammunition continued CARTRIDGE ROUND IDENTIFICATION USE ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The M856 tracer cartridge is used in the M16A2 3 4 and M4 series weapons Red tip orange when linked 4 to 1 for the M249 The M862 SRTA is used in all rifles and is designed exclusively for training Conventional brass cartridge case The M995 cartri
249. dards for an interactive dry fire exercise ACTION Demonstrate the integrated act of firing while using the LMTS 130 target system CONDITIONS Given an M16 M4 series weapon laser transmitter with mandrel and TR 700 targets with military masks STANDARDS Achieve 8 hits out of 10 shots two times on an open faced target from the prone unsupported position Achieve 8 hits out of 10 shots two times on a 300 meter masked target from the supported position A 31 This exercise provides Soldiers with an opportunity for practicing the four fundamentals of rifle marksmanship in the integrated act of firing and may easily be conducted concurrently with Exercise 1 on the same station TR 700 targets may be used both indoors and outdoors in various environments and arrangements to meet the training requirement Exercise Performance A 32 To perform Exercise 2 use the following procedures 1 The Soldier assumes a proper firing position using sandbags for a supported position Figure A 3 NOTE Sleeping mats should be used on hard floors 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 A 9 Appendix A 10M 15M or 25M Figure A 3 Exercise 2 2 The Soldier applies the four fundamentals of marksmanship to engage a TR 700 open faced target with 10 shots from the prone unsupported position The Soldier cocks the rifle after each shot forcing a break and reestablishing a proper stock weld to build muscle memory NOTE The TR 700 open faced target at
250. de hotter objects appear white while cooler objects have shades of gray to black Black Hot Mode C 50 When using the black hot mode hotter objects appear black while the cooler objects are shades of gray to white 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 C 9 This page intentionally left blank Appendix D Range Safety and Risk Management All personnel training on a rifle range should be briefed on the safety and local requirements for that range This briefing fulfills the minimum requirements for a rifle range safety briefing Information may be added to conform to local requirements and safety regulations ARs 385 10 and 385 63 and DA Pam 385 63 should be reviewed by all range personnel before operating any range RECOMMENDED BRIEFING D 1 The first priority on any range is training but safety must be at the forefront of the training program The safety program prescribes the safety precautions necessary to minimize accidents when firing and using ammunition during training and range operations The safety program should identify Surface danger zones SDZs as described in AR 385 63 The location of medical personnel Left and right limits of the range Firers never fire outside of these limits The designated smoking area if applicable D 2 Further the safety program should include the following information Inspect for objects located near the weapon s muzzle before firing especially during unassisted night fire When not o
251. de placing the nonfiring side elbow close to the side of the magazine For the basic prone unsupported position Figure 4 21 spread the legs apart with the inside of the feet flat on the ground For the alternate prone unsupported firing position Figure 4 22 bend the firing leg to relieve pressure on the lower back Place the weapon s buttstock between the SAPI plate and bicep to stabilize the weapon and absorb recoil Grasp the pistol grip with the firing hand Lower the firing elbow to the ground Place both elbows on the ground to support the upper body 10 Rest the rifle in the V formed by the thumb and fingers of the nonfiring hand 11 Adjust the position of the firing elbow until the shoulders are approximately level 12 Pull back firmly on the rifle with both hands 13 Obtain a stock weld and relax keeping the heels close to the ground NOTE To increase comfort and stability while wearing IBA in the prone position sand or dirt should be scooped underneath the chest while preparing to fire Elbow and knee pads can be worn to relieve IBA induced pain and pressure 4 26 Figure 4 22 Alternate prone unsupported firing position FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Preliminary Marksmanship Instruction PRONE SUPPORTED FIRING POSITION 4 70 To assume the prone supported firing position 1 Face the target and drop to the ground breaking the fall with the weapon s buttstock 2 For the basic prone supported firi
252. definite targets cannot be seen most suppressive fire should be well aimed 7 55 When controlling suppressive fires two factors must be considered e Point of aim e Rate of fire Point of Aim 7 56 Suppressive fire should be well aimed sustained semiautomatic fire Although lacking a definite target the Soldier must be taught to control and accurately deliver fire within the limits of the suppressed area As when engaging a point target the weapon sights are used with the front sightpost placed so each shot impacts within the desired area Rate of Fire 7 57 During most phases of live fire training for example grouping zeroing qualifying shots are delivered using slow semiautomatic fire one round every 3 to 10 seconds During training this allows a slow and precise application of the fundamentals Successful suppressive fire requires a faster but sustained rate of fire Soldiers may need to fire full automatic or bursts 13 rounds per second for a few seconds to gain initial fire superiority Rapid semiautomatic fire one round every one or two seconds allows the firer to sustain a large volume of accurate fire while conserving ammunition MODIFICATIONS FOR SUPPRESSIVE FIRE 7 16 7 58 The tactical situation dictates the most useful rate of fire but the following must be considered Marksmanship fundamentals e Rapid magazine changes e Ammunition conservation FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Advanced Rifle Marksman
253. der bracket 2 Figure 2 32 The training extender is not required when e Mounting the AN PEQ 2A B onto the side of the MWS e Using the Picatinny rail grabber 2 51 To attach the training extender hand tighten it by turning the thumb wheel 3 Figure 2 32 on the training extender clockwise Figure 2 32 MILES training extender bracket installation on M16 M4 series weapons NOTES 1 The AN PEQ 2A B and AN PAQ 4B C must be zeroed before and after using the MILES training extender 2 For further information refer to TM 11 5855 308 12 amp P AN PEQ 15 ADVANCED TARGET POINTER ILLUMINATOR AIMING LIGHT 2 24 2 52 The AN PEQ 15 advanced target pointer illuminator aiming light ATPIAL Figure 2 33 is a multifunctional laser that emits visible or IR light for precise weapon aiming and target area illumination This ruggedized system can be used as a handheld illuminator pointer or can be mounted to weapons equipped with a MIL STD 1913 rail Unlike the AN PAQ 4 and AN PEQ 2A 2B the AN PEQ 15 has an integrated rail grabber molded into the body NOTE The AN PEQ 15 can be used during force on force training in the low power modes only High power modes can be used on live fire ranges exceeding 220 meters only Refer to TM 9 5855 1914 13 amp P for more information 2 53 The AN PEQ 15 ATPIAL s visible aiming laser provides for active target acquisition in low light conditions and close quarters combat situations and allows users t
254. dge is used by the M249 SAW M16 A2 A3 A4 and M4 series weapons It is intended for use against light armored targets Aluminum cup sits at the rear of the projectile for the purpose of properly locating the penetrator within the projectile FM 3 22 9 The M856 tracer cartridge has characteristics similar to the M196 tracer with a slightly longer tracer burnout distance This cartridge has a 63 7 grain bullet The M856 does not have a steel penetrator NOTE This ammunition should not be used in the M16A1 except under emergency conditions and only at targets less than 90 meters away The twist of the M16A1 rifling is not sufficient to stabilize the length of the round s projectile The M862 SRTA can be used in lieu of service ammunition on indoor ranges and by units who have a limited range fan that does not allow the firing of service ammunition If adequate range facilities are not available for sustainment training SRTA can be used for any firing exercise of 25 meters or less This includes the 25 meter scaled silhouette 25 meter alternate qualification course and quick fire training SRTA can also be used for urban operations UO training NOTES 1 See Appendix A for use of SRTA in training 2 Although SRTA closely replicates the trajectory and characteristics of service ammunition out to 25 meters the settings placed on the sights for SRTA could be different for service ammunition SRTA should
255. dier must apply target lead Figure 7 18 and understand how target lead and bullet speed relate to the range angle and speed of the target To hit the target depicted the Soldier must aim and fire at position D when the target is at position A Ata range of 300 meters an Wem enemy soldier running 8 mph at 90 APPROACH a 90 angle lead of 4 5 feet Figure 7 18 Lead requirement based on distance and approach angle Single Lead Rule 7 46 The single lead rule says To hit a target moving laterally place the trailing edge of the front sightpost at the target s center Figure 7 19 This rule also provides that the lead increases as the range to the target increases Figure 7 20 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 7 37 Chapter 7 NOTE At 100 meters the rule begins to break down for targets moving at slight and large angles EXAMPLE As Figure 7 20 depicts the front sightpost covers about 1 6 inches at 15 meters and about 16 inches at 150 meters Since the center of the front sightpost is the actual point of aim placing the trailing edge of the front sightpost at the target s center provides a 8 inch lead on a 15 meter target and an 8 inch lead on a target at 150 meters This provides a dead center hit on a 15 meter target moving at 7 miles per hour at a 25 degree angle because the target moves 8 inches between the time that the weapon is fired and the time that the bullet arrives at the target A 150 meter target mo
256. distance from the firer that the target must be placed NOTES 1 Soldiers should not receive training on target detection or the effects of wind and gravity by engaging targets at 25 meters These skills are trained by firing at longer distances 2 If zeroing grouping exercises are not performed on the day of record fire all Soldiers confirm the zero of their assigned weapons by firing six rounds of training sustainment ammunition from the 25 meter line before firing the course Zero rounds do not count for score 6 18 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Field Fire Table 6 16 25 meter scaled target alternate course firing tables and related information TABLE POSITION TIME NUMBER OF ROUNDS NUMBER OF ADDITIONAL CONSTRAINTS SILHOUETTES INFORMATION Table 1 Prone supported 120 sec 20 round magazine two 10 silhouettes No more than two firing position or rounds for each on the same hits for each foxhole supported silhouette if firing from the target sheet silhouette will be firing position prone supported firing scored for this position or foxhole table supported firing position Table 2 Prone unsupported 60 sec 10 round magazine one 10 silhouettes No more than one firing position round for each silhouette on the same hit for each target target sheet will be scored for this table Table 3 Kneeling 60 sec 10 round magazine one 5 silhouettes on No more than two unsupported firing round for each silhouette the same target hits for eac
257. dow 9 Rapid semiautomatic __ semiautomatic 18sec sec firing position landscape target Fence or hedgerow Loo Rapid semiautomatic Tank turret 9 in three 3 round Automatic burst 24 sec bursts QUICK FIRE 7 68 The two main techniques of directing fire with a rifle or carbine are e Aim using the sights e Use weapon alignment instinct bullet strike or tracers to direct the fire 7 69 The preferred technique is to use the sights but sometimes quick reflex action is required Quick fire also known as instinctive firing or quick kill is a technique used to deliver fast effective fire on surprise personnel targets 25 meters away or less EFFECTIVENESS AND CONTROL OF QUICK FIRE 7 70 Quick fire techniques are appropriate when Soldiers are presented with close suddenly appearing surprise enemy targets or when close engagement is imminent NOTE Fire may be delivered in the SEMIAUTO or AUTOMATIC BURST fire mode For example a point man in a patrol may carry the weapon on AUTOMATIC BURST This may also be required when clearing a room or bunker Initial training should be in the SAFE mode 7 7 Two techniques of delivering quick fire are e Aimed e Pointed 7 72 The difference in the speed of delivery of these two techniques is small Pointed quick fire can be used to fire a shot about one tenth of a second faster than aimed quick fire The difference in accuracy however is more pronounced e A Soldier wel
258. dvantages each piece of equipment provides so that they can determine when to employ each device ELECTROMAGNETIC LIGHT SPECTRUM C 15 To understand why some night devices cannot be used in conjunction with others Soldiers must understand the electromagnetic spectrum The electromagnetic spectrum is a spectrum of energy light containing x rays gamma rays radio waves cosmic rays and ultraviolet rays Also within this spectrum 15 visible light light visible with the naked eye Just beyond red visible light is IR light IR light is broken down into three different ranges near IR middle IR and far IR C 16 Two types of night devices will increase the Soldier s vision into the IR range e Image intensification devices e Thermal sight IMAGE INTENSIFICATION DEVICES C 17 Image intensification devices rely on ambient light and energy within the near IR range such as light emitted from natural and artificial sources for example moonlight or starlight Image intensification devices include the AN PVS 4 PVS 5 PVS 7A B C D and PVS 14s The Army also has aiming devices that emit near IR energy in a colliminated beam such as the AN PAQ 4B C and the AN PEQ 2A B Since image intensification devices and aiming lasers work within the same range of near IR energy they can be used in conjunction with each other THERMAL WEAPON SIGHT C 18 In the past thermal technology has been solely reserved for tanks fighting vehicles and antiarmor
259. dy armor PRELIMINARY SHORT RANGE MARKSMANSHIP INSTRUCTION 7 194 As with all other forms of marksmanship training preliminary SRM instruction must be conducted to establish a firm foundation Soldiers must be taught and must understand the fundamentals of SRM Blank fire drills are conducted to ensure a thorough understanding of the fundamentals as well as to provide the trainers with valuable feedback about each Soldier s level of proficiency NOTE To maximize safety during training and in combat situations it is important to emphasize muzzle awareness and selector switch manipulation during preliminary SRM instruction The risk of fratricide or noncombatant casualties 1s greatest during SRC 7 195 Table 7 17 outlines the tasks that preliminary SRM instruction should include at a minimum 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 7 47 Chapter 7 Table 7 17 Preliminary SRM tasks and explanation TASK EXPLANATION Weapon ready positions and firing stance Ensure that each Soldier understands and can properly carry his weapon Magazine changing drills Have Soldiers perform magazine changes using the two methods Parallel method L shaped method NOTE See the paragraph below for more information about magazine changing drills Moving with a weapon Ensure that Soldiers can walk run and turn left right and to the rear as well as move from the standing to kneeling firing position and the kneeling back to the standing firing position
260. e multilane small arms crew served and individual antitank training simulator is used to e Train and evaluate individual marksmanship training for initial entry Soldiers BCT OSUT e Provide unit sustainment training for active and reserve components in preparation for qualification on individual and crew small arms live fire weapons e Provide unit collective tactical training for static dismounted infantry scout engineer military police squads and sustainment elements e Simulate training events which lead to live fire individual and crew weapon qualification Simulate training events that contribute to increased weapon crew fire team and squad combat effectiveness Simulate squad collective defensive ambush gunnery and tactical tasks Train leaders of fire teams and squads in the command control and distribution of fires Save ammunition travel time transportation costs and other range support resources Support functional gunnery training strategies and standards in weapon training Screen ine ve Firing Line Floor Box Detection Camera Lane 4 oum Projector Operator s Control Keyboard Screen Speaker Firing Line Speaker Monitor Compressor Display Controller Figure A 1 Engagement skills trainer five lane configuration 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 A 1 Appendix A GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS 1 The EST 2000 replicates eleven weapons including
261. e 10 meter boresighting target with the visible laser of the borelight 5 Adjust the adjusters on the AN PAQ 4B C until the IR laser is centered on the crosshair located on the 10 meter boresighting target NOTE For windage and elevation one click equals 1 centimeter at 25 meters A click 1s defined as the sound or feel of the positive detent movement CAUTION Do not turn the adjustment screws too much Over turning the adjustment screws will cause them to break NOTES 1 The boresighting target and zeroing mark must be kept stable during the boresighting procedure 2 Regardless of the mounting location the adjuster that is on top or bottom will always be the elevation adjuster and the one on the side will always be the windage adjuster BORESIGHTING THE AN PEQ 2A B NOTES 1 Before boresighting the AN PEQ 2A B ensure that the borelight has been zeroed to the weapon The more accurate the boresight of the AN PEQ 2A B to the assigned weapon the closer to a battlesight zero the weapon will be 2 The boresighting target and zeroing mark must be kept stable during the boresighting procedure DANGERS THE AN PEQ 2A B EMITS INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM DO NOT STARE INTO THE IR LASER BEAM WITH THE NAKED EYE OR THROUGH BINOCULARS OR TELESCOPES DO NOT POINT THE IR LASER BEAM AT MIRROR LIKE SURFACES OR OTHER INDIVIDUALS EYES EYE DAMAGE CAN OCCUR IF CARELESS HANDLING OF THE LASER OCCUR
262. e A 12 Weaponeer printouts Use of the Weaponeer 81 The Weaponeer is used to evaluate the firer s ability to apply the four fundamentals It is used throughout the program to help diagnose and remediate problems In the unit the Weaponeer should be used much like it is used in BRM A 82 When training Soldiers on the Weaponeer e Proceed at a relaxed pace and emphasize accuracy before speed e If possible train with small groups allowing each Soldier several 10 to 15 minute turns on the device e For remedial training try to relax the Soldier A nervous Soldier will have trouble learning and gaining confidence in his marksmanship skills For sustainment training encourage competition between individuals or units Diagnosis of Firing Problems A 83 The Weaponeer assists in the diagnosis of firing problems The seven step program is recommended as a guide These seven steps are designed to diagnose and show the Soldier his firing errors This could be enough to correct the error NOTES 1 Diagnosis needs to be followed up with remedial exercises with the Weaponeer target box exercise or dime washer exercise 2 Depending on the extent of the firer s problems and time constraints the number of shots may be increased A 84 To diagnose firing problems 1 Tell the Soldier to assume a good firing position aim at a target and hold steady supported and prone unsupported positions 2 Visually check the firer s po
263. e A 4 Action conditions and standards for a grouping and zeroing exercise ACTION Group and zero an M16 M4 series weapon using the TR 900 target system with military mask CONDITIONS Given an M16 M4 series weapon laser transmitter with mandrel and TR 900 target system with military mask STANDARDS From the supported firing position Grouping Fire up to 27 shots dry fire in three round shot groups and achieve two consecutive shot groups within a 4 centimeter circle 25 meters 2 4 centimeter circle 15 meters or 1 6 centimeter circle 10 meters Battlesight Zero Adjust the sights so that five out of six rounds in two consecutive shot groups strike within the zeroing circle in the silhouette on the zeroing target A 10 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Training Aids Devices and Exercises A 33 This exercise evaluates a Soldier s ability to apply the four fundamentals of rifle marksmanship in the integrated act of firing through shot grouping The exercise is conducted in the same manner as live fire grouping and zeroing exercises and can make those exercises more efficient and effective All normal range commands should be used to reinforce training in proper range procedures Up to 10 targets may be grouped together for scoring on one computer This exercise is most efficient with one trainer to run the control and scoring console plus one trainer for every five lanes Training distance must correspond to the distance used
264. e AN PAS 13B C D V1 V3 TWS is an IR 1maging sensor used for target acquisition under conditions of low visibility IR light 15 received through the telescope detected by an IR sensor converted to digital data processed and displayed for the user NOTE See Table 8 6 for the current training program Table 8 6 AN PAS 13B C D thermal weapon sight training program AN PAS 13B C D TWS Instructional Intent Soldiers qualify with the ANPAS 13B C D TWS Special Instructions Ensure that Soldiers Are proficient with the TWS Use the spacer with the M4 M16A4 and MWS Use the proper 10 meter boresighting target during boresighting procedures Boresight both FOVs Confirm the 10 meter boresight with a 25 meter zero Use the M16A2 zeroing target with a 4x4 centimeter square cut out of the center of the silhouette Thermalize the zero range and qualification range inspect for targets that aren t thermalized Use every other lane during zero and qualification Soldiers zero the TWS to the same standards as with iron sights Soldiers achieve the same practice qualification and qualification standards as with day record fire WARNING Ensure that the weapon is not loaded and is on SAFE before installing the TWS on the weapon A loaded weapon may accidentally discharge causing severe injury or death CONCEPT 8 56 The AN PAS 13B C D TWS training strategy is much the same as that of aiming lights The TWS does not require the use
265. e Soldier faces away from the target NOTE This action requires the Soldier to identify and discriminate targets and reinforces skills used during reflexive firing training 2 The Soldier is given a target description 3 On the command READY the Soldier begins to scan for the target 4 On the command UP voice command or whistle blast the Soldier turns toward and engages the target NOTES 1 Instructors should vary commands and targets so that the Soldier does not fall into a pattern Intermixing NO FIRE commands will add to realism 2 first priority is always the safety of the Soldier All Soldiers must receive a GO on this task before SRM qualification Targets must be scored and marked after each firing distance A Soldier will be scored as a NO GO if he fails to engage a target or engages a target other than the one called for by the instructor Soldiers will also receive a NO GO 1f at any time they point their weapon at another Soldier or they fail to keep their weapon on SAFE before acquiring and engaging the targets 7 54 NOTE Initial training and sustainment training may be conducted by changing the uniform in the standards statement FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Advanced Rifle Marksmanship EVALUATION 7 220 Table 7 18 will be used to score this exercise PHASE IIIL SHORT RANGE MARKSMANSHIP QUALIFICATION 7 221 Soldiers should conduct SRM qualification semiannually In addition
266. e advanced firers to progress while problem firers receive remedial training A 29 A reflective zeroing target with MP400 laser mandrel provides a simple but effective tool for remedial training during LFXs Problem firers should be sent to a remedial station for a quick check of the application of the fundamentals and remedial training Exercise Performance A 30 To perform Exercise 1 use the following procedures 1 The Soldier assumes a proper supported position using sandbags The trainer inserts the MP 400 LTA 556C assembly into the rifle barrel and uses laser windage and elevation adjustments to achieve a bold sight adjustment with laser spot on front sight Figure A 2 Then the Soldier turns the laser to the ON position NOTE Soldiers should become familiar with both supported and unsupported firing positions 10M 15M or 25M z M 41 fa Figure 2 Exercise 1 2 Under trainer supervision the Soldier establishes proper sight alignment and sight picture on a reflective zeroing target set at 10 meters 15 meters or 25 meters With the MP 400 laser turned to ON the trainer or coach blocks the beam with his finger NOTE Use the appropriate target with the corresponding distance 3 When the Soldier is confident with the sight alignment and picture the trainer removes his finger and observes the location of the red laser dot on the target A 8 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 T
267. e complete cycle The weapon continues to fire three round bursts with each separate trigger pull as long as ammunition is in the magazine NOTE Releasing the trigger or exhausting ammunition at any point in the three round cycle interrupts fire producing one or two shots Reapplying the trigger only completes the interrupted cycle it does not begin a new one This is not a malfunction 4 19 The M16A2 4 and M4 disconnectors have a three cam mechanism that continuously rotates with each firing cycle Based on the position of the disconnector cam the first trigger pull after initial selection of the BURST position can produce one two or three firing cycles before the trigger must be pulled again The burst cam rotates until it reaches the stop notch PEER COACHING 4 20 Peer coaching involves using two Soldiers of equal firing proficiency and experience to assist each other during marksmanship training ADVANTAGES AND DISADVANTAGES 4 21 Some problems exist with peer coaching If the new Soldier does not have adequate guidance a blind leading the blind situation may result leading to negative training and safety violations However 4 12 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Preliminary Marksmanship Instruction when adequate instruction 15 provided peer coaching can be helpful even in the IET environment Since all Soldiers in units have completed BRM peer coaching within units should yield better results BENEFITS 4 22 The pairi
268. e desired point 7 66 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Advanced Rifle Marksmanship 7 275 Prior to this phase of training trainers ensure that the e Weapon is cleared and that no ammunition is loaded prior to training e Weapon is zeroed prior to training e Soldier knows how to adjust for wind and gravity e Soldier can manipulate the rear sight for different ranges Elevation 7 276 When a Soldier aims directly at a target at ranges greater than the set range his bullet will hit below the point of aim At lesser ranges his bullet will hit higher than the point of aim If the SDM understands this and knows about trajectory and bullet drop he will be able to hit the target at ranges other than that for which the weapon was adjusted 7 277 For example the SDM adjusts the weapon for a target located 500 meters downrange and another target appears at a range of 600 meters The hold off would be 25 inches that is the SDM should hold off 25 inches above the center of visible mass in order to hit the center of mass of that particular target If another target were to appear at 400 meters the SDM would aim 14 inches below the center of visible mass in order to hit the center of mass 7 278 The chart in Figure 7 31 shows the projectile s trajectory when fired from the M4 carbine and the M16A2 rifle This demonstrates the drop of the round at various ranges NOTE This diagram will assist the trainer in teaching vertical hold off during this p
269. e how well they are seen FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Night Fighting ABSORPTION C 29 During the day all inanimate objects absorb thermal energy from the sun to varying degrees Metal objects have a much higher rate of absorption than wood leaves or grass therefore a metal object sitting in the sun will stand out more than the grass surrounding it when viewed through the TWS EXPOSURE C 30 The amount of time an object is exposed to thermal energy determines how well that object will be seen Naturally an object with a long exposure time will have absorbed more thermal energy than an object exposed to the same thermal energy for a shorter period of time EMISSIVITY C 31 Emissivity is the rate at which an object emits the thermal energy it has absorbed or generates Usually objects with a high absorption rate will have a high emissivity factor Although the human body does not have a high absorption rate it has a high emissivity factor due to the fact that it generates a high amount of thermal energy An object that has a high emissivity factor will be much hotter and therefore when seen through the TWS much easier to see and recognize REFLECTION C 32 Items such as glass and water have virtually no absorption rate Instead they reflect thermal energy which makes it very difficult to see objects through glass and water C 33 Snow and ice have the same effect especially during the day with no clouds present Snow and ice
270. e is another method of estimating range This method can be used for a quick on the spot estimation and engagement e Generally if a man sized target is of the width of the front sightpost the target is approximately 300 meters away e Ifthe target is 1 4 of the width of the front sightpost the target is approximately 600 meters away SECTION Il FIELD FIRE TRAINING Field fire training provides the transition from unstressed slow firing at known distances or feedback targets to engaging pop up silhouettes 50 to 300 meters away Two basic types of field firing exercises are single and multiple target timed engagements which use 75 175 and 300 meter targets Pop up targets are used to add stress and simulate the short exposure times of combat targets During field fire training the firer learns to quickly detect targets apply SPORTS and apply the four fundamentals simultaneously 6 6 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Field Fire CONDUCT OF A FIELD FIRE RANGE 6 36 On field fire ranges Soldiers fire from the supported and prone unsupported firing positions at F type silhouettes 75 meters away and E type silhouettes 175 and 300 meters away Initial training begins with single exposed targets and increased time for target exposures Field Fire I As Soldiers become proficient multiple target engagements with shorter exposure times are introduced Field Fire II NOTE There are two types of electronic pop up targets used on a field fire
271. e nonfiring hand in a position that is comfortable and provides the best weapon stability and support Show the Soldier different ways this can be done e 5 supporting the weapon properly by nudging him after the weapon has been stabilized Legs 7 240 To evaluate the placement of the Soldier s legs ensure that the Soldier e Places the legs inside the foxhole while firing e Plants the legs firmly for a stable position while firing Slightly nudge the Soldier to make sure that his legs are firmly planted in the foxhole Prone Unsupported 7 241 The Soldier must be able to successfully assume a proper unsupported firing position The trainer must ensure that the Soldier has a good steady position After the Soldier has assumed a good unsupported firing position 1 Taking special care to observe the positioning of the elbows the nonfiring hand and the legs the trainer uses DA Form 7650 R Squad Designated Marksman Position Evaluation to evaluate the same characteristics as with the supported firing position with the exception of the Elbows Nonfiring hand Legs NOTE See the end of this publication for a blank reproducible copy of DA Form 7650 R 2 Once the trainer has noted the Soldier s position he has the Soldier lay his weapon down stand up relax and then get back down into another unsupported prone position 3 The trainer evaluates this position by comparing his notes from the original position
272. e number of target exposures target ranges and exposure times for each firing table Table 6 2 Number of rounds that must be fired from each position during Field Fire 1 POSITION NUMBER OF ROUNDS FIRED Supported firing position Supported firing position Unsupported firing position Kneeling FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Field Fire Table 6 3 Field Fire firing tables FIRING TABLE 2 FIRING TABLE 3 FIRING TABLE 4 RANGE TIME RANGE TIME RANGE TIME T sec T sec sec FIRING TABLE 1 RANGE TIME sec L9 NEN EE NA 9 OE Eom 22021 EA 4 DR EE CN NUN 11 _8_ 027 ED L5 T NI EE 1 FIELD FIRE H MULTIPLE OR SINGLE TIMED TARGETS 6 48 Field Fire II consists of three firing tables CONCEPT 6 49 Firing Table 1 helps the firer practice shooting skills and develop the sense of timing and rhythm required to make the transition from single timed targets to multiple or single timed fleeting combat targets This builds confidence prior to firing the exercises in Firing Tables 2 and 3 and identifies Soldiers who are having difficulty and need reinforcement 6 50 When firing the exercises in Firing Tables 2 and 3 each Soldier demonstrates his ability to apply the fundamentals of marksmanship during the integrated act of firing by successfully detecting and engaging multiple and single timed targets CONDUCT NOTE
273. e target at 50 meters while in the prone supported or foxhole supported firing position The Soldier uses one magazine of 15 rounds 10 rounds ball 5 rounds tracer The Soldier will detect and engage 15 target exposures at 50 meters The Soldier engages the F type silhouette target at 50 meters while in the prone unsupported position or kneeling position The Soldier uses a second magazine of 15 rounds 10 rounds ball 5 rounds tracer The Soldier will detect and engage 15 target exposures at 50 meters Each Soldier must achieve 7 hits out of 30 target exposures e When the automated range is used the Soldier s performance is recorded in the tower If automatic scoring 1s not available a coach can observe and score the number of target hits the firer achieves using NVDs type silhouette with reflective material Figure 7 17 Night fire target 7 34 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Advanced Rifle Marksmanship ARTIFICIAL ILLUMINATION TRAINING 7 135 Artificial illumination allows for better target detection and long range accuracy than unassisted night vision When the artificial light is gone time must be spent regaining night vision and adapting Only when the level drops enough so that the target cannot be seen through the iron sights should the firer resume short range scanning looking just over the sights NOTE See Table 7 11 for the current training program Table 7 11 Artificial illumination training program A
274. e to seven seconds at ranges of 50 to 300 meters Since it requires one to two seconds for the manually activated target mechanism to raise the target timing begins when 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 6 11 Chapter 6 the target is fully exposed rather than when the tower operator activates the target switch When practice record fire is conducted on automated record fire ARF ranges these factors are included in the computer program NOTE Practice Record Fire I allows peer coaching and the use of dummy ammunition Practice Record Fire II does not allow peer coaching and dummy ammunition will not be used ALIBI FIRING 6 56 Alibi firing should be conducted at the end of each firing table IAW tower operator commands Alibis are provided during practice record fire for three reasons e Malfunction of the weapon e Malfunction of the target mechanism e Faulty ammunition RANGE TRAINING REAS 6 57 The three range training areas are as follows e Orientation area e Ready area e Retired area Orientation Area 6 58 The orientation area is located so that firers cannot see the firing area Practice record fire orientation includes instructions on the conduct of fire safety and range operations including the procedures used in ready and retired areas Ready Area 6 59 The ready area is located near the firing range but is positioned so that firers cannot see targets on the range While in this area the firer blackens the weapon
275. ed M4 Carbine Only Figure A 9 Blank firing attachment CAUTION Hand tighten the M15A2 M23 only LOCATION OF MISS AND HIT SYSTEM A 54 The LOMAH system is a range aid used during downrange feedback exercises The device uses acoustical triangulation to compute the exact location of a supersonic bullet as it passes through a target The bullet impact is displayed instantly on a video monitor at the firing line More importantly it shows the location of a bullet miss allowing the firer to make either a sight adjustment or a hold off for subsequent shots NOTE LOMAH like other devices is only an aid When the Soldier uses LOMAH he must understand the weapon and firing techniques and have a coach instructor A 55 LOMAH ranges have been fielded in USAREUR and Korea In locations where KD ranges are not available and restrictions prohibit walking downrange the LOMAH system is a practical alternative to essential downrange feedback A 18 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Training Aids Devices and Exercises NOTE Requests for LOMAH devices should be sent to Commander US Army Training Support Center ATIC DM Fort Eustis VA 23604 M261 22 CALIBER RIMFIRE ADAPTER A 56 The 22 calibr RFA contribute to a units marksmanship program when 5 56 millimeter ammunition is not available or when ranges that allow firing 5 56 millimeter ammunition are not available The RFA can be useful for marksmanship training such as n
276. ed in DA Pam 350 38 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Training Aids Devices and Exercises TACTICAL COLLECTIVE TRAINING A 9 When used in the tactical collective training mode the EST 2000 e Presents tactical collective exercises that train squad team and element leaders in fire distribution and control e Provides fully articulated interactive targets with variable outcomes based on a squad s action or inaction Uses realistic 3D modeled battlefield terrain and variable environmental effects for example day night and dawn dusk variable weather conditions and illumination Uses other special effects such as weapon s effects explosions and vehicle damage to enhance the static eye point of the battlefield e Allows trainers and units to build scenarios as they would fight Provides shot by shot feedback that is tied to each firer s lane of fire e Will soon include an entry level indirect fire capability product improvement NOTE Tactical collective training core scenarios can be found in the EST 2000 Operator s Manual TD 07 6910 702 10 A 10 Tactical collective training is conducted on two networked five lane subsystems This configuration can support up to 11 weapons including tandem weapons NOTE The tandem weapons capability is available in collective training only This capability allows the use of an extra weapon connected to the fifth lane port 6 in the third floor box allowing a firer to manage
277. edge of the target 5 13 5 13 illus shot groups with consistent aiming and major shooting error 5 10 5 10 illus inconsistent aiming 5 9 5 9 illus inconsistent aiming and major shooting error 5 11 5 11 illus improper vertical placement 5 12 5 12 illus N night fighting C 1 to C 9 aided night vision see also aided night vision 4 to C 9 unaided night vision see also unaided night vision C 1 FM 3 22 9 to C 3 night fire training see also advanced rifle marksmanship 7 30 to 7 35 artificial illumination training 7 35 7 35 table effectiveness and control of artificial illumination 7 35 live fire exercise 7 35 unassisted night fire training 7 30 to 7 34 7 30 table modifications 7 30 to 7 33 firing positions 7 31 immediate action 7 31 marksmanship fundamentals 7 3 1 to 7 32 operation and maintenance of the weapon 7 31 target detection 7 32 to 7 33 7 32 illus 7 33 illus training 7 34 live fire exercises 7 34 7 34 illus P peer coaching see also preliminary marksmanship instruction 4 12 to 4 14 advantages and disadvantages 4 12 to 4 13 benefits 4 13 checklist for the coach 4 13 duties 4 13 position of the coach 4 13 to 4 14 4 14 illus position see also squad designated marksman training 7 58 to 7 61 foxhole supported 7 59 to 7 60 prone unsupported 7 60 to 7 61 Zero confirmation 7 61 7 61 table preliminary marksmanship i
278. ee also stoppages 3 1 to 3 2 U unaided night vision see also night fighting C 1 to C 3 avoiding night blind spots C 2 dark adaptation C 2 to C 3 daylight vision C 2 night vision C 3 twilight vision C 2 illusion C 3 night blind spots and viewing techniques C 1 to C 2 normal blind spots C 1 protecting before operation C 3 during operation C 3 unit marksmanship training program see also traming 1 9 to 1 18 mission essential tasks 1 9 qualification training see also qualification traming 1 15 to 1 18 trainers see also trainers 1 12 to 1 14 training assessment see also training assessment 1 9 to 1 12 unit live fire exercises 1 18 FM 3 22 9 W weapon characteristics accessories and ammunition 2 to 2 39 10 meter boresight and 25 meter zero offset see also 10 meter boresight and 25 meter zero offset 2 33 to 2 34 accessories see also accessories 2 16 to 2 39 characteristics 2 16 table compatibility and mounting 2 16 table mounting see also accessory mounting 2 10 to 2 16 ammunition see also ammunition 2 35 to 2 39 rifles and carbines 2 1 to 2 10 M16 series rifle see also M16 series rifle 2 5 to 2 10 4 carbine see also M4 series carbine 2 2 to 2 5 2 2 illus wind see also effects of wind and gravity 5 29 to 5 33 adjusted point of aim based on gravity and wind speed 5 33 5 33 illus adjusted point of aim based on wind speed 5
279. een A 77 The target to the right in Figure A 11 shows the type of information that can be replayed on the video screen after a series of shots are fired To show the sequence the dots have been numbered A 78 To show a replay the firer 1 Selects the shot he wishes to replay by operating the EACH SHOT button 2 Presses the REPLAY button NOTE Some Weaponeers record and store replays for only the first three shots Figure A 11 Replay of shot Shot Groups A 79 The impact location of up to 32 shots is automatically stored in the Weaponeer s memory and displayed on the video screen Each impact is indicated by a white dot and the last shot blinks for indication All 32 shots can be fired and displayed on a single target or split among a combination of targets The CLEAR button erases all shots from the Weaponeer s memory Printer A 80 A hard copy printer is provided for postfiring analysis for firer progress tracking and for record keeping Pressing the PRINT button causes the target displayed on the video to print Figure A 12 Some Weaponeers can print the three pop up targets at the same time by holding in the REPLAY button and pressing the PRINT button A 22 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Training Aids Devices and Exercises seBgessqanapuaagamspeesqpresgsthja EG m E it E it nuncu iad u Ti HITS 12 KISS 00 LATE 06 Figur
280. effectively train and evaluate a Soldier s ability to apply the fundamentals while in advanced firing positions Repetitive training muscle memory will teach the Soldier the corrections needed to keep the same point of aim while in different firing positions NOTE The act of assuming different firing positions while keeping the same point of aim increases first time target hits and Soldier survivability 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 7 1 Chapter 7 KNEELING SUPPORTED FIRING POSITION 7 1 This position allows the Soldier to obtain the height necessary to observe many target areas while taking advantage of available cover This position is the same as the kneeling unsupported firing position except the Soldier uses some form of support to stabilize his body Solid cover that can support any part of the body or weapon assists in firing accuracy NOTE See Chapter 4 for more information about the kneeling unsupported firing position 7 2 To assume the kneeling supported firing position Figure 7 1 1 Drop to the knee toward the inside of the covered position 2 Place the foot toward the outside of cover with the toes pointing toward the engagement area 3 Place the nonfiring hand on the edge of the cover to support the weapon 4 Place the firing hand on the pistol grip with the weapon s buttstock between the SAPI plate and the bicep to stabilize the weapon and absorb recoil NOTE When firing from the strong side the firer can
281. elevation one clockwise click moves the bullet strike up For windage one clockwise click moves the bullet strike right 8 26 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Advanced Optics Lasers and Iron Sights 6 Adjust the AN PEQ 2A B top mounted target illuminator as follows For windage and elevation one click equals 1 centimeter or one square at 25 meters For elevation one clockwise click moves the bullet strike down For windage one clockwise click moves the bullet strike right 7 Retighten the rail grabber and the AN PEQ 2A B 8 Once the aiming beam is zeroed rotate the selector knob to the DUAL LO DUAL LO HI or DUAL HI HI mode to observe both aiming and illumination beams 9 Rotate the illumination beam adjusters to align the illumination beam with the aiming beam NOTES 1 Failure to fully tighten the mounting brackets and AN PEQ 2A B thumbscrew may cause zero retention problems Confirm that equipment is tight prior to Zeroing 2 To retain zero remove the TPIAL and rail grabber as a whole assembly and place back onto the same notch as removed TARGET DETECTION 8 87 Soldiers should receive in depth instruction on the proper use and fit of night vision goggles to include characteristics and capabilities maintenance and mounting procedures Extensive testing has proven that the average Soldier does not properly use NVDs Unit leaders must be proficient in the train the trainer strategy At night Soldiers shou
282. ement 8 70 Thermal cues become much more obvious on a moving object than on an object standing still A good example is a vehicle s tires When the vehicle is not moving the tires are cold On a moving vehicle the friction between the road and the tires causes the tires to heat up and become prominent when observed through the TWS The same is true with the human body a moving person generates more heat than someone standing still Camouflage 8 71 The TWS allows Soldiers to see thermal signatures not completely masked by camouflage such as paint foliage and camouflage netting thereby increasing both day and night target detection abilities WARNING If the TWS is operated with the eyecup removed light emitting from the eyepiece may be visible to the enemy s NVDs PRACTICE QUALIFICATION 8 72 Practice qualification with the TWS is the same as day practice qualification with iron sights Dry fire exercises are performed to allow Soldiers to make adjustments to the TWS Every other firing lane should be used so that the Soldier engages only the targets in his lane RECORD QUALIFICATION 8 73 Record qualification with the TWS is the same as day record qualification with iron sights NOTES 1 Record qualification with the TWS can be done day and or night Regardless of the qualification the standard day record fire for the iron sights will be used The standards for qualification with the TWS either day or night are 23 out
283. engage in a firing scenario once for practice and then for qualification Soldiers who fail to qualify on the initial day of qualification receive only one refire on the same day SECTION VI SHORT RANGE MARKSMANSHIP TRAINING SRM training allows Soldiers to quickly and effectively engage targets at ranges less than 50 meters Although normally associated with UO SRM techniques are also used during operations in restrictive terrain such as clearing a trench line the final assault across an objective during an attack or raid or when fighting in dense vegetation or during periods of limited visibility SRM instruction consists of four components e Phase I Reflexive Fire Training blank fire day and night e PhaseII Target Discrimination blank fire day and night e Phase III Short Range Marksmanship Qualification day and night live fire and Barricade Transition Qualification e Phase IV Shotgun and Automatic or Burst Firing Familiarization CONDUCT OF SHORT RANGE MARKSMANSHIP TRAINING 7 160 SRM requires individual Soldiers to be trained to standard on reflexive firing target discrimination and all necessary BRM fundamentals prior to semiannual qualification NOTE An explanation of the base level proficiency requirements 1s provided with each course of fire 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 7 41 Chapter 7 7 161 Ata minimum Soldiers should be qualified on their individual weapon within the previous six months Shotgun a
284. ent Soldiers learn how to engage targets using the quick fire techniques Special Instructions Ensure that The M16A2 A3 A4 rifle s or M4 carbine s rear sight is set on the 0 2 aperture The M16A1 s rear sight is set on the unmarked aperture Each Soldier is given two 10 round magazines Each Soldier engages 10 target exposures of 2 seconds each at 15 meters using the first 10 round magazine Each Soldier moves to the 25 meter line and engages 10 target exposures of 2 seconds each at 25 meters using the second 10 round magazine Observables Each Soldier achieves hits out of 10 target exposures at 15 meters Each Soldier achieves 5 hits out of 10 target exposures at 25 meters Conduct 7 92 Each Soldier receives two 10 round magazines Each Soldier must achieve 7 target hits out of 10 target exposures at 15 meters and 5 target hits out of 10 target exposures at 25 meters 7 93 Table 7 8 depicts quick fire training and provides related information such as the number of target exposures distance from the firer number of rounds that must be fired and time constraints Table 7 8 Quick fire training and related information NUMBER OF TARGET DISTANCE NUMBER OF ROUNDS TIME CONSTRAINTS EXPOSURES 2 sec per target exposure 2 sec per target exposure SECTION CHEMICAL BIOLOGICAL RADIOLOGICAL NUCLEAR FIRING All Soldiers must effectively fire their weapons to accomplish combat missions in a CBRN enviro
285. entimeter circle at 25 meters and adjust the sights for zero will hit the target at ranges as far away as 300 meters Figure 5 24 0 25M 50M 75M 100M 125M 150M 175M 200M 225M 250M 275M 300M Figure 5 24 25 meter zero standard 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 5 27 Chapter 5 SECTION IV EFFECTS OF WIND AND GRAVITY Marksmanship instructors trainers should know how the effects of wind and gravity influence the flight of the bullet and Soldiers should know how to compensate for such bullet displacement This instruction is appropriate for all marksmanship training and concurrent training EFFECTS OF GRAVITY 5 71 Gases created by gunpowder push each round out of the end of the barrel The barrel must be elevated slightly to allow the round to travel farther creating an arc The round will travel straight until it slows down and is gradually pulled to the ground by gravity Each round fired will be pushed approximately the same distance and will roughly follow the same path NOTE The farther the round travels the faster it begins to fall 5 72 When the firer zeroes his weapon he aligns his line of sight to cross the path of the round at the distance at which he wants to zero his weapon For example a 300 meter zero means that the line of sight crosses the path of the round at 300 meters If the firer engages a target at a distance other than 300 meters excluding 25 meters the path of the round hits the target either before
286. entry training marksmanship training strategy SUSTAINMENT TRAINING 1 8 Training continues in active Army National Guard and Army Reserve units using the same basic skills taught in IET Units must set up a year round program to sustain skills and have a plan not only for when they are at their home station but for when they are deployed as well 1 2 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Marksmanship Training 1 9 To sustain the basic marksmanship skills taught in IET periodic PMI is conducted followed by instructional and qualification range firing Key elements include e The training of trainers e Refresher training of nonfiring skills e The use of the Engagement Skills Trainer EST 2000 Laser Marksmanship Training System LMTS or other devices Sustainment training Remedial training NOTE See Appendix A for more information about TADSS 1 10 Additional skills trained in the unit include Semiautomatic and automatic fires Night fire Mission oriented protective posture MOPP firing Firing using aiming devices Moving target training techniques Squad designated marksman SDM training Short range marksmanship SRM 1 11 These skills are trained and integrated into collective training exercises such as platoon and squad live fire situation training exercises STXs Figure 1 2 shows a year round training strategy guide DETERMINE REQUIREMENTS PLAN ADJUST TRAINING CALENDAR BASED ON MET
287. er 7 Series of 3 Inch Circles on E Type Silhouettes 7 214 7 215 To conduct training using this type of target 1 Instructors call out which circle to engage for example top left 2 Firers react accordingly Marksmanship 1s emphasized using this technique Target s Hands and Center of the Uniform 7 216 If a target 1s a threat the first and most obvious indicator is a weapon in the target s hands A good technique for teaching Soldiers target discrimination is to have them focus on the target s hands and the center of the uniform To conduct this exercise the Soldier must visualize the entire target because an armed target could be a fellow Soldier or other friendly This level of target discrimination should not be trained until Soldiers are thoroughly proficient in basic SRC and SRM tasks RANGE SETUP 7 217 The range must be at least 25 meters in length and each lane should be at least 5 meters wide Each lane should have target holders and should be marked in a way that prevents crossfiring between lanes A coach safety 1s assigned to each lane to observe and control the Soldier s performance The tower lane safety or senior instructor gives all firing commands CONDUCT 7 218 7 219 Regardless of the type of target used the exercise proceeds as follows NOTE Each Soldier must complete a dry fire exercise and a blank fire exercise before moving to the live fire portion 1 Th
288. er caps on the top and right hand side of the scope Adjustment can be made with a small screwdriver coin or other hard object that fits the adjustment screws The caps are very tight to ensure a waterproof seal with the O rings inside The caps should only be off the scope when adjustments are being made CAUTION The ACOG contains an internal adjustment mechanism to allow zeroing Adjustments to the extreme ends of the range can result in damage to the internal prism assembly Do not continue to adjust the windage and elevation mechanisms if you encounter resistance 8 39 The ACOG scope is shipped with a pre centered setting Normally this means that only small adjustments are necessary Do not adjust the scope to the extremes It 15 possible that over adjustment will damage the precise alignment of the prism assembly inside the rifle scope 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 8 17 Chapter 8 8 40 The ACOG scope is adjusted at the factory to be as parallax free as possible at 100 meters This in no way affects the accuracy of the scope 8 41 The reticle patterns in the scope have been designed to provide many features while retaining simplicity of operation The user does not need to make any manual adjustments between shots at different ranges Ranging capability is built into the reticle patterns 8 42 The outside legs of the chevron reticle in the ACOG correspond to 19 inches average width of a man s shoulders at 300 meters 8 43 T
289. er safety equipment for example aiming circle compass Publications pertaining to the training that will be conducted Lesson plans status reports and reporting folder Range flag and light night firing Radios Field telephone and wire 292 antenna if necessary PA set with backup bullhorn s Concurrent training markers Training aids for concurrent training stations Sandbags Tentage briefing tent warm up tent Space heaters if needed Colored helmets for control personnel Safety paddles and vehicle flag sets or lights Ambulance or designated vehicle Earplugs Water for drinking and cleaning Scorecards Master score sheet Armorer s tools and cleaning equipment for weapons Brooms shovels and other cleaning supplies and equipment Tables and chairs if needed Target accessories Fire extinguishers Tarp stakes and rope to cover the ammunition Toilet paper Spare weapons and repair parts as needed 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 E 7 Appendix E e Tow bar and slave cables for vehicles e Fuel and oil for vehicles and target mechanisms DETERMINE AVAILABLE RESOURCES E 37 Determining available resources involves the following e Fill personnel spaces e Keepunit integrity e Utilize NCOs Coordinate with supporting organizations Ammunition Transportation a Training aids Medics Weapons a Other equipment FOOLPROOF E 38 To foolproof range operatio
290. er squeeze during automatic firing LFXs enable him to improve this skill M16A2 3 4 Rifles and M4 Carbines 7 44 Until the weapon fires trigger squeeze is applied in the normal manner To use the burst fire mode 1 Hold the trigger to the rear until three rounds are fired 2 Release pressure on the trigger until it resets 3 Reapply pressure for the next three round burst NOTES 1 Do not slap or jerk the trigger Squeeze it and then quickly release pressure 2 Depending on the position of the burst can when the selector is moved to the burst fire mode the weapon may fire one two or three rounds when the trigger is held to the rear for the first time If the weapon fires only one or two rounds quickly release pressure on the trigger and squeeze again holding it to the rear until a three round burst is completed M16A1 Rifles 7 45 Until the weapon fires trigger squeeze is applied in the normal manner Because three round bursts are the most effective rate of fire pressure on the trigger should be released as quickly as possible To use the burst fire mode keep the index finger on the trigger but quickly release pressure to prevent an excessive number of rounds from being fired in one burst With much dry fire practice the Soldier can become proficient at delivering three round bursts with the squeeze release technique Immediate Action 7 46 To maintain an increased rate of suppressive fire Soldiers must apply immedi
291. er to attach accessories on the upper receiver and on all four sides of the ARS while retaining zero when installed and tightened properly Once zeroed they will retain zero even when removed from the weapon as long as the rail grabber is not separated from the accessory and is remounted on the same notch it was zeroed on NOTE 1 Retighten the rail grabber and accessory after firing the first three rounds to fully seat both 2 The bottom rail of the ARS will not retain zero 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 2 13 Chapter 2 INSIGHT RAIL GRABBER 2 24 The Insight rail grabber Figure 2 19 can be mounted where the tightening screw 3 Figure 2 19 is on either the left or right side when top mounted or top or bottom when mounted on the left side so it does not interfere with weapon operation Figure 2 19 Insight rail grabber 2 25 Unless command directed all devices in a unit do not have to be mounted in the same location as long as individual users record or mark with paint markers or grease pencils the mounting location on their weapons to avoid unnecessary rezeroing CAUTION Both of the holes 2 Figure 2 19 located in the top of the rail grabber can be used to mount accessories but the hole closest to the muzzle must be used This ensures that the majority of the rail grabber is supporting the accessory to prevent damage to the accessory NOTES 1 The Insight rail grabber must fully rest on the ARS in order to
292. er to prevent the laser from wobbling e When ready to fire plant the elbows firmly on the ground to prevent the laser from wobbling excessively Aiming 8 81 Consider the following modifications e Practice raising the head just enough to clear the weapon with the NVGs Acquire a good sight picture by walking the laser onto the target and then aiming at the center of mass Breath Control 8 82 This fundamental is not modified for night firing conditions Trigger Squeeze 8 83 Do not disrupt the laser target alignment by jerking the trigger 25 METER ZEROING PROCEDURES 8 84 If the borelight is not available a 25 meter zero must be conducted A 25 meter zeroing target 1s shown in Figure 8 10 AN PAQ 4B C Infrared Aiming Laser 8 85 The 25 meter zeroing procedures for the AN PAQ 4B C IR aiming laser are as follows NOTE The zero standards are the same as with iron sights 1 Set the adjusters to their zero preset position NOTE See TM 11 5855 301 12 amp P for more information about setting the adjusters to their Zero preset position 2 Prepare a 25 meter zeroing target by cutting a 3x3 centimeter square out of the center of the silhouette 3 Adjust for windage and elevation For windage and elevation one click equals 1 centimeter at 25 meters For elevation one clockwise click moves the bullet strike up Forwindage one clockwise click moves the bullet strike left 4 Retighten the rail grabber
293. er zero Retighten the rail grabber after the initial 3 rounds are fired Sets the M68 CCO s dot for best sight picture Apply the marksmanship fundamentals Zero and qualify with the same sight picture one eye or two eyes open method Zero on the M16A2 25 meter zeroing target Ensure that the designated impact zone is 1 4 centimeters down from the center of mass of the 300 meter silhouette on the 25 meter zeroing target Soldiers zero the M68 CCO to the same standards as with iron sights Rounds impact in the 4x4 centimeter square designated impact zone Soldiers achieve the same practice qualification and qualification standards as with day record fire CONCEPT 8 19 Soldiers must qualify on their assigned weapons during daylight conditions as outlined in this manual The integrated act of firing with the M68 CCO is identical to the iron sights except for the change in the sight picture CONDUCT OF TRAINING NOTES 1 The M68 CCO training strategy 15 the same as the iron sight training strategy 2 All procedures for the M68 are the same as with standard iron sights 8 20 M68 equipment training should familiarize the Soldier with the proper operation and characteristics of the M68 CCO IAW TM 9 1240 413 13 amp P MODIFIED FUNDAMENTALS 8 21 M68 CCO operation requires modifications to the fundamentals of marksmanship e Steady position e Aiming e Breath control e Trigger squeeze Steady Position 8 22 When opera
294. erences 3 This page intentionally left blank NUMBERS 10 meter boresight see also weapon characteristics accessories and ammunition 2 33 to 2 34 10 meter boresight 2 34 2 34 illus borelight 2 33 to 2 34 2 33 illus 10 meter target offsets F 1 to F 8 marking F 1 F 1 F 3 illus 25 meter zero offsets see also weapon characteristics accessories and ammunition and zeroing procedures 2 34 2 34 illus F 1 to F 8 marking F 2 6 2 F 4 illus M16A4 MWS F 5 illus M4 MAAIL F 5 illus M4 MWS F 4 illus offset mounting F 6 table F 7 table F 8 table A accessories see also weapon characteristics accessories and ammunition 2 16 to 2 39 advanced combat optical gunsight see also advanced combat optical gunsight M4 series carbine and M16 series rifle 2 31 to 2 33 2 31 illus AN PEQ 15 advanced target pointer illuminator aiming light see also AN PEQ 15 advanced target pointer illuminator aiming light M4 series carbine arid M16 series rifle 2 24 to 2 25 2 25 illus 12 August 2008 Index AN PVS night vision sight see also AN PVS 4 night vision sight M4 series carbine and 16 rifle 2 28 to 2 29 2 28 illus backup iron sight see also backup iron sight 2 30 2 30 illus characteristics 2 16 table compatibility and mounting 2 16 table heavy thermal weapon sight see also heavy weapon thermal sight M4 seri
295. ers present rapidly moving targets Moving targets are open to aimed fire at two points in the rush as the target begins to gain speed at the beginning and as it slows down to a new position NOTE See Table 7 12 for the current training program Table 7 12 Moving target engagement training program MOVING TARGET ENGAGEMENT TRAINING PROGRAM Instructional Intent Soldiers learn to detect and engage moving and stationary targets with the M16 rifle carbine Special Instructions Ensure that The M16A2 A3 A4 rifle s or M4 carbine s rear sight is set on the 0 2 aperture The M16A1 s rear sight is set on the unmarked aperture Soldiers get into a proper semisupported firing position Soldiers understand and apply lead guidance rules Each Soldier receives two magazines with 25 rounds each of 5 56 millimeter ball ammunition Each Soldier engages 34 moving target exposures at ranges from 35 to 185 meters and 15 stationary target exposures at ranges from 50 to 300 meters Observables Each Soldier achieves 18 hits out of 50 target exposures MODIFICATIONS FOR MOVING TARGET ENGAGEMENTS 7 139 Soldiers in combat do not know if their next target will be stationary or moving they must fire immediately at whatever target presents itself Trainers should consider the following when conducting moving target engagement instruction e More dispersion and erratic shots are expected when Soldiers are trained to hit moving tar
296. es carbine and M16 series rifle 2 26 to 2 27 2 26 illus infrared aiming light see also infrared aiming light M4 series carbine and M16 series rifle 2 19 to 2 21 2 19 illus light thermal weapon sight see also light thermal weapon sight M4 series carbine and M16 series rifle 2 26 to 2 27 2 26 illus M68 close combat optic see also M68 close combat optic 4 carbine M16 series rifle 2 17 to 2 19 2 17 illus target pointer illuminator aiming light see also target pointer illuminator aiming light M4 series carbine and 16 rifle 2 21 to 2 24 2 22 illus accessory mounting see also weapon characteristics accessories and ammunition 2 10 to 2 16 MA MS adapter rail system see also MA MS adapter rail system 2 10 to 2 13 2 3 illus 2 11 illus rail grabbers see also rail grabbers 2 13 to 2 16 FM 3 22 9 advanced combat optical gunsight see also accessories M4 series carbine M16 series rifle and advanced optics lasers and tron sights 2 31 to 2 33 2 31 illus boresighting 8 7 mounting on 2 32 to 2 33 2 32 illus 2 33 illus M16A2 2 32 to 2 33 2 32 illus 2 33 illus M16A3 2 32 to 2 33 2 32 illus 2 33 illus M16AA 2 31 to 2 32 2 31 illus carbine 2 31 to 2 32 2 31 illus training strategies and qualification standards 8 16 to 8 20 8 17 table concept 8 17 conduct of training 8 17
297. es not silhouette the Soldier and his equipment might be a challenge Since the TWS detects thermal energy heat emitted from an object a position near an object emitting a vast amount of thermal energy for example a vehicle with the engine running or a fire may affect the Soldier s ability to acquire a target Scanning 8 66 With earlier versions of the TWS scanning too fast causes a stuttering on the screen which might cause the Soldier to miss or overlook a target With these versions Soldiers must scan slowly in order to maintain a good thermal image on the screen 8 67 With the newer version this stuttering is not as obvious One advantage of the TWS is its two FOVs wide and narrow Each has advantages and disadvantages e The NFOV increases magnification but decreases the field of view e The WFOV decreases magnification but increases the field of view Target Indicators 8 68 While scanning the sector or lane with the TWS the Soldier should recognize thermal cues that allow him to detect and identify targets The engine compartment exhaust and tires of a vehicle that has been moving are all examples of thermal cues Adjusting the brightness contrast and polarity helps enhance the thermal cues of a target allowing for quicker detection and identification 8 22 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Advanced Optics Lasers and Iron Sights Sound 8 69 Use the same techniques outlined in day and night target detection Mov
298. es weapon aided vision device combinations that can be zeroed using the borelight NOTE See Table 8 2 for the current training program Table 8 1 Weapon aided vision device combinations M16A3 A4 M4 MWS AIDED VISION DEVICE IRON SIGHT BUIS N A PANIPAG ABIC X ANPEQ2AB X ANPASHSBICID X Mescco 0 000 0 0X ___ acos _____ _ _ ___ NOTES 1 Precise boresighting of laser will allow direct engagement of targets without a 25 meter zero If a borelight is not available a 25 meter zero must be conducted to zero the laser 2 Alloptics must be 25 meter zeroed a borelight only aids in zeroing 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 8 1 Chapter 8 Table 8 2 Borelight training program BORELIGHT Instructional Intent Soldiers align the optic laser or iron sight to the bore of the weapon to reduce or eliminate the time and ammunition it requires to live fire zero Special Instructions Ensure that Soldiers Zero the borelight Use only approved 10 meter boresighting targets from Picatinny Arsenal Use the proper 10 meter boresighting target for weapon configuration Boresight 10 meters from the end of the barrel Stabilize both the weapon and the target or the boresight will not be accurate Install filters for aiming lasers to reduce blooming ooldiers confirm that the Borelight spins on itself when zeroed at 10 meters Weapon configuration is boresighted using the official and proper targets only Ta
299. esignated marksman that has been trained to engage targets from 300 to 500 meters He will operate and maneuver as a rifleman but will have the added responsibility of engaging targets out to 500 meters with effective well aimed fires The SDM is a vital member of his individual squad not a squad sniper The SDM has neither the equipment nor training to engage targets at extended ranges with precision fires while operating individually or in a small team He can also be used to help direct the fires of other squad members into enemy positions Due to the increased skill level required for his position the SDM must maintain a high level of proficiency through continued training of the required skills The SDM must possess a thorough understanding and mastery of e The fundamentals of rifle marksmanship Ballistics Elevation and windage Hold off adjusted points of aim Sight manipulation Range estimation SELECTION 7 229 The platoon sergeant and squad leaders must take special consideration in selecting the SDM The SDM must have e A solid marksmanship performance e Aclear understanding of the fundamentals e The ability to apply these fundamentals consistently during dry fire and live fire training SQUAD DESIGNATED MARKSMAN SKILLS PROGRESSION 7 230 The skills progression program assesses the Soldier s ability to apply the fundamentals of marksmanship and trains and assesses the Soldier s proficiency in several key areas
300. eters To get a solid boresight ensure that the red dot is centered within both the CCO and the target s center of mass 8 5 To boresight the weapon using the M68 CCO 1 Select the proper 10 meter boresighting target for the weapon M68 configuration 2 With the help of an assistant place the boresighting target 10 meters in front of the weapon 3 Turn the M68 CCO to the desired setting by turning it clockwise to position 10 turning it counterclockwise one click at a time until you can no longer see the dot and then turning it clockwise two clicks 8 6 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Advanced Optics Lasers and Iron Sights NOTE The desired setting may need to be adjusted throughout the day depending on ambient light conditions 4 Get behind the weapon in a stable supported firing position and look through the M68 CCO 5 Aim the red dot of the M68 CCO on the crosshair located on the 10 meter boresighting target 6 Make adjustments to the M68 CCO until the visible laser of the borelight is centered on the borelight circle on the 10 meter boresighting target 7 Turn the borelight off 8 Move the weapon off of the crosshair realign the M68 CCO s red dot on the crosshair and turn the borelight back on 9 If the borelight is on the circle and the M68 CCO s red dot is on the crosshair the weapon system 15 boresighted 10 Turn the laser off and carefully remove the borelight and the mandrel from the weapon so that
301. f greatest light center of the aperture aid in providing correct sight alignment For the average Soldier firing at combat type targets the eye s natural ability can accurately align the sights Therefore the firer can place the tip of the front sightpost on the point of aim but the eye must be focused on the tip of the front sightpost This causes the target to appear blurry while the front sightpost 15 seen clearly Two reasons for focusing on the front sightpost are 1 Only a minor aiming error should occur since the error reflects only as much as the Soldier fails to determine the target s center A greater aiming error can result if the front sightpost 1s blurry due to focusing on the target or other objects 2 Focusing on the tip of the front sightpost aids the firer in maintaining proper sight alignment Sight Picture 4 48 Once the Soldier can correctly align his sights he can obtain a correct sight picture A correct sight picture has the target front sightpost and rear sightpost aligned The sight picture includes two basic elements sight alignment and placement of the point of aim Placement of the point of aim varies depending on the engagement range For example Figure 4 16 shows a silhouette at 300 meters where the point of aim 15 the center of mass and the sights are aligned for a correct sight picture 4 20 Figure 4 16 Focus of the eye and correct sight picture FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Preliminary Marksm
302. f an inch at 25 meters and 7 2 inches at 300 meters lt 10 MPH WIND 48 46 44 42 4038 36 34 32 3028 26 24 222018 16 141210 8 6 4 2 INCHES Blowing from 3 o clock on an M193 bullet Figure 5 29 Calculate the adjusted point of aim based on wind speed NOTE Table 5 7 can be used to calculate the M193 adjusted point of aim based on wind speed Table 5 7 M193 calculated adjusted point of aim based on wind speed full value RANGE m 25 50 75 10 150 175 200 250 so DISTANCE MOVED in 5 32 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Downrange Feedback DRIFT FOR A 10 MILE PER HOUR WIND USING 5 56 MILLIMETER M855 AMMUNITION 5 84 Table 5 8 illustrates the drift using M855 5 56 millimeter ball ammunition fired in an M16A2 rifle with a 300 meter battlesight zero Table 5 8 Drift for 10 mile per hour wind using M855 ammunition FIRED IN M16A2 RIFLE WITH A 300 METER BATTLESIGHT ZERO __ _ 0 00 00 __ wo 215 X o0 X 253 860 133 505 ADJUSTED POINT OF AIM BASED ON GRAVITY AND WIND SPEED 5 85 Wind has a minor effect on the M16 bullet relative to the size of the target at ranges out to 100 meters When engaging targets in excess of 150 meters in heavy winds Soldiers adjust the point of aim for the wind to increase the probability of a hit Wind effects are uniform in relation to speed that is a 5 mile per hour wind has half the effect
303. f outline e Contrast with the background Shine 6 12 Metal objects such as belt buckles reflect light and act as a beacon to the wearer s position This 1s as true at night as it 1s during the day 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 6 3 Chapter 6 Regularity of Outline 6 13 Humans and most types of military equipment cast outlines that are familiar to all Soldiers The outlines of rifles helmets and vehicles are all easily identified The reliability of this indicator depends on the visibility and the experience of the observer On a clear day most Soldiers can easily identify enemy riflemen or equipment if a distinctive outline is presented At night or during other periods of poor visibility seeing outlines is not only more difficult but inexperienced troops will frequently mistake stumps and rocks for enemy Soldiers This 1s an additional reason for Soldiers to become completely familiar with the terrain during periods of good visibility Contrast with the Background 6 14 If a Soldier wearing a dark uniform moves into a position in front of a snow bank the contrast between the white snow and the dark uniform makes him clearly visible However if he was wearing a white or light colored uniform he would be more difficult to see 6 15 Contrast with the background is the most difficult target indicator for a Soldier to avoid During operations in which the Soldier is moving he is usually exposed to numerous background colors Since no
304. f the mode of fire This malfunction occurs when the cartridge is not ejected through the ejection port and either remains partly in the chamber or becomes jammed in the upper receiver as the bolt closes When the firer initially clears the rifle the cartridge could strike an inside surface of the receiver and bounce back into the path of the bolt Probable Cause 3 22 The cartridge must be extracted before it can eject Failures to eject can also be caused by a buildup of carbon or fouling on the extractor or by short recoil Short recoil 1s usually due to a buildup of fouling in the bolt carrier mechanism or gas tube Resistance caused by a carbon coated or corroded chamber can impede the extraction and ejection of a cartridge Corrective Action 3 23 While retraction of the charging handle usually frees the cartridge and permits removal the charging handle must not be released until the position of the next live round is determined 3 24 If another live round has been sufficiently stripped from the magazine or remains in the chamber remove the magazine and all live rounds before releasing the charging handle 3 25 If several malfunctions occur and are not corrected by cleaning and lubricating replace the ejector spring extractor spring and extractor OTHER MALFUNCTIONS 3 26 Table 3 1 describes other malfunctions that can occur and the appropriate corrective actions Table 3 1 Other malfunctions MALFUNCTION CORRECTI
305. fication CONDUCT NOTES 1 When firing record fire each Soldier must wear the proper uniform the helmet LBE and IBA with all SAPI plates 1f available No other armor is required 2 Before engaging targets target detection is accomplished with a dry fire scenario 3 Ifpossible Soldiers should fire Practice Record Fire I and II on different ranges Soldiers firing Practice Record Fire II on the same range as Practice Record Fire I must fire on a different lane 6 54 Each firer receives 40 single or multiple target exposures at ranges from 50 to 300 meters and 40 rounds of 5 56 millimeter ball ammunition Table 6 7 depicts the number of rounds that must be fired from each position Each Soldier must hit a minimum of 23 out of 40 target exposures Table 6 7 Number of rounds that must be fired from each position during Practice Record Fire and Il POSITION NUMBER OF ROUNDS FIRED Prone supported firing position or at the unit commander s discretion the foxhole supported firing position Prone unsupported firing position Kneeling unsupported firing position 6 55 Soldiers adhere to the following guidelines e Based on the total number of hits achieved in each table Soldiers are critiqued on the practice record fire score If a firer consistently misses targets or experiences problems with target detection and range estimation coaches should point out the shooting error to help correct it e Exposure times are thre
306. for Nuclear Biological and Chemical NBC Protection 02 June 2003 FM 4 25 11 First Aid 23 December 2002 FM 20 3 Camouflage Concealment and Decoys 30 August 1999 FM 21 10 Field Hygiene and Sanitation 21 June 2000 FM 3 21 75 The Warrior Ethos and Soldier Combat Skills 28 January 2008 FM 22 6 Guard Duty 17 September 1971 FM 25 4 How to Conduct Training Exercises 10 September 1984 STP 21 1 SMCT Soldier s Manual of Common Tasks Skill Level 1 14 December 2007 STP 21 24 SMCT Soldier s Manual of Common Tasks SMCT Skill Levels 2 4 2 October 2006 TC 25 20 A Leader s Guide to After Action Reviews 30 September 1993 TC 90 1 Training for Urban Operations 19 May 2008 References 2 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 References TM 9 1005 249 23 amp P Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual Including Repair Parts and Special Tools List for Rifle 5 56 mm M16 NSN 1005 00 856 6885 EIC 4F7 Rifle 5 56 mm M16A1 1005 00 073 9421 EIC 4FC 19 June 1991 TM 9 6920 363 12 amp P Operator s and Organizational Maintenance Manual Including Repair Parts and Special Tools List for Conversion Kit Cal 22 Rimfire Adapter M261 NSN 1005 01 010 1561 for Rifle 5 56 mm M16 and M16A1 Reprinted with Changes 1 and 2 21 August 1984 INTERNET WEBSITES U S Army Publishing Directorate http www apd army mil Reimer Doctrine and Training Digital Library http www train army mil 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 Ref
307. formation Maintain load and unload their magazines IAW TM 9 1005 319 10 refer to this TM for more information Maintain load unload and clear their weapons IAW TM 9 1005 319 10 refer to this TM for more information Perform SPORTS on their weapon within five seconds IAW TM 9 1005 319 10 refer to this TM for more information Correctly manipulate their sights without assistance IAW TM 9 1005 319 10 refer to this TM for more information Are taught peer coaching techniques and responsibilities IAW this manual NOTE Soldiers who do not meet the standard will receive remedial training before continuing with subsequent instruction 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 4 1 Chapter 4 CLEARING 4 2 4 WARNING To maintain safety the weapon must be cleared before disassembling cleaning inspecting transporting or storing NOTE Additional mechanical training including disassembly maintenance assembly loading and sight manipulation is available in TM 9 1005 319 10 To clear an M16 M4 series weapon Figure 4 1 perform the following actions 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Point the muzzle in a designated safe direction or in a clearing barrel Attempt to place the selector lever on SAFE If the selector lever cannot be placed on SAFE because the weapon is not cocked proceed to Step 3 Remove the magazine To perform this procedure Depress the magazine catch button m Pull the m
308. g 4 19 to 4 21 4 19 illus 4 20 illus 4 21 illus breath control 4 21 to 4 22 4 22 illus steady position 4 16 to 4 19 4 17 illus trigger squeeze 4 22 to 4 24 of short range marksmanship see also short range marksmanship training 7 42 to 7 47 aiming techniques 7 45 aimed quick kill 7 45 instinctive fire 7 45 rapid aimed fire 7 45 slow aimed fire 7 45 firing stance 7 42 to 7 43 movement techniques 7 44 to 7 45 point of aim 7 45 to 7 46 incapacitating shot placement 7 46 7 46 illus lethal shot placement 7 46 7 46 illus trigger manipulation 7 47 automatic fire 7 47 controlled pair 7 47 failure drill 7 47 weapon ready positions 7 43 to 7 44 high ready position 7 43 7 43 illus low ready position 7 44 7 44 illus G gravity see also effects of wind and gravity 5 28 adjusted point of aim based on gravity 5 28 5 28 illus grouping procedures see also downrange feedback 5 1 to 5 14 5 1 table concept 5 2 conduct of a 25 meter grouping firing 5 2 to 5 3 12 August 2008 multiple shot group analysis see also multiple shot group analysis 5 7 to 5 13 5 8 illus organization of a 25 meter grouping range 5 2 5 2 illus shot group marking 5 3 to 5 4 54 illus single shot group analysis see also single shot group analysis 5 4 to 5 7 troubleshooting the fundamentals 5 14 5 14 table H heavy thermal weapon sight see also accessories M4 ser
309. g are not permitted on the firing line unless the tower operator permits drinking from the canteen NOTE Drink water often to prevent heat injuries 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 D 1 Appendix D PERSONNEL AND DUTIES D 3 To provide a safe and efficient range operation and effective instruction certain duties may be required of personnel The personnel may include e OIC RSO NCOIC Ammunition detail Unit armorer Assistant instructor Medical personnel Control tower operators Maintenance detail OFFICER IN CHARGE D 4 The OIC is responsible for the overall operation of the range before during and after live firing RANGE SAFETY OFFICER D 5 The RSO e Is responsible for the safe operation of the range e Conducts a safety orientation before each scheduled LFX e Ensures that a brass and ammunition check is made before the unit leaves the range Ensures that all personnel comply with the safety regulations and procedures prescribed for conduct of an LFX e Ensures that all left handed firers use left handed firing devices NOTE This officer should not be assigned duties other than those of the safety officer NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICER IN CHARGE D 6 The NCOIC assists the OIC and safety officer by performing duties as required for example he might supervise enlisted personnel who are supporting the LFX AMMUNITION DETAIL D 7 This detail is composed of one or more ammunition handlers The amm
310. g it seem like both eyes are looking through the same sight 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 C 5 Appendix C AIMING LASERS C 22 AN PAQ 4 series and the AN PEQ 2A B aiming lasers operate within the electromagnetic spectrum specifically near the IR range and are seen through image intensification devices Aiming lasers emit a highly colliminated beam of IR energy that allows for quick point and shoot capability at night Even though aiming lasers provide a quick and easy means of engaging the enemy at night special attention must be given to the following e Proper adjustments to the image intensifiers e 10 meter boresighting procedures or 25 meter zeroing procedures e Scanning e Walking e IR discipline SCANNING C 23 NVDs have a 40 degree field of view leaving the average firer to miss easy targets of opportunity more commonly targets 50 meters left or right C 24 Soldiers must train to aggressively scan their sectors of fire for targets Training must reinforce regular blinking during scanning which relieves some of the eyestrain from spotting far targets After Soldiers master the art of scanning they find that targets are easier to detect by acknowledging the flicker or movement of a target WALKING C 25 Once a Soldier has located a target he must be aware of the placement of the aiming laser If he activates his laser while it 1s pointing over the target and into the sky he wastes valuable time trying to locate exac
311. g may be required INITIAL ENTRY TRAINING 1 5 The training strategy for BRM begins in IET and continues in the unit Figure 1 1 shows the IET training strategy 1 6 In IET Soldiers learn how to maintain a rifle hit a point target and apply the four marksmanship fundamentals and other skills needed to engage a target Once Soldiers understand the weapon and have demonstrated skill in zeroing additional simulations and live fire training exercises are conducted to prepare Soldiers for qualification During these exercises Soldiers master target types and scenarios of increasing difficulty to develop their proficiency 1 7 IET culminates in the Soldier s proficiency assessment which 15 conducted on the standard record fire range or approved alternates followed by instruction on advanced firing techniques a night fire exercise with iron sights unassisted or night vision goggles assisted This evaluation allows leaders to determine the effectiveness of the training BR 02 amp 03 Preliminary Grouping Zero EST 2000 8 Hours A 5 BR 07 amp 08 Field Fire I Il EST 2000 8 Hours 4 ARM 1 ARM 3 Intro to Reflexive Fire and PAQ4 Borelight Procedures Familiarization Fire Qual Day Night Fire 6 Hours 8 Hours EST 2000 5 LLL Fundamentals 22 EST 2000 Retraining Interceptor Body Armor is worn E gt 9 Selected Personnel during all periods of training 16 EX Live Fire 103 Hours Figure 1 1 Initial
312. ge for operational condition Raise the flag when occupying or firing according to the local SOP Check the ammunition to ensure that it 1s the correct type and quantity Ensure that range personnel are in the proper uniform and the equipment is in position Receive firing units Conduct safety checks on weapons Check for clean fully operational weapons Conduct a safety briefing to include administrative personnel on the range Organize personnel into firing orders keep unit integrity 1f possible Request permission to commence firing from range control Conduct of Firing E 41 When conducting firing the following must be checked Are communications to range control satisfactory Are commands from the tower clear and concise Are range areas policed Is ammunition accountability maintained Is the master score sheet updated Is personnel accountability maintained Are vehicles parked in the appropriate areas Is the air guard on duty and alert Are personnel in proper uniform Are earplugs in use Are troops responding properly to commands Are on the spot corrections being made when troops use poor techniques or fail to hit the target Is conservation of ammunition being enforced Are weapons cleared before they are taken from the firing line Are personnel checked for brass or ammunition before they leave the range Is anyone standing around not involved in training or support CLOSE THE RANGE E 42 To proper
313. gets e Considering the environment and the variables of the weapon and ammunition well trained Soldiers should be able to hit 300 meter stationary silhouette targets e When the target is moving laterally well trained Soldiers may only hit 150 meter targets 7 out of 10 times This is considered an acceptable performance 7 140 Further trainers should consider modifications to the fundamentals for engaging stationary targets e Steady position e Aiming e Breath control e Trigger squeeze STEADY POSITION 7 141 When firing at moving targets firers should assume the standard supported firing position but be flexible so that they can track any target in the sector When a target 15 moving directly at the firer directly away from the firer or at a slight angle the Soldier engages the target without changing his firing position Consider the following aspects of firing at moving targets e When targets are moving laterally only minor changes are needed to allow effective target engagement e Most moving targets are missed in the horizontal plane firing in front of or behind the target and not in the vertical plane firing too low or too high 7 36 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Advanced Rifle Marksmanship 7 142 The Soldier must make other adjustments as highlighted in Table 7 13 Table 7 13 Modifications for a steady position when firing at moving targets PART OF BODY MODIFICATION Nonfiring hand Grip the weapon more ti
314. ght see also light weapon thermal sight AN PAS 13B V1 2 26 to 2 27 2 26 illus FM 3 22 9 AN PAS 13C V1 2 26 to 2 27 2 26 illus AN PAS 13D V1 2 26 to 2 27 2 26 illus M68 close combat optic see also M68 close combat optic 2 17 2 17 illus 2 18 to 2 19 2 19 illus target pointer illuminator aiming light see also target pointer illuminator aiming light AN PEQ 2A 2 22 to 2 23 2 22 illus AN PEQ 2B 2 22 to 2 23 2 22 illus M16 series rifle see also weapon characteristics accessories and ammunition 2 5 to 2 10 M16AI see also M16A1 rifle 2 9 illus M16AQ2 see also M16A2 rifle 2 5 to 2 33 2 5 illus M16A3 see also M16A3 rifle 2 5 illus M16AA see also M16A4 rifle 2 7 illus carbine see also M4 series carbine 2 2 illus 2 3 illus characteristics 2 1 2 1 table battlesight zeroing 2 4 to 2 5 2 4 illus point of impact 2 5 table mechanically zeroing 2 4 2 4 illus mounting accessories see also accessories advanced combat optical gunsight see also advanced combat optical gunsight 2 31 to 2 32 2 31 illus AN PVS night vision sight see also AN PVS 4 night vision sight 2 28 to 2 29 2 28 illus compatibility and mounting 2 16 table heavy thermal weapon sight see also heavy weapon thermal sight AN PAS 13B V3 2 26 to 2 27 2 26 illus 12 August 2008 AN PAS 13C V3 2 26 to 2 27 2 26 illus AN PAS 13D V3 2
315. ghtly with the nonfiring hand and apply more pressure to the rear This helps to maintain positive control of the weapon and steady it for rapid trigger action Nonfiring side elbow Lift the nonfiring side elbow from the support position only to maintain a smooth track Firing hand Apply more rearward pressure to the pistol grip to steady the weapon during trigger squeeze Firing side elbow Lift the firing side elbow from support only to help maintain a smooth track NOTE The weapon pocket in the shoulder and the stock weld are the same as for stationary targets AIMING 7 143 When aiming at moving targets Soldiers must apply precise lead rules and in turn Soldiers must accurately estimate speed angle and range to the target to apply precise lead rules Then he must apply the single lead rule in order to place effective fire on combat targets 7 144 The procedures used to engage moving targets vary as the angle and speed of the target vary For example when a target is moving directly at the firer stationary target procedures apply However for a close fast moving target at a 90 degree angle the weapon and firer s entire upper body must be free from support so the target can be tracked Lead Requirements 7 145 Aiming directly at a 300 meter target moving 8 miles per hour at a 90 degree angle would result in missing it this type of target covers 4 feet while the bullet is traveling toward him To hit the target the Sol
316. ghts 8 1 to 8 11 boresighting 8 6 to 8 11 advanced combat optical gunsight see also advanced combat optical gunsight 8 7 AN PAQ B see also infrared aiming light 8 8 to 8 9 AN PAQC see also infrared aiming light 8 8 to 8 9 AN PEQ 2A see also target pointer illuminator aiming light 8 9 to 8 10 AN PEQ 2B see also target pointer illuminator aiming light 8 9 to 8 10 AN PVS see also night vision sight 8 10 to 8 11 thermal weapon sight see also light weapon iron sight and heavy weapon iron sight 8 8 using the backup iron sights see also backup iron sights 8 6 using the M68 close combat optic see also M68 close combat optic 8 6 to 8 7 concept 8 2 training program 8 2 table weapon aided vision device combinations 8 1 table zeroing 8 2 to 8 5 8 3 illus 8 4 illus 8 5 illus C chemical biological radiological and nuclear firing see also advanced rifle marksmanship 7 24 to 7 29 mission oriented protective posture equipment fire 7 24 to 7 29 modifications 7 24 to 7 28 immediate action 7 25 marksmanship 12 August 2008 fundamentals 7 25 to 7 28 7 26 to 7 27 illus Operation and function 7 25 training 7 28 to 7 29 50 meter live fire exercise 7 29 alternate fire exercise 7 29 conduct 7 28 7 28 table downrange feedback 7 28 to 7 29 dry fire exercises 7 28 clearing see also preliminary marksmanship instruction 4 2 to 4 3 4 3 illus comb
317. gure 5 14 Shot groups with improper vertical placement 5 12 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Downrange Feedback IMPROPER SHOT GROUPS ON THE EDGE OF THE TARGET 5 36 The shot groups shown in Figure 5 15 are improper groups 5 37 The Soldier should make a bold sight change to bring the groups closer to the target s center and ensure that the shot groups remain on the 25 meter zeroing target 24 1 18 15 12 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 WINDAGE dd mu LES si a LII LIU ae nm Figure 5 15 Improper shot groups on the edge of the target 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 5 13 Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING THE FUNDAMENTALS 5 38 When troubleshooting the fundamentals the coach s imagination is the only limiting factor Table 5 2 outlines the techniques that can be used to identify errors in Soldiers application of the fundamentals Table 5 2 Techniques used to identify errors in Soldiers application of the fundamentals PROBLEM AREA TECHNIQUE USED TO IDENTIFY THE PROBLEM AREA Attach the M16 sighting device and observe the Soldier while he fires Breathing Watch the rise and fall of the firer s chest for consistency Trigger squeeze Place your finger over the firer s finger while he fires feeling for jerking and smooth follow through Watch for jerking of the trigger and smooth follow through Position Observe the following areas for consistency Placement of the tip of the nose Placement of the tr
318. h Soldier achieves 7 hits out of 30 target exposures MODIFICATIONS FOR NIGHT FIRE 7 116 During limited visibility a firer cannot effectively use his iron sights in most situations and without artificial illumination the sights block his field of vision Trainers must consider the impact of limited visibility on the Soldier s ability to properly apply combat firing skills and the fundamentals of marksmanship 7 30 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Advanced Rifle Marksmanship Operation and Maintenance of the Weapon 7 117 Many actions are affected by nighttime conditions handling the weapon performing operation and function checks loading and unloading and maintenance Consider the following modifications e Because combat conditions and enforcement of noise and light discipline restrict the use of illumination Soldiers must be trained to operate service and clean their weapons in total darkness e Movements are slower tasks take longer to complete vision is impaired and equipment is more easily misplaced or lost NOTE Although initial practice of these tasks should occur during daylight to facilitate control and error correction repeated practice during actual nighttime conditions should be integrated with other training Only through repeated practice and training can the Soldier be expected to perform all tasks efficiently Immediate Action 7 118 Under normal conditions a Soldier should clear a stoppage in three to five
319. h target position sheet 50 to will be scored for 150 m this table Time Between Firing Positions 6 85 The time between each firing position 1s not specified but enough time should be allotted to allow the firer to clear his weapon quickly change firing positions and reload before beginning the next firing table DUTIES OF RANGE PERSONNEL 6 86 The following personnel perform range duties e Officer in charge OIC e Range safety officer RSO e Firing line safety crew Officer In Charge 6 87 The OIC briefs all Soldiers on the proper scoring procedures Range Safety Officer 6 88 To facilitate the timely flow of the record fire qualification table the RSO ensures that enough time is given between firing positions Firing Line Safety Crew 6 89 Firing line safety crew personnel e Perform as scorers Inform the chief range officer of crossfires Inform the chief range officer of allowable alibis Accurately count hits and misses Count only four hits for each silhouette for score Complete the scorecard Assist the Soldier with target repair Total sign and return the completed scorecard to the chief range officer 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 6 19 Chapter 6 SCORING 6 90 One hit is awarded for each round that strikes within or touches some part of the silhouette If a bullet hole does not touch some part of the scaled silhouette it is counted as a miss Ricochets are counted as hits or misses 6 91
320. has been pulled and the sear has released the hammer a cartridge may fail to fire This occurs when the firing pin fails to strike the primer with enough force or when the ammunition is defective The firer must follow unit safety guidelines until the determining factors of the misfire have been identified and corrected Probable Causes 3 12 Excessive carbon buildup on the firing pin Figure 3 2 A is often the cause because the full forward travel of the firing pin is restricted A defective or worn firing pin can give the same results Inspection of the ammunition could reveal a shallow indentation or no mark on the primer indicating a firing pin malfunction Figure 3 2 B Cartridges that show a normal indentation on the primer but did not fire indicate faulty ammunition or failure of the cartridge to fully seat in the chamber 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 3 3 Chapter 3 A Carbon or Fouling Buildup ___ md NORMAL PRIMER INDENT Figure 3 2 Failure to fire Corrective Action 3 13 If the malfunction continues 1 Inspect the firing pin bolt bolt carrier and locking lug recesses of the barrel extension 2 Remove any accumulation of excessive carbon or fouling 3 Inspect the firing pin for damage 3 14 If the round is suspected to be faulty dispose of it AW the unit SOP and ensure that it is reported and returned to the agency responsible for issuing ammunition WARNING If an audible pop or
321. hase 7 279 As the chart in Figure 7 31 shows the hold off at 400 meters is about half the height of the standard E type silhouette to hold off at 400 meters the firer aims half the height of the target over the target to hit it The drop at 500 meters 1s considerably larger so holding off will not be practical The firer will have to adjust his rear elevation knob to get the proper point of aim for that distance M4 Carbine and M16A2 Rifle Bullet Trajectory Comparision 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 Meters Figure 7 31 Bullet trajectory comparison 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 7 67 Chapter 7 Windage 7 280 When firing during windy conditions and there is no time to make sight adjustments the SDM must use hold off to adjust for windage Figure 7 32 e When holding off the SDM aims into the wind If the wind is moving from the right to left his point of aim is to the right If the wind 15 moving from left to right his point of aim is to the left e If the SDM misses the target and the point of impact of the round is observed he notes the lateral distance of his error and re fires holding off that distance in the opposite direction 7 281 Table 7 26 shows calculated adjusted points of aim based on wind speed 7 282 Table 7 27 shows the drift for a 10 mph wind using 5 56 millimeter M855 ball ammunition fired in a M16A2 rifle with a 300 meter battlesight zero lt 10 MPH WIND 48 46 44 42 4038 36 34 32
322. he bullet is fired 5 77 Therefore training time should not be wasted trying to teach Soldiers an exact way to measure wind speed Soldiers should understand that wind can blow a bullet off course but they should not overcompensate and miss targets by applying too much hold off 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 5 29 Chapter 5 5 78 A wind gauge can be used for precise measurement of wind velocity When a gauge is not available velocity is estimated using one of the following methods e Flag method e Pointing method e Observation method Flag Method 5 79 To perform the flag method Figure 5 27 1 Observe a flag or any cloth like material hanging from a pole 2 Estimate the angle formed at the juncture of the flag and pole 3 Divide this angle by the number 4 NOTE The answer is the wind velocity expressed in miles per hour Flags should be at the target line and firing line for comparision of wind conditions Figure 5 27 Determine wind speed using the flag method 5 30 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Downrange Feedback Pointing Method 5 80 If a flag is not visible the firer can use the pointing method To perform the pointing method Figure 5 28 1 Drop a piece of paper leaf or other light material from the shoulder 2 Point directly at the place where it lands 3 Estimate the angle created by the pointing arm 4 Divide this angle by the number 4 NOTE The answer is the approximate wind speed at t
323. he M16 rifle round May refer to a complete cartridge or to a bullet scaled silhouette target Any target that 1s reduced in size When it 1s observed from 25 meters it looks the same size as though at a greater range sector of fire An area assigned to an individual weapon or unit to be covered by fire semiautomatic fire A mode of fire that allows one round to be fired each time the trigger is pulled serviceability checks A technical inspection of the rifle to determine if it is safe to fire and in working condition May not ensure accuracy service ammunition Standard ammunition used by the military Ammunition designed for combat service rifle The primary rifle of a military force service school Branch schools such as the US Army Infantry School at Fort Benning Ga and the Armor School at Fort Knox Ky sharpshooter The middle rating of qualification shot group A number of shots fired using the same aiming point which accounts for rifle ammunition and firer variability Three shots are enough but any number of rounds may be fired in a group shot group analysis A procedure for analyzing the size of shot groups on a target to determine firer error 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 Glossary 9 Glossary sight alignment Placing the center tip of the front sight post in the exact center of the rear aperture sighter rounds Rounds fired that allow the bullet strike to be observed in relation to the aiming point sigh
324. he aperture marked L The small aperture is being used Proper and accurate shot group marking is enforced The firer s name is clearly marked on the target Observables Coaches analyze the firer s fundamentals Majority of the round must be inside the circle to be counted Two consecutive 3 round groups are shot with 6 of 6 rounds impacting inside of the 4 centimeter circle 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 5 1 Chapter 5 CONCEPT 5 1 Shot grouping is a form of practice firing with two primary objectives firing tight shot groups and consistently placing those groups in the same location Grouping exercises can be conducted anywhere that provides precise location of bullet hits and misses such as a 25 meter live fire zeroing range KD range EST 2000 LMTS or location of misses and hits system NOTES 1 Shot grouping should be conducted between dry fire training and zeroing 2 The initial live fire training should be a grouping exercise with the purpose of practicing and refining marksmanship fundamentals ORGANIZATION OF A 25 METER GROUPING RANGE 5 2 The organization and conduct of a grouping range are based on the availability of ammunition number of personnel and the firing ability of personnel in training 5 3 To properly conduct a 25 meter grouping range perform the following actions e Divide the unit into firing orders The first order fires while the second order coaches e Reserve ten firing points to c
325. he firing position expressed in miles per hour Pointing Method 10 MPH WIND 4 Wn i ya A e 4 722 Ay gt Figure 5 28 Determine wind speed using the pointing method Observation Method 5 81 If the flag or pointing methods cannot be used the following information can assist in determining wind velocities e Winds less than 3 miles per hour can barely be felt by the firer but the presence of slight wind can be determined by drifting smoke Winds of 3 to 5 miles per hour can be felt lightly over the firer s face Winds of 5 to 8 miles per hour constantly move the leaves of trees Winds of 8 to 12 miles per hour raise dust and loose paper Winds of 12 to 15 miles per hour cause small trees to sway 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 5 31 Chapter 5 ADJUSTED POINT OF AIM BASED ON WIND SPEED 5 82 Figure 5 29 illustrates how the effects of wind on the bullet are similar to the effects of gravity as range increases the effect of wind increases For example a 10 mile per hour full value wind moves an M16A1 M193 bullet from about of an inch at 25 meters to about 15 inches at 300 meters 5 83 Table 5 7 displays the wind effects for all conditions a wind of greater speed increases bullet movement by a uniform amount For example 15 mile per hour wind moves the bullet 34 of an inch at 25 meters and about 22 inches at 300 meters A half value wind moves the strike of the round in a 10 mile per hour wind 1 4 o
326. he half turn position and identify the reference point 14 Using the adjusters on the borelight move the visible laser to the reference point 15 Rotate the borelight back to the start point move the zeroing mark to the visible laser NOTE If the visible laser cannot be located when the borelight is spun to the half turn position start this procedure at 2 meters instead of 10 meters When the visible laser is adjusted to the reference point at 2 meters restart the procedure at 10 meters 16 Repeat steps 13 through 15 until the visible laser spins on itself NOTE Every barrel is different so steps 10 through 15 must be performed with every weapon to ensure that the borelight is zeroed to that barrel If the borelight 15 zeroed go directly to the boresighting procedures 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 8 5 Chapter 8 BORESIGHTING 8 3 Two Soldiers are required to properly boresight a weapon a firer and a target holder Their duties are as follows e The firer s primary duty 15 to zero the borelight and make all adjustments on the aided vision device being used e The target holder secures the 10 meter boresighting target straight up and down 10 meters from the borelight and directs the firer in making necessary adjustments to the aiming device The target holder must wear night vision goggles when boresighting IR aiming lasers NOTE Appendix F shows the most current 10 meter boresighting target The 10 meter boresigh
327. he sequence in which they are engaged Credit is not given if unused ammunition from one 20 round table is added to a magazine provided for the next table 6 70 Alibi firing is reserved for Soldiers who encounter a malfunctioning target ammunition or weapon A Soldier will not be issued more than 20 rounds for Table 1 10 rounds for Table 2 or 10 rounds for Table 3 Soldiers who fire 20 rounds despite a target malfunction will not be issued additional alibi rounds There are no alibis for Soldier induced weapon malfunctions or for targets missed during the application of immediate action procedures 6 71 NOTE The ammunition allocation and alibi procedures for practice record fire and record fire are conducted the same The only exception is that coaching is authorized for practice record fire If a weapon or target malfunction occurs The Soldier must apply immediate action procedures and continue to fire the exercise After firing the Soldier notifies the NCOIC to determine if the ammunition was faulty or if the target malfunctioned The NCOIC verifies the malfunction The Soldier is permitted to fire at that target s with the exact number of rounds equal to the target malfunctions For example a Soldier had two confirmed target malfunctions at 250 meters Although he may have had five rounds left from the overall exercise the Soldier receives only two rounds to engage the two 250 meter target exposures if repaired or
328. he target senses shot locations which are shown on a laptop screen Unit commanders should expect and require the following e A training process that focuses on the four fundamentals of marksmanship steady position sight alignment and picture breath control and trigger squeeze e Opportunity for experienced marksmen to test out and serve as peer trainers or return to other duties Real time feedback All season training Soldiers trained on their assigned weapon throughout the process Using LMTS technology units can consistently reduce the rate of first time marksmanship failures and increase new Soldiers confidence in their ability to fire their basic weapon EQUIPMENT A 16 Software enhancements continue to optimize the training process and minimize computer requirements by enabling an instructor to control up to 10 targets with only one computer This feature reduces overall system costs and provides maximum throughput with a minimum number of instructors A 17 Minimum LMTS systems consist of a basic laser transmitter with a rod to fit the weapon and a laser target Systems can be expanded to include a variety of components NOTE Table A 1 provides a complete component list Table 1 Laser marksmanship training strategy parts list PART 110 system 110v or 220v TR 700 target LT100C laser transmitter rod mask set AC power adapter and user s manual 330A system 110v or 220v TR 900 target LT100C laser tran
329. he widths of the horizontal hash marks on the BDC reticles in all ACOG scopes correspond to the width of a 5 meter 19 inches silhouette man size at that range Figure 8 6 Figure 8 6 Width of horizontal hash marks ZEROING THE ADVANCED COMBAT OPTICAL GUNSIGHT 8 44 The adjustment increments for the ACOG are 1 4 inch per click at 100 meters A click 15 defined as the sound or feel of the positive detent movement This means that 4 clicks are required to move the bullet approximately one inch on the target at 100 meters At 25 meters 16 clicks move the bullet one inch Turning the screw in the direction of the arrow moves the bullet impact in the direction marked up right NOTE To ensure a consistent zero tap the scope with the palm of your hand to stabilize the adjustment mechanism after an adjustment has been made and then fire a three shot group on the target 8 45 The ACOG scope with chevron reticle is designed to be zeroed at 100 meters using the tip of the chevron reticle for POA POI Figure 8 7 Use tip of chevron for POA POI fix zeroing at 100 meters Figure 8 7 Advanced combat optical gunsight reticle point of aim at 100 meters 8 18 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Advanced Optics Lasers and Iron Sights 8 46 For a quick combat zero the scope may be zeroed at 25 meters using the tip of the 300 meter post as POA POI A 25 meter zero is less precise than a 100 meter zero and should be verified at longer distances
330. he zeroing target during boresighting or zeroing procedures shine a flashlight indirectly at the target to provide ambient light 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 8 29 Chapter 8 TARGET DETECTION 8 104 Target detection with the AN PVS 4 is very similar to target detection with the night vision goggles The AN PVS 4 has a 14 5 degree field of view causing the average firer to miss easy targets of opportunity more commonly the 50 meter left or right 8 105 Soldiers must be trained to aggressively scan their sectors of fire for targets The art of target detection at night is only as good as the Soldier practices Regular blinking during scanning relieves some of the eyestrain that Soldiers experience when trying to spot distant targets Regular blinking must be reinforced during training After Soldiers have mastered the art of scanning they will find that targets are more easily detected by acknowledging the flicker or movement of a target FIELD FIRE 8 106 During dry fire exercises Soldiers acquire a sight picture on all exposed silhouette targets before conducting the field fire scenario This allows Soldiers to focus on the targets at range The procedures for field fire include the following e Conducta dry fire exercise prior to conducting a live fire e Conduct Field Fire in the same manner as Field Fire II e Engage targets at 50 150 and 250 meters e Fire 36 rounds 18 rounds from the supported firing position 18 rounds f
331. heet which is in turn designed IAW the unit SOP e Safety clearing and unloading procedures Characteristics Capabilities Accessories Ammunition Disassembly Cleaning inspection and lubrication procedures Assembly Function check Loading Immediate and remedial actions Four fundamentals Use of EST 2000 LMTS and other TADSS Sight manipulation Boresighting procedures Zeroing procedures Effect of wind gravity and other environmental factors Range determination and estimation Classes of fire 1 14 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Marksmanship Training Application of fire Range operations courses of fire conduct of fire and fire commands Optics NVDs night aiming devices and thermal devices Scanning techniques Phase III Basic Marksmanship Training 1 61 During this phase the trainer demonstrates and reinforces what he has learned during Phase II The trainer sets up and conducts firing on the various ranges He explains the targets and the zeroing and scoring procedures The trainer explains the purpose of transition firing field zeroing procedures range layout and the conduct of training on the transition range This validates that the trainer has gained the knowledge necessary to conduct training The results of this review are recorded and maintained on the trainer s progression sheet Phase IV Advanced Marksmanship Training 1 62 The final phase of the train the trainer program
332. houette can be used on any 25 meter range and the target provides feedback to the firer on where the strike of the round impacts the target This exercise 1s conducted in the same manner as the 25 meter alternate course record fire Each Soldier will be in MOPP Level 4 Each Soldier will be issued 20 rounds of ammunition to be loaded two 10 round magazines Each Soldier will engage each silhouette with two rounds from the foxhole supported or kneeling position using Table I of DA Form 5790 R Each Soldier must achieve 11 hits out of 20 shots This is a GO NO GO exercise NOTE At the commander s discretion Table II of DA Form 3595 R may be used as an alternate course of fire This table allows Soldiers to engage targets from 50 to 300 meters 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 7 29 Chapter 7 SECTION IV NIGHT FIRE TRAINING Soldiers should be able to fire their weapons effectively in total darkness in bright sunlight and under all conditions between these two extremes Scheduled marksmanship training should provide a variety of night and limited visibility conditions The battlefield may be illuminated by ground flares handheld flares M203 flares mortar and artillery illumination aerial flares searchlights exploding rounds and burning vehicles or obscured by smoke fog and various environmental conditions The well trained Soldier should have experienced a number of these conditions and be confident that he can effectively employ his we
333. ht firing Firing performed under all conditions of limited visibility nonfiring hand The opposite of the firing hand 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 Glossary 7 Glossary optical sight Sight with lenses prisms or mirrors used in lieu of iron sights Paige sighting device A device with a small scaled target that fits into the muzzle of the weapon allowing the soldier to practice aiming pasters Small white or black gum backed paper used for covering bullet holes peep sight The rear sight a sight with a small aperture hole peer coach A soldier with shooting experience and knowledge equal to that of the firer he is coaching pit The target area behind the large berm of a KD range plastic practice ammunition Ammunition with a plastic projectile high muzzle velocity the light weight causes it to lose velocity rapidly with a maximum range of 250 meters or less designed for use in close in training areas frangible bullet point of aim The exact spot on a target the rifle sights are aligned with point of impact The point that a bullet strikes usually considered in relation to point of aim pop no kick A firing condition when the primer ignites and the powder charge does not This normally results in lodging the bullet inside the barrel pop up target A silhouette target that is activated remotely so it can suddenly appear and fall when struck by a bullet practice record Firing conducted on a qualification course for
334. ht record fire IR Assisted night record fire thermal SRM NOTE See Chapter 7 for more information about ARM PHASE V ADVANCED OPTICS LASERS AND RON SIGHTS 1 26 BRM teaches Soldiers to effectively engage the enemy with the basic rifle using the iron sights primarily during the day ARM adds additional situations for the firer To enhance the lethality of night firing Soldiers participate in training with optics and lasers This phase addresses the following topics e Backup iron sight BUIS M68 CCO ACOG AN PAQ 4C IR aiming laser AN PEQ 2A B target pointer illuminator aiming light TPIAL Thermal weapon sight TWS AN PVS 4 night vision sight NOTE See Chapter 8 for more information about advanced optics lasers and iron sights SECTION II UNIT MARKSMANSHIP TRAINING PROGRAM An effective unit marksmanship program reflects the priority emphasis and interest of commanders and trainers This section outlines a rifle marksmanship training program strategy as guidance in establishing and conducting an effective unit training program The strategy consists of the individual and leader refresher training for maintaining the basic skills learned during IET It progresses to training advanced and collective skills under near combat conditions during live fire STXs 1 8 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Marksmanship Training MISSION ESSENTIAL TASKS 1 27 Marksmanship proficiency is critical to soldiering and 15 requ
335. hting system that uses infrared light to assist in the aiming process initial entry training Indicates the first training received by a new soldier includes the MOS producing portion of his training such a one station unit training OSUT Glossary 6 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Glossary initial pressure The applications of about half of the total trigger pressure it takes to fire a rifle instructor trainer ratio The number of soldiers for which each instructor trainer 1s responsible internal ballistics What happens to the bullet before it leaves the muzzle of the rifle known distance Describes the older range complexes with large target frames behind a large berm and firing lines at 100 yards or 100 meter increments See FM 25 7 laser Light amplification by simulated emission of radiation lead Distance ahead of a moving target that a rifle must be aimed to hit the target lead rule Provides the soldier guidance on how to adjust his aiming point to hit moving targets line of sight A line between the rifle and the aiming point extending from the firing eye through the center of the rear aperture across the tip of the front sight post and onto the target location of misses and hits A projectile location system that provides immediate and precise information to the firer concerning bullet strike hit or miss locking The step in the cycle of operation that is a counterclockwise rotation of the bolt securing it into the
336. ication see also short range marksmanship training 7 55 to 7 57 barricade transition qualification firing 7 56 to 7 57 conduct 7 56 evaluation 7 56 to 7 57 7 57 table range setup 7 56 record and practice fire 7 55 to 7 56 conduct 7 55 7 55 table evaluation 7 56 short range marksmanship training see also Advanced Rifle Marksmanship 7 41 to 7 57 conduct of short range marksmanship training 7 41 to 7 42 7 42 table fundamentals of short range marksmanship see also fundamentals of short range marksmanship 7 42 to 7 47 Phase I Reflexive Fire Training see also reflexive fire training 7 51 to 7 53 Phase II Target Discrimination Training see also target discrimination training 7 53 to 7 55 Index 12 Phase III Short Range Marksmanship Qualification see also short range marksmanship qualification 7 55 to 7 57 Phase IV Shotgun and Automatic or Burst Firing Familiarization see also shotgun and automatic or burst firing familiarization 7 51 Preliminary Short Range Marksmanship Instruction 7 47 to 7 51 7 48 table magazine changing drills see also magazine changing drills 7 48 to 7 51 shotgun and automatic or burst firing familiarization see also short range marksmanship training 7 57 single shot group analysis see also grouping procedures 5 4 to 5 7 2 centimeter shot groups 5 5 5 5 illus 3 to 4 centimeter shot groups 5 6 5 6 illus match grade pe
337. icient operation of the targets and the close coordination between the pit NCOIC and range officer All operators must know the proper procedure for operating and marking the target Marking Targets for Zeroing and Slow Fire E 27 Targets are marked quickly after each shot or group of shots without command During slow fire the firer has a time limit of one minute for each shot Twenty seconds is considered the maximum time limit for marking A marker spotter 1s placed in the hit regardless of its location on the target Each time the target is marked the marker is removed from the previous hit and the hole is pasted NOTE 3 inch markers are used for 100 200 and 300 meters 5 inch markers are used for 500 meters Using Disk Markers E 28 The target markers are painted black on one side and white on the opposite side They are available in three dimensions 1 1 2 inches NSN 6920 00789 0864 3 inches NSN 6920 00 713 8255 5 inches NSN 6920 00 713 8254 E 29 The disk spindle NSN 6920 00 7138257 may also be procured through the supply channels RANGE OPERATIONS CHECKLIST E 30 This checklist consists of nine sections each covering a topic relating to range operations Mission analysis Double check Become an expert Determine requirements Determine available resources Foolproof Occupy the range and conduct training Close the range KD range NOTE The checklist should be modified to include local polic
338. ier has an understanding of range estimation and sight manipulation he is able to begin the live fire training exercise Table 7 25 The Soldier will be given 20 rounds in which to engage 20 targets at ranges from 100 to 500 meters using mechanical sight adjustments 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 7 65 Chapter 7 Table 7 23 Elevation knob M16A2 3 and front sightpost M16A4 DISTANCE m 7 0 cm 2 3 4 in 13 5 cm 5 3 8 in __ 205em 8 0 om 3 48 in NOTE All values were rounded off Table 7 24 Elevation knob M4 M4A1 and windage M16A4 DISTANCE m 8 4 om 3 3 8 in 7 0 cm 2 3 4 in 7 0 cm 2 3 4 in 60 288cm i 1 4 in NOTE AII values were rounded off Table 7 25 Known distance mech adj firing event FIRING EVENT ROUND TARGET RANGE m Known Distance Mech Adj 100 to 500 PHASE IV HOLD OFF 100 TO 500 METERS 7 274 Hold off is shifting the point of aim to achieve a desired point of impact Hold off is used only when the SDM does not have time to change his sight setting Certain situations such as multiple targets at varying ranges and rapidly changing winds do not allow proper windage and elevation adjustments Familiarization and practice of elevation and windage hold off techniques prepares the SDM to meet these situations The SDM rarely achieves pinpoint accuracy when holding off a minor error in range determination or a lack of a precise point of aim might cause the bullet to miss th
339. ies carbine 16 rifle and advanced optics lasers and iron sights AN PAS 13B V3 2 26 to 2 27 2 26 illus boresighting 8 8 compatibility and mounting 2 16 table mounting on 2 27 2 27 illus M16A2 2 27 2 27 illus M16A3 2 27 2 27 illus M16A4 2 26 to 2 27 2 26 illus carbine 2 26 to 2 27 2 26 illus training strategies and qualification standards 8 20 to 8 23 8 20 table 25 meter zeroing procedures 8 21 to 8 22 8 22 illus concept 8 20 conduct of training 8 20 modified fundamentals 8 21 practice qualification 8 23 record qualification 8 23 target detection 8 22 to 8 23 AN PAS 13C V3 2 26 to 2 27 2 26 illus boresighting 8 8 compatibility and mounting 2 16 table FM 3 22 9 Index mounting on 2 27 2 27 illus 1642 2 27 2 27 illus M16A3 2 27 2 27 illus M16AA 2 26 to 2 27 2 26 illus carbine 2 26 to 2 27 2 26 illus training strategies and qualification standards 8 20 to 8 23 8 20 table 25 meter zeroing procedures 8 21 to 8 22 8 22 illus concept 8 20 conduct of traming 8 20 modified fundamentals 8 21 practice qualification 8 23 record qualification 8 23 target detection 8 22 to 8 23 AN PAS 13D V3 2 26 to 2 27 2 26 illus boresighting 8 8 compatibility and mounting 2 16 table mounting on 2 27 2 27 illus 1642 2 27 2 27 illus M16A3 2 27 2 27 illus M16AA
340. ies weapons With this knowledge a Soldier is able to assess and correct any malfunction to keep the weapon operating properly This training program Table 4 1 introduces Soldiers to BRM and teaches them how to maintain operate and correct malfunctions on M16 and 4 weapons It also teaches peer coaching responsibilities and sight manipulation while emphasizing safety Table 4 1 Introduction to basic rifle marksmanship and mechanical training INTRODUCTION TO BASIC RIFLE MARKSMANSHIP AND MECHANICAL TRAINING Period 1 4 hours Instructional Intent Introduce the Soldiers to BRM and teach them how to maintain operate and correct malfunctions on a M16 M4 series weapon Teach peer coaching responsibilities and sight manipulation while emphasizing safety Observables Soldiers Emphasize safety throughout training IAW TM 9 1005 319 10 refer to this TM for more information Clear their weapons IAW this manual and TM 9 1005 319 10 Identify all components of their weapon IAW TM 9 1005 319 10 refer to this TM for more information Handle and identify 5 56 mm ammunition IAW TM 9 1005 319 10 refer to this TM for more information Understand the eight cycles of function IAW this manual Understand the modes of fire IAW this manual Disassemble and assemble their weapon IAW TM 9 1005 319 10 refer to this TM for more information Perform a function check on their weapon IAW TM 9 1005 319 10 refer to this TM for more in
341. igger finger Placement of the nonfiring hand Placement of the legs Cheek to stock weld Positioning of equipment Other potential problem areas Ensure that the Nonfiring side eye is not shuttering Equipment is fitted properly Soldier is not flinching when the trigger is pulled Soldier is firing with the dominant eye Soldier is wearing glasses if applicable Soldier is maximizing use of the supported position SECTION ZEROING PROCEDURES This section provides guidelines for the instructor trainer to zero M16 M4 series weapons at 25 meters and at actual range Table 5 3 It includes concept organization mechanical zero zero recording 25 meter sight settings field fire sight settings and troubleshooting of the fundamentals Table 5 3 Zeroing procedures ZEROING PROCEDURES Instructional Intent Reinforce PMI while adjusting the confirmed shot groups center of mass of the 4 centimeter circle with 5 out of 6 consecutive rounds at 25 meters Special Instructions Ensure that The rear sight is on the proper setting zero M16A2 3 8 3 1 M16A4 6 3 2 M4 6 3 The rear sight aperture is set on 300 1 not 800 1 The M16A1 s rear sight is set on the aperture marked L The small aperture is being used Proper and accurate shot group marking is enforced The firer s name is clearly marked on the target M16A2 A3 A4s zero on M16A2 zeroing targets M4s zero on M4 zeroing targets M16A1s zero on M16A1 Zeroing
342. ight fire quick fire and assault fire but is not recommended for primary marksmanship training Training Considerations A 57 When service ammunition is in short supply the RFA can be used to complement a unit s training program Rifle Performance A 58 The RFA cannot be depended on to fire in the same place as 5 56 millimeter ammunition The RFA and its 22 caliber ammunition cannot replicate the exact ballistics of the 5 56 millimeter ammunition but efforts to match RFAs with specific rifles can result in reasonable replication NOTE Under ideal training conditions the RFA should be used with dedicated rifles It is not necessary for the Soldier to use his own weapon during RFA training A 59 Finding the right match of RFA and rifle can eliminate some variability A trial and error technique can match RFAs to rifles which results in weapons that fire well Rifle Zero A 60 RFA ammunition differs from 5 56 millimeter ammunition in the following ways e RFA ammunition will not usually group in the same location as 5 56 millimeter ammunition at 25 meters and cannot be used for weapon zero e RFA ammunition normally fires a slightly larger shot group than 5 56 millimeter ammunition A 61 When a Soldier uses an RFA in his rifle he must be careful not to lose his 5 56 millimeter zero This can be accomplished by using hold off while firing 22 caliber ammunition or keeping a record of sight changes so the sights can be moved back
343. ilable Targets may be effectively engaged using semiautomatic fire Automatic or Burst Fire 7 36 In some combat situations the use of automatic or burst fire can improve survivability and enhance mission accomplishment Clearing buildings final assaults FPF and ambushes may require limited use of automatic or burst fire 7 37 Depending on the tactical situation Soldiers should employ automatic or burst fire in the following conditions e Ammunition is readily available and there are no problems with resupply Closely spaced multiple targets are located 50 meters away or less Maximum fire is immediately required at an area target Tracers or some other means can be used to observe the effect of bullets on the target Leaders can maintain adequate control over weapons firing in the automatic fire mode Good artificial support 15 available The initial sound of gunfire disperses closely spaced enemy targets MODIFICATIONS FOR AUTOMATIC OR BURST FIRE 7 38 Automatic or burst fire is inherently less accurate than semiautomatic fire Trainers must consider the impact of recoil and the high cyclic rate of fire on the Soldier s ability to properly apply the fundamentals of marksmanship and other combat firing skills such as immediate action procedures and rapid magazine changes Marksmanship Fundamentals 7 39 The following paragraphs describe the modifications necessary for Soldiers to apply the four fundamentals when firing in
344. in individual and collective gunnery tasks Training strategies for rifle marksmanship are implemented in TRADOC institutions IET Noncommissioned Officers Education System NCOES Basic Officer Leaders Course BOLC and in units The overall training strategy is multifaceted and includes supporting strategies that use resources such as publications ranges ammunition and training aids devices simulators and simulations TADSS These strategies focus on developing the Soldier and leader skills required for success in combat NOTE See AR 350 1 for specific requirements pertaining to marksmanship training and DA Pam 350 38 for live fire frequency requirements OBJECTIVES 1 1 The procedures and techniques for implementing the total Army rifle marksmanship training strategy are based on the concept that Soldiers must become skilled marksmen FM 7 0 stresses marksmanship as the paramount Soldier skill Further Soldiers should understand common firing principles and be confident in applying their firing skills in combat Unit leaders accomplish proficiency through practice supervised by qualified instructors trainers and thorough objective performance assessments 1 2 The basic firing skills and exercises outlined in this manual must be part of every unit s marksmanship training program Unit commanders must focus their basic and advanced marksmanship training programs to support their mission essential task lists METLs MARKSMANSHIP TRA
345. in the M4 M16 carrying handle 2 Press down firmly on the optic until it is seated inside the carrying handle rail 3 Insert the locking screw and washer set from the bottom of the carrying handle Ensure that the locking screw and washer are inserted in the proper order screw locking nut washer or the screw will eventually shake itself loose Figure 2 46 shows the proper assembly of the screw set FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Weapon Characteristics Accessories and Ammunition Figure 2 46 ACOG locking screw 4 Tighten the locking screw with the factory supplied Allen wrench and then tighten another turn NOTE When the ACOG 1s attached to the carrying handle the bullet drop compensated BDC reticle will be off slightly at extended distances For example at 500 meters the impact will be 5 inches high at 600 meters the impact will be 6 inches high To compensate for this aim slightly low once the target 15 ranged beyond 400 meters SECTION IV 10 METER BORESIGHT AND 25 METER ZERO OFFSET Boresighting 1s conducted at 10 meters with the borelight weapon aiming device and a 10 meter offset Each aiming device and weapon combination has a unique 10 meter offset The 25 meter zero offset target 1s used when live firing at 25 meters When used properly these offsets will align the aiming device on the selected weapon to engage a target s center of mass at 300 meters NOTE See Appendix F for more information a
346. in with a review of the principles of safe weapon handling Assume the weapon is always loaded and never point the weapon at anything that you do not intend to shoot FUNDAMENTALS OF SHORT RANGE MARKSMANSHIP 7 162 During SRC there is little margin for error Too slow a shot at the enemy too fast a shot at a noncombatant or inaccurate shots can all be disastrous for the Soldier Further the risk of fratricide or noncombatant casualties is greatest during SRC To survive and accomplish missions in close quarters Soldiers must master four fundamentals of SRM e Firing stance weapon ready positions and movement techniques e Aiming technique e Point of aim e Trigger manipulation FIRING STANCE WEAPON READY POSITIONS AND MOVEMENT TECHNIQUES 7 163 Regardless of the weapon ready position used Soldiers must always assume the correct firing stance to ensure stability and accuracy when engaging targets Firing Stance 7 164 To assume the correct fighting stance Keep the feet approximately shoulder width apart Point the toes straight to the front direction of movement Stagger the firing side foot slightly to the rear of the nonfiring side foot Bend the knees slightly 7 42 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Advanced Rifle Marksmanship e Lean the upper body slightly forward e Square the shoulders and pull them back don t roll them over or slouch e Keep the head up and both eyes open 7 165 When engaging targets e
347. increasing at greater 5 7 38 Figure 7 21 Target movement distance at various angles 7 39 Figure 7322 Fig DOSIUOTI tasca tro tren Lo bd Oe ane canta Sue tede e 7 43 Fig re 23 LOW ready i i cepi Malaita av zie Pra arb a HU 1 44 FIGUIC ZOMG T 1 46 Figure 7 25 Ineapaeltallolt ZOMG uio on sees on Nee NUS 7 46 Figure 7 26 Right side parallel magazine changing method 7 49 Figure 7 27 Left side parallel magazine Changing 7 49 Figure 7 28 Right side L shaped magazine changing method 7 50 Figure 7 29 Left side L shaped magazine changing method 7 51 Figure 7 30 Dimensions and placement of bowling pin 7 51 Figure 7 31 Bullet trajectory comparison 7 67 Figure 7 32 Windage effects of a 10 mph crosswind 7 68 Figure 8 1 Example of a Zeroing 8 3 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Contents Figure 8 2 Borelight in the START POINT
348. ines 2 The Soldier loads one 28 round magazine 3 The Soldier assumes the low ready position at the 50 meter line facing the targets 4 The Soldier engages the targets as shown in Table 7 21 5 On cue the Soldier assumes the proper firing position and stance places the selector lever on SEMI uses the correct aiming technique for the target s distance and engages the target NOTE If a Soldier is having difficulty during the blank fire exercise he must be retrained before continuing with the qualification Evaluation 7 226 Use the following guidelines for scoring e Allrounds must impact on the E type silhouette e Hits are defined as being in the lethal zone bowling pin 7 56 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Advanced Rifle Marksmanship Table 7 21 Barricade transition fire BARRICADE DISTANCE POSITION ROUNDS FIRED METHOD Start with 28 round magazine in the open Standing Controlled pair Kneeling Controlled pair Open 50 m Prone Sitting Left Right Left Short 40 m Top Right Left Right Left Short 25 m Top Right Transition back to the tall 35 m barricade Perform parallel or L shaped magazine change Insert 4 round magazine Left Right Transition back to short 40 m barricade Perform parallel or L shaped magazine change Insert 4 round magazine Left Right Transition back to tall 50 m barricade Perform parallel or L shaped magazine change Insert 4 round magazine 2 PHASE IV SHOTGUN AND AUTOMAT
349. ing If there is no indication of probable error the firer s position breath control shot anticipation and trigger squeeze are closely observed Questioning the Firer 1 53 The firer is asked to detect his errors and to explain his firing procedure position aiming breath control and trigger squeeze Analyzing the Shot Group 1 54 Analyzing the shot group 15 an important step in detecting and correcting errors When analyzing a target the instructor trainer correlates observations of the firer to probable errors in performance according to the shape and size of shot groups A poor shot group is usually caused by more than one observable error TRAINER CERTIFICATION PROGRAM 1 55 The certification program sustains the trainers expertise and develops methods of training The program standardizes procedures for certifying marksmanship trainers Trainers technical expertise must be continuously refreshed updated and closely managed TRAINING BASE 1 56 The training base can expect the same personnel changes as any other organization Soldiers assigned as marksmanship trainers will have varying degrees of experience and knowledge of training procedures and methods Therefore the trainer certification program must be an ongoing process that is tailored to 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 1 13 Chapter 1 address these variables At a minimum formal records should document program progression for each trainer All marksmanship trai
350. ing Soldier assessment commanders answer the following questions e Do Soldiers maintain their assigned weapons and magazines IAW the TM Do they have a manual e Do Soldiers conduct serviceability checks of weapons and magazines before training Were maintenance deficiencies corrected e Do Soldiers demonstrate an understanding of the weapon s operation functioning and capabilities e Can Soldiers correctly apply immediate action procedures to reduce weapon stoppages and then continue to fire Have they demonstrated this during dry fire exercises e Are Soldiers firing their assigned weapons How often are weapons reassigned between individuals What 15 the value of a recorded zero e Can Soldiers precisely and consistently apply the four fundamentals of rifle marksmanship To what standard have they demonstrated their mastery During a dry fire exercise During live fire exercise LEX When firing on the 25 meter course During KD firing e Can Soldiers accurately battlesight zero their assigned rifle to standard Do they understand sight adjustment procedures Dothey record their rifle s zero How 15 it done Why Do they record the date the Soldier last zeroed his rifle What is the sight setting Are these linked How do you check this e Do Soldiers demonstrate their knowledge of the effects of wind and gravity while firing out to 300 meters What feedback was provided How FM 3 22 9 12
351. ing effective fire in a tactical setting It requires individual skill plus command and control to engage all targets within an assigned sector concurrent training Training that occurs at the same time that other unit members are using the primary training facilities cookoff A round that fires as a result of a hot chamber without the trigger being pulled It can occur any time until the weapon is cooled crack and thump A method to determine the general direction and distance to an enemy firer who 15 shooting at you cradle A vise like mechanism that holds a weapon in a secure position for test firing cross dominance A soldier with a dominant hand and a dominant eye that are not the same for example a right hander firer with a dominant left eye cycle of operation The eight steps involved in firing a round of ammunition feeding chambering locking firing unlocking extracting ejecting and cocking cyclic rate of fire The maximum rate at which a weapon will fire in the automatic mode dime washer exercise A dry fire exercise used to practice trigger squeeze downrange feedback Used to describe any training technique that provides precise knowledge of bullet strike whether hit or miss dry fire A technique used to simulate the firing of a live round with an empty weapon Any application of the fundamentals of marksmanship without live ammunition may be referred to as dry fire dry fire moving target trainer A small
352. ing the rifle between shots When performing the dry fire method Soldiers should use a magazine with the follower and spring removed Another option for the dry fire mode involves removing the charging handle and attaching a piece of cord looped on both ends with the free end about 3 inches from the end of the stock to the bolt The coach can recock the rifle between shots by pulling the cord directly to the rear A 37 The sound and recoil replicator options include the M16A2 Blazer and the alternate laser mounting bracket used with a standard blank firing attachment BFA Both options offer added realism by providing full rifle function sound and recoil When using the special safe Blazer blanks the Blazer option may be employed indoors without hearing protection Standard M200 blanks may only be used with the BFA while outdoors and while wearing hearing protection When available the LMTS mini RETS range should be employed for added training realism and to prepare Soldiers for firing on pop up targets Exercise Performance A 38 To perform Exercise 4 use the following procedures 1 The Soldier assumes the proper supported firing position using sandbags Figure A 5 10M 15M or 25M Figure A 5 Exercise 4 2 The trainer prepares the electronic 25 meter alternate C target and computer control station for the prequalification skill test The course may be conducted at 25 meters 15 meters or 10 meters using the appropriate targe
353. intain adequate levels of Vitamin A Use dim white lighting or red lighting before night operations PROTECTING DURING OPERATION C 13 Once a Soldier has dark adapted it 15 important to maintain that dark adaptation To maintain dark adaptation use the following suggestions e Minimize your use of unnecessary lighting e Close one eye before being flashed by flares and other bright lights ILLUSION APPARENT MOVEMENT OF LIGHT C 14 The illusion of movement which a static light exhibits when stared at in the dark 15 related to the loss of surrounding visual references that normally serve to stabilize visual perceptions Consequently very small eye movements are perceived by the brain as movement of the light To avoid illusions of movement e Begin ascan pattern and control the eye movement e Use large movements and scan e Try to find another light and shift your gaze back and forth between the lights 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 C 3 Appendix C SECTION AIDED NIGHT VISION There are three devices available to dismounted Soldiers that will help increase their lethality at night night observation devices NODs aiming lasers and TWSs Each provides the dismounted Soldier with different views of the IR spectrum Before Soldiers can fully operate these devices they must receive training on how the systems work within the IR range and the electromagnetic light spectrum Soldiers must also know what constraints and a
354. ion Il Laser Marksmanship Training System A 5 Section Ill Other Training Devices and Exercises A 13 SCORECARD lc s v B 1 NIGHT PIG RIT lc cR C 1 Section Unaided Night C 1 section Il Aided Night VISIOn ii eco nie eo toe eu e eise tiene C 4 RANGE SAFETY AND RISK MANAGEMENT D 1 RANGE PROCEDURES AND RANGE OPERATIONS CHECKLIST E 1 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Contents Appendix F 10 METER TARGET OFFSETS AND 25 METER ZERO 5 5 F 1 ciel Legrt RR Glossary 1 REFERENG ES sae T References 1 IN DE erm mE Index 1 Figures Figure 1 1 Figure 1 2 Figure 1 3 Figure 1 4 Figure 1 5 Figure 1 6 Figure 2 1 Figure 2 2 Figure 2 3 Figure 2 4 Figure 2 5 Figure 2 6 Figure 2 7 Figure 2 8 Figure 2 9 Figure 2 10 Figure 2 11 Figure 2 12 Figure 2 13 Figure 2 14 Figure 2 15 Figure 2 16 Figure 2 17 Figure 2 18 Figure 2 19 Figure 2 20 Figure 2 21 Figure 2 22 Figure 2 23 Figure 2 24 Figure 2 25 Figure 2 26 Figure 2 27 Figure 2 28 12 August 2008 Initial entry training marksmanship training 1 2 Unit marksmanship sustainment strategy 1 3 Active Army home station marksmanship training strategy
355. ious ranges Elevation Front Sight 5 60 To compute the distance one click of elevation front sight moves the strike of the bullet at a range of 300 meters 1 Divide 300 meters by 25 meters 2 Multiply by 83 centimeters D 300 m 25 m 12 12 x 83 9 96 cm Round 9 96 cm up to 10 cm 5 61 One click of elevation on the front sight moves the strike of the bullet 10 centimeters at a range of 300 meters NOTE Tables 5 5 and 5 6 show the amount of change in elevation of the strike of the bullet at various ranges Elevation Rear Sight 5 62 The elevation knob adjusts elevation 1 1 inch for each click at 100 meters with each dot and each number representing one click of elevation Table 5 5 M16A2 3 and front sightpost of an M16A4 DISTANCE m DISTANCE 1 CLICK WILL ADJUST THE POINT OF IMPACT 6 5 cm 2 5 8 in 7 0 cm 2 3 4 in 600 205cm 805in 8 0 cm 3 1 8 in 27 5 cm 10 83 in NOTE All values are rounded off 5 24 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Downrange Feedback Table 5 6 4 4 1 and windage of M16A4 DISTANCE m DISTANCE 1 CLICK WILL ADJUST THE POINT OF IMPACT 8 4 cm 3 3 8 in 7 0 cm 2 3 4 in 7 0 cm 2 3 4 in ________600 288cm 111 4in NOTE All values are rounded off CONDUCT OF A STANDARD KNOWN DISTANCE RANGE NOTE If the range is equipped with the LOMAH system a firing order will be used to operate the LOMAH throughout the period of instructio
356. ir applications 3 8 Introduction to basic rifle marksmanship and mechanical training 4 1 Marksmanship Fundamentals training program 4 14 Marksmanship Fundamentals II training program 4 29 Grouping procedure S su eter 5 1 Techniques used to identify errors in Soldiers application of the fundamentals lp ei c acer M CLA UEM 5 14 Zeroing Proceduro S 5 14 Downrange al 5 19 M16A2 3 and front sightpost of an M16A4 5 24 M4 M4A1 and windage of an M16A4 5 25 M193 calculated adjusted point of aim based on wind speed full value 0 32 Drift for 10 mile per hour wind using M855 5 33 855 zeroed at 300 meters M193 re zeroed at 300 meters using an M16A2 A3 A4 rifle and an 4 5 36 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Contents Table 5 10 M855 zeroed at 25 meters M193 re zeroed at 25 meters 5 37 Table 5 11 M855 zeroed at 25 meters M193 fired using M855 zero
357. ired for any unit deployed to a wartime theater All commanders should develop a METL and organize a training program that devotes adequate time to marksmanship The unit s combat mission must be considered when establishing training priorities This not only applies to the tasks selected for the unit s METL but also to the conditions under which the tasks are to be performed If a unit may be employed in an urban environment the effects of range gravity and wind may not be as important as automatic or burst fire quick fire or assault fire The reverse may be true of a unit that expects to engage the enemy at long ranges TRAINING ASSESSMENT 1 28 To conduct an effective marksmanship program the unit commander must determine the current marksmanship proficiency of all assigned personnel Constant evaluation provides commanders understanding of where training emphasis is needed All results are reviewed to determine any areas that need strengthening along with any individuals that require special attention Based on this evaluation marksmanship training programs are developed and executed Commanders continually assess the program and modify it as required To develop a training plan and assess the marksmanship program commanders should use the following tools e Direct observation of training e Spot checks e Review of past training 1 29 Based on the commander s evaluation goals and missions quarterly semiannual or annual training
358. iring position 30 one 3 round burst at Alternate course C qualification target 25 each of the 10 silhouettes 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 7 15 Chapter 7 Dry Fire and Live Fire Exercises SU 7 52 Repeated dry fire exercises are the most efficient means to ensure that Soldiers can apply modifications to the fundamentals Multiple dry fire exercises are needed emphasizing a stable position and point of aim followed by breath control and appropriate trigger squeeze NOTES 1 Blanks or dummy rounds may be used to train trigger squeeze rapid magazine changes and immediate action procedures 2 The Soldier should display knowledge and skill during dry fire exercises before attempting LFXs PPRESIVE FIRE 7 53 Suppressive fire 1s precisely aimed at a definite point or area target Some situations may require a Soldier to place suppressive fire into a wide area for example wood line hedgerow or small building while at other times the target may be a smaller area for example a bunker or window Suppressive fire is used to control the enemy and the area he occupies It is employed to kill the enemy or to prevent him from observing the battlefield effectively using his weapons or moving EFFECTIVENESS AND CONTROL OF SUPPRESSIVE FIRE 7 54 Many Soldiers have difficulty delivering effective suppressive fire when they cannot see a definite target only likely locations or general areas where the enemy is known to exist Even though
359. is staff integrates risk management into the planning and execution of training and operational missions e Makes risk decisions Selects monitors and enforces implementation of controls for hazards most likely to result in loss of combat power After implementing controls if risk remains above the tolerance level established by higher command he must elevate the risk decision to the appropriate command level Ensures that the CRM process is evaluated during all AARs Determines if unit performance meets force protection guidance Determines effectiveness of hazard controls and necessary changes to guidance and controls Ensures that these changes are fed back into the training management cycle and guidance for operational missions including unit SOPs LEADERS D 29 During implementation of the CRM process leaders e Enforce METL task performance to standard Adopt the crawl walk trun approach in planning and executing training e Make use of automated on and off duty CRM tools and surveys available from the United States Army Combat Readiness Center USACRC e Execute risk reduction controls selected by the commander by developing and implementing supporting leader level controls Apply risk management procedures to each INDIVIDUAL D 30 All Soldiers must understand how to use the CRM process to enhance mission success and to reduce or eliminate loss D 31 During implementation of the CRM process Soldiers e S
360. isk e Moderate risk e Low risk 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 D 5 Appendix D Table D 4 Four levels of risk LEVEL OF RISK EXPLANATION Extremely High Risk Loss of ability to accomplish the mission if hazards occur In the example noted in Table D 3 a frequent or likely probability of catastrophic loss IA or IB or a frequent probability of critical loss IIA exists This implies that the risk associated with this mission activity or event may have severe consequences The decision to continue must be weighed carefully against the potential gain to be achieved by continuing this COA High Risk Significant degradation of mission capabilities in terms of the required mission standard inability to accomplish all parts of the mission or inability to complete the mission to standard will result if hazards occur during the mission Occasional to seldom probability of catastrophic loss IC or ID exists A likely to occasional probability of a critical loss IIB or IIC exists Frequent probability of marginal losses IIIA exists This implies that if a hazardous event occurs serious consequences will occur The decision to continue must be weighed carefully against the potential gain to be achieved by continuing this COA Moderate Risk Expected degraded mission capabilities in terms of the required mission standard will result if hazards occur during the mission An unlikely probability of catastrophic loss IE exists The probability
361. itional shot group for confirmation Five of six shots must fall within the zeroing circle NOTE Failure to achieve the standard identifies the Soldier as a candidate for remedial training The Soldier should not progress to Exercise 4 until the standard 15 met EXERCISE 4 LASER MARKSMANSHIP TRAINING STRATEGY PREQUALIFICATION EXERCISE Table A 5 Action conditions and standards for a laser marksmanship training strategy prequalification exercise ACTION Engage 10 15 or 25 meter alternate course C scaled silhouettes with an M16 M4 series weapon CONDITIONS Given an M16 M4 series weapon laser transmitter with mandrel and electronic alternate C target system with ten 10 15 or 25 meter scaled silhouettes Engage each silhouette with two shots from the supported position and two shots from the prone unsupported position STANDARDS Without assistance the Soldier engages 10 target silhouettes using the M16 M4 series weapon with laser transmitter and achieves a minimum of 30 hits out of 40 shots 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 A 11 Appendix A A 35 Exercise 4 1s used as a skill test to determine the need for training or the results of training and serves as an accurate predictor of live fire alternate course C performance NOTE Soldiers failing to meet the standards of this exercise should receive remedial training prior to live fire qualification A 36 The exercise may be conducted in the dry fire mode with Soldiers recock
362. l 45 2 barrel LTA 500 Type A Cal 50 LTA 556C Cal 5 56 mm special order LTA 762C Cal 7 62 mm special order Mask sets for TR 700 targets Various E type silhouettes military mask set to simulate 300 m 450 m and 600 m for training conducted at 25 m System components and accessories Training vest for TR 700 target Sound and Recoil Replicator Consumable 5 56 mm 7 62 mm and 9 mm Notebook computer Safety rod CO2 4 02 7 5 oz and 20 lbs AC 600 100v adapter for TR 700 target AC 610 220v adapter for TR 700 target AC 910 110v adapter for TR 900 target AC 920 220v adapter for TR 900 target RC 260 remote cable BL 265 daisy chain cable BL 640 long cable BL 654 daisy chain cable RS 232 15 m cable extension CB 440 control boxTR 700 RF control E tag Mini range transceiver unit tag receiver Carrying cases 110 system 330A system and 360 system per 3 targets M16 M4 sound and recoil replicator Borelight kit MARKSMANSHIP TRAINING A 18 For initial skill development for example IET Exercises 1 through 4 should be conducted sequentially After grouping and zeroing standards the Soldier moves to the LMTS alternate course C target where the course of fire replicates the live fire course except that the ammunition 1s a laser beam Failure to meet the standards for this course of fire identifies the Soldier as a candidate for remedial training A 6 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Training Aids Devices and Exercises REMEDIAL TR
363. l point of aim to the center of the expected target exposure area or sector AIMING 4 45 Having mastered the task of holding the rifle steady the Soldier must align the rifle with the target in exactly the same way for each firing The firer is the final judge as to where his eye is focused The instructor or trainer emphasizes this point by having the firer focus on the target and then on the front sightpost He checks the position of the firing eye to ensure that it is in line with the rear sight aperture The elements of aiming training are as follows e Sight alignment e Focus ofthe eye e Sight picture e Front sightpost e Aiming practice Sight Alignment 4 46 The weapon must be aligned with the target to do so Soldiers place the tip of the front sightpost in the center of the rear sight aperture Figure 4 15 Any alignment error between the front and rear sights repeats itself for every 2 meter the bullet travels For example at the 25 meter line any error in rifle alignment is multiplied 50 times If the bullet is misaligned by 1 10 of an inch it causes a target 300 meters away to be missed by 5 feet Figure 4 15 Correct sight alignment 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 4 19 Chapter 4 Focus of the Eye 4 47 A proper firing position aligns the eye with the center of the rear sight aperture When the eye is focused on the front sightpost the eye s natural ability to center objects in a circle and to seek the point o
364. l trained in pointed quick fire can hit an E type silhouette target at 15 meters although the shot may strike anywhere on the target e A Soldier well trained in aimed quick fire can hit an E type silhouette target at 25 meters with the shot or burst striking 5 inches from the center of mass 7 73 This variance of target hit for this type of engagement reinforces the need for well aimed shots 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 7 19 Chapter 7 7 74 Pointed and aimed quick fire should be used only when a target cannot be engaged fast enough using the sights in a normal manner These techniques should be limited to targets appearing at 25 meters or less Modern short range combat SRC techniques emphasize carrying the weapon with the buttstock high so that the weapon sights can be brought into display as quickly as firing a hasty unaimed shot In extremely dangerous moments special reaction teams SRTs commonly advance with weapons shouldered aiming as they advance Aimed 7 75 When using this technique a Soldier can accurately engage a target at 25 meters or less in one second or less 7 76 To use aimed quick fire Figure 7 9 1 Bring the weapon to the shoulder 2 With the firing eye look through or just over the rear sight aperture 3 Use the front sightpost to aim at the target 4 Quickly fire a single shot 7 20 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Advanced Rifle Marksmanship Pointed 7 77 When using this technique a S
365. lammables or a welding cutting torch Demolition Use suitable explosives ammunition or as a last resort hand grenades Disposal Bury essential parts dump them in streams or marshes or scatter them so widely that recovering them would be impossible DEGREE OF DAMAGE 3 29 The method of destruction used must damage equipment and essential spare parts to the extent that they cannot be restored to usable condition by repair or by cannibalization in the combat zone PRIORITIES OF DESTRUCTION 3 30 When lack of time prevents completely destroying equipment Soldiers must destroy the same essential parts on all like equipment The order in which the parts should be destroyed priority of destruction is as follows 1 Bolt carrier group 2 Upper receiver group 3 Lower receiver group 3 8 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Chapter 4 Preliminary Marksmanship Instruction An Infantryman s basic battlefield tool is his weapon To effectively employ his weapon he must master marksmanship tfrom the basics of rifle marksmanship to the advanced stages of target engagement Understanding the operation and functions of any machine is vital to becoming an expert with that machine The same theory applies to rifle marksmanship Commanders must keep this in mind when setting up a training program SECTION INTRODUCTION TO BASIC RIFLE MARKSMANSHIP AND MECHANICAL TRAINING This section covers the mechanical training of M16 and M4 ser
366. ld conduct a terrain walk to become more familiar and build confidence using the night vision goggles Scanning for Targets 8 88 NVDs have a 40 degree field of view which causes the average firer to miss easy targets of opportunity Soldiers must be trained to aggressively scan their sectors of fire for targets 8 89 The art of target detection at night is only as good as the Soldier practices Regular blinking during scanning relieves some of the eyestrain that Soldiers experience when trying to spot distant targets Regular blinking must be reinforced during training After Soldiers have mastered the art of scanning they will find that targets are more easily detected by acknowledging the flicker or movement of a target Infrared Discipline 8 90 Soldiers must be taught that what they can see downrange or on the battlefield through NVGs the enemy can also see Soldiers must train to activate the laser at the base of the target and engage the target as soon as the target 1s detected After the target has been engaged the laser is deactivated 8 91 When a Soldier uses proper IR discipline while scanning for targets he must keep his weapon oriented within his sector of fire When the target is detected the Soldier orients his weapon around the base of the target activates his laser and walks the laser to the target s center of mass for engagement FIELD FIRE 8 92 During dry fire exercises Soldiers acquire a sight picture on all exp
367. leshooting malfunctions and replacing components see organizational and direct support maintenance publications and manuals 3 6 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Troubleshooting and Destruction A Check receiver for broken hammer spring B Check magazine catch adjustment for damage BROKEN HAMMER SPRING LEG Figure 3 3 Other possible malfunctions DESTRUCTION PROCEDURES 3 27 Destruction of any military weapon is authorized only as a last resort to prevent the enemy from capturing or using it In combat situations the commander has the authority to destroy weapons but he must report doing so through the proper channels NOTE Certain procedures outlined require the use of explosives and incendiary grenades Related principles and the specific conditions under which destruction occurs are command decisions 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 3 7 Chapter 3 METHODS OF DESTRUCTION 3 28 Equipment may be destroyed using several methods The commander must use his imagination and resourcefulness to select the best method of destruction based on the facilities available Time 15 usually critical Table 3 2 outlines the methods of destruction NOTE If destruction is directed appropriate safety precautions must be observed Table 3 2 Methods of destruction and their applications METHOD OF APPLICATION DESTRUCTION Use an axe pick mattock sledgehammer crowbar or other heavy implement Use gasoline oil incendiary grenades other f
368. losed to preserve its night vision results in a drastically altered sense of perception when both eyes are opened NOTE Repeated dry fire training and target detection practice are the keys to successful engagement of targets out to 250 meters or more during live fire under artificial illumination LIVE FIRE EXERCISE 7 138 The unassisted LFX with artificial illumination allows all Soldiers to apply night fire principles and to gain confidence in their abilities to effectively detect and engage targets 150 meters away and beyond when using artificial illumination Soldiers use the night record fire scenario e Each Soldier is issued two 15 round magazines with the appropriate tracer and ball combination During the night each Soldier engages 15 E type silhouette target exposures from 50 to 250 meters with one magazine of 15 rounds 10 rounds ball 5 rounds tracer while in the foxhole supported or prone supported firing position During the night each Soldier engages 15 E type silhouette target exposures from 50 to 250 meters with the second magazine of 15 rounds 10 rounds ball 5 rounds tracer while in the prone unsupported or kneeling firing position e Each Soldier must achieve 15 hits out of 30 shots 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 7 35 Chapter 7 SECTION V MOVING TARGET ENGAGEMENTS In combat situations enemy Soldiers do not stand still they rush from one covered or concealed position to another While making the rush enemy Soldi
369. low ready position 1 Place the weapon s buttstock firmly in the pocket of the shoulder with the barrel pointed down at a 45 degree angle 2 Grasp the handguards toward the front sling swivel Keep the trigger finger outside of the trigger well and the thumb of the firing hand on the selector lever 7 173 To engage a target from the low ready position bring the weapon up until the proper sight picture is achieved POTE TC Ap Piu WESCE t AT voy rur n s ari pt Dun rude ym CQ Am ru ede eee RE EU m TD Le a eres Movement Techniques 7 174 Soldiers must practice moving with their weapons up until they no longer look at the ground but concentrate on their sectors of responsibility and move without stumbling over their own feet NOTE The low ready position is the best position to use when moving or turning 7 175 To engage a target to the left 1 Step toward the target with the left foot 2 Move the right foot even with the left assuming a proper standing firing position 7 176 To engage a target to the right 1 Step toward the target with the right foot 2 Move the left foot even with the right assuming a proper standing firing position 7 44 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Advanced Rifle Marksmanship 7 177 To turn to the rear 1 Position the firing side foot forward 2 Place the body weight on the firing side foot 3 Pivot the body similar to the drill movement rea
370. lowing is an example of a commander s evaluation guide Commanders can use this guide not only to assess their unit s marksmanship proficiency but to assess the unit leaders and their ability to effectively implement a marksmanship program They can also use it to develop NCOs into subject matter experts Commander s Priorities and Intent 1 35 When considering their priorities and intent commanders answer the following questions e Have you clearly stated the priority of rifle small arms proficiency in your unit What is it Do the staff and subordinates support this priority Is it based on your METL and an understanding of FM 7 0 and FM 7 1 e Have you clearly stated the intent of record fire Are leaders evaluating firing performance based on accurately recorded data and results e Have you clearly stated that weapon qualification or record fire is one of the commander s opportunities to assess several skills relating to small arms readiness e What qualification course will be used to evaluate your unit s marksmanship readiness small arms 5 the standard 300 meter 300 KD or 25 meter scaled target alternate qualification course used How will it be conducted Will the prescribed procedures be followed Who will collect the data e Have you clearly stated the purpose and intent of PMI a What skills will PMI address a Will PMI be performance oriented Are tasks integrated Soldier Assessment 1 36 Dur
371. ly close the range the following must be performed Close downrange according to the local SOP Remove all equipment and ammunition from the range Police the range Repaste and resurface targets as required by range instructions Perform other maintenance tasks as required by the local SOP Request a range inspector from range control when ready to be cleared Submit an after action report to headquarters Report any noted safety hazards to the proper authorities 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 E 9 Appendix E KNOWN DISTANCE RANGE E 43 Events held on the KD range require additional personnel and equipment Personnel E 44 In addition to the personnel previously identified the KD range requires e NCOIC of pit detail e Assistant safety officer for the pit area Equipment E 45 In addition to the equipment previously identified the KD range requires e A sound set for the pit area Positive communication from the firing line to the pit area Pasters Glue and brushes for resurfacing targets Lubricant for target frames Proper targets mounted in target frames Briefing on how to operate a KD range Procedure for marking targets Procedure for pit safety COMPUTER CONTROLLED RANGES E 46 Modern computer controlled ranges allow trainers to develop scenarios and control targets and battlefield simulation devices This permits Soldiers and units to practice mission essential tasks in a stressful environment Comp
372. meter ball ammunition Using rapid semiautomatic fire the Soldier fires one round at each of the 10 silhouettes on the alternate course C qualification target Soldiers fire two iterations performing a rapid magazine change after each magazine is fired The targets are inspected and the results are posted after each iteration Each Soldier must obtain 14 hits out of 20 silhouette target exposures 7 26 Table 7 2 depicts the two iterations and provides related information such as time constraints number of rounds that must be fired type of target that must be used and the distance away from the firer that the target must be placed Table 7 2 Rapid semiautomatic fire training and related information ITERATION TIME NUMBER OF TYPE OF TARGET DISTANCE CONSTRAINTS ROUNDS C ___1 4se 10 25 course C qualification target ___2 aose 10 25 matternate course C qualification target 2 Dry Fire Exercises 7 27 Repeated dry fire exercises are the most efficient means to ensure that Soldiers can apply modifications to the fundamentals Multiple dry fire exercises are needed emphasizing a rapid shift in position and point of aim followed by breath control and fast trigger squeeze NOTES 1 Blanks or dummy rounds may be used to train rapid magazine changes and immediate action procedures 2 The Soldier should display knowledge and skill during dry fire exercises before attempting LFXs 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 7 11
373. meters using standard sights or the low light level sight system Table 2 5 Point of impact for the M16A1 rifle DARD Renge m 25 10 E 17 64 in 1 3 32 in 13 64 in 9 32 in 3 8 in 5 in 0 7 cm 2 8 cm 5 6 cm 8 4 cm 11 2 cm 14 cm Windage 17 64 in 1 3 32 in 2 13 64 in 3 9 32 in 4 3 8 in 5 15 32 in 0 7 cm 2 8 cm 5 6 cm 8 4 cm 11 2 cm 14 cm LOWLIGHTLEVELSIGHTSYSTEM O O OZ O LOW LIGHT LEVEL SIGHT SYSTEM Elevation 23 64 in 1 3 4 in 2 3 4 in 5 1 4 in 7 in 8 3 4 in 0 9 cm 3 5 cm 7 cm 10 5 cm 17 7 cm 22 2 cm Windage 17 64 in 1 3 32 in 2 13 64 in 3 9 32 in 4 3 8 in 5 15 32 in 0 7 cm 2 8 cm 5 6 cm 8 4 cm 11 2 cm 14 cm SECTION lIl ACCESSORY MOUNTING The M4 M5 ARS and rail grabbers are designed to mount accessories on M16 and M4 series weapons M4 M5 ADAPTER RAIL SYSTEM 2 18 The ARS provides a secure mounting point for various accessories that may be mounted on the weapon s top left and right The M4 ARS Figure 2 15 consists of lightweight sections that replace the standard handguards on the M4 carbine The M5 ARS replaces the handguards on the M16A4 rifle 2 10 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 NOTES 1 Weapon Characteristics Accessories and Ammunition Only the armorer is authorized to remove the ARS from a weapon However the user may remove only the lower assembly to perform preventive maintenance checks and services PMCS If the top section 1s removed the ac
374. mmunition pouch to support the nonfiring side elbow This allows the weapon s magazine to rest in the nonfiring hand 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 7 3 Chapter 7 STANDING SUPPORTED FIRING POSITION AROUND OBSTACLES 7 5 assume the standing supported firing position when firing around obstacles Figure 7 3 1 Face the target 2 Execute a facing movement to the firing side 3 Spread the feet a comfortable distance apart 4 Place the firing hand on the pistol grip and the nonfiring hand on the upper handguard 5 Place the weapon s buttstock between the SAPI plate and the bicep NOTE This action helps stabilize the weapon and absorbs recoil 6 Lean into the wall or obstacle with the nonfiring side forearm shoulder and thigh touching the obstacle for support 7 Shift the feet until aiming naturally at the target 8 Evenly distribute body weight NOTE When firing from the left side of any obstacle the firer should take care to prevent the ejection port from becoming obstructed Figure 7 3 Standing supported firing position around obstacles 7 4 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Advanced Rifle Marksmanship MODIFIED FIRING POSITIONS 7 6 Soldiers should be encouraged to modify positions by e Taking advantage of available cover e Using anything that helps to steady the weapon e Making changes that allow them to hit more combat targets 7 7 provide maximum stability Soldiers should use prone and sup
375. motorized scaled target device used to teach the engagement of moving personnel targets dummy ammunition A cartridge without a primer or powder Primarily used for ball and dummy exercises on the live fire line effective wind The average of all the varying winds encountered ejection The step in the cycle of operation that removes the expended cartridge from the weapon out of the ejection port elevation adjustment Rotating the front sight post to cause the bullet to strike higher or lower on the target expert The highest qualification rating 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 Glossary 5 Glossary external ballistics What happens to the bullet between the time it leaves the rifle and the time it arrives at the target extraction The step in the cycle of operation that pulls the round from the chamber eye relief The distance from the firing eye to the rear sight Eye relief is a function of stock weld feedback Obtaining knowledge of performance feedback target Targets designed for use at 75 175 or 300 meters includes an overprinted grid similar to a Zero target feeding The step in the cycle of operation that 1s the forward movement of the bolt stripping the top round from the magazine and moving it toward the chamber field firing Training on the standard field firing range with target banks at 75 175 and 300 meters firing The step in the cycle of operation that refers to pulling the trigger releasing the hammer t
376. n the adjuster that 15 on top or bottom will always be the elevation adjuster and the one on the side will always be the windage adjuster 6 Adjust the illuminator in the same manner 7 Turn the laser off and carefully remove the borelight and the mandrel from the weapon so that the borelight device is not damaged BORESIGHTING THE AN PVS 4 NOTES 1 Before boresighting ensure that the borelight has been zeroed to the weapon The more accurate the boresight of the AN PVS 4 to the assigned weapon the closer to a battlesight zero the weapon will be 2 25 meter zeroing must be conducted to ensure that the AN PVS 4 is properly zeroed 1 Select the proper 10 meter boresighting target for the weapon AN PVS 4 configuration 1 With the help of an assistant place the boresighting target 10 meters in front of the weapon 2 Ensure that the M16 reticle 15 displayed 3 Get behind the weapon in a stable supported firing position and look through the AN PVS 4 4 Turn the borelight laser on 5 Align the borelight laser with the circle on the 10 meter target offset 6 Keeping the laser in place adjust the windage and elevation until the reticle of the AN PVS 4 is aligned with the circular crosshair NOTE If there is not enough ambient light to see the 10 meter target offset circular crosshair shine a flashlight indirectly at the target to provide ambient light 8 10 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Advanced Optics Lasers and I
377. n training to support tactical conditions The firing positions used during initial training are e Individual foxhole supported NOTE Once the individual foxhole supported fighting position has been mastered the firer should practice various unsupported positions to obtain the smallest possible wobble area during final aiming and hammer fall The coach trainer can check the steadiness of the position by observing movement at the forward part of the rifle by looking through the MI6 sighting device or by checking to see if support is being used The objective is to establish a steady position under various conditions e Prone unsupported firing e Prone supported firing e Kneeling unsupported 4 67 These firing positions offer a stable platform for firing the rifle These positions are used during basic record fire FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Preliminary Marksmanship Instruction INDIVIDUAL FOXHOLE SUPPORTED FIRING POSITION 4 68 This position provides the most stable platform for engaging targets To assume the individual foxhole supported firing position Figure 4 20 1 Add or remove dirt sandbags or other supports to adjust for your height 2 Face the target 3 Execute a half face to the firing side 4 Lean forward until the chest is against the firing hand corner of the position 5 Place the rifle handguard in the V formed by the thumb and fingers of the nonfiring hand 6 Rest the nonfiring hand on the
378. n and will be fired last 5 63 Standard KD ranges are conducted using the following considerations e The standard KD range is conducted with paper targets at 100 200 and 300 meters to obtain downrange feedback at 75 175 and 300 meters Figure 5 23 Soldiers fire shot groups progressively at the targets e Half of the bullets are fired from the supported firing position and the other half are fired from the unsupported firing position e The wind speed and direction must be determined before firing and the firer must know the distance to the target e Soldiers mark the targets after firing each shot group Based on this feedback Soldiers receive a critique from their instructor trainer or coach and apply the adjusted point of aim as necessary e The downrange feedback exercise must be conducted within the constraints of time ammunition and available ranges e If 30 rounds of ammunition are available for training firing three round shot groups 10 times is preferable to firing five round shot groups 6 times e Once the Soldier understands the concept for adjusting the point of aim to compensate for the effects of wind and gravity he is ready to apply his knowledge on the field fire range 79 TARGETS 5 64 Instructors trainers can provide feedback after each round each three round shot group or each five round shot group on the 100 meter feedback targets No time limit is placed on the firer Soldiers fire from
379. n operating an M4 or M4 MWS the firer can move the selector lever SAFE SEMI and BURST to fire a semiautomatic or a three round burst e The M4A1 is fully automatic AN PAS 13 V 1 and AN PAS 13 V 2A B or AN PAQ 4B C AN PAS 13 V 3A B M68 CCO CARRY HANDLE sS um BACKUP IRON SIGHT ETT oneness gt LEAF SIGHT 2 CU M203 QUAD SIGHT M4 M4A1 TM 9 1005 319 10 Figure 2 1 M4 M4A1 carbine with accessories 2 2 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Weapon Characteristics Accessories and Ammunition ANIPAS wa LWTS Shown also eith ANIPAS 13A B V 2 MWTS ANIPAS 1 3A B V 3 HWTS AN PAQ 4B C Hand Guard Rail Slot L26 M4 L35 M16A4 P k d 1 j Upper Receiver Rail M68 CCO g n 10004 a MILES Front of Barrel FLASHLIGHT MOUNT Bottom Hand Guard Rail CLOSE QUARTER AN PEQ 2A COMBAT SLING Hand Guard Rail M203 M203 LEAF SIGHT Bottom Hand Guard Rail Top Hand Guard Rail w Quick Attach Bracket Slot T24 M4 T38 M16A4 Figure 2 2 M4 MWS with accessories M4 M4A1 Carbine M4 Adapter Rails Figure 2 3 M4 M4A1 and M4 M4A1 MWS 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 M203 QUAD SIGHT Upper Receiver Rail AN PVS 4 Upper Receiver Rail CARRY HANDLE Upper Receiver Rail BACKUP IRON SIGHT BIS Upper Receiver Rail ges AN PVS 14 Upper Receiver Rail M4 M4A1 MWS Chapter 2
380. n relevant to improving their performance in combat It should address the following topics e Soldiers should understand and apply the single lead rule in the absence of more information e Soldiers should engage moving targets coming toward them or on a slight angle 0 to 15 degrees as stationary targets e Information should be presented and practice allowed on applying additional lead to targets for Soldiers who demonstrate this aptitude Target Angle 7 153 The single lead rule does not apply to targets moving at small and large angles Table 7 15 A walking enemy Soldier at 250 meters 15 hit dead center when he is moving at 40 degrees Hits can be obtained if he is moving on any angle between 15 and 75 degrees When he is running a center hit 1s obtained when the target is on an angle of 18 degrees misses occur when he exceeds an angle of 30 to 35 degrees 7 154 The information provided in Figure 7 21 and Table 7 15 is designed to enhance instructor understanding so proper concepts are presented during instruction For example a target at 100 meters moving at 6 miles per hour receives a center hit when moving at 29 degrees When moving at an angle less than 29 degrees the bullet strikes somewhat in front of the target s center When moving at an angle of more than 29 degrees the bullet strikes somewhat behind the target s center Table 7 15 Target angle when dead center hits occur using the single lead rule STANDARD SIGHT BANG i
381. n the firing line ensure that the weapon s selector lever is on SAFE and the bolt is locked to the rear Ensure that firers enter and exit the firing line at the entry or exit point Before occupying a firing position inspect it for wildlife or obstructions Always keep the weapon s muzzle pointed downrange when on the firing line and keep the finger outside of the trigger housing area Never touch a weapon while personnel are downrange or in front of the firing line Load the weapon only on command from the tower or control point Never fire without using hearing protection Ensure that left handed firers attach left handed brass deflectors to their weapon before firing When entering or exiting the firing line clear the weapon with a cleaning rod Consider the rifle loaded at all times even in break areas Never point the weapon at anyone Anyone observing an unsafe act will immediately call CEASE FIRE place the weapon on SAFE place it in the V notched stake or lay it on the sandbags and give the verbal and visual command of cease fire Once cleared off of the firing line firers report to the ammunition point and turn in all brass and ammunition No one will leave the range until they have been inspected for live ammunition and brass In case of an electrical storm personnel will be directed to lock and clear all weapons ground their equipment except wet weather gear and disperse into a predetermined area Eating and drinkin
382. n the grouping and zeroing range All LMTS based zeros must be confirmed by live fire If no live firing 15 planned calibrated lasers need not be used and adjustments are made to the laser in Exercise 3 NOTE See the LMTS operator s manual for a description of the laser calibration process 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 A 7 Appendix A EXERCISE 1 REFLECTIVE TARGET EXERCISE Table A 2 Action conditions and standards for a reflective target exercise ACTION Demonstrate the four fundamentals of rifle marksmanship while using the LMTS reflective zeroing target CONDITIONS Given an M16 M4 series weapon laser transmitter with mandrel and reflective target STANDARDS Demonstrate the four fundamentals of marksmanship by Achieving a good steady position Applying the proper sight alignment and sight picture Applying proper breath control Applying proper trigger squeeze A 26 Exercise 1 introduces Soldiers to the four fundamentals of marksmanship outlines how to diagnose and correct firer problems and reinforces proper application of the fundamentals A 27 This exercise requires a high degree of instructor involvement but one instructor may effectively train up to 20 lanes Decreased trainer firer ratio will result in decreased efficiency and effectiveness One trainer per 10 lanes is the optimum ratio A 28 The exercise requires little time to complete to retain group integrity it should be combined with Exercise 2 to allow mor
383. nd automatic firing is required for annual familiarization only Reflexive MILES dry fire drills are an essential part of the training process and should be conducted by the team leader or squad leader during troop leading procedures and before any SRC or SRM training NOTE See Table 7 16 for the current training program Table 7 16 Short range marksmanship training program SHORT RANGE MARKSMANSHIP TRAINING PROGRAM Instructional Intent e Soldiers gain confidence and knowledge in SRM fundamentals Special Instructions Ensure that The M16A2 A3 A4 rifle s or carbine s rear sight is set on the 0 2 aperture e he M16A s rear sight is set on the unmarked aperture Each Soldier is given one 20 round magazine of 5 56 millimeter ball ammunition for marksmanship qualification Each Soldier is given one 28 round magazine and three 4 round magazines of 5 56 millimeter ball ammunition for barricade transition firing NOTE The round must impact within the lethal zone to be scored a hit Observables Each Soldier achieves 20 target hits during the day marksmanship qualification Each Soldier achieves 16 target hits during the night marksmanship qualification Each Soldier achieves 14 target hits during the day marksmanship qualification while wearing a protective mask Each Soldier achieves 12 target hits during the night marksmanship qualification while wearing a protective mask NOTE All SRC and SRM training should beg
384. nd obstacles e From windows FiRING OVER ROOFTOPS 7 9 Long range observation may require Soldiers to occupy positions that are high above the ground Figure 7 5 shows a Soldier firing over a rooftop exposing only the parts of his body necessary to engage a target Figure 7 5 Firing over a rooftop 7 6 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Advanced Rifle Marksmanship FIRING AROUND OBSTACLES 7 10 In the urban environment Soldiers may encounter man made and natural obstacles Figure 7 6 shows a Soldier firing around an urban obstacle NOTE Firing around corners could require the Soldier to fire from the opposite shoulder to avoid exposing himself to enemy fire Figure 7 6 Firing around an obstacle 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 7 7 Chapter 7 FIRING FROM WINDOWS 7 11 When firing from windows Soldiers should stay in the shadows and make sure that the weapon s muzzle does not protrude out of the opening Figure 7 7 Figure 7 7 Firing from a window SECTION Il COMBAT FIRE TECHNIQUES Combat is the ultimate test of a Soldier s ability to apply the fundamentals of marksmanship and firing skills Soldiers must apply the marksmanship skills mastered during training practice and record fire exercises to many combat situations for example attack assault ambush or UO Although these situations present problems basic techniques and fundamentals require only two modifications changes to the rate of fire and alterations
385. ners must complete the four phases of training using the progression steps and the records should be updated on a quarterly basis CERTIFICATION PROGRAM OUTLINE 1 57 Before certification all trainers must attend all phases of the train the trainer program in the following order e Phase I Program Orientation e Phase II Preliminary Marksmanship Training e Phase III Basic Marksmanship Training e Phase IV Advanced Marksmanship Training 1 58 Then they conduct all phases to demonstrate their ability to train Soldiers and to diagnose and correct problems Trainers who fail to attend or do not pass any phase of the diagnostic examination will be assigned to subsequent training Phase I Program Orientation 1 59 During this phase the trainer must accomplish the following tasks and be certified by the chain of command e Be briefed on the concept of the certification program Be briefed on the unit marksmanship training strategy Review the unit marksmanship training outlines Review issued reference material Visit training sites and firing ranges Phase II Preliminary Marksmanship Training 1 60 Phase II should be completed no more than two weeks following the conclusion of Phase I During Phase II the trainer demonstrates his ability to master the marksmanship fundamentals and his performance is reviewed by the chain of command The results of this review are recorded and maintained on the trainer s progression s
386. ng Marksmanship Fundamentals I 1 6 1 17 During this period of instruction Soldiers are trained to demonstrate the integrated act of shooting using the EST 2000 or LMTS NOTE EST 2000 will not be used in lieu of live fire qualification except for those outlined in DA Pam 350 38 1 18 This period of instruction includes the following topics The four fundamentals Basic firing positions Range and safety procedures Dominant eye training Demonstrating the integrated act of shooting during dry fire exercises NOTE The IET POI allots six hours for this phase of training FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Marksmanship Training Marksmanship Fundamentals II 1 19 During this period of instruction Soldiers are trained to demonstrate the integrated act of shooting using the EST 2000 or LMTS NOTES 1 The JET POI allots six hours for this phase of training 2 See paragraphs 4 76 through 4 80 and Appendix A for more information about EST 2000 and LMTS training PHASE 51 RIFLE MARKSMANSHIP DOWNRANGE FEEDBACK RANGE FIRING 1 20 During Phase II instructors trainers outline grouping and zeroing procedures and demonstrate how to conduct the three types of known distance KD ranges Downrange feedback provides precise knowledge of what happens to bullets at a given range and allows Soldiers to transition between 25 meter firing and firing on the field fire range Knowing precisely where bullets hit allows poor firers
387. ng NIGHT VISION C 11 Night vision occurs under starlight as well as on moonless and cloudy nights when there are no stars or cultural lighting Remember there is a night blind spot as discussed earlier Under these conditions Soldiers have e The worst visual acuity from 20 200 to 20 400 and possibly much worse Soldiers can recognize silhouettes but not details of the objects This is why knowing the silhouettes of vehicles and critical natural and man made objects is important e Poor color vision Soldiers cannot see colors only various shades of gray The longer wavelengths of light such as the reds and oranges are hard to see and appear dark Unless a dark color is bordered by two lighter colors it becomes totally invisible On the other hand greens and blues appear brighter but Soldiers may not be able to determine their color NOTE Reds are almost invisible at night Red crosses are on white backgrounds on tents or vehicles so they can be seen more easily at night PROTECTING BEFORE OPERATION C 12 Soldiers must protect their eyes before night operations so they can dark adapt in an efficient manner To efficiently dark adapt use the following suggestions e Don t smoke before night operations Not smoking four to six hours before night operations will aid in dark adaptation e Wear sunglasses if you plan to spend time in the sun Without sunglasses it will take longer to dark adapt e Watch what you eat Ma
388. ng 8 10 to 8 11 training strategies and qualification standards 8 28 to 8 30 8 28 table FM 3 22 9 25 meter zeroing procedures 8 29 concept 8 29 conduct of training 8 29 field fire 8 30 modified fundamentals 8 29 practice qualification 8 30 record qualification 8 30 target detection 8 30 automatic or burst fire see also combat fire techniques 7 12 to 7 16 effectiveness and control 7 12 factors for use 7 12 to 7 13 modifications 7 13 to 7 14 training 7 15 to 7 16 7 15 table B backup iron sight see also accessories arid advanced Optics lasers and iron sights 2 30 2 30 illus boresighting using 8 6 training strategies and qualification standards 8 11 to 8 12 8 11 table concept 8 11 conduct of training 8 12 ballistics see also downrange feedback 5 34 to 5 42 bullet dispersion at range 5 41 to 5 42 increase of shot group size 5 42 5 42 illus minute of angle 5 41 5 41 illus external ballistics 5 39 to 5 41 air resistance drag 5 39 altitude or air density 5 39 angles 5 40 to 5 41 gravity 5 39 muzzle velocity 5 39 temperature 5 39 trajectory 5 40 wind 5 40 internal ballistics 5 34 to 5 38 5 24 illus M855 and M193 ammunition 5 34 to 5 38 5 35 illus 5 36 table 5 36 illus 5 37 table 12 August 2008 5 37 illus 5 38 table 5 38 illus terminal ballistics 5 41 borelight see also advanced optics lasers and iron si
389. ng 8 8 compatibility and mounting 2 16 table mounting on MI6A1 2 27 2 27 illus 1642 2 27 2 27 illus M16A3 2 27 2 27 illus M16AA 2 26 to 2 27 2 26 illus carbine 2 26 to 2 27 2 26 illus training strategies and qualification standards 8 20 to 8 23 8 20 table 25 meter zeroing procedures 8 21 to 8 22 8 22 illus concept 8 20 conduct of training 8 20 modified fundamentals 8 21 practice qualification 8 23 record qualification 8 23 target detection 8 22 to 8 23 AN PAS 13D V1 2 26 to 2 27 2 26 illus boresighting 8 8 compatibility and mounting 2 16 table mounting on MI6A1 2 27 2 27 illus 1642 2 27 2 27 illus M16A3 2 27 2 27 illus M16AA 2 26 to 2 27 2 26 illus carbine 2 26 to 2 27 2 26 illus training strategies and qualification standards 8 20 to 8 23 8 20 table 25 meter zeroing procedures 8 21 to 8 22 8 22 illus concept 8 20 conduct of training 8 20 modified fundamentals 8 21 practice qualification 8 23 record qualification 8 23 target detection 8 22 to 8 23 12 August 2008 M M16A1 rifle see also M16 series rifle 2 9 illus battlesight zeroing 2 10 2 10 illus point of impact 2 10 table characteristics 2 1 2 1 table mechanically zeroing 2 9 to 2 10 2 9 illus mounting accessories see also accessories advanced combat optical gunsight see also advanced combat optical gunsight 2 32 to 2 33 2 32 illus
390. ng 15 aligned with the index line 3 on the left side of the detachable carrying handle NOTE The elevation knob remains flush 2 Position the apertures 4 so the unmarked aperture is up and the 0 200 meter aperture 1s down 2 4 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Weapon Characteristics Accessories and Ammunition 3 Turn the windage knob 5 to align the index mark 6 on the 0 200 meter aperture with the long center index line on the rear sight assembly NOTE The Z marking on the elevation knob employed when using the M4 series weapon s detachable carrying handle should be ignored The Z marking is only used when the M16A4 is being zeroed 2 5 Table 2 2 shows how much one click of elevation or windage will move the strike of the round at ranges from 25 to 500 meters Table 2 2 Point of impact for the M4 M4A1 and M4 MWS RANGE m 25 10 20 so 40 500 _ Elevation 3 4 in 1 3 8 in 2 3 4 in 4 1 8 in 5 1 2 in 6 7 8 in 0 9 cm 3 5 cm 7 cm 10 5 cm 14 cm 17 5 cm Windage 1 8 in 1 2 in 1 in 1 1 2 in 2in 2 1 2 in 0 3 cm 1 25 cm 2 5 cm 3 8 cm 5 6 3 M16A2 A3 RIFLE 2 6 Figure 2 6 shows the M16A2 A3 rifle When operating an M16A2 rifle the firer can move the selector lever SAFE SEMI and BURST to fire a semiautomatic or a three round burst The M16A3 has the same characteristics as the M16A2 with the exception of the selector lever SAFE SEMI and AUTO and the addition of the automatic mode A
391. ng a possible correction to reduce a stoppage without performing troubleshooting procedures to determine the actual cause Apply immediate action only once for a stoppage If the rifle fails to fire a second time for the same malfunction inspect the weapon to determine the cause of the stoppage or malfunction and take the appropriate remedial action The key word SPORTS will help the firer remember the steps for immediate action 1 Slap gently upward on the magazine to ensure that it is fully seated and that the magazine follower is not jammed NOTE When slapping up on the magazine be careful not to knock a round out of the magazine into the line of the bolt carrier causing more problems Slap only hard enough to ensure that the magazine 15 fully seated Ensure that the magazine is locked into place by quickly pulling down on the magazine 2 Pull the charging handle fully to the rear 3 Observe the ejection of a live round or expended cartridge NOTE If the weapon fails to eject a cartridge perform remedial action 4 Release the charging handle do not ride it forward 5 Tap the forward assist assembly to ensure that the bolt 1s closed 6 Squeeze the trigger and try to fire the rifle REMEDIAL ACTION 3 3 Remedial action is the continuing effort to determine the cause of a stoppage or malfunction and attempt to clear the stoppage once it has been identified To apply the corrective steps for remedial action 1 Try to
392. ng of Soldiers can enhance learning for both participants The coach learns what to look for as he provides guidance to the firer and the firer has a chance to ask simple questions and to discuss areas that are not understood Pairing Soldiers who have demonstrated good firing proficiency with those who have firing problems can improve the performance of problem firers DUTIES 4 23 The peer coach Constantly checks factors that the firer is unable to observe for himself Prevents the firer from repeating errors Assists the firer in applying marksmanship fundamentals during firing Assists the firer in obtaining a good position and in adjusting sandbags Adds to range safety procedures by helping safety personnel with preliminary rifle checks Watches the firer not the target to ensure that the firer maintains proper position breath control trigger pressure and trigger squeeze NOTE There are times when the peer coach may be required to observe the target area and not the firer for example when field fire targets are being engaged and the firer cannot see where he is hitting or missing targets CHECKLIST FOR THE COACH 4 24 Coaches follow these procedures to determine and eliminate rifle and firer deficiencies e The coach checks to see that the Rifle is cleared and defective parts have been replaced Ammunition is clean and the magazine is properly placed in the pouch Sights are blackened and set correctly fo
393. ng position Figure 4 23 spread the legs apart with the inside of the feet flat on the ground For the alternate prone supported firing position Figure 4 24 bend the firing leg to relieve pressure on the lower back 3 Use sandbags or any other suitable object to support the handguard Keep the nonfiring hand free for use on any part of the rifle 4 Place both elbows on the ground to support the upper body 5 Place the firing hand on the pistol grip 6 Place the nonfiring hand on the upper handguard 7 Place the weapon s buttstock between the SAPI plate and bicep to stabilize the weapon and absorb recoil NOTE Elbow and knee pads can be worn to relieve IBA induced pain and pressure paco A 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 4 27 Chapter 4 KNEELING UNSUPPORTED FIRING POSITION 4 71 To assume the kneeling unsupported firing position Figure 4 25 1 Keep the left foot in place 2 Step back with the right foot 3 Drop to the right knee 4 Place the left nonfiring hand on the upper handguard with the upper arm triceps on the left knee for support 5 Place the right firing hand on the pistol grip with the weapon s buttstock between the SAPI plate and bicep to stabilize the weapon and absorb recoil 6 Rest the ball of the right foot firmly on the ground 7 Rest the buttock on the heel 8 Relax and lean forward into the position to help absorb recoil Ja 1 Es aT Lau cis
394. niques 7 8 to 7 12 effectiveness and control 7 9 modifications 7 9 to 7 10 immediate action procedures 7 10 marksmanship fundamentals 7 9 to 7 10 training 7 10 to 7 12 7 11 table record qualification see also field fire 6 11 to 6 17 practice record fire I and IL 6 11 to 6 13 6 11 table alibi firing 6 12 concept 6 11 conduct 6 11 to 6 12 6 12 table practice record fire standards 6 13 6 13 table range training areas 6 12 orientation area 6 12 ready area 6 12 retired area 6 12 record of performance 6 13 record fire 6 13 to 6 17 6 13 table concept 6 14 conduct 6 15 to 6 16 6 15 table alibi firing 6 15 to 6 16 refire 6 16 troubleshooting performance 6 16 development of standards 6 14 6 14 table probability of hits 6 14 table qualification ratings 6 16 6 16 table record of performance 6 17 target function 6 14 reflexive fire training see also short range marksmanship training 7 51 to 7 53 Index 11 Index conduct 7 52 to 7 53 7 52 table 7 53 table range setup 7 52 reflexive firing targets 7 51 7 51 illus S scanning for targets see also field fire and target detection 6 2 to 6 3 50 meter overlapping strip method of search 6 2 maintaining observation of the area 6 3 self preservation method of search 6 2 scorecards B 1 to B 5 examples of completed scorecards B 1 reproducible forms B 1 to B 5 short range marksmanship qualif
395. nment With proper training and practice Soldiers gain confidence in their ability to effectively hit targets in full MOPP equipment MOPP firing proficiency must be part of every unit s training program MISSION ORIENTED PROTECTIVE POSTURE EQUIPMENT FIRE 7 94 Firing weapons is only part of overall CBRN training Soldiers must be familiar with CBRN equipment its use and proper wear before they progress to learning the techniques of MOPP firing MODIFICATIONS FOR MISSION ORIENTED PROTECTIVE POSTURE FIRE TRAINING 7 95 Trainers must consider the impact of MOPP equipment for example hood or mask gloves overgarments on the Soldier s ability to properly apply the fundamentals of marksmanship and combat firing skills 7 24 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Advanced Rifle Marksmanship Operation and Function 7 96 Many actions are affected by MOPP equipment handling the weapon performing operation and function checks loading and unloading and cleaning Consider the following modifications e Movements are slowed tasks take longer to complete and often require more effort e Vision is impaired e Care is needed to avoid damaging MOPP equipment and possible exposure to lethal agents 7 97 Because of the great differences between MOPP Level 1 and MOPP Level 4 Soldiers must be trained in all aspects of weapon operation and maintenance while practicing at the highest MOPP level Only through repeated training and practice can the Soldier be
396. not be used to battlesight zero weapons that will fire service ammunition 3 SRTA ammunition must be used with the M2 training bolt The M995 offers the capability to defeat light armored targets at ranges two to three times that of currently available 5 56 mm ammunition The M995 cartridge consists of a projectile and a propelling charge contained in a brass cartridge case The projectile is a dense metal penetrator tungsten carbide enclosed by a standard gilded metal jacket The cartridge utilizes a double base propellant A standard rifle cartridge primer is used in the case to initiate the propelling charge 12 August 2008 Weapon Characteristics Accessories and Ammunition TRAJECTORY 2 80 Figures 2 49 through 2 53 show trajectory data for M855 cartridges when fired from M16A2 rifles and carbines 16 zero EL M16 300m M16 400m 16 500m 16700 _ LONPES Figure 2 50 Bullet drop of M855 ammunition with M16A2 8 3 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 2 37 Chapter 2 4 zero ELE M4 300m M4 400m 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 Meters Figure 2 52 M4 carbine and M16A2 rifle bullet trajectory comparison 2 38 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Weapon Characteristics Accessories and Ammunition Meters Figure 2 53 Bullet drop of M4 M855 during 25 meter zeroing on 6 3 STORAGE 2 81 When storing ammunition in the open
397. ns e Write an overall lesson plan for the range e Organize a plan for firing Determine the range organization Outline courses of fire to be used Have fire commands typed for use on the range m Set the rotation of stations Rehearse concurrent training instructors and assistants Brief the RTO on unique range control radio procedures Brief and rehearse the reporting NCO on range operation and all of his duties Collect and concentrate equipment for use on the range in one location Obtain training aids Pick up targets from the range warehouse if required Report to range control for a safety briefing if required and sign for any special items Publish the LOI Uniform of range and firing personnel helmets and earplugs Mode of transportation departure times and places Methods of messing to be used Any special requirements being placed on units OCCUPY THE RANGE AND CONDUCT TRAINING E 39 Certain actions must be performed to properly occupy the range and conduct training Occupy the Range E 40 When occupying the range perform the following actions e Request permission to occupy the range e Establish good communications e Have designated areas prepared m Parking Ammunition point E 8 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Range Procedures and Range Operations Checklist Medical station Water point Concurrent training Mess Helipad m Armorer Inspect the ran
398. nstruction 4 1 to 4 30 Introduction to Basic Rifle Marksmanship and Mechanical Training 4 1 to 4 14 4 1 table clearing see also clearing 4 2 to 4 3 4 3 illus 12 August 2008 cycles of functioning see also cycles of functioning 4 4 to 4 10 modes of fire see also modes of fire 4 11 to 4 12 4 11 illus peer coaching see also peer coaching 4 12 to 4 14 Marksmanship Fundamentals I 4 4 to 4 30 4 14 table basic firing positions see also firing positions 4 24 to 4 28 dominant eye training see also dominant eye training 4 24 four fundamentals see also fundamentals 4 16 to 4 24 interceptor body armor see also interceptor body armor 4 15 to 4 16 4 15 illus training devices and exercises see also training aids devices and exercises 4 28 to 4 29 Marksmanship Fundamentals 4 29 4 29 table Engagement Skills Trainer 2000 see also training aids devices and exercises and Engagement Skills Trainer 2000 4 29 to 4 30 Laser Marksmanship Training System see also training aids devices and exercises and Laser Marksmanship Training System 4 30 Q qualification training see also unit marksmanship training program and training 1 15 to 1 18 downrange feedback 1 16 feedback 1 16 field fire 1 16 grouping and zeroing 1 16 record fire 1 17 remedial training 1 17 1 17 table 12 August 2008 quick fire see also combat fire techniques 7 19 to 7 2
399. ntimeter circle is the minimum standard NOTE M16A2 zeroing target squares are 96 centimeter in size while M4 zeroing target squares are 1 3 centimeters in size 5 4 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Downrange Feedback MATCH GRADE PERFORMANCE 5 4 The target shown in Figure 5 4 illustrates a match grade quality weapon ammunition combination This combination places all bullets in almost the same hole and helps detect the firer s slightest errors 300 METERS 300 METERS 300 METERS Figure 5 4 25 meter match grade performance 2 CENTIMETER SHOT GROUPS 5 15 The variances of standard weapons and ammunition must be considered during shot group analysis When firing a standard service weapon ammunition combination the dispersion pattern may be up to 2 centimeters apart without human error The instructor trainer must ensure the Soldier understands that his weapon or ammunition may not be capable of placing three rounds within a 1 centimeter square NOTE The dispersion pattern is not considered a firer error 5 16 The targets shown in Figure 5 5 reflect proper 25 meter shot group performances using standard weapon ammunition combinations 300 METERS 300 METERS 300 METERS Figure 5 5 Shot groups with no firer error 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 5 5 Chapter 5 3 TO 4 CENTIMETER SHOT GROUPS 5 17 The targets shown in Figure 5 6 represent minimum acceptable firing performances a better firing performance should be expected
400. o strike the firing pin which strikes the primer The primer ignites and in turn ignites the powder charge within the cartridge case firing hand The right hand of a right handed firer The left hand of a left handed firer firing pin Plunger in the bolt of a rifle that strikes the primer fleeting target A moving target remains within observing or firing distance for such a short period that it affords little time for deliberate adjustment and fire against it functioning See cycle of operation fundamentals of rifle marksmanship The four essential elements needed to hit targets steady position aiming breath control and trigger squeeze gravity The natural pull of all objects to the center of the earth grouping A live fire exercise with the objective of shooting tight shoot groups gun bore line A reference line established by the linear extension of the bore axis of a gun headspace The distance between the face of the bolt fully closed and the face of a fully chambered cartridge hold off See adjusted aiming point horizontal dispersion The left to right displacement of bullets on a target immediate action procedures applied to rapidly reduce any rifle stoppage without determining its cause individual firing proficiency Individual firing skills for example an individual s performance on the record fire course Infantry Remoted Target System IRETS See RETS infrared aiming light A unique night sig
401. o training e Weapon is zeroed prior to training e Soldier is able to consistently apply the fundamentals of marksmanship 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 7 61 Chapter 7 Follow Through 7 248 Follow through involves applying all of the marksmanship fundamentals while and after the weapon fires A good follow through ensures that the weapon is allowed to fire and recoil naturally The Soldier weapon combination reacts as a single unit to such actions It consists of the following Keeping the cheek in firm contact with the stock stock weld Keeping the finger on the trigger all the way to the rear Continuing to look through the rear aperture Keeping muscles relaxed Avoiding reaction to recoil or noise Releasing the trigger only after the recoil has stopped Borelight Exercise 7 249 The borelight dry fire exercise provides evaluation of the Soldier throughout the integrated act of firing NOTE If a borelight is not available the target box exercise will be used 7 250 To perform a borelight exercise 1 2 3 4 The trainer attaches a 25 meter zero target to a flat surface The trainer positions the Soldier 10 meters away facing the target The Soldier assumes a good prone supported firing position with the borelight inserted in the weapon s barrel and with the weapon placed in dry fire mode The trainer uses DA Form 7650 R Squad Designated Marksman Position Evaluation to evaluate the Soldier s p
402. o zero using the borelight without using NVDs When used in conjunction with NVDs its IR aiming and illumination lasers provide for active covert target acquisition in low light or complete darkness NOTES 1 The ATPIAL visible and IR aiming lasers are aligned A single set of adjusters moves both aiming beams and the user can boresight zero using either aiming laser 2 In addition to momentary and continuous modes of operation the IR illuminator may be programmed to operate at 1 2 4 or 8 pulses per second to eliminate confusion on the battlefield FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Weapon Characteristics Accessories and Ammunition Figure 2 33 AN PEQ 15 advanced target pointer illuminator aiming light MOUNTING ON THE MI6A4 RIFLE OR M4 MWS 2 54 To mount the AN PEQ 15 on an M16A4 rifle or M4 MWS Figure 2 34 1 Loosen the clamping knob on the integral rail grabber bracket until the jaws sufficiently fit over the MIL STD 1913 rail 2 Position the integral rail grabber bracket on the rail ensuring that the recoil lug is seated in the desired recoil groove of the rail NOTE The ATPIAL may be positioned anywhere on the rail where it is most convenient for the operator however ensure that it does not extend beyond the end of the ARS or touch the collar of the barrel The AN PEQ 15 will not retain zero if the rail grabber extends beyond the end of the integrated rail when mounted 3 Turn the clamping knob clockwise to tigh
403. of 40 2 During practice qualification and qualification the Soldier chooses his own polarity and FOV AN PAQ 4B C AND AN PEQ 2A B INFRARED AIMING LASERS 8 74 The newest IR aiming lasers greatly increase the night firing accuracy of all infantry weapons IR aiming lasers complete the transition from day optics to night optics Their effectiveness is limited by the capability of the image intensifier I2 sight with which they are used NOTE See Table 8 7 for the current training program 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 8 23 Chapter 8 Table 8 7 AN PAQ 4B C AN PEQ 2A B infrared aiming laser training program AN PAQ 4B C OR AN PEQ 2A B INFRARED AIMING LASERS Instructional Intent e Soldiers qualify with the AN PAQ 4B C or AN PEQ 2A B IR aiming laser Special Instructions Ensure that Soldiers Are proficient with the AN PAQ 4B C or AN PEQ 2A B IR aiming laser Use the proper 10 meter boresighting target during boresighting procedures Use the borelight filter Set the AN PEQ 2A B IR aiming laser to AIM LO Boresight the illuminator on the AN PEQ 2A B Use the M16A2 25 meter zeroing target for 25 meter zero Ensure that a 3x3 centimeter hole is cut in the center of the 25 meter zeroing target and E type silhouette Soldiers conduct either 10 meter boresight or a 25 meter zero Soldiers display good scanning IR discipline and IR walking technique Soldiers achieve at least 17 target hits out of 40 target exposures CONCEP
404. of a 10 mile per hour wind and a 20 mile per hour wind has twice the effect of a 10 mile per hour wind 5 86 Firers must adjust their points of aim into the wind to compensate for its effects If they miss a distant target and wind 15 blowing from the right they should aim to the right for the next shot A guide for the initial adjustment 1s to split the front sightpost on the edge of the target facing the wind Figure 5 30 5 87 Newly assigned Soldiers should aim at the target s center of mass for the first shot and then adjust for wind when they are confident that wind caused the miss Experienced firers should apply the appropriate hold off for the first shot but should follow the basic rule when in doubt aim at the center of mass 10 MPH WIND 150 METERS 250 METERS 300 METERS Figure 5 30 M16 M4 series weapons adjusted point of aim based on wind speed 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 5 33 Chapter 5 SECTION V BALLISTICS Commanders and marksmanship trainers must understand some aspects of ballistics to teach the principles of zeroing and engagement of long range targets Ballistics is a science dealing with the motion and flight characteristics of projectiles The study of ballistics in rifles and carbines 1s divided into three categories e Internal ballistics e External ballistics e Terminal ballistics INTERNAL BALLISTICS 5 88 Internal ballistics deals with what happens to the bullet before it leaves the wea
405. of a critical loss is seldom IID Marginal losses occur with a likely or occasional probability IIIB or 1 A frequent probability of negligible losses exists Low Risk Expected losses have little or no impact on accomplishing the mission The probability of critical loss is unlikely IIE while that of marginal loss is seldom 110 or unlikely The probability of a negligible loss is likely or less IVB through IVE Expected losses have little or no impact on accomplishing the mission Injury damage or illness are not expected or may be minor and have no long term impact or effect STEP 3 DEVELOP CONTROLS AND MAKE RISK DECISIONS D 24 In this step commanders develop and apply controls reassess the hazard to determine a residual risk and make risk decisions This process continues until an acceptable level of risk is achieved or until all risks are reduced to a level where benefits outweigh the potential cost This step is accomplished during the COA development COA analysis COA comparison and COA approval of the MDMP STEP 4 IMPLEMENT CONTROLS D 25 Leaders and staffs ensure that controls are integrated into SOPs written and verbal orders mission briefings and staff estimates The critical check for this step 1s to ensure that controls are converted into clear and simple execution orders This step includes coordination and communication with e Appropriate superior adjacent and subordinate uni
406. of the 100 meter method Range Card Method 7 262 SDMs use a range card to quickly determine ranges throughout the target area Once a target is detected the SDM determines its location on the card and then reads the proper range to the target Front Sightpost Method 7 263 Using the front sightpost as a scale 1s another method of estimating range This method can be used for a quick on the spot estimation and engagement e Ifa man sized target is approximately of the width of the front sightpost he is approximately 300 meters away e If the target is 1 2 the width of the front sightpost then the target is approximately 600 meters away NOTE See Chapter 6 for more information about this method of range determination Appearance of Objects Method 7 264 This method of range determination is based on the size and visible characteristics of an object To use this method with any degree of accuracy the SDM must be familiar with the appearance and visible detail of an object at various ranges Some common guidelines can be used to determine the range of a human target At 200 meters a human target is clear and details can be seen At 300 meters the target 1s still clear but no details can be seen At 400 meters the target s outline is clear however the target itself is blurry At 500 meters the body tapers and the head disappears At 600 meters the body resembles a wedge shape NOTE See Chapter 6 for more information
407. oldier can engage a target at 15 meters or less in less than one second 7 78 To use pointed quick fire Figure 7 10 1 Keep the weapon at your side 2 Keeps both eyes open and use instinct and peripheral vision to line up the weapon with the target 3 Quickly fire a single shot or burst e Figure 7 10 Pointed quick fire 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 7 21 Chapter 7 FACTORS FOR USE OF CONTROLLED PAIRS VERSUS BURST FIRE 7 79 Tactical considerations dictate whether controlled pairs or burst fire is most effective in a given situation MODIFICATIONS FOR QUICK FIRE 7 80 Trainers must consider the impact of the increased rate of fire on the Soldier s ability to properly apply the fundamentals of marksmanship and other combat firing skills Marksmanship Fundamentals 7 81 Quick fire techniques require major modifications to the four fundamentals of marksmanship Initial training in these differences followed by repeated dry fire exercises will be necessary to prepare the Soldier for live fire Steady Position 7 82 The quickness of shot delivery prevents the Soldier from assuming a stable firing position Consider the following modifications e Fire from the present position when the target appears e If moving stop e Do not make adjustments for stability and support before the round is fired Aimed 7 83 Consider the following modifications 1 Pull the weapon s buttstock into the pocket of the
408. olled pair until it becomes instinctive Automatic Fire 7 191 While rapid aimed semiautomatic fire 15 the most accurate method of engaging targets during SRC and controlled three round bursts are better than automatic fire automatic weapon fire may be necessary to maximize violence of action or gain fire superiority when gaining a foothold in a room building or trench When properly trained Soldiers should be able to fire six rounds two three round bursts in the same time it takes to fire a controlled pair With practice the accuracy of engaging targets can be equal to that of semiautomatic fire at 10 meters NOTE The key to burst or automatic firing is to squeeze the trigger not jerk 11 7 192 For the majority of Soldiers fully automatic fire 1s rarely effective and can lead to unnecessary noncombatant casualties or fratricide Not only is fully automatic fire inaccurate and difficult to control but it also rapidly empties ammunition magazines A Soldier who finds himself out of ammunition with an armed uninjured enemy Soldier during SRC will become a casualty unless a fellow Soldier intervenes Failure Drill 7 193 To make sure that a target is completely neutralized Soldiers should be trained to execute the failure drill The firer will fire a controlled pair into the lethal zone followed by a third round placed into the incapacitation zone This type of target engagement is particularly useful when engaging targets wearing bo
409. ology Soldiers and units can reduce their rate of marksmanship failures and increase Soldiers confidence in being able to fire their assigned weapons A 5 EST 2000 15 particularly useful for teaching BRM where a gated strategy requires the Soldier to pass certain gates in the simulation before firing live ammunition The Soldier does not proceed or pass a gate scenario until he meets the standard A 6 EST 2000 marksmanship training provides basic range firing and qualification and is accomplished in 5 10 or 15 lane configurations Each firer is restricted to one firing lane Remedial Marksmanship Training A 7 While the EST 2000 BRM gated strategy often reduces the requirements for remedial live fire training it is highly useful in diagnosing and correcting problems before the Soldier fires live rounds Using the EST 2000 technology of rifle cant trigger pressure and before the shot during the shot and after the shot AARs trainers can quickly identify and correct problems thus raising confidence and first time qualifications Individual and Unit Sustainment Training A 8 Sustainment training and prequalification refresher training can be conducted with the EST 2000 During individual and unit sustainment training grouping zeroing and Field Fire I and II should be conducted to standard in the EST 2000 prior to live fire qualification NOTE EST 2000 will not be used in lieu of live fire qualification except for those outlin
410. on SAFE If the selector lever cannot be placed on SAFE because the 4 Lock the bolt open To perform this procedure a Pull the charging handle rearward b Press the bottom of the bolt catch c Allow the bolt to move forward until it engages the bolt catch d Return the charging handle to the full forward position If you have not done so already place the selector lever on SAFE 6 Allow the bolt to move forward by pressing the upper portion of the bolt catch 8 Pull the charging handle fully rearward and release it allowing the bolt to return to the full forward position a PULL CHARGING HANDLE Figure 4 1 Clearing 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 4 3 Chapter 4 CYCLES OF FUNCTIONING 4 2 Soldiers must understand the rifle components and the mechanical sequence of events during the firing cycle After a loaded magazine has been inserted into the weapon the eight cycles of functioning begin They include Feeding Chambering Locking Firing Unlocking Extracting Ejecting Cocking 4 3 The following paragraphs describe the actions that occur during each cycle of functioning FEEDING 4 4 During feeding the following actions occur This process 15 shown in Figure 4 2 1 2 3 As the bolt carrier group moves rearward it engages the buffer assembly and compresses the action spring into the lower receiver extension When the bolt carrier group
411. onary positions are as follows Firers assume a good position Lock one magazine of rounds Load Ready on the right Ready on the left The firing line is ready Place your selector lever on SEMIAUTOMATIC your sector Cease fire Lock and clear your weapon Place the selector lever in the SAFE position E 18 The range officer relays his commands to the pit NCOIC by radio or telephone so he can keep abreast of the conduct of fire Before each firing exercise the range officer informs the pit NCOIC of the 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 E 3 Appendix E next exercise and any special instructions for target operation for example The next firing will be for zero Mark targets after each three round shot group or for slow fire The next firing will be ten rounds Slow fire Mark targets after each shot E 19 Radio telephone operators RTOs relay commands to the pit and pass on special instructions to target operators as requested by assistant instructors NOTES 1 Radio telephone operators never identify a firer on a particular firing point 2 The command MARK TARGET NUMBER indicates that the target has been fired upon but has not withdrawn for marking PRACTICE RECORD FIRE AND RECORD FIRE E 20 Simple standard fire commands are needed to avoid confusion and misunderstanding during practice record fire and record fire Practice Record Fire E 21 Practice record fire commands in
412. onduct corrective instruction e Provide sandbags at each firing point to accommodate supported firing positions e Setup the 25 meter grouping range as depicted in Figure 5 1 25 METERS 3 METERS BETWEEN FIGHTING POSITIONS Figure 5 1 25 meter range CONDUCT OF A 25 METER GROUPING FIRING 5 4 Each shot 1s fired from a supported firing position using the same point of aim 25 meter zeroing target s center of mass The objective is to fire tight shot groups and to place those shot groups inside a 4 centimeter circle the actual location of groups on the target is not important 5 2 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Downrange Feedback NOTES 1 Since this is not zeroing exercise few sight adjustments are made unless the shot group is off of or barely on the 25 meter zeroing target 2 No sight adjustments should be made until the firer can shoot six consecutive shots two shot groups inside a 4 centimeter circle Once this is accomplished the Soldier is ready to conduct zeroing procedures 5 5 To conduct a 25 meter grouping firing NOTE Before beginning the 25 meter grouping firing each Soldier ensures that his sights are set for 25 meter firing 1 The Soldier fires a three round shot group at the 25 meter zeroing target 2 The firing line is cleared and the Soldier and coach move downrange to examine the shot group for fundamental errors triangulate the shot group and put the number 1 in the center of the shot g
413. one direction until the diopter is totally out of focus Then turn the diopter focus ring the opposite direction until the display is focused to your eye Follow the same procedures for the other eye if using the AN PVS 7 series No further adjustments should have to be made to the diopter focus ring NOTE Adjust the diopter focus ring before adjusting the objective focus ring The diopter focus ring focuses the display lens to your eye while the objective focus ring focuses the target You cannot focus the sight to the target without your eye being focused to the display first 6 Adjust the objective focus ring While looking at an object turn the objective focus ring until the objective lens is out of focus and then slowly turn the objective focus ring in the opposite direction until the object becomes as clear as possible NOTE Adjustments will have to be made for targets at different ranges using the objective focus ring 7 Adjust the variable gain control AN PVS 14 only Turn the variable gain control to the point that both eyes are almost receiving the same amount of light NOTE The AN PVS 14 has a variable gain control that controls the illumination input to the eye Keeping the variable gain turned up will cause your brain to form two separate images one darker and one very bright With the variable gain turned down to the point that both eyes are almost receiving the same amount of light the brain will produce one image makin
414. op training programs plans and lessons that meet the objectives or intent of the United States Army rifle marksmanship program and FM 7 0 This manual is organized to lead the trainer through the material needed to conduct training during initial entry training IET and unit sustainment training Preliminary subjects include discussion on the weapon s capabilities mechanical training and the fundamentals and principles of rifle marksmanship Live fire applications are scheduled after the Soldier has demonstrated preliminary skills This manual was revised to include references to new materiel and systems This revision includes e The new Army total marksmanship training strategy to include specific strategies for the United States Army Reserve USAR and the Army National Guard ARNG e Information about the advanced combat optical gunsight ACOG the AN PEQ 15 advanced target pointer illuminator aiming light ATPIAL various thermal sights and the MK 262 round e Information about the alternate qualification record fire courses known distance KD record fire 25 meter scaled target alternate course 15 meter scaled target alternate course e Information about the rapid magazine change and barricade transition fire for short range marksmanship SRM Changes to all of the scorecards Updated terminology This publication prescribes DA Form 3595 R Record Fire Scorecard DA Form 3601 R Single Target Field Fire I Scorecard
415. or a live round without the firer knowing it An excellent exercise for identifying and correcting trigger jerks ballistics A science that deals with the motion and flight characteristics of projectiles barrel erosion Wearing away of the surface of the bore due to the combined effects of gas washing coring and mechanical abrasion basic marksmanship Fundamental marksmanship skills taught in BRM during IET and OSUT basic rifle marksmanship The formal course of marksmanship instruction received by all soldiers battlesight zero A sight setting that soldiers keep on their weapons It provides the highest probability of hitting most high priority combat targets with minimum adjustment to the aiming point a 250 meter sight setting as on the M16A1 rifle and a 300 meter sight setting as on the M16A2 rifle blank ammunition A complete cartridge without the bullet used to simulate weapon firing blank firing adapter A device that fits in the muzzle of the rifle used only with blank ammunition brass An alloy of copper and zinc used to make cartridge cases and bullet jackets Also a common name for expended cases breath control The third marksmanship fundamental refers to the control of breathing to help keep the rifle steady during firing bullet The projectile or ball the part that goes downrange It may also be used to refer to the complete cartridge bull s eye target Any target with a round black circle and scoring ring
416. ord Fire I and a Record Fire II course The Record Fire I course requires the individual to use mechanical elevation and windage adjustments The Record Fire II course requires the individual to use elevation and windage hold off adjusted points of aim Conduct 7 286 To complete this course Soldiers fire two firing events Record Fire I and Record Fire II 7 287 During each event each Soldier will engage a total of 20 targets with 20 rounds Soldiers must attain a total of 14 hits out of 20 targets on each record fire to pass Table 7 29 depicts these two events and provides related information such as number of rounds that must be fired position that must be used and the distance away from the firer that the target must be placed Table 7 29 Firing event Record Fire and Il FIRING EVENT POSITION NUMBER OF TARGET RANGE m TARGETS 100 to 500 Foxhole supported or prone Record Fire supported position and the prone 20 100 to 500 unsupported firing position Foxhole supported or prone Record Fire II supported position and the prone unsupported firing position NOTE If the SDM is issued an optic the Record Fire II course will substitute use of that optic instead of using adjusted points of aim 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 7 69 Chapter 7 7 288 Prior to training ensure that The weapon is zeroed prior to training Each Soldier assumes a steady firing position Each Soldier consistently applies the fundamentals
417. ord fire course should be used for all Soldiers but there are times when qualification exercises must be conducted on alternate courses DEVELOPMENT OF STANDARDS 6 65 Testing and development indicates that the Soldier should hit at least 39 of 40 targets if he applies the marksmanship fundamentals correctly assuming that target mechanisms have been checked and are 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 6 13 Chapter 6 functioning This probability of hit PH 1s provided as a guide to consider the capability of the typical weapon ammunition and Soldier firing a standard course Table 6 10 Table 6 10 Probability of hits NUMBER OF TARGETS 6 66 When the IET BRM POI or an adequate unit training program is conducted the following PH can be expected Table 6 11 Table 6 11 Results from an adequate unit training program TARGETS LOW PH AVERAGE PH HIGH PH pa its 32 hits 37 hits TARGET FUNCTION 6 67 The first task on a standard record fire course is to ensure that all targets function properly When in doubt a lane should be fired to ensure that a bullet strike will activate each target Sometimes slapping a target with a cleaning rod can cause it to activate but a bullet impact will not Hot plastic targets may allow a 5 56 millimeter bullet to pass through without causing sufficient vibration to activate the mechanism resulting in a requirement to change targets more often use double targets or use different silhoue
418. ord fire range firing tables and related information 6 17 Table 6 15 Qualification ratings for the known distance record fire range 6 18 Table 6 16 25 meter scaled target alternate course firing tables and related HATO NIWA OMG e m 6 19 Table 6 17 Qualification ratings for the 25 meter scaled target alternate course 6 20 Table 7 1 Rapid semiautomatic fire training program 7 11 Table 7 2 Rapid semiautomatic fire training and related information 7 11 Table 7 3 Automatic or burst fire training 7 15 Table 7 4 Automatic or burst fire training and related information 7 15 Table 7 5 Suppressive fire training program 7 18 Table 7 6 Suppressive fire training and related 7 19 Table 7 7 Quick fire training 7 24 Table 7 8 Quick fire training and related information 7 24 Table 7 9 Chemical Biological Radiological and Nuclear fire training program 7 28 Table 7 10 Unassisted night fire training program 7 30 Table 7 11 Artificial illumination training program 7 35 Table 7
419. osed silhouette targets before conducting the field fire scenario This allows Soldiers to focus on the targets at range The procedures for field fire include the following e Conduct a dry fire exercise prior to conducting a live fire e Conduct Field Fire in the same manner as Field Fire II e Engage targets at 50 150 and 250 meters e Fire 36 rounds 18 rounds from the supported firing position 18 rounds from the prone unsupported firing position 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 8 27 Cha pter 8 PRACTICE QUALIFICATION 8 03 The procedures for practice qualification include the following e Conducta dry fire exercise e Use coaches e Fire 40 rounds m 20 rounds from the prone supported firing position 10 rounds from the unsupported firing position m 10 rounds from the kneeling firing position Engage targets from 50 to 250 meters e Meet the standards 17 hits out of 40 target exposures RECORD QUALIFICATION 8 94 The procedures for record qualification include the following e Conduct a dry fire exercise e Fire 40 rounds 20 rounds from the prone supported firing position lOrounds from the unsupported firing position 10 rounds from the kneeling firing position Engage targets from 50 to 250 meters e Meet the standards 17 hits out of 40 target exposures AN PVS 4 NIGHT VISION DEVICE 8 95 The AN PVS 4 NVD is a portable battery operated electro optical instrument used for observation and
420. osition NOTE See the end of this publication for a blank reproducible copy of DA Form 7650 R 5 6 7 8 The Soldier aims at the silhouette s center of mass on the 25 meter zero target and squeezes the trigger The borelight is activated as the trigger 15 fired The laser is seen on the 25 meter zero target The trainer marks the 25 meter zero target exactly were the borelight laser hit the target The Soldier gets out of position and then back into a prone supported firing position 7 251 This process will be done until a three round shot group has been achieved The Soldier will do the same from the prone unsupported firing position To receive a GO the Soldier must place a three round shot group in a 3 centimeter circle from both prone positions Target Box Exercise 7 62 7 252 The target box exercise checks the consistency of aiming and placement of three round shot groups in a dry fire environment To conduct the exercise 1 2 3 4 The target man places the silhouette on a plain sheet of paper 25 meters away from the firer and moves the silhouette target as directed by the Soldier When the Soldier establishes proper aiming he squeezes the trigger The target man marks through the silhouette with a pen or pencil at the target s center of mass The target man moves the silhouette to another spot on the paper and tells the firer to repeat the process twice more to obtain a shot group NOTE A sim
421. ount the AN PAQ 4B C on an M16A1 A2 A3 rifle or M4 carbine NOTE Reference the weapon components using the numbers listed in Figure 2 28 Figure 2 28 Mounting the AN PAQ 4B C on the M16A1 A2 A3 rifle and M4 carbine 1 Install the bracket assembly 1 2 Align the switch lever shroud 2 with the notches on the mounting rail 3 3 Lower the ON OFF switch 4 Align the AN PAQ 4B C 4 with the notches on the switch lever shroud 5 Hand tighten using the thumbscrew 5 NOTE 1 Hand tighten the plastic thumbscrew to avoid breakage If the thumbscrew 15 metal tool tightening 1s recommended to ensure zero retention 2 ensure zero retention retighten the thumbscrew after firing a few rounds 2 42 The remote switch should be attached to the weapon where it will not interfere with the functioning of the weapon or hinder the firer s ability to fire the weapon AN PEQ 2A B TARGET POINTER ILLUMINATOR AIMING LIGHT 2 43 AN PEQ 2A and AN PEQ 2B aiming lights Figure 2 29 are Class IIIb laser devices that emit a collimated beam of IR light for precise aiming and a separate IR beam for illumination of the target or target area Both beams can be independently zeroed to the weapon and to each other The beams can be operated individually or in combination in both high and low power settings NOTES 1 The IR illuminator is equipped with an adjustable bezel to vary the size of the illumination beam based on the size and dist
422. owing the bolt carrier forward and causing multiple firings 3 The trigger must be squeezed again before the next round will fire AUTOMATIC MODE OF FIRE 4 15 Weapons that function in the automatic mode of fire are MI6A I A3 rifles e M4A 1 carbines 4 16 When the selector lever is in the AUTO position the rifle continues to fire as long as the trigger is held back and ammunition is in the magazine The functioning of certain parts of the rifle changes when firing automatically Once the trigger is squeezed and the round is fired 1 The bolt carrier group moves to the rear and the hammer is cocked 2 The center cam of the selector depresses the rear of the disconnector and prevents the nose of the disconnector from engaging the lower hammer hook 3 The bottom part of the automatic sear catches the upper hammer hook and holds it until the bolt carrier group moves forward 4 The bottom part strikes the top of the sear and releases the hammer causing the rifle to fire automatically 5 Ifthe trigger is released the hammer moves forward and is caught by the nose of the trigger NOTE This ends the automatic cycle of fire until the trigger is squeezed again BURST MODE OF FIRE 4 17 Weapons that function in the burst mode of fire are M16A2 A4 rifles e M4 carbines 4 18 When the selector lever is in the BURST position the rifle fires a three round burst if the trigger is held to the rear during th
423. own Figure 7 24 Lethal zone Incapacitating Shot Placement 7 187 Only one shot placement guarantees immediate and total incapacitation roughly centered in the face below the middle of the forehead and the upper lip and from the eyes in Shots to the side of the head should be centered between the crown of the skull and the middle of the ear opening from the center of the cheekbones to the middle of the back of the head Figure 7 25 Figure 7 25 Incapacitation zone 7 46 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Advanced Rifle Marksmanship TRIGGER MANIPULATION 7 188 SRC engagements are usually quick violent and deadly Due to the reduced reaction time imperfect sight picture and requirement to effectively place rounds into targets Soldiers must fire multiple rounds during each engagement in order to survive Multiple shots may be fired either through the use of a controlled pair or automatic weapon fire Controlled Pair 7 189 A controlled pair is two rounds fired in rapid succession Controlled pairs should be fired at single targets until they go down When multiple targets are present the Soldier must fire a controlled pair at each target and then reengage any targets left standing To fire a controlled pair 1 Fire the first round and allow the weapon to move in its natural arc without fighting the recoil 2 Rapidly bring the weapon back on target and fire a second round 7 190 Soldiers must practice firing the contr
424. own as final trigger squeeze without disturbing the lay of the weapon e Increase the firing rate by firing releasing enough trigger pressure to reset the sear and then immediately firing the next shot This technique 15 called rapid trigger squeeze It eliminates the time used in fully releasing pressure on the trigger and allows the firer to rapidly deliver subsequent rounds NOTE Training and practice sessions are required for Soldiers to become proficient in the technique of rapid trigger squeeze 7 22 Repeated dry fire training using simulators such as the EST 2000 and LMTS and live fire practice ensure that the Soldier can squeeze the trigger and maintain a rapid rate of fire consistently and accurately Immediate Action Procedures 7 23 To maintain an increased rate of suppressive fire Soldiers must apply immediate action quickly Repeated dry fire practice using blanks or dummy rounds followed by live fire training and evaluation ensures that Soldiers can rapidly apply immediate action procedures while other Soldiers initiate fire RAPID SEMIAUTOMATIC FIRE TRAINING NOTE Soldiers should be well trained in all aspects of slow semiautomatic firing before attempting any rapid semiautomatic fire training Those who display a lack of knowledge of fundamental marksmanship skills should not advance to rapid semiautomatic fire training until these skills are learned and mastered 7 24 Initial training should focus on the modification
425. page 2 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 D 9 Appendix D D 33 See Table D 5 for instructions on completing DA Form 7566 Table D 5 Worksheet instructions ITEM INSTRUCTION 1 through 4 Self explanatory 5 Subtask relating to the mission or task in Block 1 Hazards Identify hazards by reviewing METT TC factors for the mission or task Additional factors include historical lessons learned experience judgment equipment characteristics and warnings and environmental considerations Initial Risk Level Factors include historical lessons learned intuitive analyses experience judgment equipment characteristics and warnings and environmental considerations Determine the initial risk for each hazard by applying the risk assessment matrix Enter the risk level for each hazard Controls For each hazard develop one or more controls that will eliminate the hazard or reduce the risk of a hazardous incident Specify who what where why when and how for each control Enter controls Residual Risk Level Determine the residual risk for each hazard by applying the risk assessment matrix Enter the residual risk level for each hazard How to Implement Decide how each control will be put into effect or communicated to the personnel who will make it happen written or verbal instruction tactical safety garrison SOPs rehearsals Enter controls How to Supervise Who Plan how each control will be monitored for implementation contin
426. perly loaded magazine Defective round projectile forced back into the cartridge case which could result in a stubbed round or the base of the previous cartridge could be separated leaving the remainder in the chamber Damaged or broken action spring Exterior accumulation of dirt in the lower receiver extension Fouled gas tube resulting in short recoil A magazine resting on the ground or pushed forward causing an improper lock Corrective Action 3 7 Applying immediate action usually corrects the malfunction To avoid the risk of further jamming watch for ejection of a cartridge and ensure that the upper receiver is free of loose rounds 3 8 Ifimmediate action fails to clear the malfunction take remedial action NOTE Do not force the bolt carrier 3 9 Ifresistance is encountered which can occur with an unserviceable round 1 Lock the bolt to the rear 2 Remove the magazine 3 Clear the malfunction 3 10 For example to correct a bolt override a cartridge has wedged itself between the bolt and charging handle 1 Ensure that the charging handle is pushed forward and locked into place 2 Attempt to place the weapon on SAFE 3 Secure the rifle and pull the bolt to the rear until the bolt seats completely into the buffer well 4 Turn the rifle upright and allow the overridden cartridge to fall out FAILURE TO FIRE CARTRIDGE 3 11 Despite the fact that a round has been chambered the trigger
427. place the elbow of the firing side on the outside knee to provide stability When firing from the weak side the firer should cant the weapon approximately 45 degrees and thrust the hips forward to minimize exposure to the enemy When placing the weapon against the cover the firer should take care to prevent the ejection port from becoming obstructed Li d Teo e E et dms E C 1 z 2 as zr pett Iadi Pr as At ef EPS t oe a vM AU See 2 era fr E Figure 7 1 Kneeling supported firing position 7 2 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Advanced Rifle Marksmanship STANDING UNSUPPORTED FIRING POSITION 7 3 While the standing position provides the least stability it can be assumed quickly while moving and is a good position for target area observation Support for any portion of the body or weapon improves stability 7 4 assume the standing unsupported firing position Figure 7 2 1 Face the target 2 Step toward the target with the foot closest to the target 3 Spread the feet a comfortable distance apart 4 Place the firing hand on the pistol grip and the nonfiring hand on the upper handguard 5 Place the weapon s buttstock between the SAPI plate of the IBA and the bicep NOTE This action stabilizes the weapon and absorbs recoil 6 Shift the feet until aiming naturally at the target 7 Evenly distribute body weight NOTE More stability can be obtained by adjusting the a
428. place the weapon on SAFE NOTE A bolt override may not allow the weapon to be placed on SAFE 2 Remove the magazine 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 3 1 Chapter 3 3 Lock the bolt to the rear 4 Place the weapon on SAFE if not already done MALFUNCTIONS 3 4 Malfunctions are caused by procedural or mechanical failures of the rifle magazine or ammunition Prefiring checks and serviceability inspections identify potential problems before they become malfunctions This section describes the primary categories of malfunctions NOTE In training Soldiers must alert other Soldiers and range personnel when experiencing weapon malfunctions FAILURE TO FEED CHAMBER OR LOCK 3 5 This malfunction can occur when loading the rifle or during the cycle of operation Once the magazine has been loaded into the rifle the forward movement of the bolt carrier group could lack enough force generated by the expansion of the action spring to feed chamber or lock the bolt Figure 3 1 e FAILURE TO FEED FIRST ROUND e BOLT CARRIER NOT FULLY CLOSED e ADOUBLE FEED OF TWO LIVE ROUNDS Figure 3 1 Failure to feed chamber or lock 3 2 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Troubleshooting and Destruction Probable Causes 3 6 The malfunction could be the result of one or more of the following e Excess accumulation of dirt or fouling in and around the bolt and bolt carrier Defective magazine dented bulged or a weak magazine spring Impro
429. pon s muzzle 5 89 The overall dimensions of the combat service 5 56 millimeter cartridges are the same which allows cartridges to be fired safely in M16 series rifles and carbines but there are internal differences that affect firing accuracy Figure 5 31 0 76 IN 091IN fd 0 906 IN 19 3 MM 23 1 MM i 29 3 MM Figure 5 31 Projectile differences M855 AND M193 AMMUNITION 5 90 The M855 bullet is longer and wider than the M193 bullet and has a different configuration These differences require different twists in the barrels lands and grooves to stabilize the bullet in flight These differences include the following e The MI6AI has a 1 12 barrel twist the bullet rotates once for every 12 inches of travel down the barrel e The MI6A2 A3 A4 and the M4 have a 1 7 barrel twist the bullet rotates once for every 7 inches of travel down the barrel 5 91 The M16A1 does not put enough spin on the heavier M855 bullet to stabilize it in flight causing erratic performance and inaccuracy Figure 5 32 The shot groups are e 30 48 to 35 56 centimeters 12 to 14 inches at 91 4 meters 100 yards e 182 88 centimeters 72 inches at 274 2 meters 300 yards 5 34 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Downrange Feedback NOTE Although firing the M855 cartridge in the M16A1 rifle is safe it should only be used in a combat emergency and then only for close ranges of 91 4 meters 100 yards or less 5 92 The M16A2 A
430. ported positions when firing M16 or M4 series weapons in the automatic or burst fire mode If the weapon is equipped with the ARS the Soldier should use the vertical pistol grip to further increase control of the weapon Optional modifications include the following e Maximize use of artificial support e Grip the weapon firmly and pull it into the shoulder securely This helps offset the progressive displacement of weapon target alignment caused by recoil Use sandbags to support the weapon Position the nonfiring hand on the weapon wherever it provides the most stability and flexibility The goal 1s to maintain weapon stability and minimize recoil e Form a 5 inch loop with the sling at the upper sling swivel Grasp this loop with the nonfiring hand and pull down and to the rear while firing e Grasp the small of the stock with the nonfiring hand and apply pressure down and to the rear while firing e Assume the modified supported prone firing position Figure 7 4 This position uses sandbags to support the handguard and frees the nonfiring hand to hold the magazine steady Figure 7 4 Modified supported prone firing position 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 7 5 Chapter 7 URBAN OPERATIONS FIRING POSITIONS 7 8 Although the same principles of rifle marksmanship apply the selection of firing positions during urban operations UO requires some special considerations During UO Soldiers may be required to fire e Over rooftops e Arou
431. proper 25 meter zero offsets 1 Use only a M16A2 300 meter zeroing target 2 Find the correct target template for the weapon configuration 3 Count the number of squares starting from the center of the 300 meter zeroing silhouette 4 Mark the designated strike point by drawing a small circle at the appropriate number of squares from the center of the 300 meter zeroing silhouette 5 Draw a 4 centimeter by 4 centimeter square keeping the designated strike point at the center NOTES 1 To reproduce the 10 meter target offset copy the blank 10 meter target offset and place the example of the weapon being used on the back This reproducible copy can be laminated and used repeatedly 2 Table F 1 provides offset mounting information for various weapon configurations F 2 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 10 Meter Target Offsets and 25 Meter Zero Offsets 10 METER BORESIGHT TARGET 1 USE THE CORRECT OFFSET FOR THE WEAPON SIGHT AND LOCATION CONFIGURED 2 STABILIZE THE WEAPON AND THE OFFSET 3 ZERO BORELIGHT WHILE INSIDE THE BARREL OF THE WEAPON 4 ALIGN THE LASER OF THE BORELIGHT WITH THE DOT ON THE 10M OFFSET 5 ALIGN THE MILES LASER WITH THE MILES RECTANGLE ON THE 10M OFFSET IF APPLICABLE US Army ARDEC 6 ADJUST AIMING LASER UNTIL CENTERED ON CROSSHAIR AMSTA AR CCL A 7 PLACE OPTIC AIMPOINT CENTERED ON CROSSHAIR AND MAKE ADJUSTMENTS ON OPTIC UNTIL THE BORELIGHT LASER IS ALIGNED WITH THE DOT ON THE 10
432. provide the Soldier with the smallest target exposure to the enemy and will be used during this training cycle The prone supported position can be substituted for the foxhole supported position dependent on range configurations Prior to this phase of training trainers ensure that the Weapon is cleared and that no ammunition is loaded prior to training e Weapon is zeroed prior to training e Soldier is able to assume a steady firing position Foxhole Supported 7 235 The Soldier must be able to successfully assume a proper supported position while firing from a foxhole The trainer must ensure that the Soldier has a good steady position After the Soldier has assumed a good supported position in the foxhole 1 The trainer uses DA Form 7650 R Squad Designated Marksman Position Evaluation to evaluate his position and take notes on all of the following characteristics NOTE See the end of this publication for a blank reproducible copy of DA Form 7650 R Eye relief Trigger finger Elbows Nonfiring hand m legs NOTE The main areas that will differ between the foxhole supported and the prone supported positions are in the placement of the elbows legs and nonfiring hand These body positions will be similar to those of the prone unsupported position 2 After all characteristics have been noted the trainer has the Soldier lay his weapon down relax and then assume another supported position in the foxhole
433. pulls per hit and time to hit Proper training and repeated practice increases the degree of accuracy 7 15 Rapid application of the four fundamentals will result in a well aimed shot every one or two seconds This technique of fire allows a unit to place the most effective volume of fire in a target area while conserving ammunition It is the most accurate means of delivering suppressive fire MODIFICATIONS FOR RAPID SEMIAUTOMATIC FIRE 7 16 Trainers must consider the impact of the increased rate of fire on the Soldier s ability to properly apply the fundamentals of marksmanship and other combat firing skills such as immediate action procedures Marksmanship Fundamentals 7 17 The following paragraphs describe the modifications necessary for Soldiers to apply the four fundamentals when firing in the rapid semiautomatic fire mode Steady Position 7 18 Consider the following modifications to achieve a steady position e Make sure that the weapon is well supported to improve accuracy and reduce recovery time between shots e Grip the handgrip tightly to reduce recovery time and rapidly shift or distribute fire to subsequent targets When possible pivot the weapon where the nonfiring hand meets the support e Avoid changing the position of the nonfiring hand on the support it is awkward and time consuming when rapidly firing a series of shots Aiming 7 19 Consider the following recommendations to properly aim the weapon
434. quU OE NE MD EI 7 19 FM 3 22 9 Contents Chapter 8 Appendix A Appendix B Appendix C Appendix D Appendix E Section Ill Chemical Biological Radiological and Nuclear Firing 7 24 Mission Oriented Protective Posture Equipment 7 24 Section IV Night Fire Training ccccsscecssssseeesesseeeseeseeeseesneeseeeeeseesneessnens 7 30 Unassisted Night Fire 7 30 Artificial Illumination Training ccccseccceesseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeessaeeeessaeeeeeeas 7 35 Section V Moving Target Engagements 7 36 Modifications for Moving Target Engagements 7 36 Moving Target Live Fire Exercise 1 1 41 Section VI Short Range Marksmanship Training 7 41 Conduct of Short Range Marksmanship 7 41 Fundamentals of Short Range Marksmanship 7 42 Preliminary Short Range Marksmanship Instruction 7 47 Phase I Reflexive Fire Training nnn 7 51 Phase 11 Discrimination Training 7 53 Phase III Short Range Marksmanship Qualification 7 55 Pha
435. r long or short range firing e The coach observes the firer to see if he Uses the correct position and properly applies the steady position elements Properly loads the rifle a Obtains the correct sight alignment with the aid of an M16 sighting device Holds his breath correctly by watching his back Applies proper trigger squeeze determines whether he flinches or jerks by watching his head shoulders trigger finger and firing hand and arm Is tense and nervous If the firer is nervous the coach has the firer breathe deeply several times to relax e Supervisory personnel and peer coaches correct errors as they are detected If many common errors are observed it is appropriate to call the group together for discussion demonstration of proper procedures and feedback POSITION OF THE COACH 4 25 During an exercise the coach should be positioned where he can best observe the firer as he assumes position Then he moves to various points around the firer sides and rear to check the correctness of the firer s position The coach requires the firer to make adjustments until the firer obtains a correct position 4 26 When the coach is satisfied with the firing position he assumes a coaching position alongside the firer The coach usually assumes a position like that of the firer on the firing side of the firer Figure 4 12 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 4 13 Chapter 4 Figure 4 12 Prone position of coach
436. r march AIMING TECHNIQUES 7 178 Four aiming techniques are used during SRC Slow aimed fire Aimed quick kill e e Rapid aimed fire E e Instinctive fire 7 179 Each has advantages and disadvantages and the Soldier must understand when how and where to use each technique Slow Aimed Fire 7 180 Slow aimed fire is the slowest but most accurate technique When using this technique Soldiers take a steady position properly align the sight picture and squeeze off rounds This technique should only be used to engage targets more than 25 meters away when good cover and concealment 15 available or when the need for accuracy overrides the need for speed Rapid Aimed Fire 7 181 The rapid aimed fire technique utilizes an imperfect sight picture When using this technique the Soldier focuses on the target and raises his weapon until the target is obscured by the front sightpost Elevation is less critical than windage when using this technique This aiming technique is extremely effective on targets 0 to 15 meters away Aimed Quick Kill 7 182 The aimed quick kill technique is the quickest and most accurate method of engaging targets up to 12 meters away As Soldiers become more experienced at using this technique they may use it at greater ranges When using this technique the Soldier aims over the rear sight down the length of the carrying handle and places the top to of an inch of the front sightpost on the targe
437. r marksmanship fundamentals and explain that this shot group size is due to major shooting error not weapon or ammunition performance Any of these shot groups could have resulted from a change in position sight picture breathing or trigger squeeze or the firer may have anticipated the shot 5 24 Soldiers who fire these shot groups should receive extensive dry fire training or remedial training on the EST 2000 or LMTS to help correct firing problems 300 METERS 300 METERS 300 METERS Figure 5 8 Shot groups with major shooting error MULTIPLE SHOT GROUP ANALYSIS 5 25 Multiple shot group analysis involves performing ongoing analysis of individual shot groups while comparing them to each other for consistent aiming NOTE If the Soldier is to benefit from this exercise and if the instructor trainer or coach is to provide useful guidance the Soldier must mark each shot group individually and locate the center of more than one shot group 5 26 To properly mark the shot groups Figure 5 9 1 Connect each individual shot group on the target with a straight line 2 Place a number inside the shot group NOTE The number represents the center of the three shots 3 Connect the numbers and place an X in the center NOTE The X represents the center of the shot groups 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 5 7 Chapter 5 Figure 5 9 Central point of three shot groups ACCEPTABLE SHOT GROUPING PERFORMANCE 5 27 The shot
438. r on the left needs more training on the four fundamentals 5 22 HAAS HEH HA te tt HD CEEE HEEN moare aw Faas M SATO Sw gt 7 5255 9959 cw Ew m HESS 111 IIl dit Figure 5 22 Comparison of firing performance FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Downrange Feedback KNOWN DISTANCE ZEROING 5 56 The 300 meter target can be used to confirm weapon zero or to refine the zero obtained on the 25 meter range When Soldiers properly compensate for the wind the zero on this target is more valid than the zero obtained on the 25 meter range Soldiers should fire two five round shot groups to confirm zero or three round shot groups to refine their zero The pit crews should spot targets after each shot group is fired If the crosswind exceeds five miles per hour KD zeroing should not be attempted NOTES 1 IET Soldiers only zero on the 25 meter range 2 For M16A2 3 4 M4 and M4A1 weapons only Soldiers should use the unmarked aperture for zeroing and target engagement at all distances on the KD range When engaging targets beyond 300 meters the windage knob should be adjusted to the range of the target 400 meter targets will be set on 4 flush and 450 meter targets will be set on 4 plus two clicks 3 For M16
439. r to remove it apply thumb pressure to the center of the spring latch and slide it in the desired direction NOTES 1 Keep unused bottom left and right rail sections covered with 11 rib rail cover sections 2 accessories are mounted on a rail cover the remaining rail surface with an appropriately sized rail cover 3 Ifa BUIS is installed permanently remove the top full length rail cover and replace it with a shorter rail cover to protect the nonfiring hand when the barrel is hot WARNING When firing at high rates of sustained fire the barrel and metal components of the ARS can become hot enough to inflict serious burns Cover exposed metal portions with plastic rail covers Use the vertical pistol grip Figure 2 18 during heavy sustained fire NUMBERED RECOIL GROOVES 2 21 The even numbered recoil grooves on each rail of the ARS are sequentially numbered within the recoil grooves themselves Figure 2 17 Each number is preceded by a letter prefix indicating a specific slot on the ARS The numbers on the top rail have a T prefix while those on the bottom have a B prefix Additionally the numbers on the rail to the firer s left have an L prefix while those to the firer s right have an R prefix These addresses e Assist the user in remounting an accessory in the same position e Allow standardization in the location of mounted accessories e Identify reference points for discussions
440. raining Aids Devices and Exercises 4 If the laser dot is in the 4 centimeter circle proceed to Step 5 If the laser dot is outside of the 4 centimeter circle the trainer instructs the Soldier regarding correct aiming techniques to bring the dot inside the circle and repeats Step 2 NOTE If the trainer is reasonably certain that the laser and sights are aligned the visible laser dot may be used to help the firer understand correct sight picture and alignment The firer should be instructed to bring the laser dot to the target silhouette s center of mass and then observe the relationship of the front and rear sights to the target 5 With the MP 400 in constant ON mode the trainer or coach uses the red dot trace to confirm steady hold and proper breathing and trigger control NOTE This trace can also be used to show the effects of improper steady position breath control and trigger control and reinforce proper techniques 6 The trainer or coach turns the MP 400 to the training TRN mode and instructs the Soldier to fire six shots into the target s center of mass The trainer or coach observes the laser hits to confirm proper application of the four fundamentals of rifle marksmanship NOTE Failure to achieve this standard provides an early indication of the need for more intense instruction in the fundamentals of marksmanship or remedial training EXERCISE 2 INTERACTIVE DRY FIRE EXERCISE Table A 3 Action conditions and stan
441. range those that rise to the upright position from the back and those that rise to the upright position from the side When using targets that rise from the side Soldiers should be instructed to wait until the target is fully raised before engaging it If the target 1s engaged as it 1s rising the computer will not register the hit even though the target may fall REMEDIAL TRAINING 6 37 Soldiers who miss most targets should be removed from the firing line for remedial training if their problem cannot be corrected A Soldier who fires at a 300 meter target 10 times and misses it 10 times is not learning instead he is losing confidence in his ability The typical Soldier should hit the 300 meter target at least 7 out of 10 times PEER COACHING 6 38 Peer coaches should assist Soldiers in observing the strike of rounds and identifying firing problems If the target is missed and the coach cannot observe the bullet strike the coach should instruct the Soldier to aim lower for the next shot expecting to see the strike of the bullet in the ground With this information the coach can instruct the Soldier where to aim to hit the target ORGANIZATION 6 39 Live fire training can be organized in several ways A unit is divided into two or more firing orders based on the number of personnel to be trained e The first order is the firer e The second order is the coach e The third order is the scorer if required 6 40 At the conclusion of e
442. ravity on a bullet strike A refresher training program prevents Soldiers from becoming frustrated and losing confidence and conserves ammunition and training time All Soldiers attend this program so they can meet the standards outlined in this manual and supporting manuals NOTE Many individual marksmanship tasks such as operation and function checks immediate action target detection and dry fire do not require live firing Live and virtual simulators can be used to reinforce PMI grouping zeroing practice record fire record fire CBRN fire and assisted and unassisted night fire by simulating the LFXs Building marksmanship confidence by repetition can bring consistency to the unit marksmanship training program FEEDBACK 1 65 Feedback must be included in all live fire training Soldiers must have precise knowledge of a bullet strike feedback is not adequate when bullets from previous firings cannot be identified To provide accurate feedback trainers ensure that Soldiers triangulate and clearly mark previous shot groups on a zeroing target 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 1 15 Chapter 1 GROUPING AND ZEROING 1 66 The initial LFX should be a grouping exercise during which Soldiers apply marksmanship fundamentals to obtain tight consistent shot groups Following a successful grouping exercise Soldiers zero their weapons quickly using only a few rounds DOWNRANGE FEEDBACK 1 67 After zeroing downrange feedback should be conduc
443. rbines 2 23 Figure 2 32 MILES training extender bracket installation on M16 M4 series WE AD OIG HO e 2 24 Figure 2 33 AN PEQ 15 advanced target pointer illuminator aiming light 2 25 Figure 2 34 AN PEQ 15 mounted on Carbine 2 25 Figure 2 35 AN PAS 13B C D V1 light weapon thermal sight and AN PAS 13B C D heavy weapon thermal 2 26 Figure 2 36 Mounting the TWS on M16A4 rifle or carbine 2 26 Figure 2 37 Mounting the TWS on an M16A1 A2 A3 2 27 Figure 2 38 AN PVS 4 night vision SIQNK cccccccceeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeseaeeeesaaeeesaaeees 2 28 Figure 2 39 Mounting the AN PVS 4 on an carbine MWS 2 28 Figure 2 40 Mounting the AN PVS 4 on an M16A1 A2 A3 rifle 2 29 Figure 221 Backup SIOR 2 30 Figure 2 42 Backup iron sight the stowed position 2 30 Figure 2 43 Advanced combat optical 2 31 Figure 2 44 Mounting the on M16A4 rifle and carbine 2 31 Figure 2 45 Mounting the on an M16A1 A2 A3 rifle
444. rcises define procedures for using LMTS equipment to train and sustain basic marksmanship fundamentals They may be conducted as independent stations or combined on a single station as appropriate for the training scenario Trainers should employ LMTS equipment in a manner that accounts for e Space and time available at the training site e Unit size and composition e Remedial training requirements e Equipment availability NOTE Check the LMTS operator s manual for specific information about equipment setup and operation A 24 Training in Exercises 1 through 3 should be conducted using the Soldier s own service rifle in the dry fire mode Exercise 4 may be conducted in the dry fire mode but an optional sound and recoil replicator should be employed for added realism NOTE Sound and recoil replicators provide nearly 100 percent of the recoil felt with full rifle function They require the Soldier to properly load magazines and enable the trainer to cause the rifle to misfeed or misfire to verify a Soldier s ability to perform immediate action procedures to reduce a stoppage A 25 If LMTS training immediately precedes a live fire grouping and zeroing exercise and time permits trainers may wish to use the system s prezeroing capability during Exercise 3 by using calibrated or spun lasers Using the calibrated lasers Soldiers make adjustments to their own rifle sights during Exercise 3 resulting in a savings of time and ammunition o
445. rds DIME WASHER EXERCISE 4 75 The primary purpose of this exercise is to practice trigger control it is also used to reinforce good body position and breath control The Soldier must successfully dry fire his weapon six consecutive times without the dime or washer falling to the ground NOTE Refer to Appendix A for a detailed explanation of the dime washer exercise and training standards SECTION lll MARKSMANSHIP FUNDAMENTALS II This training program Table 4 3 reinforces BRM and the four fundamentals while demonstrating the integrated act of shooting on the EST 2000 or LMTS Table 4 3 Marksmanship Fundamentals training program MARKSMANSHIP FUNDAMENTALS II Period 3 8 hours Instructional Intent Reinforce BRM and and the four fundamentals while demonstrating the integrated act of shooting on the EST or LMTS Observables Ensure that e All fundamentals are emphasized and applied on the EST or LMTS e Weapon safety is reinforced on the EST or LMTS Peer coaching is emphasized during EST or LMTS firing e Soldiers who fail to hit six out of nine shots at the 300 meter EST target receive remedial training Demonstrate the integrated act of firing while using the EST NOTE Soldiers who do not meet the standard will receive remedial training before continuing with subsequent instruction ENGAGEMENT SKILLS TRAINER 2000 4 76 The EST 2000 is a home station indoor multipurpose multilane
446. re clearly a target can be seen the closer it appears When the sun is behind the observer the target appears to be closer When the sun is behind the target the target is more difficult to see and appears to be farther away Elevation Knob Training 7 270 Elevation knob training involves nothing more than being able to adjust the rear elevation knob front sightpost on the M16A4 for the various ranges that the SDM must engage With this knowledge he can better determine his range settings for the different distances between the 100 meter adjustments 7 27 The rear elevation knob adjusts the point of aim e From 300 to 800 meters on the M16A2 e From 300 to 600 meters on the M16A4 and Conduct 7 272 During elevation knob training the Soldier determines the number of adjustments clicks between the different range settings on his rear elevation adjustment knob Tables 7 23 and 7 24 Once the Soldier understands how to set the proper point of aim for his target using his rear elevation knob the instructor trainer has him conduct another range estimation course This time the instructor trainer has him estimate the range and set the rear elevation for the range that he has estimated The Soldier must estimate range and set his rear elevation knob properly six out of six times to receive a GO If the Soldier receives a NO GO the trainer recommends retraining retesting or possible removal from the course 7 273 Once the Sold
447. re line As the projectile travels downrange air drag decreases the velocity giving way to the inevitable force of gravity This effect creates trajectory Line of Sight 5 109 The line of sight is an imaginary straight line extending from the firer s eye through the telescopic sight or rear and front sight to the target Line of Departure 5 110 The line of departure is an imaginary straight line extending from the center of the barrel to infinity Zero Range 5 111 Zero range is where the projectile intersects the line of sight It occurs twice once on the way up and once on the way down Apex 5 112 Otherwise known as midrange trajectory the apex is the point where the projectile is at its highest in relation to the line of sight Bullet Path 5 113 The bullet path is the relationship of a projectile and the line of sight at any given range normally expressed in inches WIND 5 114 External factors influence the trajectory relative to the point of aim such as wind altitude temperature humidity and barometric pressure Wind 1s by far the most significant Consider the following effects of wind e Because the bullet is moving through the air the air moves the bullet Wind deflection is always in the same direction the wind is moving A wind blowing from the left will move the bullet to the right e Deflection decreases as the angle of the wind to the line of flight decreases 5 115 Effectively reading and correcting for
448. reduced recoil occurs during firing immediately cease fire This could be the result of a round being fired without enough force to send the projectile out of the barrel Do not apply immediate action Instead perform the following actions 1 Lock the bolt to the rear Place the selector lever in the SAFE position 2 3 Remove the magazine 4 Visually inspect the bore to ensure that a projectile is not lodged in the barrel If a projectile is lodged in the barrel do not try to remove it Turn the rifle in to the unit armorer 3 4 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Troubleshooting and Destruction FAILURE TO EXTRACT 3 15 A failure to extract results when the cartridge case remains in the chamber of the rifle The bolt and bolt carrier might move rearward only a short distance but more commonly the bolt and bolt carrier recoil fully to the rear leaving the cartridge case in the chamber A live round is then forced into the base of the cartridge case as the bolt returns in the next feed cycle WARNING A failure to extract is an extremely serious malfunction requiring the use of tools to clear A live round could be left in the chamber and accidentally discharged If a second live round is fed into the primer of the chambered live round the rifle could explode and cause personal injury This malfunction must be properly identified and reported Ejection failures should not be reported as extraction failures Prob
449. retain zero The locking clamp 1 Figure 2 19 must grasp the ARS and the screw that tightens the rail grabber must be tightened with a field tool such as a multipurpose tool 2 Even if the rail grabber is resting entirely on the ARS accessories should not make contact with the front sight assembly or the collar of the barrel The vibrations that occur during firing will interfere with the rail grabber s and accessory s zero retention capabilities MILES Training Extender for the Insight Rail Grabber 2 26 The training extender Figure 2 20 1s used to elevate an accessory above the MILES laser during force on force training The training extender is only used when the Insight rail grabber is top mounted 2 14 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Weapon Characteristics Accessories and Ammunition 2 27 To install the extender and accessories NOTE Reference the weapon components using the numbers listed in Figure 2 20 Figure 2 20 Insight rail grabber MILES training extender 1 Use the thumbscrew 1 to hand tighten the extender into the mounting hole closest to the muzzle on the Insight rail grabber 2 Install the accessory on top of the extender and tighten NOTE The AN PEQ 2A B and AN PAQ 4B C must be zeroed before and after using the MILES training extender PICATINNY RAIL GRABBER 2 28 The Picatinny rail grabber Figure 2 21 must fully rest on the ARS in order to retain zero The locking clamp must grasp the ARS and
450. rformance 5 5 5 5 illus over 4 to 5 centimeter shot groups 5 6 5 6 illus shot groups larger than 5 centimeters 5 7 5 7 illus squad designated marksman training 7 57 to 7 70 mission 7 58 selection 7 58 skills progression 7 58 to 7 70 certification 7 70 conduct 7 58 Phase I Position Evaluation see also position 7 58 to 7 61 Phase II Dry Fire Training see also dry fire training 7 61 to 7 63 Phase III Range Estimation and Sight Manipulation 100 to 500 Meters see also range determination 7 63 to 7 66 FM 3 22 9 Phase IV Hold Off 100 to 500 Meters see also hold Off 7 66 to 7 69 Phase V Field Fire 100 to 500 Meters see also field fire 7 69 to 7 70 qualification 7 58 stoppages see also troubleshooting and destruction 3 1 to 3 2 immediate action 3 1 remedial action 3 1 to 3 2 suppressive fire see also combat fire techniques 7 16 to 7 19 effectiveness and control 7 16 modifications 7 16 to 7 17 training 7 17 to 7 19 7 18 table 7 18 illus 7 19 table sustainment training see also marksmanship training strategy and training 1 2 to 1 5 1 3 illus Active Army home station marksmanship training strategy 14 illus Army Reserve home station marksmanship training strategy 1 5 illus deployed unit marksmanship training strategy 1 5 illus National Guard home station marksmanship training strategy 14 illus T target detection see also Field
451. rget NOTES 1 See Chapter 5 for more information about downrange feedback 2 See paragraphs 4 76 through 4 80 and Appendix A for more information about EST 2000 and LMTS training PHASE ITI BASIC RIFLE MARKSMANSHIP FIELD FIRING 1 24 Field fire begins a critical transition from unstressed firing at single targets at known distances to requiring the Soldier to refine techniques for scanning the range for targets estimating range and firing quickly and accurately Phase III includes the following e Field Fire I single timed targets at 75 meters 175 meters and 300 meters Field Fire II single and multiple targets at 75 meters 175 meters and 300 meters Practice Record Fire Practice Record Fire II Record Fire 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 1 7 Chapter 1 NOTES 1 See Chapter 6 for more information about BRM field fire 2 See paragraphs 4 76 through 4 80 and Appendix A for more information about EST 2000 and LMTS training PHASE IV ADVANCED RIFLE MARKSMANSHIP 1 25 ARM focuses on the techniques and procedures that the Soldier will need to participate in collective training This phase addresses the following topics e Alternate firing positions Burst fire Quick fire Chemical biological radiological and nuclear CBRN fire Moving targets SDM Unassisted night record fire M68 close combat optic CCO Advanced combat optical gunsight AN PAQ 4C infrared IR aiming laser Assisted nig
452. rget and weapon do not move during the boresighting procedure Borelight is centered on the circle on the target Aiming device is aiming at the center of the crosshair on the offset CONCEPT 8 1 Boresighting is a simple procedure that saves time and ammunition The visible laser of the borelight is aligned with the barrel of a designated weapon Then using a 10 meter boresighting target the weapon can be boresighted with any optic laser or iron sight that the Soldier 1s assigned to fire ZEROING THE BORELIGHT WARNINGS Before using the borelight ensure that the weapon is clear and on SAFE and that the bolt is locked in the forward position When rotating the borelight to zero it ensure that the mandrel is turning counterclockwise from the firer s point of view to avoid loosening the borelight from the mandrel DANGERS DO NOT STARE INTO THE VISIBLE LASER BEAM DO NOT LOOK INTO THE VISIBLE LASER BEAM THROUGH BINOCULARS OR TELESCOPES DO NOT POINT THE VISIBLE LASER BEAM AT MIRROR LIKE SURFACES DO NOT SHINE THE VISIBLE LASER BEAM INTO OTHER INDIVIDUALS EYES 8 2 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Advanced Optics Lasers and Iron Sights 8 2 Before boresighting the weapon system the borelight must first be zeroed to the weapon To zero the borelight to the weapon 1 Stabilize the weapon by placing it in a rifle box rest or by laying two rucksacks side by side and placing another rucksack on top of the weapon
453. ries Table 2 6 Accessory compatibility and mounting ACCESSORY M4 MWS M16A4 M68 Upper receiver ANIPVS 14 Upper receiver 4 Rail grabber 2 Rail grabber ANIPAQ 4 Rail grabber AN PAS 13B V1 LWTS Upper receiver AN PAS 13B V3 HWTS Upper receiver AN PAS 13C V1 LWTS Upper receiver AN PAS 13C V3 HWTS Upper receiver Upper receiver Upper receiver Upper receiver puis ACOG Upper receiver With a half moon spacer installed Picatinny or Insight rail grabbers may be used If used in conjunction with the CCO the CCO will mount on the top rail of the ARS Table 2 7 Characteristics of various accessories _ 4____ __ ___ 14802 45in X 25 in Jj HWTS 4 5 Ib 1 600 m AN PVS 4 3 8 Ib ACOG Actual range is dependent upon ambient light NVGs and background contrast 2 16 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Weapon Characteristics Accessories and Ammunition M68 CLOSE COMBAT OPTIC 2 30 The M68 CCO Figure 2 22 is a reflex nontelescopic sight that is designed for the two eyes open method of sighting but can be shot with only one eye open The red dot aiming point follows the horizontal and vertical movement of the firer s eye while remaining fixed on the target NOTES 1 Retighten the torque limiting knob after firing the first three rounds to fully seat the M68 2 Nocentering or focusing i
454. right handed firer SECTION MARKSMANSHIP FUNDAMENTALS This training program Table 4 2 reinforces BRM and trains the four fundamentals to standard through dry firing and simulation circuit training It also teaches and reinforces range and safety procedures Table 4 2 Marksmanship Fundamentals training program MARKSMANSHIP FUNDAMENTALS Period 2 8 hours Instructional Intent Reinforce BRM and train the four fundamentals to standard with hands on training simulation and dry firing during circuit training with an M16 M4 series weapon Teach and reinforce range and safety procedures Observables Ensure that All equipment helmet IBA is fitted properly to maximize training IAW the local SOP Live fire range procedures are replicated and enforced IAW the local SOP The four fundamentals are being integrated into all exercises IAW this manual All dry firing is well aimed using 25 meter zeroing targets EST and LMTS Peer coaching is being emphasized IAW this manual The four fundamentals IAW with this manual Dominant eye training IAW with this manual Basic firing positions IAW with this manual Range and safety procedures IAW with the local SOP Demonstrate the integrated act of shooting during dry fire exercises utilizing simulators and training devices IAW this manual 4 14 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Preliminary Marksmanship Instruction NOTES 1 Simulators and training devices are li
455. ring positions Build the Soldier s confidence in his ability to hit where he aims while applying the effects of wind and gravity at range Special Instructions Ensure that The effects of wind and gravity are thoroughly explained The rear sight is on the proper setting M16A2 3 8 3 M16A4 and M4 6 3 flush M16A1 the unmarked aperture short range The rear sight aperture is set on 300 not 800 Observables e Spotters provide correct feedback to firers Soldiers hit 8 of 10 targets at 100 meters Soldiers hit 14 of 20 targets at 200 meters Soldiers hit 5 of 10 targets at 300 meters 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 5 19 Chapter 5 CONCEPT 5 49 A KD range has three primary objectives 1 Fire tight shot groups at a known distance 2 Make sight adjustments at range not an objective for IET Soldiers while experiencing the effects of wind and gravity 3 Participate in marksmanship testing 5 50 KD firing brings the Soldier one step closer to being able to fire during combat The Soldier 1s provided information concerning the precise hit or miss location of every bullet fired KD firing is conducted with a single clearly visible target at a known distance and the Soldier can establish a position that provides a natural point of aim on that single target Consider the following On the standard KD range Soldiers fire at 100 200 and 300 meter targets without any time constraints On the KD re
456. rise from any number of areas They can be associated with enemy activity accident potential weather or environmental conditions health sanitation behavior and or materiel or equipment Mission enemy terrain and weather troops and support available time available civil considerations METT TC factors serve as a standard format for identifying hazards on or off duty D 17 CRM does not differentiate between the sources of the hazard The loss of personnel equipment or materiel due to any hazard has the same disruptive impact on readiness or mission capabilities no matter what the source STEP 2 ASSESS HAZARDS TO DETERMINE RISK D 18 During mission analysis course of action COA development or analysis rehearsal and execution steps of the military decision making process MDMP commanders assess hazards and assign risk in terms of probability and severity of adverse impact During their assessment they must consider both mission and non mission related aspects that may have an impact The end result of this assessment is an initial estimate of risk for each identified hazard as determined from the standardized application of the risk assessment matrix D 19 There are three substeps in this step 1 Assess the probability of an event or occurrence 2 Estimate the expected result or severity of an event or occurrence 3 Determine the level of risk using the standard risk assessment matrix Assess the Probability of an E
457. rom the prone unsupported firing position PRACTICE QUALIFICATION 8 107 The procedures for practice qualification include the following e Conduct a dry fire exercise e Use coaches e Fire 40 rounds 20 rounds from the prone supported firing position m lOrounds from the unsupported firing position lOrounds from the kneeling firing position Engage targets from 50 to 250 meters Meet the standards 17 hits out of 40 target exposures RECORD QUALIFICATION 8 108 The procedures for record qualification include the following e Conducta dry fire exercise e Fire 40 rounds 20rounds from the prone supported firing position lOrounds from the unsupported firing position m lOrounds from the kneeling firing position Engage targets from 50 to 250 meters Meet the standards 17 hits out of 40 target exposures 8 30 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Appendix A Training Aids Devices and Exercises Training aids and devices must be included in a marksmanship program This appendix lists those available and provides information on how to obtain them for marksmanship training SECTION I ENGAGEMENT SKILLS TRAINER 2000 The EST 2000 Figure A 1 supports realistic and comprehensive gated rifle marksmanship instruction identifies Soldiers needs by requiring them to satisfy gate requirements in order to progress and facilitates any necessary remedial training prior to qualification This unit institutional indoor multipurpos
458. ron Sights 7 Turn the borelight off 8 Move the reticle off of the circular crosshair and then realign on the target 9 Turn the borelight laser back on 9 If the borelight is in the circle then the AN PVS 4 is boresighted 10 Turn the laser off and carefully remove the borelight and mandrel from the weapon so that the borelight device is not damaged SECTION Il TRAINING STRATEGIES AND QUALIFICATION STANDARDS Before beginning a night marksmanship program Soldiers must qualify on their assigned weapons during the day as outlined in the previous chapters of this manual Commanders should follow these training strategies and abide by the qualification standards set forth Although some courses of fire may seem redundant or inappropriate numerous tests show that these training strategies work and the qualification standards are achievable if the strategies are followed BACKUP IRON SIGHT 8 10 The BUIS is a semipermanent flip up sight equipped with a rail grabbing base The BUIS provides a backup capability effective out to at least 600 meters and can be installed on M16A4 rifles and M4 carbines NOTE See Table 8 3 for the current training program Table 8 3 Backup iron sights training program BACKUP IRON SIGHTS Instructional Intent e Soldiers zero and qualify with the BUIS Special Instructions Ensure that Soldiers e Apply the marksmanship fundamentals e Place the BUIS in the full vertical position
459. roup Figures 5 2 and 5 3 NOTE If the shot group is off of the 25 meter zeroing target the Soldier should mechanically zero the weapon If the shot group is barely on the target the Soldier should make a bold adjustment 3 The Soldier returns to the firing line and fires a second three round shot group 4 The firing line 15 cleared and the Soldier moves downrange to examine the second shot group triangulate and mark the center of the shot group with the number 2 5 The Soldier groups the two shot groups and marks the center 5 6 The Soldier repeats Steps 1 through 5 until he places six out of six consecutive rounds inside a 4 centimeter circle If the Soldier has not grouped in 18 rounds he should be removed from the firing line and given remedial training before attempting to group again NOTE To be counted the majority of the round must be inside of the circle 5 7 Once the Soldier has demonstrated firing proficiency from the supported firing position grouping exercises can be conducted from the unsupported firing position For example 27 rounds are allocated for the grouping exercise IET only If the Soldier groups in 18 rounds he can fire the remaining 9 rounds from the unsupported firing position SHOT GROUP MARKING 5 8 If the Soldier is to benefit from this exercise and if the instructor trainer or coach is to provide useful guidance the Soldier must mark each shot group for a clear record of his firing pra
460. s one of these points will be the Soldier s own position The other may be a target or prominent feature 6 25 To accomplish the mission combat riflemen must be able to accurately determine range Not only does this affect his combat marksmanship proficiency it is also required to report information and adjust artillery and mortar fire 6 26 The methods of range estimation used during this period are e 100 meter unit of measure method e Appearance of objects method e Front sightpost method 100 METER UNiT OF MEASURE METHOD 6 27 To perform this method the Soldier must be able to visualize a distance of 100 meters on the ground e For ranges up to 500 meters he determines the number of 100 meter increments between the two points e Beyond 500 meters the Soldier selects a point halfway to the target determines the number of 100 meter increments to the halfway point and then doubles it to find the range to the target 6 28 During training exercises the Soldier must become familiar with the effect that sloping ground has on the appearance of a 100 meter increment e Ground that slopes upward gives the illusion of greater distance and observers tend to underestimate a 100 meter increment e Ground that slopes downward gives the illusion of shorter distance and observers tend to overestimate a 100 meter increment 6 29 Proficiency in the 100 meter unit of measure method requires constant practice While training this technique
461. s Normally used in competitive marksmanship training buttplate Metal or rubber covering of the end of the stock on the rifle cadre coach A trainer with expertise and knowledge exceeding that of the firer caliber Diameter of the bore for example the M16 series rifle bore is 5 56mm 223 inch cartridge A complete round of ammunition center of mass A point that is horizontally left and right and vertically up and down at the center of the target chambering The step in the cycle of operation that refers too fully seating the round in the chamber of the rifle chamber plug A range safety device that is a small plastic plug designed to fit into the chamber of the M16 A handle extends out the ejection port so safety personnel can see at a glance that the rifle is clear of ammunition Glossary 4 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Glossary clock method Method of calling shots by referring to the figures on an ordinary clock dial assumed to have the target at its center Also a method of determining the strength and direction of wind coach Any individual who assists firers on the firing line coach and pupil method Method of training in which pairs of pupils take turns practicing a procedure explained by the instructor trainer cocking The step in the cycle of operation that refers to the rearward movement of the bolt riding over the hammer resetting the weapon for subsequent firing collective firing proficiency Units deliver
462. s equate to the 4 centimeter zeroing target at 25 meters If the Soldier s shot group falls within the 4 centimeter circle at 25 meters it will fall within the circle on the target being shot If the round falls outside of the circle the round will clearly miss the 300 meter target Figure 5 20 An X 1s located in the bottom portion of the circle to show the firer the target s center of mass where he must aim when his weapon 1s zeroed The grid system on the targets in Figure 5 20 equates to that of the 25 meter zeroing target For example one click on the front sightpost equals one square on the 25 meter zeroing target and also equals one square on the target being shot Information similar to that on the zeroing target has been overprinted to help Soldiers apply sight adjustments FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Downrange Feedback TI FEEDACH TARZET 100 METER FEEDBACK TARGET 200 METER FEEDBACK TARGET 300 METER FEEDBACK TARGET NSN 6920 01 243 4006 NSN 6920 01 243 4008 NSN 6920 01 243 4007 Figure 5 20 Downrange feedback targets MARKING KNOWN DISTANCE RANGE TARGETS 5 52 When the initial shot group is fired target spotters markers Figure 5 21 should be placed in each bullet hole placing the white side on the silhouette and the black side off of the silhouette This procedure ensures that the firer can see where the rounds impacted and has two benefits e Instructors trainers can observe the firer s performan
463. s for assembling the Weaponeer and a small hex head wrench for aligning the rifle sensor A remote control which attaches to the back of the console enables a trainer or firer to operate select functions away from the console Feedback A 72 The Weaponeer provides feedback to help trainers to teach and Soldiers to learn marksmanship skills The tools used for feedback include e Fall when hit mode Real time aiming point display Immediate shot impact display Replay Shot groups Printer Fall When Hit Mode A 73 Lighting the KILL button enables the fall when hit mode When the button is activated targets fall when hit This feedback provides the same hit or miss information as a train fire RETS range Real Time Aiming Point Display A 74 When a firer aims on or near a target his aiming point relative to the target 15 continuously displayed on the video screen The aiming point display allows the trainer to teach and verify aiming techniques and to continuously monitor the firer s steadiness techniques time on target trigger squeeze and recovery from recoil Immediate Shot Impact Display A 75 When a shot is fired its impact relative to the target is immediately displayed on the video screen as a blinking white dot Figure A 11 left target 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 A 21 Appendix A Replay A 76 After a shot 15 fired a real rate display of how the firer engaged the target can be replayed on the video scr
464. s for conducting the exercise to include the duties of the nonfiring orders PERSONNEL AND DUTIES D 2 To provide a safe and efficient range operation and effective instruction certain duties may be required of personnel The personnel may include OIC RSO NCOIC Ammunition detail Unit armorer Assistant instructor Medical personnel Control tower operators Maintenance detail OFFICER IN CHARGE D 3 The OIC is responsible for the overall operation of the range before during and after live firing RANGE SAFETY OFFICER D 4 The RSO e Is responsible for the safe operation of the range e Conducts a safety orientation before each scheduled LFX e Ensures that a brass and ammunition check is made before the unit leaves the range e Ensures that all personnel comply with the safety regulations and procedures prescribed for the conduct of an LFX e Ensures that all left handed firers use left handed firing devices NOTE This officer should not be assigned duties other than those of the safety officer 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 E 1 Appendix E NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICER IN CHARGE D 5 The NCOIC assists the OIC and safety officer by performing duties as required for example he might supervise enlisted personnel who are supporting the LFX AMMUNITION DETAIL D 6 This detail is composed of one or more ammunition handlers The ammunition detail e Breaks down issues receives accounts for and safeguards live
465. s immediately before scheduled training exercises Distribute small arms ammunition to troops only when they are on the ready line or firing line Cover all ammunition to protect it from the elements and direct rays of the sun For proper ventilation provide air circulation between the ammunition and cover Limit the unpacking of ammunition at the firing line to the minimum number of rounds needed Retain packaging material until firing is complete Units do not burn wooden containers or indiscriminately fire ammunition to preclude return to a storage site COMPOSITE RISK MANAGEMENT D 14 Composite risk management CRM is a decision making process used to mitigate risks associated with all hazards that have the potential to injure or kill personnel damage or destroy equipment or otherwise impact mission effectiveness The guiding principles of CRM are as follows Integrate CRM into all phases of the mission and operations Make risk decisions at the appropriate level Accept no unnecessary risk Apply the process cyclically and continuously Do not be risk averse D 15 CRM is a five step process 1 Identify hazards 2 Assess hazards to determine risk 3 Develop controls and make risk decisions 4 Implement controls 5 Supervise and evaluate NOTE Steps 1 and 2 are assessment steps Steps 3 through 5 are management steps 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 D 3 Appendix D STEP I IDENTIFY HAZARDS D 16 Hazards may a
466. s knob An auto and manual contrast switch A polarity switch 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 C 7 Appendix C Diopter Focus Ring C 38 When making adjustments to the sight Soldiers begin with the diopter focus ring The diopter focus ring focuses the display screen raster to the eye To adjust the diopter focus ring adjust the diopter focus ring until everything on the display screen is clear and easily read NOTE This is best done with the objective lens cover closed C 39 Once you have adjusted the diopter focus to your eye no other adjustments to the diopter focus ring should be necessary Fields of View C 40 The TWS has two operating FOVs wide and narrow The Soldier should be allowed to select the FOV that suits him best Through use Soldiers learn to use the appropriate FOV under different combat situations NOTE When selecting an FOV make sure that the FOV ring is turned completely to the left or to the right If the FOV ring 15 turned only halfway you will not be able to see through the sight Wide Field of View C 41 The WFOV has the least magnification but a greater FOV and 1s great for scanning Narrow Field of View C 42 The NFOV has greater magnification but less degrees of FOV Objective Focus Ring C 43 The objective focus ring focuses the sight to the target Adjustments to the objective focus ring are based on the range of the object being viewed NOTES 1 Over adjustment to the objective focus
467. s required beyond 50 meters Figure 2 22 M68 close combat optic MOUNTING ON THE M16A4 RIFLE OR M4 SERIES CARBINE 2 3 The M68 mounts directly on the integrated rail on top of M16A4 rifles and M4 series carbines Figure 2 23 The half moon spacer 1 Figure 23 must be installed to raise the M68 above the front sightpost The Soldier s preference dictates the notch that the M68 is mounted on Although any notch 15 acceptable testing has shown that the farther away the M68 is from the Soldier s eyes the better his field of view 2 32 To mount the M68 on an M16A4 rifle or M4 series carbine Figure 2 23 Figure 2 23 Mounting the M68 on an M16A4 rifle or M4 series carbine 1 Remove the carrying handle 2 Align the locking bar with a notch 3 Tighten the torque limiting knob until it clicks twice NOTE If the M68 is remounted on the same notch it will retain zero 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 2 17 Chapter 2 MOUNTING ON THE MI6A1 A2 A3 RIFLE 2 33 The M68 mounts on the M16A1 mounting bracket 1 Figure 2 24 that attaches to the carrying handle on the M16A1 A2 A3 rifle The half moon spacer should not be installed but will not hinder firing performance 2 34 To mount the M68 on an M16A1 A2 A3 rifle NOTE Reference the weapon components using the numbers listed in Figure 2 24 Figure 2 24 Mounting the M68 on an M16A1 A2 A3 rifle 1 Firmly hand tighten the bracket 1 O ring 2 and machine screw
468. s to the fundamentals and other basic combat skills necessary during rapid semiautomatic firing NOTE See Table 7 1 for the current training program 7 10 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Advanced Rifle Marksmanship Table 7 1 Rapid semiautomatic fire training program RAPID SEMIAUTOMATIC FIRE TRAINING PROGRAM Instructional Intent Soldiers learn to engage targets using rapid semiautomatic fire and practice rapid magazine changes Special Instructions Ensure that The M16A2 A3 A4 rifle s or M4 carbine s rear sight is set on the 0 2 aperture The M16A1 s rear sight is set on the unmarked aperture Soldiers use a 25 meter alternate course C qualification target Each Soldier is given four 5 round magazines of 5 56 millimeter ball ammunition Soldiers use rapid semiautomatic fire to engage targets Each Soldier fires one round at each of the 10 silhouettes on the alternate course C qualification target Each Soldier does a rapid magazine change after each magazine is fired The first iteration of 10 rounds is fired within a time limit of 40 seconds The second iteration of 10 rounds is fired within a time limit of 30 seconds Each target is inspected and the results are posted after each iteration Observables Coaches continuously analyze the firer s application of the fundamentals Each Soldier obtains 14 hits out of 20 silhouette target exposures Conduct 7 25 Each Soldier receives four 5 round magazines of 5 56 milli
469. se 4 Align the thumbscrew 5 on the AN PEQ 2A B with the hole that is closest to the front sight assembly located on the top of the rail grabber 2 47 The mounting procedures are identical for the M16A4 rifle and M4 MWS NOTE If the aiming light and rail grabber are removed as a whole unit and mounted onto the same rail the system will retain zero If the rail grabber and AN PEQ 2A B are separated the AN PEQ 2A B must be rezeroed to the weapon MOUNTING ON THE M16A1 A2 A3 RIFLE OR CARBINE 2 48 To mount the AN PEQ 2A B on an M16A1 A2 A3 rifle or carbine NOTE Reference the weapon components using the numbers listed in Figure 2 31 Figure 2 31 Mounting the AN PEQ 2A B on M16A1 A2 A3 rifles and M4 carbines 1 Install the bracket assembly 1 2 Align the AN PEQ 2A B 2 thumbscrew 3 with the hole in the mounting rail 4 nearest to the muzzle 3 Tool tighten 2 49 The remote switch should be attached to the weapon where it will not interfere with the functioning of the weapon or hinder the firer s ability to fire the weapon NOTE To ensure zero retention retighten the rail grabber and thumbscrew after firing a few rounds 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 2 23 Chapter 2 USE IN CONJUNCTION WITH MILES 2 50 When conducting MILES training with the Insight rail grabber 1 Figure 2 32 or bracket assembly 4 Figure 2 32 the AN PEQ 2A B 15 attached to the M16 M4 series weapon using the training exten
470. se modifications e Scan potential target areas and when a target is detected engage it using a modified quick fire position Take a few seconds to improve weapon target alignment by pointing slightly low to compensate for the usual tendency to fire high Figure 7 14 e Apply the three principles of night vision a Dark adaptation mw Off center vision Scanning 7 128 Tracer ammunition may provide feedback on the line of trajectory and facilitate any adjustments in the weapon target alignment Figure 7 14 Lower weapon target alignment 7 32 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Advanced Rifle Marksmanship Dark Adaptation 7 129 This process conditions the eyes to see under low levels of illumination The eyes of the average person take about 30 minutes to acquire 98 percent night vision in a completely darkened area Moving from illuminated to darker areas will decrease night vision until the eyes have adjusted to the surrounding area again Off Center Vision 7 130 When an individual looks at an object during the daytime he looks directly at it However if he did this at night he would only see the object for a few seconds To see this object for any length of time he must look 6 to 10 degrees from this object Figures 7 15 and 7 16 while concentrating his attention on the object This allows the light sensitive area of the eye to detect faint light sources or reflection Line of sight 7 7 Figure 7 15 Da
471. se IV Shotgun and Automatic or Burst Firing Familiarization 7 57 Section VII Squad Designated Marksman Training 7 57 Mission of the Squad Designated Marksman 7 58 ET 7 58 Squad Designated Marksman Skills 7 58 ADVANCED OPTICS LASERS AND IRON SIGHTS 8 1 Section Borelighit e 8 1 Sene 8 2 Zonge 8 2 LE 8 6 Section Training Strategies and Qualification Standards 8 11 Backup ONM SIG ie 8 11 M68 Close Combat ODIIG dide doeet ciae etate xoi 8 12 Advanced Combat Optical 8 16 AN PAS 13B C D V1 Light Weapon Thermal Sight and AN PAS 13B C D Heavy Weapon Thermal 8 20 AN PAQ 4B C and AN PEQ 2A B Infrared Aiming Lasers 8 23 AN PVS 4 Night Vision Device nennen 8 28 TRAINING AIDS DEVICES AND EXERCISES eere A 1 Section Engagement Skills Trainer 2000 A 1 Sect
472. second generation NODs and 20 40 vision with third generation NODs To approach these levels of acuity you must be able to adjust your NOD for optimal clarity C 21 To adjust the NOD 1 Mount the NOD Mount the head mount or helmet mount IAW the appropriate TM If using the helmet mount ensure that the tilt is adjusted until you have a comfortable viewing angle Use the nape strap to maintain proper acuity with the NODs NOTE If the mounting bracket is permanently attached to the helmet ensure that the nape strap rear bracket is also permanently attached See TM 11 5855 306 10 for more information about attaching the nape strap rear bracket Use of the nape strap will prevent the NOD s weight from pulling the helmet downward causing the NOD to rest on the bridge of your nose The nape strap allows for proper acuity of the sight and allows you to engage targets with more ease and accuracy 2 Set the eye relief Move the goggles so that the eyecups cover the eye but not so close that the eyepiece touches your eyelashes or glasses 3 Turn the goggles on 4 Set the inner pupillary distance AN PVS 7 series Move each eyepiece until they are centered over each eye Close one eye and make adjustments until the eye that is open is viewing a complete circle and not an oval Continue to make adjustments to the other eye 5 Adjust the diopter focus ring Close one eye and with the eye that is open turn the diopter focus ring in
473. ship Marksmanship Fundamentals 7 59 As the stress of combat increases some Soldiers may fail to apply the fundamentals of marksmanship This factor contributes to reduced accuracy and effectiveness While some modifications are appropriate the basic fundamentals should be applied and emphasized regardless of the rate of fire or combat stress Strategies to enhance marksmanship skills under combat stress include shooting in the prone position as opposed to standing 7 60 Factors that contribute to combat stress are e Environmental e Operational Environmental 7 61 Environmental stressors have been shown to degrade marksmanship accuracy up to 20 percent Such stressors include e Heat e Altitude Operational 7 62 Operational stressors have been shown to degrade marksmanship accuracy from 17 percent to 136 percent Such stressors include e gear e Tasks that require carrying rucksacks litter patients and other equipment on the body e Sleep deprivation Rapid Magazine Changes 7 63 One of the keys to sustained suppressive fire is reloading the weapon rapidly Rapid magazine changes must be correctly taught and practiced during dry fire and live fire exercises until the Soldier becomes proficient Small unit training exercises must be conducted so Soldiers who provide suppressive fire practice staggered magazine changes Ammunition Conservation 7 64 Automatic or burst fire should be used sparingly and
474. ship tasks under realistic combat conditions FUNDAMENTALS 1 72 During training the fundamentals must apply to combat as well as to the range Too often Soldiers disregard the fundamentals while under the pressure of combat so it is imperative that the Soldier receives feedback regarding his firing results and his use of the fundamentals during collective LFXs This training should also discuss target acquisition area fire quick fire assuming firing positions responding to oral fire commands and safety To learn SOPs and proper procedures Soldiers must participate in dry fire or MILES rehearsals at crawl walk and run paces EVALUATORS 1 73 During training enough evaluators must be present to observe each Soldier and provide performance feedback Evaluators must know the scenario the location of targets the friendly plan and SOPs They must watch each Soldier to determine if he identifies targets in his sector and successfully engages them Evaluators must also understand the fundamentals of marksmanship to detect Soldiers mistakes and review them during the after action review AAR 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 1 17 This page intentionally left blank Chapter 2 Weapon Characteristics Accessories and Ammunition This chapter describes the general components characteristics accessories and ammunition for M16 and M4 series weapons and includes a brief explanation of how to mount the various accessories SECTION
475. shot to miss the target e The precise instant of firing should be a surprise to the Soldier If a Soldier knows the exact instant that the rifle will fire the Soldier will naturally compensate for the weapon s noise and recoil causing him to miss the target Soldiers usually tense their shoulders when expecting the rifle to fire it is difficult to detect since the Soldier does not realize that he is flinching Trigger Finger 4 58 The Soldier places his trigger finger index finger on the firing hand on the trigger between the first joint and the tip of the finger not the very end of the finger and adjusts depending on his hand size and grip The trigger finger must squeeze the trigger to the rear so the hammer falls without disturbing the lay of the rifle 4 59 When a live round is fired it 1s difficult to see the effect that the trigger pull had on the lay of the rifle It is important to experiment with many finger positions during dry fire training to ensure that the hammer 15 falling with little disturbance to the aiming process Trigger Squeeze Time 4 60 The proper trigger squeeze should start with slight pressure on the trigger during the initial aiming process The firer applies more pressure after the front sightpost is steady on the target and he 1s holding his breath 4 61 As the firer s skills increase with practice he needs less time spent on trigger squeeze A novice firer can take five seconds to perform an adequate
476. shoulder as the cheek comes in contact with the stock 2 Firmly grip the weapon with both hands applying rearward pressure 3 Place the firing eye so that it looks through or just over the rear sight aperture 4 Place the sight on the target Pointed 7 84 Consider the following modifications e Pull the weapon into the side e Firmly grip the weapon with both hands applying rearward pressure Aiming 7 85 This fundamental must be highly modified because the Soldier may not have time to look through the rear sight find the front sight and align it with the target NOTE When using either aiming technique bullets may tend to impact above the desired location Repeated live fire practice is necessary to determine the best point of aim or the best focus Such practice should begin with the Soldier using a center of mass aim 7 22 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Advanced Rifle Marksmanship Aimed 7 86 Consider the following modified procedure 1 Initially focus on the target 2 Place the firing eye so that it looks at the target through or just over the rear sight aperture 3 Using peripheral vision locate the front sightpost and bring it to the center of the target NOTE Focus remains on the front sightpost throughout the aiming process 4 When the front sightpost 15 in focus fire a controlled pair Pointed 7 87 Consider the following modifications e Place the focus on or slightly below the center of the
477. sideration 1 44 Most Soldiers even those who do not fire well enjoy firing and begin their training with great enthusiasm A cadre trainer who is considerate of Soldiers feelings and who encourages them throughout their training will find training a pleasant and rewarding duty Respect 1 45 An experienced cadre 15 assigned the duties of instructor trainer which classifies him as a technical expert and authority A good cadre trainer watches for mistakes and patiently makes needed corrections Encouragement 1 46 A cadre trainer can encourage Soldiers by convincing them to achieve good firing performance through practice He imparts his knowledge and helps Soldiers gain the practical experience necessary TRAINING THE TRAINER 1 47 Knowledgeable small unit leaders are key to marksmanship training This manual and other training publications provide the unit instructor with the required information for developing a good train the trainer program 1 48 The goal of a progressive train the trainer program is to achieve a high state of combat readiness Through the active and aggressive leadership of the chain of command a perpetual base of expertise is established and maintained 1 49 The commander should identify unit personnel who have had assignments as marksmanship instructors These individuals should be used to train other unit cadre by conducting PMI and LFXs for their Soldiers 1 12 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Marksmanship
478. sights WARNING In Positions 4 and above the red dot is visible through the front of the sight For night vision operations Close the front lens cover before turning the rotary switch clockwise to Positions 2 and 3 Check the light for proper intensity before opening the front lens cover Close the front lens cover before turning the rotary switch counterclockwise to the OFF position Failure to follow this warning could reveal your position to the enemy PRACTICE QUALIFICATION 8 33 The procedures are the same as standard iron sight procedures RECORD QUALIFICATION 8 34 The procedures are the same as standard iron sight procedures ADVANCED COMBAT OPTICAL GUNSIGHT 8 35 The ACOG scope is designed to provide enhanced target identification and hit probability for the M16 M4 series weapons out to 800 meters It is designed with dual illuminated technology using fiber optics for daytime illumination and tritium for night and low light use The ACOG scope is a lightweight rugged fast and accurate 3 5 power optic scope It is internally adjustable to allow the shock of rough handling to be carried by the scope body and not the adjustment mechanism NOTE See Table 8 5 for the current training program 8 16 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Advanced Optics Lasers and Iron Sights Table 8 5 Advanced combat optical gunsight training program ADVANCED COMBAT OPTICAL GUNSIGHT Instructional Intent e Soldiers qualify with
479. silhouettes on the plastic paddle Figure A 17 are scaled to represent an E type silhouette target at 250 meters The visual perception during the target box exercise is similar to what a Soldier sees while zeroing on a standard zeroing target The small E type silhouette is the same scale at 15 yards as the larger silhouette 15 at the 25 meter range some training areas are set up at 15 yards others are set up at 25 meters While there are some benefits to representing a 250 meter target the main benefit of this exercise can be obtained at any distance In place of the paddle a standard zeroing target can be used at 25 meters by placing a small hole in the center dot moving the target sheet over the paper and marking as previously outlined A 26 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Training Aids Devices and Exercises DVC T 7 86 313M 51 Q3 WIS This end is 13931 YILIW OSZ used as an option for indoor exercise 250 METER TARGET SCALED FOR 25 METERS Figure A 17 Target box paddle DVC T 7 86 A 90 The shot group exercise provides a chance for the trainer to critique the Soldier on his aiming procedures aiming consistency and placement of shot groups Assuming the rifle and paper remain stationary and the target man properly marks the three shots the only factor to cause separation of the dots on the paper is error in the Soldier s aiming procedure When the Soldier can consistently direct the target into alignment with
480. sily using the adapter that comes from the factory Figure 2 44 To attach the ACOG to the flattop with the adapter Figure 2 44 Mounting the ACOG on M16A4 rifle and M4 carbine 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 2 31 Chapter 2 1 Loosen the thumb screws 2 Pull the interface clamp bar back against the knobs 3 Place the ACOG onto the flattop upper receiver rail surface Be sure to engage the interface studs on the bottom of the adapter with the grooves on the top mounting surface of the upper receiver NOTE 1 The can be placed in any of the slots on top of the weapon to allow for eye relief adjustments 2 Toretain zero place the ACOG into the same slots during each installation 4 Using a finger tighten the knobs firmly 5 Add another 1 4 of a turn using a coin or a blade screwdriver NOTE The slots on the knobs are only for removing the ACOG from the weapon if the knobs have been attached too tightly for hand removal If the slots are used to tighten the knobs the ACOG will be difficult to remove MOUNTING ON THE M16A1 A2 A3 RIFLE 2 70 Although the ACOG 1s designed for use on the flattop rail of M16A4 rifles and M4 carbines it can be attached to the carrying handle Figure 2 45 To attach the ACOG to the carrying handle 2 32 Figure 2 45 Mounting the on an M16A1 A2 A3 rifle 1 Align the forward most threaded mounting hole on the bottom of the ACOG with the existing hole
481. sition and correct any gross errors 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 A 23 Appendix A 3 4 5 6 7 Observe the video screen If there is no aiming dot on the video screen or if the aiming dot is far from the target s center teach sight picture to the firer If the light dot shows excessive movement check and correct the techniques of the steady position and natural point of aim Tell the Soldier to fire a three round shot group aimed at the target s center of mass Watch the video screen and Soldier as he fires Note violations of the four fundamentals Replay each shot to show the firer his aim steadiness and trigger squeeze In Figure A 11 the target on the right shows a numbered series of 16 shots Dots 1 through 4 indicate that the firer approached the target from the high right Dots 5 through 15 show that he is aiming near the target s center but does not have a steady position The sudden shift from dot 15 to 16 dot 16 is the hit point of the shot indicates that gun shyness or improper trigger squeeze caused the firer to pull his point of aim down and to the right just before firing Replay helps the firer understand and correct his firing errors Confirm and refine the diagnosis by allowing the Soldier to fire additional three round shot groups Use replay to show the firer his faults summarize and record the Soldier s basic firing problems TRAINING EXERCISES A 85 Marksmanship training exercises are designed to
482. smitter rod cable software AC power adapter and user s manual 360 system available in 3 4 and 5 target array TR 900 target LT100 laser transmitter rod cable software AC power adapter control box and user s manual 430 system 110v or 220v TR 900 target MP400 laser 556C rod software AC power adapter and user s manual Mini range TR 700 target LT100C laser transmitter rod transceiver unit with RS 232 cable software E tat AC power adapter and user s manual Sound and recoil replicator system M16A2 upper receiver M4 upper receiver CO powered weapon simulator 4 or M16 Borelight kit MP400 laser LTA 556C transmitter rod and carrying case Targets TR 700 electronic TR 900 electronic 25 m zero reflective small 25 m zero reflective large Other reflective targets available Laser transmitters LT 100 laser transmitter LT 500 in barrel laser transmitter 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 A 5 Appendix A Table A 1 Laser marksmanship training strategy parts list continued PART INCLUDES System software 330A system 360 system Mini range system Instruction booklets 110 system 330A system 360 system Laser transmitter rods LTA 1200 Type B 12 gauge LTA 190 Type B Cal 177 LTA 220 Type B Cal 22 LTA 240 Type B Cal 25 LTA 310 2 Type A Cal 30 2 barrel LTA 380 Type A Cal 38 and 357 LTA 380 2 Type A Cal 38 and 357 2 barrel LTA 410 Type A Cal 40 and 41 LTA 440 Type A Cal 44 LTA 450 2 Type A Ca
483. st 2008 Range Procedures and Range Operations Checklist GENERAL COMMANDS E 14 The following general commands may be altered when necessary Firers assume the position Issue the firer rounds of ammunition Coach secure rounds of ammunition Lock one round Load Ready on the right Ready on the left Ready on the firing line Commence firing when your targets appear Cease firing Lock and clear all weapons Grouping Commands E 15 Grouping commands include the following Firers assume a good supported prone position Lock one of three single rounds Load Ready on the right Ready on the left The firing line is ready Place your selector lever on SEMIAUTOMATIC Commence firing Cease fire Lock and clear your weapons Clear on the right Clear on the left The firing line is clear Move down to your targets and triangulate your shot group After all personnel have triangulated their targets move back to the firing line At this time make adjustments to your sights Repeat all firing commands until grouping standards are met ZERO COMMANDS E 16 Tower commands are the same as grouping commands Repeat all firing commands until zeroing standards are met Field Firing Exercises E 17 Simple standard fire commands are needed to avoid confusion during field firing exercises Commands for exercises from stati
484. sted in Appendix A of this manual 2 Soldiers who do not meet the standard will receive remedial training before continuing with subsequent instruction INTERCEPTOR BODY ARMOR 4 27 BRM strategy includes the wearing of interceptor body armor IBA shown in Figure 4 13 if it is available minus the throat collar and groin attachments during all BRM periods and concurrent training Whether or not IBA is worn marksmanship fundamentals remain the same 4 28 Prior to BRM training use an IBA immersion approach so the Soldier can adapt to weight and movement restrictions For an easier weight transition incrementally introduce the outer tactical vest OTV and front and back small arms protective insert SAPI plates Figure 4 13 Interceptor body armor PROPER WEAR AND FIT 4 29 When using IBA adhere to the following guidelines e Have adequate IBA quantities on hand for all Soldiers e Properly size IBA to the Soldier by conducting deliberate fit procedures to reduce or eliminate fit and size problems NOTE Improper wear and fit of IBA impedes a Soldier s marksmanship ability e Ensure that the SAPI plate size corresponds to the OTV e Make sure that nothing else is in the OTV SAPI compartment 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 4 15 Chapter 4 WEAR OF HELMETS WITH INTERCEPTOR BODY ARMOR 4 30 When using helmets with IBA adhere to the following guidelines e When in the prone position the IBA s back plate tends to shove
485. stent 5 9 Shot groups with consistent aiming and major shooting 5 10 Shot groups with inconsistent aiming and major shooting error 5 11 Shot groups with improper vertical 5 12 Improper shot groups on the edge of the target 5 13 Correct aiming initial shot group results B 5 16 eco oes Qc Fo hws uen abt situ d aide suut tva 0 16 M16A1 25 meter zero target 0 17 M16A2 and M4 25 meter zero target 0 18 Downrange feedback targets 5 21 Target marking with spotters markers sese 5 21 Comparison of firing 5 22 KMOWM distance TAN 5 26 25 meter zero 5 27 M16 MA series weapon aiming points 5 28 Determine wind value using the clock method 5 29 Determine wind speed using the flag
486. sters and help with communication and stabilization of the weapon Figure 8 3 NOTE Once the Soldier performs step 8 the borelight s position and the place where the visible laser is pointing are identified as the half turn position The command HALF TURN is given to ensure clear communication between the Soldier at the weapon and the Soldier at the boresighting target Figure 8 3 Borelight in the HALF TURN position 8 4 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Advanced Optics Lasers and Iron Sights 9 Identify the point approximately halfway between the start point and the half turn point This is the reference point Figure 8 4 Start Point Half Turn Reference Point SPIN GGW ONLY From the Gunners Point of View Figure 8 4 Example of a start point half turn and reference point 10 Turn the borelight on and spin it until it 15 in the start point position 11 Place the zeroing mark approximately 10 meters from the end of the barrel so that the visible laser strikes the zeroing mark 12 Slowly rotate the borelight 180 degrees while watching the visible laser made by the borelight NOTE If the visible laser stops on the zeroing mark the borelight is zeroed to the weapon If the borelight does not stop on the zeroing mark elevation and windage adjustments must be made to the borelight 13 From the start point realign the zeroing mark with the visible laser rotate the borelight 180 degrees to t
487. t Instinctive Fire 7 183 Instinctive fire 1s the least accurate technique and should only be used in emergencies It relies on instinct experience and muscle memory To use this technique the firer concentrates on the target and points the weapon in the general direction of the target While gripping the handguards with the nonfiring hand he extends the index finger to the front automatically aiming the weapon on a line toward the target POINT OF AIM 7 184 Most short range engagements will be decided by who hits his target with the first round During this type of engagement it is more important to put the target down as quickly as possible than it 1s to kill him immediately 7 185 Soldiers must aim at the lethal zone center of mass of the body Although shots to the center of the body may prove to be eventually fatal they may not immediately incapacitate the target A shot that does not immediately incapacitate the target may be no better than a clean miss Because of this and the possible presence of military equipment or protective vests Soldiers must also be able to engage targets with incapacitating shots 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 7 45 Chapter 7 Lethal Shot Placement 7 186 The target s lethal zone Figure 7 24 is its center of mass between the waist and the chest Shots in this area maximize the hydrostatic shock of the shot pellets Due to the nature of SRC Soldiers must continue to engage targets until they go d
488. t AN PAS 13B V3 2 27 2 27 illus AN PAS 13C V3 2 27 2 27 illus AN PAS 13D V3 2 27 2 27 illus infrared aiming light see also infrared aiming light 2 21 2 21 illus AN PAQAC 2 21 2 21 illus light thermal weapon sight see also light weapon thermal sight AN PAS 13B V1 2 27 2 27 illus AN PAS 13C V1 2 27 2 27 illus AN PAS 13D V1 2 27 2 27 illus M68 close combat optic see also M68 close combat optic 2 18 2 18 illus target pointer illuminator aiming light see also target pointer Index 7 Index illuminator aiming light AN PEQ 2A 2 23 2 23 illus AN PEQ 2B 2 23 2 23 illus M16A3 rifle see also M16 series rifle 2 5 to 2 33 2 5 illus battlesight zeroing 2 6 to 2 7 2 6 illus point of impact 2 7 table characteristics 2 1 2 1 table mechanically zeroing 2 6 2 6 illus mounting accessories see also accessories advanced combat optical gunsight see also advanced combat optical gunsight 2 32 to 2 33 2 32 illus 2 33 illus AN PVS night vision sight see also AN PVS 4 night vision sight 2 29 2 29 illus compatibility and mounting 2 16 table heavy thermal weapon sight see also heavy weapon thermal sight AN PAS 13B V3 2 27 2 27 illus AN PAS 13C V3 2 27 2 27 illus AN PAS 13D V3 2 27 2 27 illus infrared aiming light see also infrared aiming light 2 21 2 21 illus
489. t 1 is a standard item in the TWS carrying case 2 Align the Picatinny rail grabber 4 on the bottom of the TWS with a notch on the bracket ensuring that the TWS is positioned to accommodate an effective firing position once the eyecup 5 1s depressed NOTES 1 Ensure that the rail grabber fully rests on the bracket when mounting the TWS or the sight will not retain zero 2 It is not necessary to use a spacer when mounting the HWTS on the M16A1 A2 A3 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 2 27 Chapter 2 AN PVS 4 NIGHT VISION SIGHT 2 60 The AN PVS 4 Figure 2 38 15 a passive battery operated night sight used for observation and accurate firing of individual served weapons during nighttime conditions for example moonlight starlight skyglow against targets as far away as 400 meters NOTE The sight is less effective when viewing into rain fog sleet snow smoke shadows and other obscurants 2 61 The sight is portable and mounts to the following weapons M16A1 A2 and M14 rifles M203 and M79 grenade launchers M249 squad automatic weapon SAW M60 machine gun M67 recoilless rifle M72A1 rocket launcher Figure 2 38 AN PVS 4 night vision sight MOUNTING ON THE MI6A4 RIFLE OR M4 CARBINE 2 62 To mount the AN PVS 4 night vision sight on an M16A4 rifle or M4 carbine NOTE Reference the weapon components using the numbers listed in Figure 2 39 Figure 2 39 Mounting the AN PVS 4 on an M4 carbine or M4 MWS
490. t see also target pointer illuminator aiming light AN PEQ 2A 2 22 to 2 23 2 22 illus AN PEQ 2B 2 22 to 2 23 2 22 illus 4 carbine see also weapon characteristics accessories and ammunition 2 2 to 2 5 2 2 illus M4 see also M4 carbine 2 2 illus 2 3 illus see also carbine 2 2 illus 2 3 illus M4A1 MWS see also M4A1 MWS 2 3 illus M4 MWS see also M4 MWS 2 3 illus M68 close combat optic see also accessories M4 series carbine M16 series rifle and advanced optics lasers and iron sights 2 17 to 2 19 2 17 illus boresighting using 8 6 to 8 7 characteristics 2 16 table compatibility and mounting 2 16 table mounting on 2 18 2 18 illus Index 9 Index 1642 2 18 2 18 illus M16A3 2 18 2 18 illus M16AA 2 18 to 2 19 2 19 illus M16AA 2 17 2 17 illus M4 MWS 2 18 to 2 19 2 19 illus M4 series carbine 2 17 2 17 illus training strategies and qualification standards 8 12 to 8 16 8 13 table 25 meter zeroing procedures 8 14 to 8 15 8 15 illus concept 8 13 conduct of training 8 13 modified fundamentals 8 13 to 8 14 practice qualification 8 16 record qualification 8 16 target detection 8 16 zeroing without a borelight 8 14 magazine changing drills see also short range marksmanship training 7 48 to 7 51 1 method 7 50 to 7 51 7 50 illus 7 51 illus p
491. t 2008 FM 3 22 9 7 51 Chapter 7 RANGE SETUP 7 203 The range must be at least 25 meters in length with identification marks at the 5 10 15 and 25 meter distances Each lane should be marked in a way that prevents crossfiring between lanes A lane safety coach is assigned to each lane to observe and evaluate the Soldiers performance as well as ensure the safe conduct of firing All firing cues are given by the tower or line safety CONDUCT OF TRAINING NOTE Unit commanders should conduct training continually to first establish and then sustain levels of proficiency in reflexive firing 7 204 Each Soldier conducts a dry fire exercise and a blank fire exercise prior to conducting the LFX The dry fire and blank fire exercises give the Soldier the repetition needed to successfully engage targets quickly and accurately 7 205 During the dry fire exercise Soldiers identify and engage the proper targets at ranges from 5 to 25 meters from the stationary position while turning and walking The tower or line safety gives all firing cues All tables are fired at night with and without protective masks using automatic fire for familiarization and while using NVDs The dry fire exercise proceeds as follows 1 The Soldier starts at the 25 meter line at the low ready position facing the targets 2 The Soldier is then told the engagement position for example facing left turns right and once in position is given the cue to fire
492. t overlay NOTE The trainer should use appropriate range commands and enforce all range safety procedures 3 To fire the alternate course C the Soldier applies the four fundamentals of rifle marksmanship using the service rifle laser zeroed during Exercise 3 4 The computer automatically times the test and can print a score sheet SOUND AND RECOIL REPLICATOR A 39 To add realism to the training a special upper receiver sound and recoil replicator provides full live fire functionality without the projectile It supplies nearly 100 percent of the recoil with 50 percent of the noise using a specially designed nontoxic theatrical blank A 12 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Training Aids Devices and Exercises SECTION Ill OTHER TRAINING DEVICES AND EXERCISES This section provides the classification and nomenclature for training aids devices and targets TRAINING SUPPORT CENTERS A 40 Training support centers TSCs are located throughout the world to provide training aids and devices Each TSC provides training aid services to customers for example active Army units and schools reserve components and ROTC units in their geographic area of support NOTE For more information concerning TSC operations write Commander United States Army Training Support Center ATTN ATIC DM Fort Eustis VA 23604 SELECTION OF TRAINING AIDS AND DEVICES A 41 After training requirements have been established appropriate training
493. t picture Placing correct sight alignment on a selected aiming point on a target sight radius The distance from the front sight post to the rear sight aperture of a rifle sighting device M16 A small metal device with a tinted square of glass that is placed on the carrying handle allowing a coach to see what the firer sees through the sights silhouette target A target that represents the outline of a man spotters A round cardboard disk placed in bullet holes with a small wooden peg so the bullet strike can be observed from the firing line squad automatic weapon A lightweight one man 5 56mm machine gun starlight scope A weapon scope that amplifies ambient light so targets can be seen and effectively engaged during darkness The AN PVS 2 and AN PVS 4 are used on the M16 rifle steady position The first marksmanship fundamental which refers to the establishment of a position that allows the weapon to be held still while it 15 being fired stock weld The contact of the cheek with the stock of the weapon supported position Any position that uses something other than the body to steady the weapon artificial support suppressive fire Any engagement that does not have a definite or visible target Firing in the general direction of known or suspected enemy location sustained rate of fire Rate of fire that a weapon can continue to deliver for an indefinite period without overheating terminal ballistics What happens
494. target as you align the weapon with it and fire the weapon e Use your instinctive pointing ability and peripheral vision to aid in proper alignment Breath Control 7 88 This fundamental has little application to the first shot of quick fire The round must be fired before a conscious decision can be made about breathing If subsequent shots are necessary breathing must not interfere with the necessity of firing quickly When possible use short shallow breaths Trigger Squeeze 7 89 Consider the following modifications 1 Apply initial pressure as weapon alignment is moved toward the target 2 Exert trigger squeeze so when weapon target alignment is achieved the rounds are fired at once 7 90 Perfecting rapid trigger squeeze requires much training and practice QUICK FIRE TRAINING NOTE Only Soldiers in basic training will conduct quick fire training SRM will be conducted at the unit level See Section VI of this chapter for more information about SRM training 7 9 The key to the successful employment of both quick fire techniques is practice Both pointed and aimed quick fire must be repeatedly practiced during dry fire training LFXs provide further skill enhancement and illustrate the difference in accuracy between the two techniques NOTE See Table 7 7 for the current training program 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 7 23 Chapter 7 Table 7 7 Quick fire training program QUICK FIRE TRAINING PROGRAM Instructional Int
495. te target 100 QUALIFICATION RATINGS 6 81 Scoring is conducted in the pits with the results provided after each firing table One point 1s awarded for each round within or touching some part of the silhouette facing Qualification ratings for the KD record fire range are shown in Table 6 15 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 6 17 Chapter 6 Table 6 15 Qualification ratings for the known distance record fire range QUALIFICATION NUMBER OF RATINGS TARGETS HIT 38 to 40 Sharpshooter 33 to 37 26 to 32 Unqualified 25 and below RECORD OF PERFORMANCE 6 82 The KD record fire range is fired and recorded IAW DA Form 5789 R Record Fire Scorecard Known Distance Course NOTE See Appendix B for a sample completed form and the end of this publication for a blank reproducible copy 25 METER SCALED TARGET ALTERNATE COURSE NOTE The 25 meter scaled target alternate course is used when a standard record fire or KD range is unavailable for weapon qualification 6 83 The 25 meter scaled target alternate course enables units to test a Soldier s weapon marksmanship proficiency and firing at scaled silhouettes allows Soldiers to engage targets with time constraints and feedback CONDUCT 6 84 To complete this course Soldiers fire three tables Table 6 16 depicts these three tables and provides related information such as time constraints number of rounds that must be provided number of silhouettes that must be engaged and the
496. tection see also target detection 6 1 to 6 6 field fire training see also field fire 6 7 to 6 10 conduct of a field fire range 6 7 FM 3 22 9 to 6 8 organization 6 7 peer coaching 6 7 recording 6 8 automated 6 8 manual 6 8 remedial training 6 7 Field Fire I single timed target 6 8 to 6 9 concept 6 8 conduct 6 8 to 6 9 6 9 table Field Fire II multiple or single timed targets 6 9 to 6 10 concept 6 9 conduct 6 10 6 10 table firing positions advanced see also advanced rifle marksmanship 7 1 to 7 8 kneeling supported firing position 7 2 7 2 illus modified firing positions 7 5 7 5 illus standing supported firing position around obstacles 7 4 74 illus standing unsupported firing position 7 3 7 3 illus urban operations firing positions 7 6 to firing around obstacles 7 7 7 7 illus firing from windows 7 8 7 8 illus firing over rooftops 7 6 7 6 illus basic see also preliminary marksmanship instruction 4 24 to 4 28 individual foxhole supported firing position 4 25 4 25 illus kneeling unsupported firing position 4 28 4 28 illus prone supported firing position 4 27 4 27 illus prone unsupported firing position 4 25 to 4 26 4 26 illus interceptor body armor adjustments to firing positions see also interceptor body armor 4 16 12 August 2008 fundamentals of marksmanship see also preliminary marksmanship instruction 4 16 to 4 24 aimin
497. ted If modified field fire or KD ranges are not available a series of scaled silhouette targets can be used for training on the 25 meter range A timed fire scaled silhouette target can add to successful record fire performance since it represents targets at six different ranges requires quick response and allows precise feedback It also serves as another way to confirm zero and requires the application of the four fundamentals FIELD FIRE 1 68 Field fire training is a transitional phase that stresses focusing on a certain area Soldiers must detect the target as soon as it appears and quickly fire this is an important combat skill Soldiers who are exposed to the field fire range before they have refined their basic firing skills cannot benefit from the exercise and feedback from this exercise is hit or miss If most 175 and 300 meter targets are missed additional feedback or PMI training should be conducted RECORD FIRE 1 69 The intent of record fire is to facilitate the commander s evaluation of several individual tasks and integrated marksmanship skill performances and to provide unit readiness indicators The qualification standards are specifically related to a prescribed procedure for the conduct of record fire Individual performance must be evaluated IAW three components e What test was used standard known distance or scaled e How was the test administered e How were individual and unit performances distributed marksm
498. ten 4 Tool tighten the AN PEQ 15 onto the MIL STD 1913 rail to ensure that it does not come loose NOTE Failure to properly secure the AN PEQ 15 to the rail may lead to zero retention issues Figure 2 34 AN PEQ 15 mounted on M4 carbine NOTE If the ATPIAL is removed from the rail the operator must note the notch that it was zeroed on and return it to the same position to retain zero 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 2 25 Chapter 2 AN PAS 13B C D V1 LIGHT WEAPON THERMAL SIGHT AND AN PAS 13B C D V3 HEAVY WEAPON THERMAL SIGHT 2 55 The AN PAS 13B C D V1 light weapon thermal sight LWTS and the AN PAS 13B C D V3 heavy weapon thermal sight HWTS Figure 2 35 are silent lightweight compact and durable battery powered IR imaging sensors that operate with low battery consumption The AN PAS 13B C D V1 is used on riflemen s M4s and M16A4s The AN PAS 13B C D V3 15 used on squad leaders M4s and M16A4s only NOTE Both the LWTS and the HWTS are referred to henceforth as a singular TWS For more information refer to TM 11 5855 312 10 TM 11 5855 316 10 and TM 11 5855 317 10 2 56 The TWS is capable of target acquisition under conditions of limited visibility such as darkness smoke fog dust and haze The TWS operates effectively both at night and during the day The TWS is composed of two functional groups the telescope and the basic sensor AN PAS 13B AN PAS 13C AN PAS 13D Figure 2 35 AN PAS 13B C D V1 light
499. the Soldier should have when he is zeroing on a standard silhouette target 2 The Soldier shows the side alignment technique three times place the front sightpost on the left or right edge of the target and bring the front sightpost to the target s center of mass 3 The Soldier shows the bottom up alignment technique place the front sightpost at the bottom of the target and bring the front sightpost to target s center of mass 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 A 15 Appendix A RIDDLE SIGHTING DEVICE A 46 The Riddle sighting device Figure A 7 indicates if the Soldier understands the aiming process while using the rifle It is a small plastic plate with a magnet and a drawing of an E type silhouette target A two man team is required for its use A 47 To use the Riddle sighting device 1 The Soldier assumes a supported or prone firing position The assistant places the Riddle device on the front sight assembly and adjusts the plastic plate in the direction of the firer until he reports the proper sight picture 2 Without disturbing the plastic plate the trainer or coach aims through the sights to determine if the Soldier has aligned the target and sight properly A 48 Many sightings are conducted and the trainer may include variations to ensure that the Soldier understands the process Each Soldier demonstrates six out of six points of aim starting with the plastic plate offset to the front sightpost NOTE This device has
500. the borelight device is not damaged NOTE If the firer does not get the same sight picture after the second realignment he more than likely has a fundamentals problem with his firing position and sight picture To save time on the range a coach should troubleshoot the Soldier before continuing to boresight the M68 CCO BORESIGHTING THE ADVANCED COMBAT OPTICAL GUNSIGHT NOTES 1 Before boresighting ensure that the borelight has been zeroed to the weapon The more accurate the boresight of the ACOG to the assigned weapon the closer to a battlesight zero the weapon will be 2 25 meter zeroing must be conducted to ensure that the ACOG is properly zeroed 8 6 To boresight the ACOG NOTE Use the 10 meter boresighting target that 1s used for boresighting the M68 CCO 2 With the help of an assistant place the boresighting target 10 meters in front of the weapon 4 Get behind the weapon in a stable supported firing position and look through the ACOG 5 Aim the tip of the 300 meter post on the crosshair located on the 10 meter boresighting target 6 Make adjustments to the ACOG until the visible laser of the borelight is centered on the borelight circle on the boresighting target 7 Turn the borelight off 8 Move the weapon off of the crosshair realign the tip of the 300 meter post on the crosshair and turn the borelight back on 10 If the borelight is on the circle and the tip of the 300 meter post is on the crossh
501. the rifle carbine pistol grenade launcher all machine guns MK19 shotgun and AT4 It has three modes of training e Marksmanship training e Tactical collective training e Shoot don t shoot rules of engagement training A 2 It also includes a scenario editor for generating or tailoring new scenarios MARKSMANSHIP TRAINING A 3 When used in the marksmanship training mode the EST 2000 e Uses Army standard courses of fire for all small arms weapons Accurately simulates live fire ranges in daylight and limited visibility conditions using precision scaled targets high resolution imagery and the essential weapon s system accuracy to compensate for errors drift parallax e Isolates captures and displays shots with replay that highlights firer s errors in the application of the fundamentals of marksmanship Replay of the point of aim trace before the shot during the shot and after the shot diagnoses firer problems with aiming breathing steady hold trigger control and shot recovery for on the spot corrections Cant sensors visually indicate firer induced right or left cant possibly resulting in missed shots Basic Rifle Marksmanship Training NOTE The marksmanship core scenarios can be found in the EST 2000 Operator s Manual TD 07 6910 702 10 A 4 The EST 2000 begins training the fundamentals of marksmanship right from the beginning before the Soldier has a chance to develop bad habits Using EST 2000 techn
502. tical Severely degraded mission capability or unit readiness Permanent partial disability or temporary total disability exceeding three months time Extensive major damage to equipment or systems Significant damage to property or the environment Security failure Significant collateral damage Marginal Degraded mission capability or unit readiness Minor damage to equipment or systems property or the environment Lost days due to injury or illness not exceeding three months Minor damage to property or the environment Negligible Little or no adverse impact on mission capability First aid or minor medical treatment Slight equipment or system damage but fully functional or serviceable Little or no property or environmental damage Determine the Level of Risk Using the Standard Risk Assessment Matrix D 22 Using the standard risk assessment matrix Table D 3 commanders convert probability and severity for each identified hazard into a specified level of risk All accepted residual risk must be approved at the appropriate level of command NOTE This assessment is an estimate not an absolute It may or may not be indicative of the relative danger of a given operation activity or event Table D 3 Risk assessment matrix RISK ASSESSMENT MATRIX Severity Probability E Extremely High D 23 Risk is addressed in the four levels listed in the lower left corner of the matrix Table D 4 e Extremely high risk e High r
503. ting target grids are Ix1 centimeter squares unlike those on 25 meter zeroing targets Contact the proponent of this publication C Co 2 29 IN Fort Benning GA for information about the availability of boresighting targets CAUTION Weapon stability is crucial in boresighting The weapon should be in the bolt forward position and must not be canted left or right during boresighting procedures If the weapon is boresighted using field expedient methods for example sandbags rucksacks and the weapon is laid on its side for stability ensure that the boresighting target is also oriented in the same manner BORESIGHTING THE WEAPON USING THE BACKUP IRON SIGHTS 8 4 The BUIS can be boresighted to a new user to expedite 25 meter zeroing To boresight the weapon using the BUIS 1 Align the BUIS with the Canadian bull on the 10 meter boresighting target 2 Make adjustments to the windage and elevation of the BUIS until the borelight 1s centered with the circle on the boresighting target BORESIGHTING THE WEAPON USING THE M68 CLOSE COMBAT OPTIC NOTES 1 Before boresighting ensure that the borelight has been zeroed to the weapon The more accurate the boresight of the M68 CCO to the assigned weapon the closer to a battlesight zero the weapon will be 2 25 meter zeroing must be conducted to ensure that the M68 CCO 15 properly zeroed 3 The M68 CCO is a parallax free sight beyond 50 meters boresighting is conducted at 10 m
504. ting the M68 CCO Soldiers no longer need a good stock weld to get a good sight picture after the M68 is zeroed at 25 meters The M68 s reflexive sight allows the Soldier to fire the weapon with his cheek in a comfortable position but since the CCO 1s parallax free beyond 50 meters only the Soldier must zero and fire using the same cheek position 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 8 13 Chapter 8 Aiming 8 23 When using the M68 CCO the two eyes open method is the preferred method of aiming NOTE The aiming method used to zero must also be used to engage targets When using the M68 CCO the weapon must not be canted during aiming or firing Two Eyes Open Method Preferred 8 24 This method allows a much greater field of view and makes scanning for targets much easier however getting accustomed to the two eyes open method takes practice The Soldier must keep the rifle and M68 in a vertical alignment each time he fires 8 25 To use the two eyes open method 1 Position the head so that one eye can focus on the red dot and the other eye can scan downrange 2 Place the red dot on the target s center of mass and engage One Eye Open Method 8 26 To use the one eye open method 1 With the nonfiring side eye closed look through the M68 CCO to ensure that the red dot can be seen clearly 2 Place the red dot on the target s center of mass and engage Breath Control 8 27 This fundamental does not change Trigger Sq
505. tly where the laser is pointing and increases his chances of being detected and fired upon by the enemy Walking the laser to the target is a quick and operationally secure means of engaging the enemy with the aiming laser To walk the laser to a target 1 Aim the laser at the ground just in front of the target 2 Walk the aiming laser along the ground and up to the target s center of mass 3 Engage the target INFRARED DISCIPLINE C 26 To exercise proper IR discipline e While on the range actively scan for targets with the laser off e Once a target is located walk the laser to the target and engage e Once a target has been located and engaged with the aiming laser deactivate the laser THERMAL WEAPON SIGHT C 6 C 27 To understand how the TWS 15 able to convert energy into an image suitable for viewing Soldiers must understand the electromagnetic spectrum and the range of IR light in which the TWS operates The TWS absorbs all available light into the lens and then filters out all light except for middle far IR thermal light Then the TWS converts the thermal light into an image and creates a video that 1s displayed on the raster C 28 The TWS can convert thermal energy that is reflected radiated or generated from an object AII objects such as trees metal plastic and living creatures display a quality that allows them to be seen with thermal technology How well the objects display these qualities will determin
506. toward the firer as shown in Figure 2 42 for best durability and minimal interference unless its use is imminent The BUIS should only be removed by the armorer and remains on the MWS unless the carrying handle sight is installed NOTE Failure to install the BUIS on the first notch will lead to an improper zero and inaccuracy at longer ranges when the range lever is used Figure 2 41 Backup iron sight Figure 2 42 Backup iron sight in the stowed position 2 30 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Weapon Characteristics Accessories and Ammunition ADVANCED COMBAT OPTICAL GUNSIGHT 2 68 The ACOG Figure 2 43 is designed to provide enhanced target identification and hit probability for the M4A1 or M16 series weapon when firing as far as 800 meters approximately 870 yards away It is designed with dual illuminated technology using fiber optics for daytime employment and tritium for nighttime and low light use The ACOG is a lightweight rugged fast and accurate 3 5 power optic scope The body is machined from aluminum forgings both the material and finish are identical to the M4A1 It is internally adjustable to allow the shock of rough handling to be carried by the scope body instead of the adjustment mechanism FIBER OPTIC ADJUSTER PROTECTIVE CAPS OBJECTIVE LENS MOUNT WITH THUMB SCREWS Figure 2 43 Advanced combat optical gunsight MOUNTING ON THE M16A4 RIFLE OR M4 CARBINE 2 69 The ACOG can be attached to the flattop ea
507. trajectory NOTE See paragraphs 5 71 through 5 72 for more information about the effects of gravity MUZZLE VELOCITY 5 102 Muzzle velocity is the speed of a bullet as it leaves the barrel measured in feet per second Muzzle velocity diminishes as the bullet gets farther away The bullet reaches its maximum velocity 76 feet from the end of the weapon and slows until it reaches the target AIR RESISTANCE DRAG 5 103 resistance or drag immediately produces a slowing effect on a bullet ALTITUDE OR AIR DENSITY 5 104 The greater the altitude the thinner the air and the longer the bullet will travel with a correspondingly flatter trajectory Each 5 000 foot elevation will raise the strike of the bullet to 1 minute of angle MOA TEMPERATURE 5 105 Deviation from standard daytime temperature 59 degrees Fahrenheit 15 degrees Celsius affects bullet trajectory Cold Temperatures 5 106 Cold air is denser than warm air the bullet must travel through more tightly packed air particles This causes the bullet to lose velocity causing the bullet to impact lower than intended Cooler air also causes lower chamber pressure which reduces the initial velocity Hot Temperatures 5 107 Warm or hot temperatures cause the strike of the round to move up 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 5 39 Chapter 5 TRAJECTORY 5 108 When a projectile exits the weapon s muzzle it drops from the line of departure otherwise known as the center bo
508. trigger squeeze but as skills improve he can squeeze the trigger in a second or less Coaching Trigger Squeeze 4 62 The coach trainer e Observes the trigger squeeze emphasizes the correct procedure and checks the firer s applied pressure e Places his finger on the trigger and has the firer squeeze the trigger by applying pressure to his finger e Ensures that the firer squeezes straight to the rear on the trigger avoiding a left or right twisting movement e Observes that the firer follows through and holds the trigger to the rear for approximately one second after the round has been fired Wobble Area 4 63 Wobble area is the movement of the front sight around the point of aim when the rifle is in the steadiest position 4 64 The position must provide for the smallest possible wobble area e From a supported position there should be minimal wobble area and little reason to detect movement If movement of the rifle causes the front sight to leave the target more practice is needed e From an unsupported position the firer experiences a greater wobble area than from a supported position If the front sight strays from the target during the firing process the firer should hold constant pressure on the trigger and resume as soon as he corrects the sighting 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 4 23 Cha pter 4 NOTE The firer should never try to quickly squeeze the trigger while the sight 1s on the target The best firing
509. trip method of search To perform this method 1 Begin the search with the area offering the greatest potential danger the terrain nearest to your position 2 Beginning at either flank systematically search the terrain to your front in a 180 degree arc 50 meters in depth NOTE Become familiar with the terrain as you search it Take advantage of peripheral vision by focusing the eyes on specific points as you search from one flank to the other Make mental notes of prominent terrain features and areas that may offer cover and concealment to the enemy 3 After reaching the opposite flank search a second 50 meter strip farther out but overlapping the first strip by approximately 10 meters 4 Continue in this manner until the entire area has been searched NOTE This method should also be used as part of maintaining observation of the area and when the observer has been distracted from his area of responsibility 6 2 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Field Fire Maintaining Observation of the Area 6 7 After completing his detailed search the Soldier may be required to maintain observation of the area To perform this method e Glance quickly at various points throughout the entire area focusing the eyes on specific features e Always search the area in the same manner to ensure complete coverage of all terrain NOTE Since this quick search may fail to detect the initial movement of an enemy the observer should periodicall
510. ts organizations and individuals e Logistics Civil Augmentation Program LOGCAP organizations and civilian agencies that are part of the force or may be impacted by the activity hazard or its control e The media and nongovernmental organizations NGO when their presence impacts or is impacted by the force STEP 5 SUPERVISE AND EVALUATE D 26 This step involves implementing risk controls and enforcing them to standard and validating the adequacy of selected control measures in supporting the objectives and desired outcomes This continuous process provides the ability to identify weaknesses and to change or adjust controls based on performance changing situations conditions or events RESPONSIBILITIES D 27 CRM responsibilities are spread across three levels e Commander e Leaders e Individual D 6 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Range Safety and Risk Management COMMANDER D 28 During implementation of the CRM process the commander e Ensures that warfighting functions WFF are performed to standard to minimize human error materiel failure and environmental effects e Establishes a force protection policy and publishes a safety philosophy with realistic safety goals objectives and priorities e Ensures that his training assessment considers the WFF s ability to protect the force Selects long short and near term control actions and ensures implementation to improve force protection e Ensures that h
511. ttes CONDUCT NOTE When firing record fire each Soldier must wear the proper uniform the helmet LBE and IBA with all SAPI plates if available No other armor is required 6 68 Each firer receives 40 single or multiple target exposures at ranges from 50 to 300 meters and 40 rounds of 5 56 millimeter ball ammunition Table 6 12 depicts the number of rounds that must be fired from each position Each Soldier must hit a minimum of 23 out of 40 target exposures Table 6 12 Number of rounds that must be fired from each position during Record Fire POSITION NUMBER OF ROUNDS FIRED Prone supported firing position or at 20 the unit commander s discretion the foxhole supported firing position Prone unsupported firing position Kneeling unsupported firing position 6 14 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Field Fire 6 69 Soldiers adhere to the following guidelines Alibi Firing Credit for targets hit should not be given when rounds are saved from difficult targets to be used on easier targets for example not firing at the 300 meter target so an additional round can be fired at the 150 meter target When double targets are exposed the Soldier should fire two rounds If the first target 15 missed he may fire at that same target with the second round Soldiers engage the target that poses the greatest threat first normally assumed to be the closer target No scoring distinction is made between near targets and far targets or t
512. two weapons For further instructions refer to the EST 2000 Operator s Manual SHOOT DON T SHOOT RULES OF ENGAGEMENT TRAINING 11 When used in the shoot don t shoot rules of engagement training mode the EST 2000 e Can be configured to enhance special operations and counterterrorism training e 5 the premier training simulation for stability and support operations training e Uses video based graphic overlays with multiple escalation or de escalation points that require the firer to justify his actions based on his situational awareness NOTE Shoot don t shoot core scenarios can be found in the EST 2000 Operator s Manual TD 07 6910 702 10 A 12 Shoot don t shoot rules of engagement training is conducted on a five lane subsystem This training uses video based graphic overlays that provide important clues for example facial expressions and body language for the firer to cue on Multiple escalation or de escalation points require the firer to justify his actions based on his situational awareness SCENARIO EDITOR A 13 The scenarios currently available in the EST 2000 meet 90 percent of a unit s training requirements As a unit s mission changes weapons and TTPs are changed or additional training requirements occur the unit can use the scenario editor to generate or tailor new scenarios The scenario editor can be used to enhance the individual Soldier s skills and collectively the squad s ability to engage and
513. ual Collective Scenarios ROE TDA Annually EST 2000 will be located at 5 of AR Individual Tng Sites plus 10 of Units Centrally Located Sites Live Fire is located at less than 15 of Unit Home Station Sites LMTS E EST 2000 C don ire Figure 1 5 Army Reserve home station marksmanship training strategy Unit deployed location Unit deployed location LMTS PMI Collective Pretest Training at Remediation Commander s Remediation Discretion EST 2000 Centrally Unit deployed location Located Unit deployed location E S LMTS LMTS PMI Pretest Pretest Remediation Remediation LMTS will be used as the primary resource for PMI and remedial training for deployed units due to its deployability and cost Operational commanders can request and receive an EST 2000 as was done in Afghanistan and Iraq where they support PMI collective and shoot don t shoot training n some instances the EST 2000 will be located in one of the deployed unit locations Commander s decision ws BEES quere Figure 1 6 Deployed unit marksmanship training strategy TRAINING PHASES 1 13 Soldiers progress through five phases of rifle marksmanship training e Phase I Basic Rifle Marksmanship Preliminary Marksmanship Instruction e Phase Rifle Marksmanship Downrange Feedback Range Firing e PhaseIII Basic Rifle Marksmanship Field Firing 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 1 5
514. ualification standards are specifically related to a prescribed procedure for conducting record fire Individual performance must be evaluated IAW two components e What record fire test was used standard KD or alternate scaled e How were individual performances distributed first time GO rates percent in each qualification rating NOTE See Table 6 9 for the current training program Table 6 9 Record Fire training program RECORD FIRE Instructional Intent Reinforce all phases of BRM Allow Soldiers to practice and refine critical marksmanship skills Measure the Soldier s complete understanding of BRM Ensure that The rear sight is on the proper setting M16A2 3 8 3 M16A4 and M4 6 3 flush M16A1 the unmarked aperture short range The rear sight aperture is set on 300 not 800 The small aperture is being used All targets are operational Each Soldier has one 20 round magazine and two 10 round magazines Soldiers apply all aspects of BRM Soldiers hit 23 out of 40 target exposures Soldiers that do not meet the standard receive remedial training before refiring CONCEPT 6 64 Since all Soldiers must fire the record fire course at least once a year for qualification the course can provide excellent firing performance evaluations It also provides excellent diagnostic information for instructor trainers who are concerned with scheduling training to overcome the most serious firing weaknesses The standard rec
515. ueeze 8 28 This fundamental does not change ZEROING WITHOUT A BORELIGHT 8 29 To zero without a boresight 1 Begin with a securely installed and live fire zeroed BUIS 2 Mount the CCO to the front of the receiver rail or to the top ARS as preferred 3 Adjust windage and elevation on the reflex sight until the center of the aiming dot 1s at the tip of the front sightpost when viewed through the BUIS while assuming a normal firing position 25 METER ZEROING PROCEDURES NOTE Conduct zeroing only on the M16A2 25 meter target 8 30 When zeroing the CCO at 25 meters a designated point of impact zone must be identified on the 25 meter zeroing target Figure 8 5 To zero the CCO at 25 meters 1 Starting from center of mass of the 300 meter silhouette on the 25 meter zeroing target count down 1 squares or 1 4 centimeters This is now the point of impact when zeroing the M68 CCO 2 Continue to aim at the center of mass of the 300 meter silhouette and make adjustments to the M68 so that the rounds impact in the secondary 4x4 centimeter circular box 17 squares or 1 4 centimeters down from the point of aim 8 14 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Advanced Optics Lasers and Iron Sights 8 31 Other procedures are the same as standard iron sight procedures NOTE A click is defined as the sound or feel of the positive detent movement e For windage and elevation two clicks equal 1 centimeter at 25 meters e Forelevation
516. ulated shot group covered within a 1 2 centimeter circle indicates consistent aiming FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Advanced Rifle Marksmanship 7 253 Since no weapon or ammunition variability 1s involved and shot groups do not have to be placed in a certain location a 1 2 centimeter standard may be compared to obtaining a 4 centimeter shot group on the 25 meter live fire zero range Dime Washer Drill 7 254 The dime washer drill is an effective way of measuring the Soldier s trigger squeeze To conduct the exercise 1 The Soldier takes aim and squeezes the trigger 2 If the dime or washer remains in place he has successfully squeezed the trigger 7 255 The Soldier must successfully obtain five out of five consecutive shot groups within 1 centimeter and without allowing the dime or washer to drop The trainer evaluates the Soldier s performance and gives the Soldier a GO or NO GO If the Soldier receives a NO GO the trainer recommends retraining retesting or possible removal from the course Zero Confirmation 7 256 Zero confirmation is conducted as shown in Table 7 6 PHASE ESTIMATION AND SIGHT MANIPULATION 100 500 METERS 7 257 SDMs must use range estimation methods to determine the distance between their position and the target Trainers ensure that the e Weapon 15 cleared and no ammunition is loaded prior to training e Weapon is zeroed prior to training e Soldier knows how to adjust for wind
517. un wool peuoddnsun w00 peyoddnsun peuoddnsun peyoddnsun uot peuoddnsun peyoddnsun SSI LIH NOILISOd ADNVY 19947 NOILISOd ADNY d L39v L YILdO SLNIOd ONIATY aarzsnrav 34154 30339 LNAWLSNPOY LHOIS Tv2INVHO3MW 13813 030339 4009 di S YOLYNTIVAS QOWWAAAA 31wad LUNAN 4000 OQ vu 5 AousDBe jusuodoud eu 6 22 2 Wd 288 woy 510 jo esn 04 I Salad qeoo3as NVIASM3IVIN dQ31VNOIS3Q0 avnos 00 3d 8002 435 4 0697 WHOS S 5 9984005 8SBUd A 8414 SBUd uonsog eseug Apog 404 111235 eIqejs 801049 sueiplos julol diy a puey pa B20 1 5I SISUAA Lewes uuopeld 5 juiof 35 ed jeuAA woy asou 51 d IdiNvX3 504 9ONleIJ NON SMOd 19 eost Jal Ide SAS jSvHd 3NOMd QqalHoddns 310HXOJ 3d09 dl 5 A3 QGWWAAAA 3lwvad LINN 3d09 al 30071 s jueuodoud au 5 22 2 J 885 woy SIU Jo esn 0y NOILVNIWAA NOILISOd NVIISMHVII GALVNSISAG avnos FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 By Order of the Secretary of the Army GEORGE W CASEY JR General United States Army Chief of Staff Official
518. undamentals 7 21 The four marksmanship fundamentals apply to night firing but some modifications are needed depending on the conditions 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 7 31 Chapter 7 Steady Position 7 122 When applying unassisted night fire the Soldier must change his head position or stock weld especially when using weapon target alignment techniques Consider the following modifications e Position the head high so that the weapon is aligned on the target e Look just over the iron sights e Keep the cheek in contact with the stock 7 123 Repeated dry fire practice followed by live fire training is necessary to learn and refine these modifications and still achieve the steadiest position Aiming 7 124 Modifications to the aiming process vary Consider these modifications e When firing unassisted use off center vision instead of pinpoint focus e Open both eyes to gather the maximum available light e Focus both eyes downrange Breathing 7 125 This fundamental is not affected by unassisted night fire conditions Trigger Squeeze 7 126 This fundamental is not affected by unassisted night fire conditions The objective is to not disrupt weapon s alignment with the target when squeezing the trigger Target Detection 7 127 Trying to detect a target during the day is difficult enough but at night it becomes even more so The firer must detect and engage targets without artificial illumination or NVDs Consider the
519. unition detail e Breaks down issues receives accounts for and safeguards live ammunition e Collects expended ammunition casings and other residue UNIT ARMORER D 8 The unit armorer e Repairs rifles e Replaces parts ASSISTANT INSTRUCTOR D 9 One assistant instructor is assigned for each one to ten firing points Each assistant instructor e Ensures that all firers observe safety regulations and procedures e Assists firers having problems D 2 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Range Safety and Risk Management MEDICAL PERSONNEL D 10 Medical personnel provide medical support as required by regulations governing LFXs CONTROL TOWER OPERATORS D 11 Control tower operators Raise and lower the targets Time the exposures Sound the audible signal Give the fire commands NOTE If possible two men should be chosen to perform these functions MAINTENANCE DETAIL D 12 This detail should be composed of two segments one to conduct small arms repair and one to perform minor maintenance on the target holding mechanisms AMMUNITION POSITIONING AND ISSUANCE D 13 To provide a safe and operational range the following are recommended procedures for handling ammunition Locate all ammunition for the weapons involved at firing sites outside of the backblast area when applicable Store ammunition at a position that minimizes the potential for ignition explosion or rapid burning Issue ammunition to firing unit
520. uous supervision spot checks and reassess hazards as the situation changes Determine if the controls worked and if they can be improved Pass on lessons learned Was Control Effective Indicate Yes or No Review during AAR Overall Risk Level Select the highest residual risk level and circle it This becomes the overall mission or task risk level The commander decides whether the controls are sufficient to accept the level of residual risk If the risk is too great to continue the mission or task the commander directs development of additional controls or modifies changes or rejects the COA Risk Decision Authority Signed by the appropriate level of command D 10 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Appendix E Range Procedures and Range Operations Checklist This appendix contains the procedures used to conduct live fire training exercises These procedures support Army regulations TCs 7 9 and 25 1 local range regulations and established unit training SOPs Conduct of the training exercise should clearly define and establish details and equipment needed to open and operate the range so that these actions do not adversely impact Soldiers training time The procedures outlined in this appendix should be followed in order to open the range and conduct effective training RANGE PROCEDURES E 1 Before beginning an LFX all personnel must receive an orientation on range operations The orientation should outline the procedure
521. upport commanders and leaders in the rapid identification and communication of hazards and associated risks that may impact on the mission e Provide immediate feedback to the leader as the mission progresses and hazards are encountered Use short written messages hand and arm signals or radio transmissions to communicate first hand information to leaders e n extreme situations act alone or make risk decisions within the context of orders DA FORM 7566 COMPOSITE RISK MANAGEMENT WORKSHEET D 32 DA Form 7566 Composite Risk Management Worksheet Figure D 1a and D 1b provides a starting point to logically track the CRM process It can be used to document risk management steps taken during planning preparation and execution of training and combat missions NOTE For detailed CRM procedures see FM 5 19 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 D 7 Appendix D COMPOSITE RISK MANAGEMENT WORKSHEET Few use of this form see FM 5 18 the proponent agency is TRADOC 1 MBNITASK DTG BEGIN 2b DTG END 3 DATE PREPARED l YYYYMMDDI 4 PREPARED DEP a 5 SUBTASK 6 HAZARDS DA FORM 7566 APR 2005 Page 1 of 2 APD V2 00 Figure D 1a Sample DA Form 7566 Composite Risk Management Worksheet FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Range Safety and Risk Management ITEMS 5 THROUGH 12 CONTINUED DA FORM 7566 APR 2005 Page 2 of 2 APD V2 00 Figure D 1b Sample DA Form 7566 Composite Risk Management Worksheet
522. ure is up and the 0 200 meter aperture 1s down 4 Turn the windage knob 7 to align the index mark on the 0 200 meter aperture with the long center index line 8 on the rear sight assembly BATTLESIGHT ZEROING THE M16A4 RIFLE 2 12 To battlesight zero an M16A4 rifle NOTE Reference the weapon components using the numbers listed in Figure 2 11 Figure 2 11 M16A4 battlesight zero 1 Turn the elevation knob 1 shown as viewed from above counterclockwise until the rear sight assembly 2 rests flush with the detachable carrying handle and the 6 3 marking 15 aligned with the index line 3 on the left side of the detachable carrying handle 2 Turn the elevation knob two clicks clockwise so the index line on the left side of the detachable carrying handle 1s aligned with the Z on the elevation knob 3 Position the apertures 4 so the unmarked aperture is up and the 0 200 meter aperture 1s down 2 8 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Weapon Characteristics Accessories and Ammunition 4 Turn the windage knob 5 to align the index mark on the 0 200 meter aperture with the long center index line 6 on the rear sight assembly 2 13 Table 2 4 shows how much one click of elevation or windage will move the strike of the round at ranges of 25 to 600 meters Table 2 4 Point of impact for the M16A4 rifle __ RANGE m 25 100 200 300 400 50 6o Elevation 3 A in 1 3 8 in 2 3 4 in 4 1 8 in 5 1 2 in 6 7 8 in 8 1
523. ures 5 1 to 5 14 5 1 table known distance range see also known distance range 5 19 to 5 27 5 19 table zeroing procedures see also zeroing procedures 5 14 to 5 19 5 14 table dry fire traming see also squad designated marksman training 7 61 to 7 63 borelight exercise 7 62 dime washer drill 7 63 follow through 7 62 target box exercise 7 62 to 7 63 zero confirmation 7 63 Index 4 E effects of wind and gravity see also downrange feedback 5 28 to 5 33 gravity see also gravity 5 28 wind see also wind 5 29 to 5 33 Engagement Skills Tramer 2000 see also preliminary marksmanship instruction and training aids devices and exercises 4 29 to 4 30 A 1 to A4 A 1 illus general characteristics A 2 to A 3 laser safety A 4 marksmanship training A 2 basic rifle marksmanship training A 2 individual and unit sustainment training A 2 remedial marksmanship training A 2 scenario editor A 3 shoot don t shoot rules of engagement training A 3 tactical collective training A 3 weapon safety A 4 F field fire 6 1 to 6 21 6 1 table 100 to 500 meters see also squad designated marksman training 7 69 to 7 70 conduct 7 69 to 7 70 7 69 table alternate qualification courses see also alternate qualification courses 6 17 to 6 21 field fire training see also field fire training 6 7 to 6 10 record qualification see also record qualification 6 11 to 6 17 target de
524. uterized systems also provide performance feedback Using data recorded during training the computer generates AARs This accurate feedback allows commander to assess the unit s performance and leaders to assess their unit s mission status and design training programs to overcome the identified shortcomings The performance feedback highlights positive actions to reinforce correct procedures and to foster Soldiers confidence enabling Soldiers and leaders to recognize and correct their shortcomings RANGE SELECTION E 47 This section identifies primary and alternate ranges used for training and qualification with specific weapon systems and weapons based on applicable FMs The following table lists primary and alternate ranges to satisfy weapon system training events Table E 1 Primary alternate range selection WEAPON SYSTEM TRAINING EVENT RANGE PRIMARY ALTERNATE AFF ARF MRF with 25m boots Sustainment Record AFF ARF MRF 25 m range M16 Series and M4 Qualification ARF MRF QTR 25 m range Night AFF ARF MRF Night 25 m range CBRN Conditions AFF ARF MRF 25 m range Automated Field Fire Range Automated Record Fire Range Modified Record Fire Range Qualification Training Range E 10 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Range Procedures and Range Operations Checklist Rifle Machine Gun Zero Range 17801 E 48 This range Figure E 1 is used to train individual Soldiers on the skills necessary to align the sights and practice basic marksmanship
525. vent or Occurrence D 20 Probability is the likelihood an event will occur based on prior experience The probability levels estimated for each hazard are based on the mission COA or frequency of a similar event There are five levels of probability Table D 1 e Frequent Likely Occasional Seldom Unlikely Table D 1 Five levels of probability LEVEL OF PROBABILITY EXPLANATION Occurs very often known to happen regularly Likely Occurs sporadically but is not common Remotely possible could occur at some time Unlikely Can assume will not occur but not impossible Estimate the Expected Result or Severity of an Event or Occurrence D 21 Severity 1s the degree to which an incident will impact combat power mission capability or readiness The degree of severity estimated for each hazard is based on the results of similar events Severity is addressed in the four levels used on the risk assessment worksheet Table D 2 e Catastrophic e Critical e Marginal e Negligible D 4 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Range Safety and Risk Management Table D 2 Four levels of severity LEVEL OF SEVERITY EXPLANATION Catastrophic Complete mission failure or loss of ability to accomplish a mission Death or permanent total disability Loss of major or mission critical systems or equipment Major property or facility damage Severe environmental damage Mission critical security failure Unacceptable collateral damage Cri
526. vertical dispersion The up and down displacement of bullets on a target Weaponeer A training device that simulates the firing of the M16 rifle to provide performance feedback windage adjustment Moving the rear sight aperture to cause the bullet to strike left or right on the target wind value The effect the wind will have on the trajectory of the bullet wobble area The natural movement of the weapon sight on and around an aiming point when the weapon is being held in a steady position zero criterion The standard or requirement for zeroing 4cm or smaller group at 25 meters zeroing Adjusting the rifle sights so bullets hit the aiming point at a given range zero target A scaled silhouette target with a superimposed grid for use at 25 meters 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 Glossary 11 This page intentionally left blank References SOURCES USED These sources were used to prepare this publication AR 385 10 The Army Safety Program 23 August 2007 AR 385 63 Range Safety 19 May 2003 DA Pam 350 38 Standards in Weapons Training 16 August 2004 DA Pam 385 63 Range Safety 10 April 2003 FM 5 19 Composite Risk Management 21 August 2006 TM 9 1005 249 10 Operator s Manual for Rifle 5 56 mm M16 NSN 1005 00 856 6885 Rifle 5 56 mm M16A1 1005 00 073 9421 11 May 1990 TM 9 1005 319 10 Operator s Manual for Rifle 5 56 MM M16A2 W E NSN 1005 01 128 9936 EIC 4GM Rifle 5 56 MM M16A3 1005 01 357 5112 Rifle 5 56 M
527. ving at 7 miles per hour at a 25 degree angle moves 8 inches between the time the weapon is fired and the bullet arrives Figure 7 19 Sight target relationship for the single lead rule 8 INCH LEAD 15 METERS 150 METERS Figure 7 20 Lead increasing at greater ranges 7 38 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Advanced Rifle Marksmanship Target Speed 7 147 Figure 7 21 reflects the differences in lateral speeds for various angles of target movement for a target traveling at 8 miles per hour at a distance of 150 meters from the firer The angle of target movement is the angle between the target firer line and the target s direction of movement An 8 mile per hour target moves 24 inches during the bullet s flight time If the target is moving on a 15 degree angle it moves 6 inches the equivalent of 2 miles per hour Figure 7 21 Target movement distance at various angles 7 148 Since the target lead is half the perceived width of the front sightpost at 100 meters the standard sight provides 5 4 inches of lead for M16A1 2 3 4 rifles and M4 carbines Table 7 14 Table 7 14 Angle of target movement ANGLE OF TARGET RANGE 100 m MOVEMENT Degrees STANDARD SIGHT TARGET SPEED 2 1 0 20 32 43 54 52 7 0 1 2 TT 71 5 84 AT 8 8 19 92 20 2 1 9 7 27 1 e AJ NOTE Plus indicates bullet strike in the direction of movement minus indicates bullet strike behind the target s center 1
528. weapon sight see also light weapon thermal sight AN PAS 13B V1 2 26 to 2 27 2 26 illus AN PAS 13C V1 2 26 to 2 27 2 26 illus AN PAS 13D V1 2 26 to 2 27 2 26 illus M68 close combat optic see also M68 close combat optic 2 17 2 17 illus target pointer illuminator aiming light see also target pointer illuminator aiming light AN PEQ 2A 2 23 2 23 illus AN PEQ 2B 2 23 2 23 illus M4A1 MWS see also M4 series carbine 2 3 illus characteristics 2 1 2 1 table MA MS adapter rail system see also accessory mounting 2 10 to 2 13 2 3 illus 2 11 illus numbered recoil grooves 2 12 2 12 illus rail covers 2 11 to 2 12 2 11 illus vertical pistol grip 2 13 2 13 illus MWS see also M4 series carbine 2 3 illus battlesight zeroing 2 4 to 2 5 2 4 illus point of impact 2 5 table characteristics 2 1 2 1 table mechanically zeroing 2 4 2 4 illus FM 3 22 9 Index mounting accessories see also accessories AN PEQ 15 advanced target pointer illuminator aiming light see also AN PEQ 15 advanced target pointer illuminator aiming light 2 25 2 25 illus compatibility and mounting 2 16 table infrared aiming light see also infrared aiming light 2 20 2 20 illus AN PAQAC 2 20 2 20 illus M68 close combat optic see also M68 close combat optic 2 18 to 2 19 2 19 illus target pointer illuminator aiming ligh
529. weapon system is boresighted otherwise you will need remedial training on your sight picture 10 Change the field of view FOV on the sight by rotating the FOV ring and repeat steps 1 through 9 11 Turn the laser off and carefully remove the borelight and the mandrel from the weapon so that the borelight device 15 not damaged BORESIGHTING THE AN PAQ 4B C NOTE Before boresighting the AN PAQ 4B C make sure that the borelight has been zeroed to the weapon The more accurate the boresight of the AN PAQ 4B C to the assigned weapon the closer to a battlesight zero the weapon will be DANGERS DO NOT STARE INTO THE IR LASER BEAM WITH THE NAKED EYE OR THROUGH BINOCULARS OR TELESCOPES DO NOT POINT THE IR LASER BEAM AT MIRROR LIKE SURFACES OR OTHER INDIVIDUALS EYES ALTHOUGH THIS LASER IS EYE SAFE IT IS A SAFE PRACTICE TO TREAT ALL LASERS AS NOT EYE SAFE 3x EXTENDERS MAGNIFY THE LASER AIMING LIGHT WHEN USING THE 3x EXTENDERS THE AN PAQ 4B C IS NOT CONSIDERED EYE SAFE AT ANY DISTANCE DO NOT STORE THE AN PAQ 4B C WITH THE BATTERIES INSTALLED 8 8 FM 3 22 9 12 August 2008 Advanced Optics Lasers and Iron Sights 8 8 To boresight the AN PAQ 4B C 1 Select the proper 10 meter boresighting target for the weapon AN PAQ 4B C configuration 2 With the help of an assistant place the boresighting target 10 meters in front of the weapon 3 Install the borelight filter and turn the AN PAQ 4B C on 4 Align th
530. what happens to the bullet when it comes in contact with the target 5 120 Bullet penetration depends on the range velocity bullet characteristics and target material Greater penetration does not always occur at close range with certain materials since the high velocity of the 5 56 millimeter bullet causes it to disintegrate soon after impact BULLET DISPERSION AT RANGE 5 21 Instructors trainers must have a working knowledge of the effects of bullet dispersion and accuracy at various ranges MINUTE OF ANGLE 5 122 An MOA is the standard unit of measurement used in adjusting a weapon s sights and other ballistic related measurements It is also used to indicate the accuracy of a weapon 5 123 A circle is divided into 360 degrees Each degree 15 further divided into 60 minutes therefore a circle contains 21 600 minutes An MOA is an angle beginning at the muzzle that covers 2 54 centimeters at a distance of 91 4 meters Figure 5 36 5 124 When the range is increased to 182 8 meters the angle covers twice the distance or 5 08 centimeters The rule applies as range increases 7 62 centimeters at 274 2 meters 10 16 centimeters at 365 6 meters and so on 2 or 5 08 cm 1 2 54 37 7 62 100 yds _ 300 yds 91 4m 200 yds 274 2 m 182 8 m Figure 5 36 Minute of angle 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 5 41 Chapter 5 INCREASE OF SHOT GROUP SIZE 5 125 Just as the distance covered by an MOA increases
531. when unable to complete a record fire scenario due to circumstances beyond his control for example a target mechanism weapon or ammunition malfunction alternate course Alternatives to standard qualification courses ammunition lot A quantity of cartridges each of which is made by one manufacturer under uniform conditions and is expected to work in a uniform manner ammunition lot number Code number that identifies a particular quantity of ammunition from one manufacturer aperture The hole in the rear sight armorer One who services and makes repairs on small arms and performs similar duties to keep small arms ready for use Army Training and Evaluation Program A guide for the training and evaluation of critical unit combat missions crew squad through battalion task force echelon Army Training Center Conducts OSUT and BRM Locations are Fort Benning GA Fort Jackson SC Fort Knox KY artificial illumination Any light from a man made source assault course An area of ground used for training soldiers in attacking an enemy in close combat 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 Glossary 3 Glossary automatic fire A firing mode that causes the weapon to continue firing as long as the trigger 15 held or until all ammunition has been expended ball The projectile the bullet ball ammunition General purpose standard service ammunition with a solid core bullet ball and dummy An exercise that substitutes a dummy round f
532. y changes to regulations or SOPs E 31 The person responsible for the training must answer the questions in each section To answer these questions he should use the following procedures Ask each question in order Record a Yes answer by checking the GO column Record a No or Don t know answer by checking the NO GO column 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 E 5 Appendix E e Refer to the checklist to find the GO and NO GO columns e After all of the questions in a section are answered analyze the NO GOs Contact the people who reported them and ask if they have corrected each problem If so change the answer to GO If any NO GO remains analyze it and implement a countermeasure for the shortfall Afterward check to ensure that the countermeasures work Before range operations start be sure that a workable countermeasure is implemented for each safety hazard presented by a NO GO answer MISSION ANALYSIS E 32 Mission analysis includes identifying the following e Who will be firing on the range e Number of personnel Units e What weapons and course will be used Weapons Course e Where will the training be conducted Range e When is the range scheduled for operations Date Opens Closes DOUBLE CHECK co noco REMARKS 1 Has sufficient ammunition been requested for the number of personnel 2 Are the range facilities adequate for the type of training to be conducted 3 Has enough time been
533. y repeat the procedures outlined in the 50 meter overlapping strip method of search TARGET INDICATORS 6 8 A target indicator is anything that a Soldier friendly or enemy does or fails to do that reveals his position Since these indicators apply equally to both sides of the battlefield Soldiers must learn to use target indicators to locate the enemy and to prevent the enemy from using the same indicators to locate them For instructional purposes these indicators can be grouped into three general areas e Sound e Movement e Improper camouflage Sound 6 9 Sounds such as footsteps coughing or equipment noises provide only a direction and general location making it difficult to pinpoint a target by sound alone However detection of a sound alerts the observer greatly increasing the possibility that he will eventually locate the target through other target indicators Movement 6 10 The degree of difficulty in locating moving targets depends primarily on the speed of movement Slow deliberate movements are much more difficult to notice than those that are quick and jerky Improper Camouflage 6 11 The lack or improper use of camouflage or concealment reveals the majority of targets detected on the battlefield alert observers easily notice indicators such as light reflecting from shiny surfaces or a contrast with the background Three general indicators may reveal a camouflaged or concealed target e Shine e Regularity o
534. y time he sees other oncoming vehicles that fit these dimensions he knows they are about one mile away 6 32 The rifleman can use this technique to determine ranges on the battlefield If he knows the characteristics size and detail of personnel and equipment at known ranges he can compare these characteristics to similar objects at unknown ranges When the characteristics match so do the ranges 6 33 To use the appearance of objects method with any degree of accuracy the Soldier must be thoroughly familiar with the details of objects as they appear at various ranges For example the Soldier should study the appearance of a man standing at a range of 100 meters He fixes the man s appearance firmly in his mind carefully noting details of size and the characteristics of uniform and equipment Next he studies the same man in a kneeling position and in a prone position By comparing the appearance of Soldiers in these positions at known ranges from 100 to 500 meters the Soldier can establish a series of mental images that will help him determine range on unfamiliar terrain NOTE Training should also be conducted in the appearance of other familiar objects such as weapons or vehicles 6 34 Because the successful use of this method depends upon visibility anything that limits visibility for example weather smoke or darkness will limit the effectiveness of this method FRONT SIGHTPOST METHOD 6 35 Using the front sightpost as a scal
535. ye the objects will reappear NIGHT BLIND SPOTS AND VIEWING TECHNIQUES C 3 When you stare at an object under starlight or lower levels of illumination it can disappear or fade away This 1s a result of the night blind spot The night blind spot affects both eyes at the same time and occurs when using the central vision of both eyes Consequently when looking directly at an object Soldiers miss larger objects as the distances increase A hand grenade 2 meters away might not be seen an enemy Soldier at 50 meters may be missed An MI tank at 300 meters can even be missed 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 C 1 Appendix C AVOIDING NIGHT BLIND SPOTS C 4 To avoid night blind spots e Look to all sides of objects you are trying to find or follow DONOT STARE C 5 Diamond viewing a technique similar to the off center vision technique taught in rifle marksmanship is a good technique for peripheral viewing To use the diamond viewing technique e Move your eyes just slightly a few degrees in a diamond pattern around the object you wish to see e Do not move your head use your peripheral vision DARK ADAPTATION C 6 In order for your visual system to work efficiently at night you need to dark adapt or get your eyes used to seeing things under low light conditions Dark adaptation 1s similar to walking into a movie theater when it s very dark you can t see things at first but as your eyes gradually adapt you can see better C
536. ytime field of view using pinpoint focus 6 to 10 feet Figure 7 16 Nighttime field of view using off center vision Scanning 7 131 The act of scanning relates to the short abrupt irregular movement of the firer s eyes every 4 to 10 seconds around an object or area Be aware that scanning ranges vary according to levels of darkness 12 August 2008 FM 3 22 9 7 33 Chapter 7 NIGHT FIRE TRAINING 7 132 All units must include basic unassisted night fire training annually in their unit marksmanship programs 7 133 Combat units should conduct tactical night fire training at least quarterly This tactical training should include MILES during force on force training as well as live fire training Live Fire Exercises 7 134 The basic unassisted LFX allows all Soldiers to apply night fire principles and to gain confidence in their ability to effectively engage targets out to 50 meters Practice and proficiency firing can be conducted on any range equipped with mechanical lifters and muzzle flash simulators Figure 7 17 The muzzle flash simulator provides the firer with a momentary indication that a target is presenting itself for engagement When a RETS range is used for this exercise the two 50 meter mechanisms are used For the unassisted night LFX the Soldier will perform the following scenario e Each Soldier will be issued two 15 round magazines with a tracer and ball combination The Soldier engages the F type silhouett

RIFLE MARKSMANSHIP M16-/M4-SERIES WEAPONS

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents